JP7584575B2 - Cooking equipment - Google Patents

Description

This disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot, placed on a top plate.

Cooking appliances are broadly divided into three types based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" which is installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is the "free-standing type" which is placed in a specific position on kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas-burning table"). The third type is the small and portable "tabletop type" which is placed in a desired position on a dining table, etc.

Many "built-in" cooking appliances are equipped with multiple heat sources and are popular for their ability to handle a variety of cooking methods. However, because they are installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed to match the standards of general kitchen furniture, meaning there is much less freedom in design compared to "freestanding" or "tabletop" appliances, and it is difficult to turn them into practical products.

A typical built-in cooking appliance has a grill chamber (also called an "oven chamber" or "heating chamber", but hereafter referred to collectively as "heating chamber") that is heated by an induction heating source inside the main body to expand the range of cooking options, and microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber from a microwave heating source (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2). Appliances equipped with multiple heating sources with different heating principles like this are called composite cooking appliances.

It has also been proposed to heat and cook a single food by moving a cooking utensil, such as a pot, containing the food among multiple heating locations. By changing the heating location, the heating space (environment) changes, which has the advantage of being able to handle a variety of food items (see, for example, Patent Documents 3 to 5).

JP 2016-031202 A (Page 1, FIG. 5) JP 2016-207400 A (page 5, FIG. 9) JP 2011-129529 A (Page 1, FIG. 6) JP 2011-96484 A (Page 1, FIG. 14) JP 2020-87506 A (page 20, FIG. 18)

As proposed in the above Patent Documents 3 to 5, when multiple heat sources located far apart are used in the process of completing one cooking step, measures must be taken to prevent unintended heat sources from operating or stopping even if the user issues an incorrect operation command. If these measures are not sufficient, it may cause confusion for the user and may result in cooking failure. In other words, difficult technical problems must be overcome, such as coordinating multiple heat sources and informing or displaying the user of the coordination status of the heat sources in a timely manner.

The first objective of this disclosure is to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by improving user operability.

The cooking device according to the first disclosure includes:
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate;
A second heating means having a plurality of heat sources for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber;
A notification means for notifying information about cooking;
A control unit for controlling a heating operation;
An input means,
The control unit is
a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone;
A composite cooking mode in which a cooking process is automatically performed using the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means;
A cooking mode including a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means is switched and executed in response to a command from the input means,
The single cooking mode is a mode in which a control pattern of the first heating means is determined and a heating operation is started,
The composite cooking mode is a mode in which a control pattern of the second heating means is determined and a heating operation is started,
In the cooperative cooking mode, the food to be heated is determined by the input means, and a heating operation is started.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the second disclosure is
A heating chamber;
A display means;
A first heating means for heating an object to be cooked that is accommodated in the heating chamber outside the heating chamber;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
An input means;
a control unit that receives a command from the input unit and controls the first heating unit and the second heating unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone, and an integrated cooking mode in which a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means are combined,
When a main power source is turned on, the control unit automatically displays an initial standby screen on the display means, and during a period in which the initial standby screen is displayed,
(1) when a first command is received from the input means, identification information of at least one food item that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display means;
(2) when a second command is received from the input means, information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode is displayed on the display means.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the third disclosure is
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate;
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber;
An input operation unit that receives a command signal from a user;
A control unit that controls the heating operations of the first heating means and the second heating means,
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are used in combination,
The control unit executes an operation step A of determining whether or not cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is permitted for a specific food item selected by the input operation unit, an operation step B of issuing a first specific notification including information about the food item to be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode if cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is permitted, and an operation step C of transitioning to the coordinated cooking mode if a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit after the first specific notification.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the fourth disclosure is
A heating chamber;
A display means;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
A second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
an input means for giving commands to the first heating means and the second heating means;
a control unit that receives a command from the input unit and controls the first heating unit and the second heating unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone, and an integrated cooking mode in which a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means are combined,
When a main power source is turned on, the control unit automatically displays an initial standby screen common to the first heating means and the second heating means on the display unit, and during a period in which the initial standby screen is displayed,
(1) upon receiving a first command specifying the cooperative cooking mode, switching from the standby initial screen to a first specific screen and displaying a cooking menu that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) when receiving a second command specifying a control pattern for the first heating means, a specific screen different from the standby initial screen is displayed on the display means, and a control menu for the single cooking mode is displayed.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the fifth disclosure is
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate;
A second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
A notification means for notifying information about cooking;
A control unit for controlling a heating operation;
An input means for giving a command to the control unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a coordinated preheating cooking mode including a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated using the first heating means, a cooking step 1 of heating the object to be cooked using the first heating means and the object to be heated after the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of using the second heating means after the cooking step 1.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the sixth disclosure is
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate;
A second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
A notification means for notifying information about cooking;
A control unit for controlling a heating operation;
An input means for giving a command to the control unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a coordinated preheating cooking mode having a preheating process of preheating the object to be heated using the first heating means, a cooking process 1 of heating the object to be cooked using the second heating means in parallel with the preheating process, and a cooking process 2 of using the object to be heated in the preheating process and the first heating means after the cooking process 1.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the seventh disclosure is
A composite cooking mode having multiple control menus for operating two or more heat sources in a predetermined sequence;
An integrated cooking mode having a plurality of integrated cooking menus, in which foods placed in the heating chamber and above the top plate are heated and cooked in a predetermined order;
a display means for selectively displaying the control menu and the collaborative cooking menu;
An input means for selecting the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking mode,
When a start key of the input means is operated in a state where at least two of the control menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, one of the control menus displayed on a predetermined display position A of the display means is selected as a "control menu to be executed" and a transition is made to a cooking process of the composite cooking mode;
When the start key is operated while at least two of the cooperative cooking menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, one of the cooperative cooking menus displayed at a predetermined display position B is selected as a "cooking menu to be executed" and a transition is made to a cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode;
the input means includes an input key for displaying the control menu in a forward direction at the display position A of the display means each time the input key is operated, and an input key for displaying the control menu in a reverse direction at the display position A each time the input key is operated, the input key being arranged adjacent to each other;
the input means includes an input key for displaying the linked cooking menu in a forward direction at the display position B each time the input key is operated, and an input key for displaying the linked cooking menu in a reverse direction at the display position B each time the input key is operated, the input key being arranged adjacent to each other;
The input key for forwarding and backwardly displaying the control menu and the associated cooking menu at the display position A and the display position B, respectively, is shared between the composite cooking mode and the associated cooking mode.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the eighth disclosure is
A heating chamber formed inside the main body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
A second heating source having a plurality of heating sources for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber;
a first selection unit that selects one cooking menu from a plurality of cooking menus prepared according to the type of food in an integrated cooking mode in which one food is heated two or more times using the first heating means and the second heating means;
a second selection unit that selects one control menu from a plurality of control menus that are common to a plurality of types of food in a composite cooking mode in which a plurality of the heating sources are automatically combined to heat one food simultaneously or at a time lag;
A control unit that controls the first heating means and the second heating means in response to selection by the first selection unit and the second selection unit;
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the ninth disclosure is
A heating chamber;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber;
A display means for notifying information on cooking;
A selection means for selecting a cooperation cooking menu for the cooperation cooking mode prepared for each type of food to be cooked and a control menu shared by a plurality of types of food to be cooked;
a control unit that receives a command from the selection unit and controls the display unit, the first heating unit, and the second heating unit;
A function setting unit that limits a function of the control unit,
the control unit has a function of executing a composite cooking mode having the control menu by using any one or both of the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means in combination, a function of executing an integrated cooking mode combining a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means, and a function of controlling the display unit according to information set by the function setting unit;
When the control unit is turned on and the display unit is started, if the cooperative cooking menu is selected or the door of the heating chamber is opened, and if a permission condition preset in the function setting unit is satisfied, the control unit displays a first specific screen for the cooperative cooking mode on the display unit.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the tenth disclosure is
A first heating means for heating an object placed on a top plate;
A second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
A notification means for notifying information about cooking;
A control unit for controlling a heating operation;
An input means for giving a command to the control unit,
The control unit has a function of executing an integrated preheating cooking mode including a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber using the second heating means, a cooking step 1 of heating the food to be cooked using the second heating means after the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of further heating the food to be cooked in the cooking step 1 by heating the food to be cooked using the first heating means after the cooking step 1.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by linking multiple heating means.

1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system between one house and the outside according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of home appliances and a home gateway in one house shown in FIG. 1. 1 is a perspective view showing an entire kitchen furniture in which a built-in type combination heating cooker according to a first embodiment is installed. FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state of kitchen furniture before the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5 is installed. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of installing the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 in kitchen furniture. FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture and the cooking appliance in FIG. 5 . 9 is an enlarged schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing a front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 . 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line Z-Z of FIG. 11. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line Z-Z of FIG. 11, showing the flow of cooling air. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along the line W-W of FIG. 12. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line YY of FIG. 11. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line VV of FIG. 12. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line XX of FIG. 12. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a right-side essential part of the cooking device of FIG. 5 when installed in kitchen furniture. FIG. 6 is a simplified plan view for explaining an input operation unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a plan view of the front portion of the cooking device of FIG. 5 for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units. FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit and an integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is an enlarged plan view of a right operating section and a right display section of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is an enlarged plan view of a left operation unit and a left display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5. FIG. 25 is a simplified schematic diagram of the main components shown in FIG. 24. 25 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in FIG. 24. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle by enlarging the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25. 4 is a simplified perspective view illustrating a positional relationship between the cooling air from the air outlet of the first cooling fan and an inverter circuit board. FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a block diagram 2 showing main control-related parts of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a block diagram 3 showing main control-related parts of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a main cooling air passage of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing details of an inverter circuit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a table showing the correspondence between the main (range grill) control menus and the display areas in the integrated display section of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between a storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and a central operation unit. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. 6 is a table showing explanations of cooking menus in a combined cooking mode and an induction heating only cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 1 for explaining a control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 3 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in time series. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in time series. 6 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fans of the cooking device in FIG. 5 and the types of cooking. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a control operation when deep-fry cooking (automatic), which is a type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the operation of the left operating part of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the operation of the left operating unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during composite cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 7 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during composite cooking in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during coordinated cooking in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing input operations and steps when implementing a coordinated cooking mode, a combined cooking mode, and a single cooking mode. FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between cooking steps in a coordinated cooking mode and a single cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode and the independent cooking mode. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys in an input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection of an integrated cooking mode to transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing, in time series, the relationship between input operations and displays until a transition between a composite cooking mode and an associated cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in an integrated cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the combined cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 1 showing a notification operation of a cooking process in a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of notifying the user of a cooking process in the combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing cooking steps in a coordinated preheating cooking mode, which is one type of coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing cooking steps in a coordinated preheating cooking mode, which is one type of coordinated cooking mode. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 3 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 4 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 5 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when a combined cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a plan view 1 showing the control operations of the input operation unit and the display unit (integrated display unit and left display unit) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7A and 7B are plan and explanatory views showing the operation of the central operation unit and the display operation of the integrated display unit when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooking menus in the coordinated cooking mode when the coordinated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 13 is a table showing the display contents of a first specific screen on the integrated display unit when the collaborative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when an integrated cooking mode is selected; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "fried chicken" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between a refrigerator and a cooker during cooking in a coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 105 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator, the home gateway, and the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 104. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "fried chicken" in the collaborative cooking mode in the example shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the example shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 104 . FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 104 . 105 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway in the example shown in FIG. 104. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation of the integrated control device illustrating an example of using refrigerator inventory information. FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 112. 113 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 112. FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example of FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is closed in the (built-in type combined) cooking device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing the cooking device of FIG. 116 with the door open. 117 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 116 with the top plate removed. This is an oblique view of the upper unit of the cooking device of Figure 116 with the top plate and IH coil removed. This is an oblique view of the upper unit of the cooking device of Figure 116 with the top plate, IH coil and cover removed. FIG. 117 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the cooking device of FIG. 116. This is a bottom (underside) view of the upper unit of the cooking device of Figure 116. A block diagram explaining the overall control function of the heating cooker of Figure 116. 117 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation section and integrated display section of the cooking device of FIG. 116. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode and the independent cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 116. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit in the heating cooker of FIG. 116 in the coordinated cooking mode. 13 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device and the type of cooking to disclose the third embodiment. 128 is a timing chart 1 showing the timing of starting and stopping operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. 128 is a time chart 2 showing the timing of starting and stopping operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. 128 is a time chart 3 showing the timing of starting and stopping operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. 128 is a timing chart 4 showing the timing of starting and stopping operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. 128 is a timing chart 5 showing the timing of starting and stopping operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body in a (built-in type) combined heating cooker according to embodiment 4. An explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the cooking appliance shown in Figure 133 and an external information management device, etc. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 133 and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left display unit. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 133. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the front portion of the upper surface of the main body of a cooking device according to a fifth embodiment. A block diagram showing the main control functions of the heating cooker shown in Figure 137. A flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device of Figure 137 from when the main power is turned on to when a cooking mode or a control menu is selected. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the front portion of the upper surface of the main body of a cooking device according to a sixth embodiment. A block diagram showing the main control function parts of the heating cooker 1 shown in Figure 140. 140. Flowchart 1 showing the operation up to setting the cooking menu and control conditions of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 140. Flowchart 2 showing the operation up to setting of the cooking menu and control conditions of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 140. Flowchart 3 showing the operation up to setting of the cooking menu and control conditions of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of a cooking device disclosed in a seventh embodiment. FIG. 147 is a block diagram 2 showing the main control-related parts of the heating cooker of FIG. 145. A time chart showing an example of the operation of the heating cooker of Figure 145. 147 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation before cooking starts in the heating cooker of FIG. 145. 147 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation after cooking starts in the heating cooker of FIG. 145. 2 is a block diagram showing main internal functions of a portable information terminal; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a display operation of a portable information terminal. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a display operation of the portable information terminal device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal device. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal device. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal device. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal device. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal device. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the display operation of the portable information terminal device. 23 shows an operation management system for a heating cooker and home appliances according to a modified example of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram 1 for the display operation of the portable information terminal in the modified example shown in FIG. 161 . FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram 2 of the display operation of the portable information terminal in the modified example shown in FIG. 161 . 13 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys in an input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection to transition to an integrated cooking mode in a heating cooker disclosed in an eighth embodiment. FIG.

(Definition)
"Home appliance" 400 refers to an electric appliance designed mainly for use at home. Home appliance 400 includes induction heating cooker 1, described later, refrigerator 401, television receiver 402, air conditioner 403, air purifier 404, ventilator 405, electric rice cooker (including electric rice cooker) 406, microwave oven 408, lighting equipment 409, and air purifier 410. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "refrigerator" includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function.

The "device identification information" of home appliance 400 is unique information for identifying home appliance 400. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, manufacturer name, type name (model name), model number, and serial number of home appliance 400.

The "home gateway" 411 refers to an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and participates in coordinated operations. In addition to this, it also performs the operation of issuing an operation command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also called "data") from one home appliance 400.

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function to manage the total power usage of a household for all or some of the home appliances 400, in which case it may be called a "power control device" or "integrated management device", etc.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current state of the home appliance 400, such as whether the home appliance 400 is in operation, stopped, or in standby mode, from the home appliance 400 via a wired or wireless signal.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 400 using the appliance identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an "integrated management device" or "power command device" for one home appliance 400 (e.g., induction heating cooker 1), if it does not limit the power consumption of other home appliances (e.g., lighting fixture 409), it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, it does not have the function of regulating the power consumption of the lighting fixture 409 itself so that the total power consumption, including the power consumption of the other home appliances 400, does not exceed the upper limit of the specified total power consumption. Therefore, from the perspective of the lighting fixture 409, the home gateway 411 does not correspond to either an integrated management device or a power command device.

Embodiment 1.
1 to 115 disclose a first embodiment. In this first embodiment, a built-in type combined (induction) heating cooker 1 is disclosed. In the following description, unless there is any particular contradiction, it will be simply called a "heating cooker."
In each drawing, the symbol RT indicates the right direction of the cooking device 1, LE indicates the left direction, FT indicates the front, and BK indicates the rear.

In this embodiment 1, the "first heating means" HM1 refers to a means for heating the object N, which contains the food to be cooked, on the top plate 15, such as an induction heating source 9 or a gas burner (burner) described below. The object N is, for example, a metal pot or frying pan.

In the following explanation, when we say "a heated object N placed on the top plate," it means that it includes both cases where the heated object N, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 15 described below and heated, and cases where the heated object N is placed on a support member, such as a trivet, arranged above the top plate 15, such as a gas burner, and heated.

In this embodiment 1, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a plurality of heating sources for heating the food contained inside the heating chamber 113 described below. The heating sources may be any of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, or a gas burner (not shown).

In this embodiment 1, the term "induction heating cooker" refers to an appliance having a heating section that heats the object to be heated N. When there are multiple heating sections, some of the heating sections may be a heating source that uses a method other than induction heating, such as a radiant electric heat source.

In this embodiment 1, a "combined cooking device" refers to a device that has multiple heating sources with different heating principles, such as a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 made up of an electric heater or the like, and can cook in one heating chamber 113 using these two types of heating sources. The heating chamber 113 may also be heated by both an oven heating source 188 made up of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Furthermore, an induction heating source may be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 113.

In this embodiment 1, the “heating means (hereinafter referred to as the “oven heating source”)” of the heating chamber 113 may be either a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, or a heating source installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 113.
Alternatively, a heat generating member that becomes hot by induction heating may be disposed and used to heat the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, or to heat the air inside the heating chamber 113.

For example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-74305 proposes a cooking device that is arranged in a heating chamber (grill chamber) and has a second heating body (induction heating coil) that heats a cooking tray on which food to be cooked is placed from below, and a third heating body (induction heating coil) that heats the food to be cooked from the side.

Furthermore, JP 2016-85996 A proposes a configuration in which an electrical insulator is provided below the heating chamber, an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electrical insulator, and a cooking plate placed on the IH heating coil is induction heated. The cooking plate is made of a material that can be induction heated. For example, iron, stainless steel, carbon material with a carbon content of 90% or more, ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferrosilicon) as a conductive material, etc. are used.

As a representative example of an induction heating method using a heat-generating component that becomes hot, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 discloses a method in which a high-frequency current is supplied to an IH coil to generate a high-frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil, and the high-frequency magnetic flux is linked to a heater disposed in the heating chamber, causing an induced current to flow through the heater, and the food in the heating chamber is heated and cooked by Joule heat generated by the electrical resistance of the heater itself.

Furthermore, JP 2013-247048 A proposes arranging an electrically closed circuit heater inside the heating chamber, linking this heater with high-frequency magnetic flux generated from an induction coil arranged outside the heating chamber, heating the heater to a high temperature and dissipating heat into the heating chamber. Note that the heater referred to here forms an electrically closed circuit, and is made by bending a round bar or pipe made of stainless steel, high-nickel alloy, etc. into a specified shape and joining both ends together by welding, brazing, etc. to form an endless shape.

A typical example of the "IH coil" referred to in this embodiment 1 is one made by bundling about 30 thin copper or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm, twisting several of these bundles together and winding them into a spiral (for example, Japanese patent publication JP 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is also one made by winding about 1,000 to 1,500 pieces of wire of about 0.05 mm.

Another patent document, JP 2018-32551 A, proposes an induction heating cooker that uses a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat conductive material as an IH coil.
Any of these forms corresponds to the “IH coil” which is the main part of the induction heating source 9 .

In this embodiment 1, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently.

The "coordinated cooking" mentioned above refers to the use of multiple heating sources with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing a single dish, after microwave heating and preheating, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, and then heated by the IH coil 17L (described below) at the new location to complete the dish, this is a type of "coordinated cooking" as referred to here.

Another type of "cooperative cooking" is to heat the food inside the heating chamber 113 with a gas burner (burner), and then move the food onto the top plate 15 and heat it with the gas burner (burner) or induction heating source 9 to improve the cooking quality.

Coordinated cooking has been proposed in the form of a built-in cooking device in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 5500944.

(Overall configuration and home appliance operation management system)
First, the operation management system for the home appliance 400 will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA indicates one house.
Although not actually shown, the inside of the house HA is divided into a number of living spaces by walls and doors, and one of these living spaces, the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), is provided with home appliances 400 such as a refrigerator 401, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, and an electric rice cooker 406, as well as kitchen furniture 2. The living space may also include other rooms such as a "living room" and a "bathroom" as well as a room with a toilet, although these are not shown in FIG. 1. The living space may include other rooms.

All living spaces are supplied with electricity, for example 200V, from a commercial power source EP provided by an electric power company outside the house. This electricity is drawn into the house HA via a watt-hour meter 414.

415 is a power line (main line) connected to a commercial power source EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. A television receiver (TV receiver) 402 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, a home gateway 411, a wireless router 419, and an environment detection unit 413 are each connected to this power line 415.

The home gateway 410, the environment detection unit 413, the TV receiver 402, the air conditioner 403, the cooking appliance 1, the refrigerator 401, and the lighting fixture 409 are always connected to the power line 415 via a specified power cord. Note that there is more than one lighting fixture 409, but the others are not shown in the figure.

FIG. 1 will now be described.
416 is a wide area communications network (sometimes called a "communications network" or the "Internet").
This wide area communication network 416 is connected to the home gateway 411 via a wireless router 419 .

417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the information and communication terminal device 418. For example, it may be a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information provider in a specific region or an electric power company, or it may be a server prepared by the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. This external server may be a distributed processing type server known as a "cloud server." It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that uses cloud servers: "IaaS," "PaaS," and "SaaS."

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from the external server 417. This content includes recipe information (text and images) for various cooking methods.

Although not shown, the environmental sensor of the above-mentioned environmental detection unit 413 may be provided with additional temperature and humidity sensors that detect the temperature and humidity outside the house.

The external server 417 also functions as an information providing means for the home appliance 400. In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as the manufacturer, distributor, repairer, or information service provider of the home appliance 400, either alone or in collaboration with two or more organizations, and provides various services related to the home appliance 400 to users via the wide area communication network 416.

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as a "Web server"). A Web server refers to a service program that provides display information of HTML and objects (images, etc.) to a Web browser of software on the information processing device (client) side that is the "information receiver" such as various information and communication terminal devices 418 and home gateway 410, in accordance with HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between Web browsers and Web browsers), and a server computer on which the service operates.

The external server 417 stores and remembers control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location. The remote control can be achieved by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) the control application software from an information and communication terminal device 418, which will be described in detail later, such as a device called a smartphone.

The information and communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by the user to communicate calls and data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or anywhere on the go. It is a device that can download information from outdoor information sites via the wide area communication network 416, send and receive e-mail, and transmit remote control signals, but it can also be a device that cannot make calls, and such portable communication devices are collectively called information and communication terminal device 418. A small portable personal computer is also a type of information and communication terminal device 418.

The information communication terminal device 418 in the present embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals through short-range communication while being located within a few centimeters of (or may be in contact with) the input/output unit of each home appliance 400. Note that this short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 400 including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 .
On the other hand, it is also possible for the information communication terminal device 418 to send control data (also called a "control command") to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400, and control the home appliance 400 in accordance with the control command.

In this embodiment 1, the information communication terminal device 418 is not able to directly remotely control the home appliances 400. Some of the home appliances 400, such as the cooking appliance 1, generate high heat, so remote control via the Internet, which is used by many people outside the house 413, is not adopted. Instead, it is possible to operate all the home appliances 400 via the home gateway 411 as an integrated information processing device.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 in this embodiment 1 is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 and allows them to operate in cooperation with each other. In addition to this, it also performs the operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also called data) from one home appliance 400.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, the kitchen KT in the house HA is equipped with a range hood 422 (described below) and a ceiling-mounted air purifier 404.

413A is a sensor section of the environment detection section 413 of the home gateway 411. Although not shown in FIG. 1, this sensor section 413A has an environment sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a human presence sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (by infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). The environment detection section 413 will be described in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to three types of information: temperature information of the atmosphere in the space (kitchen KT) where the cooker 1 and refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light intensity information. The dust scattering amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

Examples of "use of environmental information" include the following:
(1) When the temperature is high, the keep-warm function of the electric rice cooker 406 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process ends. Also, the target refrigeration temperature and the target freezing temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode", or the ventilation device 405 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (such as the target room temperature) are changed.
(3) When fine dust particles are dispersed in the air, the air cleaner 404 is operated, or the ventilation device 405 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen dispersed is large, the air purifier 404 starts operating.
(5) When the amount of light (amount of visible light) is low, the lighting device 409 is turned on.

A "resident" refers to a person who resides in one of the houses HA shown in FIG. 1. Residents include blood relatives such as parents and children, brothers, and sisters. When using home appliance 400, the person is called a "user" regardless of whether they are a resident or not.

"Home" means a single dwelling HA managed by a specific manager, and may also include an apartment building with multiple rooms and occupied by multiple families. In other words, such an apartment building is considered a home here if, like a single dwelling HA, the commercial power limit is centrally managed by a single power cut-off device (such as a single breaker BK or multiple power cut-off devices).

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information on some signal related to power consumption that the home appliance 400 receives from the home gateway 411. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information including information on transmission commands such as the power reduction request signal AS1 and power reduction command signal AS2 described below. This information includes information indicating the time when the signal was received (year, month, and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, information such as "Reception time: 17:00 on June 9, 2020, reduce instantaneous maximum power consumption by 2%" regarding the power reduction command signal AS2 for the cooking appliance 1 at a certain point in time.

In the case of the cooking appliance 1, for example, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, and is not erased even when the main power switch 98 is turned ON or OFF. Turning the main power switch 98 ON and OFF is considered to be one cooking session, and at least several cooking sessions are stored and held. Anything beyond that is automatically erased in sequence.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
2 shows an example of a hardware configuration to which the cooking device 1 and the home appliance operation management system of the present embodiment 1 are applied. The following description will be given taking the kitchen KT as an example of one living space.

In the kitchen KT to which the present embodiment 1 is applied, an air purifier 404 is installed on the ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a refrigerator 401 with multiple freezer compartments 401A with different freezing temperatures and a refrigerator compartment 401B, a microwave oven 408, a built-in (induction) heating cooker 1 installed in the kitchen furniture 2, a range hood (a type of ventilation device 405) 422 installed directly above the heating cooker 1, and a home gateway 411 are installed. Note that the electric rice cooker 406, air conditioner 403, and lighting fixtures 409 described in FIG. 1 are not shown.

The refrigerator 401 has multiple freezer compartments 401A, allowing the user to select a freezer compartment with a suitable freezing temperature (temperature range) for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh ingredients (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C±2°C, -10°C, or -2°C.

In addition, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range also affect the maturation of fresh food ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time, so even in the same freezer, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range can be changed as appropriate depending on the type of food ingredient.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outdoors is connected to this exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 denotes a hood whose entire underside is open as an intake port 425A, and inside this hood is installed an electric exhaust fan 426. The range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, but a detailed description of the configuration will be omitted.

The operating status of the range hood 422 is sent to the central control unit 447 (described in detail later) of the home gateway 411 at any time. For this reason, the range hood 422 is provided with a transmitting unit (not shown) and a receiving unit (not shown) inside to transmit various operating information between the home gateway 411, such as the start and stop of exhaust operation and the strength of operation (exhaust capacity). For example, the transmitting unit and receiving unit are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication unit 427. This communication unit 427 sends and receives information with the home gateway 411 via wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is rotated, it draws in air from the intake port 425A of the range hood 422, and also sucks in cooking odors and smoke, and exhausts the air outside the house HA through the duct 424. The range hood 422 receives an operation signal, such as an infrared signal, from the cooking appliance 1 and starts exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 2, arrow FF1 indicates the airflow rising from cooking device 1. FF2 indicates the exhaust airflow from duct 424. FF3 indicates the airflow moving sideways near ceiling surface 420. FF4 indicates the airflow blown out from air purifier 404.

A heat sensor (thermoelectromotive element) may be placed in the range hood 422 facing the cooking appliance 1. With this configuration, the range hood 422 itself detects when the cooking appliance 1 starts operating and controls the operation of the electric fan 426.

The ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 is installed by embedding it in the ceiling surface 420. Inside the box-shaped body 428 of the air purifier 404, a blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided.

431 is an air guide plate that covers the entire lower part of the air purifier 404. 432 is an intake port formed by the air guide plate 431 at one end (the side closer to the range hood 422). 433 is an air outlet formed by the air guide plate 431 at the end opposite the intake port 432.

The blower fan 429 draws in dirty air from the kitchen through the intake port 432, passes the purified air through the filter 430, and exhausts it from the exhaust port 433 toward the bottom of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed, and the air in the room is purified.

434 is an odor sensor for the air purifier 404, and is positioned facing the entrance of the suction port 432. This detects odors in the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation, and detects the degree of air pollution. The odor sensor 434 can be positioned anywhere in the air duct on the suction port 432 side, and in front of the filter 430, without any significant difference in effectiveness.

The odor sensor 434 detects the odor and the odor intensity is determined by an odor sensing unit (not shown) disposed inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404, and the result is sent to the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411 as needed. For this reason, the air purifier 404 is provided with a transmitter (not shown) and a receiver (not shown) for transmitting various information between the home gateway 411, such as the start and stop of air purifying operation and the odor intensity determination results. For example, the transmitter and receiver are integrated in hardware as a communication unit 435. The communication unit 435 transmits and receives information between the home gateway 411 and the air purifier 404 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

Air purifier 421 can detect odors when air purifier 404 is operating and an odor generated somewhere in kitchen KT reaches air purifier 404 from that location.

This air purifier 404 is generally configured to include one or more (multiple layers) filters 430 with fine air passages to capture dust particles, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 filters oily smoke generated during cooking with edible oil (for example, "fried foods" or "tempura"), the oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430 and combine to form an oil film.
This oil film reduces the filtering performance of the filter 430. In other words, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 decreases, leading to a situation in which the air purification ability of the air purifier 404 decreases. Therefore, an idea has already been proposed to avoid operating the air purifier 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by cooking contains oily smoke generated by cooking with oil (for example, Patent Document JP 2016-95126 A).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is depicted as being installed near the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in an actual situation, it may be installed in a location different from that shown in FIG. 2. Also, multiple refrigerators 401 may be used, rather than just one.

412 is a main body case that forms the outer shell of the home gateway 411. This main body case 412 is fixed to a vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height that allows the resident to check input operations and displays.

445 is an alarm device fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, which will be described in detail later. 2D is a water supply inlet 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the cooking appliance 1 and the range hood 422.
In Fig. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the cooking appliance 1. In this embodiment 1, this temperature monitoring device is configured as one component of the range hood 422 in terms of hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 in terms of hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detection unit 441 and a communication unit 442. The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal imaging camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443.

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is a hardware component of the range hood 422, but is always powered regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 is constantly monitoring the temperature even when the range hood 422 is not in exhaust operation.

The temperature detection unit 441 divides the entire area of the top plate 15 (described later) into at least 64 areas (8 vertical × 8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as "detection areas") and detects the temperature of each area.

The detection area includes an induction heating section 17H of the cooking appliance 1, which will be described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection area at predetermined time intervals not only while the range hood 421 is in operation but also while it is not in operation.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411. In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration in which the information is transmitted directly to the cooking appliance 1 may be adopted. In addition, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining the temperature monitoring information is not a fixed time (e.g., every 5 seconds), but is shortened in areas where the temperature is high.

When the light receiving unit 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmitting unit 48 of the cooking appliance 1, the range hood 421 starts operating. The temperature monitoring device 440 starts acquiring temperature information of the top plate 15 of the cooking appliance 1 when the range hood 421 starts operating.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating the end of operation of the cooking appliance 1. It continues acquiring temperature information at a specified time interval until the estimated temperature of the entire area of the top plate 15 falls below a predetermined temperature (e.g., 40°C). Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the interval of the temperature measurement operation becomes slower. Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the above-mentioned monitoring operation may be temporarily terminated, but the temperature monitoring operation is started again at least at the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1.

The cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. 113 is a heating chamber formed inside the cooking device 1, and 114 is a door that can be opened and closed to cover the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

The cooking device 1 has a top plate 15 that covers the top surface, on which an object to be heated N, such as a pot or frying pan made of magnetic metal, is placed, and is induction heated by an IH coil 17. 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking device 1 into two spaces, an upper space and a lower space.

CK is an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 16S, in which the IH coil 17 is housed.

Next, Fig. 4 will be described. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the home gateway 411, the home appliances 400, and the temperature monitoring device 440. Among the home appliances 400, the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408 are subjected to power amount control from the home gateway 411.
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also functions as a power command device for the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408, but this has been explained above and will not be explained in detail here. Although not shown in Fig. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also a home appliance 400 subject to power amount control.

The power control unit 448 constantly obtains information on the amount of power used by the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408) and has the function of limiting the power consumption of the home appliances 400 so as not to exceed a preset total amount of power, and is already known as a HEMS (home energy management system).

When the power consumption control unit 448 receives information indicating a power reduction request or power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, it performs an operation to reduce the power consumption of the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1, the microwave oven 408, and the air conditioner 403) according to a predetermined priority order.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 includes an environment detection unit 413 that incorporates a human detection unit 413H that receives the detection output of a human detection sensor 452. The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown) and a sensor that detects the temperature and humidity in the kitchen in the form of data in a specified format. 453 is an environment sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, etc. of the kitchen KT.

The human presence sensor 452 detects the presence of people in the kitchen KT, particularly in the area in front of the cooker 1 and in front of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401.
One or more human detection sensors 452 are installed inside the kitchen KT.

For example, if the distance between the front of the cooking device 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is short, the human detection sensor 452 is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, facing the space between the front of the cooking device 1 and the refrigerator 401.

In addition, if there is a small distance between the front of the cooking appliance 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401, one human detection sensor 452 is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, etc., facing the space near the front of the cooking appliance 1. The other human detection sensor 453 should be installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, etc., facing the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401.

A human detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect the presence of a user in front of the cooking appliance 1 .
As described above, the locations for installing the human detection sensors 452, 453 may be appropriately determined taking into consideration the relative positions of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking appliance 1 and the detection capabilities of the human detection sensors.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one of the sensors of the environment detection unit 413, but it may also function as one of the sensors of a home presence detection device (not shown) for detecting the presence of a human inside the house HA, i.e., in the kitchen KT, etc. In that case, information from an unlocking sensor that detects that the front door (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used by the home presence detection device. This can improve the accuracy of the process of determining whether someone is at home or not.

The input unit 449 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating touch input keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen. One of the functions is to specify the home appliance 400 for which an upper limit on power consumption is to be set, and then to set the upper limit on power consumption and the time period during which the appliance can be used. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the cooking appliance 1 as, for example, 4800W or 5400W.

The input unit 449 has a function for inputting information by operating touch input keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen, as well as a function for inputting information by voice, and various desired functions can be input by the resident directing their voice into a microphone unit (not shown).

445 is an alarm device that issues an alarm to the occupants by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440, and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445. Note that since this alarm device 445 is not subject to control by the power consumption control unit 448, power is not restricted or cut off due to changes in the power consumption of the home appliance 400.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further includes a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 446 , a central control unit 447 , and a storage device 450 .
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit capable of wireless communication or infrared communication with the home electric appliances 400 such as the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 individually.

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 is a device that records a relatively large amount of information, such as the operation history information of the home gateway 411, the daily power control history information of the home appliance 400, and further the daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories or HDDs.

The central control unit 447 contains a microcomputer that is the core of information processing, as well as ROM and RAM, and stores computer programs that regulate various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a wide area communication network (Internet) that performs wireless communication via a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 446 of the home gateway 411 and a wireless router 419.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 is shown with only one communication unit 446, but a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) for the home appliance 400 and a communication unit for the wireless router 419 may be provided separately. Also, a separate NFC communication unit may be provided to enable direct information exchange via wireless communication between the NFC (near field communication) provided in the information communication terminal 418.

451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store event schedule information for at least one month (maximum 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In this embodiment 1, the input unit 449 can be used to register the scheduled date and scheduled start time (or time period) of an event (e.g., shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident.

When event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451, a notification is issued from the schedule management unit 451 at the stored date and time. The notification may be displayed on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449 or be notified by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a notification may be sent to the information and communication terminal device 418 carried by the resident.

When a home appliance 400 such as a cooking appliance 1 is activated, a notification may be sent based on the event information registered from the schedule management unit 451.

(Overview of cooking appliances)
Next, the cooking device 1 according to the present embodiment 1 will be described with reference to Figs.
5, cooking appliance 1 is a built-in cooking appliance that is incorporated in kitchen furniture 2. Reference numeral 2A denotes an installation port formed in kitchen furniture 2. Cooking appliance 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power source 99, as described below.

As shown in Figs. 5 and 19, the cooking device 1 has two induction heating units, one on the left and one on the right.
In FIG. 19, CL1 indicates a center line passing through the center point of the left and right sides of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates the range of the top plate 15 exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100.

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating section (corresponding to the "first heating section") provided in the range to the right of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this.
17HL is a left heating section (corresponding to the "second heating section") provided in the range to the left of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. In this way, this cooking device 1 is a cooking device provided with two (two) "heating ports" (heating sections) on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

Alternatively, a third induction heating unit may be provided between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL so as to straddle the lateral center line CL1, making the cooking device into a three-burner cooking device. Alternatively, one of the IH coils 17L, 17R (described in detail later) constituting the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL may be replaced with a radiant electric heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, when referring to the "induction heating unit," the reference symbol 17H is used.

As shown in Figures 5 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to indicate the desired position for placing an object to be heated N (see Figure 3), such as a metal pan or plate (grill). The position marks 17LS and 17RS are printed on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the cooking device 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating sections 17H, one on the left and one on the right. The user can also recognize that there are two induction heating sections, one on the left and one on the right, by the voice guidance of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later.

Directly below the position marks 17LS and 17RS are installed IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later. Note that the position marks 17LS and 17RS do not need to be circular, and may be marked, for example, with a figure, a symbol such as "+", or letters that indicate only the center point of the desired position for placing the object to be heated N.

The position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks that indicate approximate positions where induction heating can be performed by the IH coils 17L and 17R, and are therefore drawn with a diameter slightly larger than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

In this embodiment 1, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as IH coils, the reference symbol 17 is used. Therefore, when referring to an "IH coil" 17, it can refer to both the left IH coil 17L and the right IH coil 17R, or it can refer to either one of them.

In this embodiment 1, unless otherwise specified, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L described below.

(Basics of Heat Source and Control Menu)
The cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is provided with three types of heating means with different heating principles. That is, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9 (first heating source), and the second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 (second heating source) and an oven heating source 188 (third heating source).

The three heat sources described above can be used as follows.
(1) The induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of one another, so that cooking can be performed using each heating source alone. This type of operation pattern is the "single cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

(2) By using the induction heating source 9 in combination with at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, one cooking can be performed using two or more different locations. This type of operating pattern is the "linked cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

(3) The oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used together to perform a single cooking operation. This operating pattern is the "combined cooking mode" KM2. Note that the "operating pattern" referred to here includes cases in which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in series, simultaneously, or with a time lag.

(4) The induction heating source 9 has dedicated input operation units. Specifically, it is a right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R and a left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L. By operating the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, it is possible to start the induction heating operation, set the heating conditions (heat power, etc.), and stop the induction heating operation.
(5) The oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have their own input operation units. They share the central operation unit 40M.

(6) There is no superiority or inferiority between the single cooking mode KM1, which uses any one of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189, and the linked cooking mode KM3 and combined cooking mode KM2. The rule is that the cooking with the heating source that was started first takes priority. For this reason, for example, even if you try to select a linked cooking mode that uses the right heating section 17HR of the induction heating source 9, if the right heating section 17HR is already performing a single heating operation for another cooking, the right heating section 17HR cannot be used in the linked cooking mode. As a result, the heating sources are partially restricted in the linked cooking mode KM3.

(7) With regard to input operations, there is no superiority or inferiority between single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189 and the linked cooking mode and combined cooking mode. Therefore, for example, if you try to set the linked cooking mode KM3 and leave it halfway without switching to the linked cooking mode KM3 (for example, if you do not enter anything for 30 seconds), the input up to that point will be automatically canceled. Also, if you enter an input for the single cooking mode KM1 from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9 during this left-alone state, you can proceed to induction heating cooking.

(8) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "first cooperative cooking mode" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1), and a "second cooperative cooking mode" in which at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1).

(9) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the preheating process. Note that the case in which the second heating means HM2 is used in the preheating process is also one form of the "cooperative preheating cooking mode", but this form is not described in detail in the first embodiment.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in Figures 5 to 8, the cooking appliance 1 is supported on the upper surface 2P of the rim of the installation opening 2A. In this embodiment 1, the kitchen furniture 2 is provided with a water tank 2CP that can temporarily store water coming out of a water supply opening 2D, as shown in Figure 6. 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2. This front opening 2B is for exposing the front components (a door 114 and a front cover 112, which will be described later) of the cooking appliance 1 to the front when the cooking appliance 1 is installed.

If the size of the front opening 2B and the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 is standard, they are almost always pre-formed to standard dimensions, as standardization is being promoted by the industry. This will be explained in more detail later.

A typical method for installing the cooking appliance 1 in the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the installation work in the kitchen furniture 2.
As shown in Figure 7, the cooking appliance 1 is placed into the installation opening 2A while tilting it so that its front side (the side facing you) is facing down, and then the rear side of the cooking appliance 1 is lowered as shown by the solid arrow BD, so that the cooking appliance 1 is placed on the peripheral portion of the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2.

Then, tighten the screws to move (rotate) the fixing bracket (not shown) installed on the rear edge of the lower unit 100 (described later) so that the fixing bracket is pressed firmly against the kitchen furniture 2, completing the installation. Note that this type of installation method is already widely used, so a detailed explanation of the structure will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the cooking appliance 1 is integrated by stacking the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 one above the other, and is shipped from the manufacturer in this integrated form. Therefore, in the assembly work shown in FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is fixed (directly) to the kitchen furniture 2 with the above-mentioned screws. By removing the fixing brackets (not shown), the entire cooking appliance 1 can be removed from the kitchen furniture 2. This allows subsequent inspection and repair to be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2. Note that when only the upper unit 100 is referred to as the "main body", the reference number 10 is added to distinguish it.

In this embodiment 1, the "main body case" HC is a collective term for the upper case 16 that constitutes the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 that constitutes the outer shell of the lower unit 200. The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

The installation opening 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape as shown in Fig. 6. However, the four corners are arc-shaped.
The installation opening 2A has a width W1 of 560 mm to 564 mm and a front-rear dimension D1 of 460 mm to 464 mm.

5 and 6, reference numerals 3 and 4 denote surface materials constituting the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. Reference numerals 5 and 6 denote surface materials adjacent to both the left and right sides of the cooking appliance 1 when the cooking appliance 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2.
When the cooking appliance 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front faces of these surface materials 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front face of the cooking appliance 1. In other words, when the cooking appliance 1 is installed, the user can be presented with a design sense that the surface materials 3 to 6 and the cooking appliance 1 form a unified flat surface.

In Figure 7, 8 is a wall that divides the interior of the kitchen furniture 2 into multiple rooms vertically, and the lower part of this wall is often used, for example, as a storage room for kitchen utensils, food, etc. Note that the illustration of the wall 8 is omitted in Figure 6. Also, the wall 8 may be installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 so that it is removable.

When the cooking appliance 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2 with the above-described configuration, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 presents a substantially flat surface. When a user looks at the kitchen furniture 2, the front surface is designed so that it can be recognized as having a clean, unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the cooking appliance 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer; kitchen furniture is often manufactured and sold by kitchen furniture or housing equipment manufacturers, while cooking appliance 1 is often manufactured and sold by home appliance manufacturers.

In Figures 5 and 6, 7 is a border printed on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5, and does not form physical irregularities on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5. Note that a thin, shiny metallic decorative plate or tape may be attached to indicate the presence of the border 7 and create a sense of luxury. Conversely, the border 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Furthermore, these surface materials 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors or drawers. For example, they may always be fixed on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and not move at all.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6, when unified in terms of the color and surface form (pattern, gloss, unevenness, etc.) of their front surfaces, enhance the sense of unified design of the kitchen furniture 2. For example, if the entire front surface of surface material 4 is unified in a single color or wood grain pattern, the front surface of surface material 3 can also be unified in the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, we will explain Figures 8 and 9. Figure 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the cooking appliance 1 in Figure 1. Figure 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the front of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in Figure 8.

In Japan, the standardization (commonization) of housing parts and materials for kitchen furniture 2, etc. is being promoted by the Japan Industrial Standards (JIS) as well as the Council for the Promotion of Standardization of Long-Term Use Housing Materials (abbreviated as Long-Term Use Housing Materials).

According to the "Long-term Use Component Standards for Built-in IH Cooking Heaters" established by the Nagajukyo, the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) on which the IH cooking heater is to be installed must meet are as follows:
(1) The dimensions of the installation opening 2A are: width dimension W1 is 560 mm to 564 mm, and front-to-rear dimension D1 is 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front downward portion 2F is 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-to-back direction) dimension D3 of the front downward slope portion 2F is 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling depth (front-to-back direction) dimension D2 of the front downward section 2F is 58 mm to 70 mm.

Furthermore, according to the "Long-Term Use Component Standards," the external dimensions of built-in IH cooking heaters (induction heating cookers) are specified as follows:
(1) The height dimension H2 from the bottom end of the top plate to the bottom end of the front panel is 215 mm to 223 mm.

The cooking device 1 of the present disclosure is designed to satisfy the various constraints as described above.
8, A1 is the dimension in the front-rear direction of the top plate 15 described later, which is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rearmost part of the main body 110, which is 498 mm. A3 is the dimension in the front-rear direction from the inclined portion 111 formed at the rear of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, which is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. The front cover 112 is formed symmetrically, and has several protruding mounting legs 112P formed on the rear side where it is attached (see Figure 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into multiple elongated fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and are slid slightly downward so that the mounting legs 112P engage with the fitting holes. In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a fixing device (not shown). This fixation prevents the front cover 112 from moving upwards, and the front cover 112 is attached to the lower case 101.

In FIG. 8, 113 is a heating chamber formed into a box shape from a thin metal plate, which will be described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200. A large opening 113A (see FIG. 15) is formed in the front of the heating chamber 113, through which a cooking utensil such as a frying pan (food to be heated N) or food to be cooked can be inserted and removed. The opening 113A is covered by a door 114, which can be opened and closed freely.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 is supported rotatably relative to the main body 110 by two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two arms 116 (not shown) arranged on the left and right so that its front surface is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115. Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front-opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at its lower end as the fulcrum (center of rotation).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front of the cooking appliance 1 by a professional such as a retailer or installer after the cooking appliance 1 has been installed in the kitchen furniture 2. The door 114 is attached when the cooking appliance 1 is shipped from the factory, and cannot be removed later by anyone other than a professional, i.e., a household user. This is to prevent microwaves from leaking from inside the heating chamber 113 due to poor sealing of the door 114 after installation.

In FIG. 8, H1 is the maximum height of the cooking device 1. In other words, it is the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200, which is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is the height dimension from the bottom end of the top plate 15 to the bottom end of the front cover 112, which is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the dimension from the top to the bottom end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, which is set to 171 mm. H4 is the height dimension of the top plate 15, which is 11 mm. By setting these dimensional relationships, when the cooking appliance 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is ensured below the bottom surface of the door 114 and the bottom surface of the front cover 112.

Next, we will explain Figure 10. Figure 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in Figures 1 and 2. In this Figure 10, 2G is a step formed at both the left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This step is the part that faces closely to the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200 described later. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation opening 2A. This maximum width dimension W2 is approximately 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figs.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Z-Z line in FIG. 11. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Z-Z line in FIG. 11, showing the flow of cooling air. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the W-W line in FIG. 12. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Y-Y line in FIG. 11. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the V-V line in FIG. 12. FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the X-X line in FIG. 12. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the right main part of the cooking device 1 when it is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1. Fig. 20 is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit 40 and various display units in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation unit 40R and the right display unit 31R of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the cooking appliance 1.

(Upper unit 100)
In this embodiment 1, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the cooking appliance 1. For this reason, a commercial (AC) power source 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100. However, a power cord 106 (not shown) for directly connecting to the commercial power source 99 via a plug 106A (not shown) is drawn from the lower unit 200 to the outside of the cooking appliance 1.

The upper unit 100 is composed of a box-shaped upper case (upper housing) 16 that forms the outer shell of the main body 10, a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 (see FIG. 12) fixed to the top of the upper case, and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass that is attached to the top surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover almost the entire upper surface except for the rear portion. In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 is equipped with the upper case 16 and top plate 15 that form the outer shell.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a single thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate.
Alternatively, a plurality of thin metal plates are joined by spot welding, screws, etc. to form a box shape.
In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 is made by bending the peripheral portion of a single sheet of metal vertically, as described later, to integrally form a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, a front vertical wall 16F, and (left and right) side vertical walls 16L and 16R. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall", as described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in a different form. For example, a single metal plate is pressed to form a "body" having three surfaces: a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, and a front vertical wall 16F. Separately, two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are formed separately. These two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are then attached to the ends of the "body" by screws, spot welding, or the like, to finally form a box shape with an open top surface.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape with a generally uniform overall thickness, and its entire underside is covered with a painted surface that is opaque to visible light. This means that the functional components below the top plate 15, such as the induction coil 17, cannot be seen from above the top plate 15.

The IH coil 17R on the right has a donut-shaped planar shape. The maximum heat output of this IH coil 17R is 3200 W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

The left IH coil 17L also has a doughnut shape. The maximum heating power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168mm. Note that the diameter may be increased to approximately 180mm so that it can accommodate heated objects such as large pots and frying pans. Figure 11 shows a case where the diameter of the left IH coil 17L is larger than that of the right IH coil 17R.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a long opening formed horizontally at the rear of the upper case 16, 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, and has shutters or multiple through holes to allow ventilation. 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18.

In Figures 12 and 14, 22 is a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the upper rear end of the upper case 16, as described above. This reinforcing plate 22 has a length equal to the width of the rear edge of the upper case 16.

21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the top surface of the reinforcing plate 22. This decorative frame protrudes to the rear of the upper case 16 and is longer than the width of the upper case 16. In other words, when viewed from above, it appears to surround the rear and both left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 (see Figure 11).

In Figures 11, 12 and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame. This decorative frame 25 is installed to protect the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 from external impacts (see Figure 11).

26 is a ring-shaped cushioning material made of a highly elastic material, such as silicone rubber, which is attached to the entire underside of the decorative frames 21, 25. This allows the upper unit 100 to be placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via this cushioning material 26. Note that a single decorative frame 25 may be designed to surround three portions (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15, or four portions (four surrounding sides) including the rear end face.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 30L, 30R)
11 and 19, reference numeral 30 denotes an integrated display unit. The integrated display unit 30 is disposed in the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the center portion on the left and right.
The left and right display sections 31L and 31R are also provided on the left and right sides of the front portion of the top plate 15, respectively.

The integrated display unit 30 is a display means used in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 described below. In other words, it is used during microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking.

This integrated display section 30 alternatively displays a first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 54) used in the linked cooking mode KM3 and a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 51) used in the combined cooking mode KM2.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of liquid crystal display screens (not shown), and the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are installed on a horizontal operation board 41 that is installed long in the left-right direction.

The bottom surface of the top plate 15 does not have a painted surface that blocks visible light as described above, corresponding to the position directly above the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R can be seen from above the top plate 15.

The integrated display unit 30 displays common information and warnings for the cooking appliance 1. For example, it displays the selection result of the three types of heating sources for the cooking appliance 1, and caution and warning information showing the operating status of those heating sources. That is, the integrated display unit 30 is called the integrated display unit 30 because it may display information related to the induction heating source 17, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189.

The integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying the names of various cooking methods corresponding to a combined cooking mode KM3 (described later) and their control conditions.
The integrated display unit 30 may be referred to as a "center display unit 30" based on its installation position. In particular, the term "center display unit 30" may be used to indicate the difference between the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L.

Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 also has the function of displaying "inventory information" for the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display section 31R/left side display section 31L)
The left display unit 31L displays information related to the operation of the left IH coil 17L. For example, as described below, when setting timer cooking, the time can be set in one-minute increments and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time since the start of heating and the "remaining time" until the timer setting ends. Furthermore, when preheat cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default The display will show the temperature, current temperature, etc. Note that the "remaining time" will be displayed as 9 minutes 59 seconds when there are less than 10 minutes remaining, and the remaining time will be displayed in 1-second increments. .

Similarly, the right display unit 31R displays information related to the operation of the right-side IH coil 17R. This right display unit 31R basically displays information related to various control conditions such as the timer setting time, preheating temperature, and elapsed time for the right-side IH coil 17R, just like the left display unit 31L.

(Input Operation Unit 40)
19, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation unit. This input operation unit 40 is disposed long horizontally along the front edge of the top plate 15.
The input operation unit 40 is disposed on the upper surface of an operation board 41 which is elongated horizontally and disposed in a strip shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41. The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material with excellent electrical insulation properties. Behind the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100 is a central operation board 32 supported by a holder 50. The integrated control device MC, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the central operation board 32.

A flat auxiliary support plate (not shown) is installed below the operation board 41, facing the operation board 41 with a gap between them. In other words, it has a two-layer (two sheets) structure with a gap between them, allowing as many electrical components and circuits as possible to be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air flows from the second cooling fan 61 described later, and is formed by the space between the cover 70 described later and the front vertical wall 16F located in front of the upper case 16 (see Figures 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. The lower case 101 and the upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated at multiple locations by screws 51.

As is clear from Figure 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end of the lower case 101 closely face each other within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing parts are fastened and fixed by the screws 51. In addition to the screws 51, screws 51F (not shown) are also provided to fasten the facing parts of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are joined at multiple points.

16BX is a horizontal bend formed by bending the upper end of the rear vertical wall 16B further rearward BK. This horizontal bend 16BX and the flange 16A (see Figure 14) described below are positioned on the same horizontal line.

Because of the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontal bend 16BX may work together to function as a part that firmly supports such loads. In other words, the flange 16A, which is made by bending a metal plate in a series to increase its mechanical strength, and the horizontal bend 16BX support the upper case 16 itself, and as a result, a structure is realized in which the lower case 101 is also reliably supported. Note that in this embodiment 1, the horizontal bend 16BX does not directly contact the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2, as shown in FIG. 12.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity that is large in both depth and area. This cavity 104 is the space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical direction) dimension of the cavity 104.

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, this embodiment 1 has a flat upper case 16 (forming the outer shell of the main body 10) whose upper opening is closed by the top plate 15. When this upper case 16 is placed on the lower case 101 (described below), the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
In the cavity 104 , a waveguide 123 constituting a part of a microwave heating device 120 (described later) is disposed long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113 .
Further, behind the waveguide 123, a case C154 for accommodating a power supply circuit board 127 on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted is disposed elongated in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer, and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 stored inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted. Although such a control board and power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, in this embodiment 1 they are integrated to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101. This front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 backward.

198 is a connecting support bracket made of a metal plate and has a horizontal part 198H and a vertical part 198V. The horizontal part 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are box-shaped and made of thin metal plates, and by fastening the screws 51, 51F (not shown), the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 become a single, sturdy box-shaped structure.

In this embodiment 1, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are fitted together in a tight fit as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the top opening of the lower case 101 are designed to be the same as the maximum width dimension D5 (not shown) in the front-rear direction and the maximum width dimension W4 (not shown) in the left-right direction of the upper case 16. Alternatively, they are only 0.2 mm larger (at most) than the maximum dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the top opening of the lower case 101.

When a small force is applied outward to the upper ends of the left and right vertical walls 101L, 101R or the rear wall (rear vertical wall) 101B, the top opening of the lower case 101 widens slightly, allowing the upper case 16 to fit tightly (snugly) inside it.

In this embodiment 1, "fitting" does not necessarily mean a tight fit as illustrated in the above embodiment 1. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 that is inserted inside may differ by up to about 1 mm from the inner dimensions (front-to-back and left-to-right directions) of the lower case 101 that is the outside, and they do not have to be tightly attached as a whole. Even if there is such a slight difference in dimensions, it is possible to make a strong main body case HC by fixing with screws 51, etc.

The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a single, sturdy box-shaped structure, which allows for a sturdy support structure for the door 114 (described below), which is beneficial in preventing microwave leakage between the door 114 and the periphery of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In particular, the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported on the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and bears the entire load of the lower unit 200, so it is important that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are constructed so that they do not warp or deform as a whole. Note that since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire bottom surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually comes into contact with the top surface of the lower kitchen unit 2.

In FIG. 12 , reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board, which is disposed horizontally in the center of the upper case 16 .
The inverter circuit board 80 has a rectangular planar shape that is long in the left-right direction. The inverter circuit board 80 has a length W16 of 316 mm and a length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction of 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In FIG. 12, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40 and the range of the integrated display unit 30, right display unit 31R, and left display unit 31L, and is provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached to the underside of the holder 50 so as to overlap it with a small gap.

(Inverter circuit board cooling structure)
Next, reference will be made to FIG. 25 to FIG.
Fig. 25 is a simplified horizontal cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 26 is a vertical cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in Fig. 24. Fig. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle by enlarging the schematic diagram shown in Fig. 25. Fig. 28 is a simplified perspective view explaining the positional relationship between the cooling air from the air outlet of the first cooling fan and the inverter circuit board.

When creating a circuit with various electronic components, this type of inverter circuit board is formed by fixing components such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, and transistors to an insulating substrate, and wiring between these components with copper foil. Because this is a complex and detailed process, it is currently mass-produced by mounting using automatic loading machines. For this reason, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the board, and even when used in this type of heating cooker, the basic shape of the circuit board is square or rectangular. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space inside the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise a way to avoid interference and overlap with surrounding components. Furthermore, if the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted also increases, and the area of the inverter circuit board inevitably becomes larger.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 is composed of an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L, and an inverter circuit 81R that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. These will be described later with reference to Figures 29, 30, and 33.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (heat dissipation sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. The heat sinks 82 are as shown in Figures 12, 15, and 26. That is, the heat sinks 82 are arranged in two rows with two heat dissipation fins 82FN facing each other, and are installed close to each other by a few mm to about 10 mm.

In FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed when the heat dissipation fins 82FN of two heat sinks 82 face each other. The size (front-to-back width) of this gap GP2 is the same across the entire left-to-right direction of the two front-to-rear rows of heat sinks 82. For example, it is 8 mm. To distinguish it from the (second) gap GP12 described below, this gap GP2 may be called the "first gap."

As can be seen from Figures 12 and 26, the heat sink (heat dissipation sink) 82 has power control switching elements 83 that form part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R attached to the inclined surfaces on the opposing sides. Therefore, the heat generated during operation of the switching elements 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 that passes around the heat dissipation fins 82FN.

The power control switching elements 83 are, for example, IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors). The power control switching elements 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side are attached to the rear side of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two rows, front and rear.
The power control switching elements 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side are attached to the front side of the heat sink 82 which has two rows, front and rear. It is to be noted that they may be attached to the opposite side.

In Figures 12 and 26, 70 is a cover that is integrally formed from a thin metal plate or plastic material and covers the entire upper part of the inverter circuit board 80. Both left and right ends of this cover 70 are open, and as shown in Figure 24, the left end surface of the cover 70 forms the inlet FI for the cooling airs RF1 and RF2 described below, and the right end surface of the cover 70 forms the outlet FO for the cooling airs RF1 and RF2.

The cover 70 is positioned so that a certain gap GP11 is maintained between it and the underside of the coil base 17C that supports the IH coils 17L and 17R (see FIG. 26). The gap GP11 is approximately 1 mm to a maximum of several mm in linear distance.

In this embodiment 1, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. This ensures a space of at least 5 mm between the bottom surfaces of the IH coils 17L, 17R and the top surface of the cover 70. This space reduces the magnetic effect of the IH coils 17L, 17R on the cover 70, and also has the effect of making it easier for cooling air to flow between the cover 70 and the bottom surfaces of the IH coils 17L, 17R.

The cover 70 is sized to ensure a certain gap GP12 with the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In this embodiment 1, GP12 is 20 mm.
To distinguish it from the (first) gap GP2, this gap GP12 may be referred to as a "second gap."

In Fig. 26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the heat sink 82 based on the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16, and is 28 mm. H7 is the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S, and is 31 mm. Note that 71 is a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or a magnetic shielding sheet (such as a thin aluminum plate) may be placed between the upper surface of this support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80.

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is the linear distance from the bottom surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16. In this embodiment 1, this height dimension H9 is 44 mm or 44.5 mm.

The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described in Figures 16 and 17 is 40 mm. This height dimension H10 does not match the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A, etc.

Since the cover 70 is located directly below the IH coil 17L and is in close proximity to it, if you want the cover 70 to have a magnetic shielding effect, it is best to make the cover 70 out of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. If the cover 70 is made of iron or magnetic stainless steel, there is a concern that the cover 70 will heat up due to leakage magnetic flux and rise in temperature, so in that case it is best to cover the top surface of the cover 70 with a non-magnetic metal. For example, you can use measures such as stacking aluminum sheets or attaching aluminum tape.

If the cover 70 is made of metal, it is even better to electrically connect it to the upper case 16. For example, the metal screws (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 can reach directly into the screw holes in the cover 70.

The upper case 16 is connected to the lower case 101 (described later) with metal screws or the like, and is also electrically connected to an earth terminal (not shown) provided on the lower case 101, so that noise is absorbed by the earth. In this way, the magnetic shielding effect of the cover 70 can be expected to provide a noise shielding effect for the various electrical components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.

In addition, if the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be determined relatively freely. This has the advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can also be adjusted. For example, a ribbed air direction plate or the like can be integrally formed on the underside of the cover 70 so that more cooling air RF1 flows toward a specific portion of the heat sink 82.

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all the heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B) themselves, which is 20 mm.
A gap GP12 of about 21 mm is secured between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70, and the height of this gap GP12 also becomes the height of the first air passage F1.

The distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is approximately 13 mm. A continuous hanging wall 70B is formed downward from both the front and rear edges of the cover 70.

The distance between the pair of hanging walls 70B at the front and rear, i.e., the dimension W9 of the space in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 26), is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B abuts against the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a small gap between the two, it does not interfere with the cooling air guiding effect.

In FIG. 26, GP16 is a gap formed between the top surface of the heat dissipation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. This gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12, GP16 formed inside the cover 70 and the heat dissipation fins 82FN.
26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm, and W9 is the distance between the opposing hanging walls 70B (the dimension of the space in the front-rear direction), which is 205 mm.

Next, referring back to FIG.
W10 indicates the distance from the right end face of the cover 70, i.e., the end face on the outlet side, to the lateral vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space of this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is disposed in this space.

25, 70A is a front cutout formed on the left edge, i.e., the inlet end, of the cover 70. This front cutout 70A is for guiding a part of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside just before the cover 70.
A plurality of front cutout portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP14 indicates the gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end face of the cover 70. This gap GP14 is approximately 40 mm. Note that a gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end face of the cover 70. In FIG. 25, this gap GP15 is very small, so it is not shown.

25, XB indicates the point where a "blowout line" FL1 that passes through the center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and is perpendicular to the tip surface of the air outlet 60A intersects with the partition wall 11.
The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is inclined at a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to a center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L, 17R in the left-right direction. Note that the air outlet 60A may be inclined with respect to a straight line (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27) that crosses the partition wall 11, instead of the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L, 17R in the left-right direction.

XF indicates a point (intersection) of an "air outlet line" FL2 that passes through the center point of the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and is perpendicular to the tip surface of the air outlet 61A, and the partition wall 11. These intersections XB and XF will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.
Note that the air outlet lines FL1 and FL2 are imaginary straight lines provided for the convenience of explaining the first embodiment, and the cooling air does not actually flow along these air outlet lines FL1 and FL2.

In FIG. 25, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined at a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
The installation distance W14 between the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 measured at the center point is 150 mm.

27, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are spaced apart by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is approximately 110 mm.
The air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are spaced apart by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2, which is approximately 100 mm.

With the above-described configuration, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is directed toward the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B from behind the straight line (reference line) BL that passes through the center of the gap GP2.
The air outlet 60A is inclined (at an angle θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

Conversely, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined (at an angle θ2) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL from the front direction across the straight line (reference line) BL.
The magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is "θ1>θ2", but they may be equal.

As can be seen in FIG. 27, in this embodiment 1, the two intersections XB and XF are not in the same position. They change depending on the positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and the direction of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sinks 82 include 82F1 and 82F2 as heat sinks 82F on the front FR side. The heat sinks 82B include 82B1 and 82B2 as heat sinks 82B on the rear BK side. When viewed from the front side of the cooking appliance 1, of the two rows of heat sinks 82, the one on the front left side is sometimes called the "first front heat sink" 82F1, and the one installed a little further away on the front right side is sometimes called the "second front heat sink" 82F2.

As shown in FIG. 28, of the two rows of heat sinks 82, the one on the rear left side is sometimes called the "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the one installed a short distance away on the rear right side is sometimes called the "rear second heat sink" 82B2.

Returning to the explanation of FIG.
Reference numeral 11 denotes a partition wall that is integrally formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70. When the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, it can be formed integrally as described above, but a plate-like member separate from the cover 70 may also be used, in which case it will be referred to as the partition member 11. Hereinafter, for ease of explanation, it will be referred to as the "partition wall" 11 collectively.

The front and back surfaces (rear surface) of this partition wall 11 are flat over its entire length from the right end to the left end. This is to minimize the airflow resistance of the cooling airflows RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first airflow path F1. The thickness of the partition wall in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.0 mm.

It is desirable to form the partition wall 11 from a material with high electrical insulation properties (e.g., a plastic material). Note that the partition wall 11 is not shown in Figures 12, 13, and 15.

24 and 25, D6 is the maximum width dimension in the front-rear direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between a partition plate 52 (described later) and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction behind the partition plate 52 .

In Figures 24 and 25, D7 is the distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the partition plate 52 (described later), and is the dimension that determines the size of the gap GP1 (see Figures 13 and 24). W8 is the maximum left-right dimension (width) that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16.

The two IH coils 17L and 17R are supported from below by a part called the coil base 17C (see Figure 12), which is made of heat-resistant plastic. The coil base 17C may be provided for each of the two IH coils 17L and 17R, or may be formed as a single structure common to both IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C is placed directly on the top surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with fasteners such as screws. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the coil base 17C and the top surface of the cover 70, and the coil base 17C is supported in a manner that it is constantly pushed up toward the top plate 15. A detailed explanation of these support structures is omitted. In any case, the distance (opposition) between the IH coils 17L, 17R and the rear surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 does not change over a long period of time. The coil base 17C has multiple large communication holes (not shown) formed in it to allow air to easily pass through in the vertical direction throughout the coil base.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 and the IH coils 17L, 17R does not change during induction heating cooking. As a result, it is possible to suppress changes in the high-frequency voltage and high-frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L, 81R that supply high-frequency current to the IH coils 17L, 17R, and it is possible to stabilize the induction heating performance.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are located above and away from the first horizontal plane HP1 that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, they exist on the second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is positioned below the IH coils 17L and 17R and is not in contact with either the coil base 17C or the heat sink 82.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of a flat support plate 71 that is larger than the planar shape of the cover 70. A first air passage F1 that is long in the left-right direction is defined and formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, as shown in Figures 24 and 25. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material, such as heat-resistant plastic.

In Figures 12 and 15, 102 is a metallic exhaust duct through which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. The outlet end 102E of this exhaust duct 102 passes through a gap GP1 formed between a partition plate 52 (described later) and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see Figure 13). In other words, the exhaust duct 102 passes vertically through the gap GP1 like a chimney.

TS10 is a contact type temperature sensor such as a thermistor, which measures the temperature of the food being cooked inside the heating chamber 113 and the ambient temperature surrounding it.
As shown in FIG. 15, the temperature sensor TS10 is installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the exhaust duct 102 so that the heat-sensing portion is exposed to the inside of the exhaust duct 102.
The temperature sensor TS10 is preferably installed near the rear surface of the heating chamber 113, and is therefore located near a communication port 174 formed at the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113.

The temperature sensor TS10 constantly measures the temperature not only when cooking with the oven heating source 188 driven, but also when cooking with the microwave heating source 189 (e.g., thawing frozen food) (in the cooking process of the combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later). The temperature detection data of this temperature sensor TS10 is input to the heating chamber control unit 159 (see FIG. 30).

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 16A denotes a horizontal flange formed by bending the upper ends of the side vertical walls 16L, 16R of the upper case 16 outward at a right angle in a continuous manner.
Reference numeral 101A denotes a horizontal flange formed by bending outward at a right angle continuously from the upper end portions of side vertical walls 101L and 101R of a lower case 101, which will be described later.

The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are arranged such that the flange 16A overlaps the flange 101A. In this overlapping state, the side wall of the upper case 16 and the side wall of the lower case 101 are fixed with the screws 51 (see FIG. 12) described above. Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed into a strong integrated structure by the fixation with the screws 51 and the tight fixation of the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is supported by the top surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed from thin metal plates, they can be made into a box-shaped structure with sufficient mechanical strength when integrated.

The means for fixing the flanges 16A and 101A in an overlapping state may not be the screws 51, but may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts. The flanges 16A and 101A do not come into contact with the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2. These flanges 16A and 101A are made of a hard material (metal), so there is a concern that they may damage the kitchen furniture 2. Furthermore, if the flanges 16A and 101A come into contact with the kitchen furniture 2, the cushioning material 26 cannot be installed in a compressed state. If the cushioning material 26 is not in a tight contact state, there is a concern that the effect of preventing the intrusion of water, etc. will be lost.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the cooking appliance 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, reference numeral 311 denotes a lower gap formed between the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 10 mm.

Reference numeral 301R denotes a right gap formed between the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
Reference numeral 301L denotes a left gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

302 is a front gap formed between the bottom surface of the door 114 or the bottom surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 when the door 114 is closed, and is approximately 10 mm in size. Note that the position of the bottom surface of the front cover 112 coincides with the position of the bottom surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, so that a gap of the same size as the front gap 302 is also secured below the front cover 112.

The size of the front gap 302 changes depending on whether the door 114 is open or closed, but as shown in FIG. 12, it is sufficient that the size (e.g., about 5 mm to 10 mm) is ensured so that outside air can be sucked in when the door 114 is closed. Note that in the explanation of the cooking device 1, "outside air" refers to the air that is present outside the cooking device 1, and does not refer to the air outdoors of the house HA shown in FIG. 1.

The lower gap 311, the right gap 301R, the left gap 301L, and the front gap 302 are interconnected. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 starts operating and outside air is drawn in from the front gap 302, the drawn outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, the right gap 301R, and the left gap 301L. The gap 303 described in FIG. 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311, the right gap 301R, the left gap 301L, and the front gap 302.

Next, referring back to FIG.
W3 is the maximum width dimension at the front portion of the cooking appliance 1. This width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, and is, for example, 595 mm.

303 is a gap formed between the inner surface (right side surface) of the right wall material on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112. This gap is provided to prevent the cooking appliance 1 from colliding with the kitchen furniture 2 when it is installed. The size of the gap may be about 1 to 2 mm.

The left front cover 112 also has a gap similar to the gap 303 between it and the inner surface (left side surface) of the left wall material that exists on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. Note that the size of the gap 303 on the left and right may differ slightly depending on the installation of the cooking appliance 1. Also, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, an elastic sealing material (cushion material) may be placed on the step portion 2G (see Figure 10), and the kitchen furniture 2 may be installed in a state where the gap 303 is almost completely blocked, but even in such a state, there is no problem with the internal cooling function of the cooking appliance 1.

The front cover 112 extends outward beyond the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L as shown in FIG. 18. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 is installed, the front sides of the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are covered by the two front covers 112 on the left and right.

Since the front sides of the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are covered, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, the user does not get the impression that there is a large gap between the cooking appliance 1 and the kitchen furniture 2.

When the cooking appliance 1 is installed, the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are secured, so that outside air can be reliably introduced into the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

In Figure 18, WS is the width dimension of the door 114 facing the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. This width dimension is necessary to prevent microwave leakage by tightly fitting the door 114 and the lower case 101, and also to form choke chambers 194 (described later) at the front, rear, left and right positions of the opening 113A (see Figure 11).

(First cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61)
24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the side vertical wall 16L on the left side of the upper case 16. Rotating shafts 60T (not shown) at the centers of the rotors (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extend in the vertical (perpendicular) direction, and the rotors rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are centrifugal fans (blowers). This is because it takes into consideration the high static pressure and the large ventilation resistance in a space with a high mounting density. Generally, there are centrifugal fans of the type that have a single intake port and blow (discharge) in the full radial direction. However, the fan in this embodiment 1 is a type that blows in only one direction.

In FIG. 24, 60A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cool the IH coil installation space CK inside the upper space 300A described below. Therefore, these two cooling fans 60 and 61 may be collectively referred to as the "upper cooling fans."

The air outlets 60A, 61A are directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, the two air outlets 60A, 61A are both located above a common first horizontal plane (HP1) and directed to the right. Note that the "first horizontal plane" HP1 in this embodiment 1 refers to the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80.

The first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 have exactly the same structure, shape, and "rated specifications," and are assumed to operate at the same rotation speed during normal induction heating operation. However, in this embodiment 1, the IH control unit 90 varies the rotation speed to change the amount of air blown. For example, the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R may be increased to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than normal, the rotation speed may be increased to increase the amount of air blown in order to improve the cooling effect. In addition, the first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 may be operated at different rotation speeds as a measure against "whining noise" to be described later.

The rated specifications are, for example, rated voltage, operating voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, etc. By changing the applied voltage or the voltage application time (ON DUTY time) within the operating voltage range, the rotation speed can be changed.
In contrast to this, the present embodiment 1 employs a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control method, which changes the duty cycle of the pulse width (ratio of H and L pulse widths) according to the magnitude of the input signal (DC level) to control the motor of the first cooling fan 60. This PWM control is also employed for the second cooling fan 61.

The first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 are configured with fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding the rotors (not shown), and a circular intake port (not shown) is provided on the underside of the fan case.

Directly below the intake ports (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, there is a vent hole 64 (see Figures 14 and 16) consisting of multiple round or elliptical holes. This vent hole 64 is formed in the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16. This vent hole 64 is connected to a vent hole 164 formed in the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from outside the lower case 101 through the vent hole 164.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (intake duct) that is provided to directly connect the vent 64 to the vent 164 of the lower case 101. This recess 165 is recessed from the left side by a certain depth (dimension) DP1. This dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, the vertical center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the vertical center point of the electrical component 85 mounted on the top surface of the power supply circuit board 55 (described later) are all located on a single horizontal line HL1. In other words, the cooling air RF1 blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is positioned so that it reaches the heat sink 82 and the electrical component 85 when it travels straight to the right. The horizontal plane determined by this horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from a commercial AC power source 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55 via a filter circuit board 54, which will be described later. Then, AC is converted to DC in this power supply circuit board 55. For this reason, electrical components 85 such as a diode for converting AC to DC and a transformer 57 (not shown) are mounted on the power supply circuit board 55.

If the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control unit 90 that controls induction heating cooking reduces the amount of heat from the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown per unit time by the first cooling fan 60 may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see Figure 24), such as thermistors, fixed in close contact with the surface of the heat sink 82.

If the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are made to have exactly the same structure, shape, and rated specifications, procurement costs during manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans of the same specifications are placed in parallel and operated, there is a high possibility that a whirring noise will occur.
For this reason, in the first embodiment, as a measure against the humming noise, the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are controlled to be different values within a range in which the humming noise is likely to occur. In other words, they are not always operated at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 24, 52 is a metal partition plate that is installed horizontally at the rear of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16. This partition plate 52 is a vertically extending wall that divides the internal space of the upper case 16 into front and rear. Note that "dividing" does not mean a strict shielding that completely blocks air flow. It is sufficient to be able to prevent the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 from flowing rearward beyond the upper end surface of the partition plate 52 to some extent.

The upper air passage AH, which will be described later, is the air passage within the upper unit 100, extending from the vent hole 64 to the front surface of the partition plate 52. The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 is present in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. Therefore, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH, but is structured to be substantially connected to the outside of the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 24, 52A is an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, and 53 is an exhaust port plate installed to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, with numerous through holes 53A formed therein, allowing cooling air to pass through toward the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52. The cooling air that passes through this exhaust window 52A is released into the space outside the cooking device 1 via the exhaust cover 19.

In Fig. 24, LF is the exhaust port dimension indicating the range (width dimension) to the left of the partition plate 12 described later for the exhaust exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L, 17R. This exhaust port dimension is determined by the formation range of the through holes 53A and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through holes 53A (the form shown in Fig. 24), the exhaust range LF is determined by the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A.
The width dimension of the right exhaust window 52B and the formation area of the through hole 53B are equal to each other.

In FIG. 24, 54 is a filter circuit board located in the right corner of the rear of the upper case 16. This filter circuit board removes noise from the power supply from the commercial power source 99 and supplies it to the output terminal side, and conversely prevents noise from flowing (backflowing) to the commercial (AC) power supply at the input terminal side, and is equipped with electrical components (not shown) such as resistors, inductors (choke coils), line capacitors, relays, and current fuses. The end of the power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power source 99 via a plug is connected to this filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is located on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 across the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, the power supply circuit board 55 is located to the right of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, and is therefore cooled by the cooling air immediately after it leaves the first air passage F1.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the front-rear direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the front-rear direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L, 17R in the left-right direction. CL2 is a center line that passes through the rotation centers of the rotor blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from Fig. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are aligned in a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 indicates the cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown out from the second cooling fan 61.

RF3 indicates the cooling air after it leaves the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. RF4 indicates the cooling air after it passes through the second air passage F2. Note that the cooling air RF3 after it leaves the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after it passes through the second air passage F2 partially merge along the way. In other words, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 merge before they reach the through hole 53A of the exhaust port plate 53.

In FIG. 24, GP1 is a gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. The width of this gap GP1 in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 30 mm to 50 mm.

In Figures 24 and 25, 12 is a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. 13 is also a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52.

The partition plate 12 divides the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 into two spaces, left and right. On the left side of the partition plate 12, an exhaust duct 102 is vertically positioned from below. Also, on the right side of the partition plate 13, the terminal end (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) that exhausts air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be located. However, in this embodiment 1, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not located.

In Figures 24 and 25, 14 is a vertically installed plate-like or rib-shaped (protruding) partition wall. This partition wall 14 is formed integrally with or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) that is installed so as to overlap the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 29 (not shown) is made of an electrically insulating plastic material like the support plate 71 .
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front surface of the partition plate 52. However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it contacts the lower surface of the top plate 15. In other words, although the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, the space behind the cover 70 is not completely divided into two, left and right, by the partition wall 14.

As shown in FIG. 25, a portion of the cooling air RF4 that is guided mainly through the first air passage F1 to the right side of the cover 70 is divided by the partition wall 14 into two cooling air flows RF4L and RF4L, and is guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, a portion of the cooling air RF4 that is guided mainly via the first air passage F1 to the right side of the cover 70 can be divided into two cooling air flows RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14 and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling airflows RF4L, RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L, 17R through the exhaust windows 52A, 52B.
24 and 25, the cooling air exhausted from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air exhausted from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When these two cooling airs are to be collectively referred to, the reference symbol RF4 is used in the following description.

(Detailed configuration of input operation unit 40)
19 and 20, the main parts of the input operation unit 40 will be described.
In Figures 19 and 20, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation section formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, in which various input keys (touch-type keys) that enable input by utilizing a change in electrostatic capacitance when the user lightly touches the keys with a finger or the like, as described below, are arranged in a horizontal line.

The input operation unit 40 includes three parts: a right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R, a central operation unit 40M, and a left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L. 98 is an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of a main power switch 97 that can supply and cut off the commercial power supply 99 described below. This operation button or operation key 98 is located adjacent to the right end of the right operation unit 40R. The following description is based on the assumption that this operation button or operation key 98 is within the range of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

The right operation unit 40R may be called an "individual operation unit" since it performs input operations only for the induction heating source 9. Similarly, the left operation unit 40L may be called an "individual operation unit".
In contrast, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "shared operation unit" because it is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperative operation unit" 40MC for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later. These will be described in detail in FIG. 21.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter board 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in Figures 24 and 25. The commercial power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power supply circuit section of the lower unit 200 (not shown in Figure 25).

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, a total of five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are arranged on the right operation unit 40R. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key that selects heating with the right heating unit 17HR. It can also stop the operation of the right-side IH coil 17R that has started the heating operation. Therefore, when pressed once the first time, it performs the function of selecting the right heating unit 17HR, and when pressed once again, it has the function of instantly issuing a command to stop the heating operation. In this way, each time this input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, automatically switches.

The input key 43R1 may be called the third selection means. That is, the input key 43L1 and the input key 43R1 are means for commanding the start of a heating operation in the "single (heating) cooking" mode, which uses either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys for designating the heating power (power consumption) during induction heating.
Of the two input keys 43R2, when the left input key 43R2 is touched, the heat is reduced by one level each time it is operated. For example, when the heat is 3200 W (rated maximum heat: heat level 9), touching this input key 43R2 once reduces the heat to 2500 W (heat level: 8).

When the input key 42R3 on the right side is touched, the heat level is increased by one step each time. For example, if the heat level is 2500W (heat level 8), touching this input key 42R3 once selects 3200W (maximum rated heat level: heat level 9).

43R4 is an input key for selecting the timer cooking control menu. Timer cooking is a control method in which the user sets the cooking time and induction heating operation is performed only for the set time. For example, if 10 minutes is specified and timer cooking is started, a specified display will be displayed on the right display unit 31R when 10 minutes have elapsed, and the voice synthesizer 95, described later, will also automatically notify the user by voice that cooking is complete. Induction heating will automatically stop when the set time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the set time has elapsed.

In this embodiment 1, the display units such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R, and the voice synthesis device 95 may be collectively referred to as the "alert unit" AN.

44R is a touch-type input key for selecting the "control menu" for induction heating cooking, and each time it is touched, one of multiple control menus can be selected. In this induction heating cooking, the "control menu" refers to the control mode of the induction heating source 9, or in other words, the type of control, such as "boiling water," "boiling," "deep-frying (automatic cooking)," etc., as shown in FIG. 38. In other words, "boiling water," "stewing," "deep-frying," etc., have different drive times for the IH coil 17R, different heat levels, and different drive patterns for changing the heat levels.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the names of the final food items or ingredients obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger steak" and "tempura" are names of food items and are not "control menus" as used here. In other words, the "control menu" can be said to be a general expression of the type of heating, cooking method, conditions, etc., until the cooking is completed.
The control menu for the induction heating source 9 may be referred to as an "IH control menu" to distinguish it from control menus for other heating sources.

Next, the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to Figures 20 and 23. The left operation unit 40L has a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

Reference numeral 43L1 denotes an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. After the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L has started, the operation can be stopped at any time.
That is, when the button is pressed once initially, it functions to select the left heating unit 17HL, and when the button is pressed once again after induction heating has started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.
The input key 43L1 may be called a third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys that specify the heating power (power consumption) of the left heating unit 17HL, similar to the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R. As with the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time they are touched, a specific heating power level one step higher or one step lower can be selected from the data table of specified heating power values.

Reference numeral 43L4 denotes an input key for selecting timer cooking. This input key 43L4 can specify the time for induction heating cooking, similar to the input key 43R4 of the right operation unit 40R.
When the timer cooking is completed, the end of the timer cooking is displayed on the left display section 31L in the same manner as the input key 43R4, and is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking. As with the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R, one control menu can be selected from multiple "control menus." Note that the control menu that can be selected with the left input key 44L is exactly the same as the control menu that can be selected with the right input key 44R.

The five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L arranged on the left operation section 40L are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction, as is clear from Figures 20 and 23.

20 and 21, a total of ten touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation section 40M, and one or more input functions are assigned to these input keys.
The ten touch input keys will be described below.

The input key 43KP on the far left allows the user to set the various operations and displays of the entire cooking device 1 as desired.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, switches to a "function mode" and displays a "function setting menu" such as the one shown below on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Setting the ventilation fan interlocking mode (3) Setting the cleaning guide (setting the automatic notification function for when to clean the heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (maximum power consumption can be selected from four levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W)
(5) Audio settings for audio guidance (6) Volume settings for audio guidance (7) Settings to prevent forgetting to remove food, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 113 (whether or not an alarm is required on the voice synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limiting function of the home power control device)
(9) Setting the time unit for timer cooking (changing the 1-minute setting to 5-minute or 30-minute units) (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (experienced) mode (11) Setting the type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 401 (12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu, identification information 330 to be displayed as the default) of each cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the linked cooking mode KM3 (13) Setting the display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as the default) of each control menu (e.g., "range grill", "pre-boil leafy vegetables") in the composite cooking mode KM2 (14) Setting the cooking mode to be automatically (preferentially) displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON.

The beginner mode is an optional function for people (users) who are not familiar with using the cooking appliance 1. When the beginner mode is set, the voice guidance in the voice synthesizer 95 becomes more detailed and clear. In addition, the number of voice guidance regarding input operations in the input operation unit 40 increases, and the amount of display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, the amount of reference information (including additional information 331, described later) displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases in cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, or the content of the voice guidance in the voice synthesizer 95 increases. This enhances the function of supporting the user's input operations.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the cooking mode setting that is automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is set to either the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has been opened.
This function assumes that the user will be cooking using the heating chamber 113, and automatically displays either the first specific screen 30SP for the linked cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 30SC for the composite cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30.
The first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is automatically displayed immediately after the door 114 is opened after the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, 2B: FIG. 46) described later is displayed.

After the "Function Setting Menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, by "long pressing" (hereinafter referred to as "long press") one specific input key other than the input key 43KP on the central operation unit 40M, one setting menu from the "Function Setting Menu" can be selected, and the desired setting contents can be subsequently changed.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the input key 43KP are pressed and held simultaneously, one of the setting menus in the "function setting menu" described above can be called up and the desired setting can be changed.

The term "long press" refers to a state in which the button is pressed continuously for five seconds or more, for example.
The integrated control device MC judges whether or not the state is a "long press" by comparing the timing of the touch input in the input operation unit 40 with a reference value. That is, the timing when the input keys (e.g., 43M1 and 43M2) in the central operation unit 40M are pressed simultaneously can be determined by the ON (when touched)-OFF (when not touched) signal transmitted from the input operation unit 40 to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC measures the time from the ON signal to the point when it changes to the OFF signal to judge whether or not it is a "long press."

The type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 401 may be, for example, limited to only frozen foods or to only food ingredients that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189.

By pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "function mode," and then operating the touch-type input keys 43M1 to 43M3 (described later) located on the central operation unit 40M, the 11 individual functions defined in the "function setting menu" of the cooking device 1 can be individually changed.

When the control mode or control conditions (temperature, heat, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 or oven heating source 188 are being selected on the integrated display unit 30, the input function of the input key 43KP is disabled so that the function mode is not switched. Therefore, the light-emitting unit 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting of the control mode or control conditions (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking appliance 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the user's home. In this way, the functions of the cooking appliance 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes and the usage environment (power situation of the home where it is installed). When such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72, and is used to determine whether or not to allow the use of the linked cooking mode KM3 when the user selects the linked cooking mode KM3, as described below.

As shown in Fig. 21, the range of the central operation unit 40M includes a range called a shared operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 that is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by a dashed line in Fig. 21.
On the other hand, the area of the central operation section 40M excluding the input keys 43KP is a cooperative operation section 40MC for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later.

In the following description, the "individual operation unit" 40M2 may be referred to as the "second operation unit" 40M2 because it also serves as the input operation unit for the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means).

Reference numeral 43MC denotes an input key for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which is disposed at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and is made up of a touch key.
The input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light-emitting diode (LED) or the like so that the user can easily see the words "cooperative cooking" and the figure that indicates it. However, the input key 43MC is illuminated and visible only during the cooperative cooking mode.
In other words, after all cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the LED stops emitting light to indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not active.
The input key 43MC may be called a "first input key."

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in the heating chamber 113 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. A combined cooking mode KM2 that uses both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. In other words, this input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "combined cooking mode." Note that when input key 43M1 is operated, cooking can also be performed using only microwave heating or oven heating by executing the "combined cooking mode," as described below.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This will be described later with reference to Figures 49 to 53.

When the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be executed. In other words, the display screen is switched to a configuration that displays the first specific screen 30SP. This will be described later with reference to Figs. 54, 75 to 102.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a single LCD display screen in terms of hardware, but as shown in Figure 21, it is divided into a maximum of three display areas 30L, 30M, and 30R by the display unit drive circuit 63.

Of the three display areas, display area 30L located on the left side will hereafter be referred to as the "first area." Display area 30M located in the center will hereafter be referred to as the "second area." Display area 30R located on the right side will hereafter be referred to as the "third area." Note that methods of dividing a single display screen into multiple areas in this way have been proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-172940, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

43M1 is a pair of input keys on the left and right for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display unit drive circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, we will explain the state in which the input key 43M1 is operated and individual names indicating "combined cooking mode" KM2 and "single cooking mode" KM1 are displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side, when the left input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward and the display screen switches to an image in which the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the center front to back. In other words, when the left input key 43M1 is operated once, one piece of desired display information (for example, a name that identifies "range grill" cooking, which is one of the control menus) can be selected from a group of display information such as "control menu" (in the case of combined cooking mode KM2) and identification information of the food to be cooked (in the case of linked cooking mode KM3) stored in the integrated control device MC. Note that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, it only appears to move forward visually.

Conversely, when the right input key 43M1 is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backwards, and the display screen switches so that different information is instead displayed in the center of the front and rear of the first display area. In other words, even if the right input key 43M1 is operated, one of the "display information group" defined in the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information is reversed.

In this way, the user can display desired information from the display information group in the center of the first area 30L by operating either the right input key 43M1 or the left input key 43M1.

43M2 is a pair of input keys that switch the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of these input keys 43M2, the display information in the second area 30M can be switched one by one in sequence, similar to the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys that switch the screen displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of these input keys 43M3, the display information in the third area 30R can be switched one by one in sequence, similar to the input key 43M1.

The input key 43M3 also serves as a guide key for assisting the user in inputting information for the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
When this input key 43M3 is touched in a specific situation, such as when no information is displayed in the third area 30R or when guidance information 30P described below is displayed, it displays "guidance information" 30P in the third area R to serve as a reference for the user's operation (see Figure 49).

The display of the guidance information 30P will automatically disappear after a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the display screen will return to its previous state. Details of this operation will be explained later with reference to Figures 73 and 74.

43MS is a starter that can command the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is composed of touch-type input keys. It also doubles as an input key that can command the transition to the combined cooking mode KM3.

43MT is a termination unit that can stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations, and is composed of a touch-type input key. It also doubles as an input key that can issue a command to cancel the transition to the combined cooking mode KM3.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is pressed to start cooking, for example, the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R do not always need to function as inputs.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L do not always need to have an input function. The same is true for the central operation unit 40M. To avoid unnecessary input, such as when the user touches an input key without realizing it, the integrated control device MC temporarily disables the input functions of the other input keys immediately after starting up the cooking device 1, and does not accept input, except for input keys that require input depending on the cooking condition input process and the progress of cooking.

To indicate that the input functions of the above-mentioned input keys are valid, light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided for each of the three operation units 40R, 40L, and 40M, as shown in Figures 20 to 23.

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, in the right operation unit 40R, the individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 are located immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. The input keys 43R2 and 43R3 form a pair, and therefore share one individual light-emitting unit 27R2.

The individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 each have one or more light-emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R, and the display unit drive circuit 63 controls the individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 to turn on and off, or to change the color of the light they emit.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 immediately adjacent to and behind the input key 43R1 emits blue light. This indicates that the unit is in a state where it can accept operational input.

When a user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 emits light in a unified color (red) to indicate to the user that an operation has been accepted. This display control is performed by the display unit drive circuit 63 based on commands from the integrated control device MC. Note that instead of emitting light in one color, the light color may be changed, for example from blue to red, to indicate to the user that an operation has been accepted. This also applies to the individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

Note that the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 adjacent to and immediately behind the input key 43R1 may not be illuminated before the input key 43R1 is operated, but may start illuminating when the operation is accepted and continue illuminating. Alternatively, the system may be such that only the fact that operational input is possible is indicated by illumination in advance (before operation) and that the operational input has been accepted is not indicated by illumination. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light flashes when operational input is possible and waiting for input, and changes to continuous illumination when operational input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in Figures 20 and 23, in the left operation unit 40L, individual light-emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 form a pair, they share one individual light-emitting unit 27L4.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, in the central operation unit 40M, individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch-type input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and induction heating begins, the input keys (43M1, 43M2, etc.) on the central operation unit 40M will no longer be able to be used for input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT will remain valid. Therefore, the heating operation in the linked cooking mode can be stopped at any time, and the linked cooking mode can be cancelled.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu or the cooperative cooking mode KM3. For example, when a cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started, pressing the input key 43MT cancels the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 midway through, and the occupied state of the left heating unit 17HL used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is immediately released, as described later.
Therefore, after this release, input of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking can be started.

When the input key 43M1 or input key 43MC is operated to display the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the cooking process starts, all previous input settings are cancelled. Therefore, if you want to display the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3, you need to operate the input key 43MC again.

The individual light-emitting units 27M1-27M6 each have one or more light-emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M, and the individual light-emitting units 27M1-27M6 are controlled by the display unit drive circuit 63 (see FIG. 30) to light up or turn off in a unified light color. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light blinks when operation input is possible and waiting for input, and changes to continuous light when operation input is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 21, a pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light-emitting unit 27M3. The two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 also share one individual light-emitting unit 27M4 and one individual light-emitting unit 27M5, since they also form a pair. In the following explanation, the reference symbol 27M is used to collectively refer to the individual light-emitting units in the central operation unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 22, an individual light-emitting unit 27R5 is also located directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97, which is located adjacent to the right end of the right operation unit 40R.

It is desirable to unify the light emission modes (continuous light emission, flashing, light color, etc.) of the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, 27M as described above across the three operation units in order to avoid unnecessary confusion and misunderstandings by the user. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the light emission modes of the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, 27M are unified across the right operation unit 40R, the left operation unit 40L, and the central operation unit 40M.

To indicate that the input function of each input key is valid, there is a method of making the operation part of the input key itself light up, but in that case, it is necessary to place a light-emitting part directly under the operation part of the input key, and to manufacture the operation part from a light-transmitting material, and there is also the issue of ensuring the sensitivity of the operation part of the input key, so there are many issues in terms of structure and cost. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, as described above, the light-emitting display parts 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided in adjacent positions to avoid the operation parts of the input keys. "Adjacent" here means a positional relationship in which the two are close to each other from the user's perspective, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display part 27R, and the one-to-one relationship can be instantly recognized. Therefore, for example, the case where the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display part 27R are separated by a structure such as a wall that protrudes upward based on the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a structure is adopted in which it is illuminated from below.

In FIG. 20, heat level indicators 67L, 67R are provided at the rear of the right operating unit 40R and the left operating unit 40L to indicate the heat level during induction heating cooking.
These heat power indicators 67L, 67R indicate the heat power level of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL by emitting light (red). Nine levels of heat power are indicated by light, ranging from the minimum rated heat power (heat power level 1: 150 W) to the maximum rated heat power (heat power level 9: 3200 W).

The flame power display units 67L, 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operating unit 40R and the left operating unit 40L. The color of the light emitted may be changed according to the magnitude of the flame power. In this embodiment 1, for example, the flame power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Heat level 1: 1 red light, remaining 8 blue light. (2) Heat level 2: 2 red light, remaining 7 blue light. In addition, at the left end of the heat indicators 67L and 67R, there is a keep warm indicator 67H that displays an LED by illuminating it when the appliance is operated in the “keep warm mode” (see “display screen 3A” in Figure 47) in which the heated object is heated with a heat level lower than the minimum heat level 1.

The left display unit 31L displays the heat level value of the left heating unit 17HL as a number between 1 and 9. A "1" is displayed when the minimum heat level is 1, and a "9" is displayed when the maximum heat level is 9. The heat display on the left display unit 31L matches the heat level displayed by the heat display unit 67L, and is displayed at the same time.

The right display unit 31R also displays the heat level value of the right heating unit 17HR as numbers 1 to 9. The display conditions are exactly the same as those of the left display unit 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, and 27R and the two heat display units 67L and 67R are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction. Moreover, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, and 27R and the two heat display units 67L and 67R are aligned in the left-right direction.

In this way, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heat display units 67L, 67R are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R, providing good operability and visibility. Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R are also aligned in a straight line in the horizontal direction, providing a design that provides good overall operability and visibility from the perspective of a user standing in front of the cooking appliance 1 to operate it.

In FIG. 20, reference numeral 68 denotes a heat source display unit disposed behind the integrated display unit 30.
Since multiple heat sources are used with the central operation unit 40M, the heat source display unit 68 displays the heat source that is actually operating with the light of an LED.

As shown in FIG. 21, the heat source display section 68 is made up of three display sections.
The leftmost display unit 68L is an indicator that indicates that a microwave heating source 189 is in use, and the word "range" is displayed in letters near the front so that it is easy to see that this is microwave heating.

The central display section 68M is a display section that indicates when "grill cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using both or either one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.
The word "grill" is written on the front side, making it easy to understand that this is for grilling.

The rightmost display 68R is a display that indicates when "oven cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Unlike grill cooking, "oven cooking" involves monitoring the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 and reflecting (feeding back) it in the power control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be explained in more detail later.

20 and 21, reference numeral 69 denotes a high temperature display unit provided immediately behind the heat source display unit 68. This high temperature display unit 69 causes an LED light-emitting unit to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC, thereby indicating that the part to be monitored for temperature is at a high temperature.
The integrated control device MC issues a command to display a high temperature based on temperature information from a temperature detection circuit 93 which receives temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors as described below, and a heating chamber control unit 159 .

The high temperature indicator 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display unit 69 has three temperature monitoring target parts, the left heating unit 17HL, the heating chamber 113, and the right heating unit 17HR, and displays the status of these temperature monitoring target parts individually. Therefore, for example, after induction heating cooking is performed using the left heating unit 17HL, the high temperature display unit 69 can notify the user that the area from the center to the left side of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL has become hot, and alert the user.

In order to shorten the period during which the high temperature display unit 69 displays a high temperature as much as possible, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after one induction heating cooking session is completed, for example, the IH control unit 90 continues to operate the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and uses outside air to cool the internal space of the upper unit 100, i.e., the upper space 300A.

Returning to FIG.
Reference numeral 47 denotes a touch-type input key for issuing an Internet connection command to the integrated control device MC for wireless communication. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, a wireless connection is established with the home gateway 411, and information from the outside can be obtained via the home gateway 411.

46L and 46R are windows that transmit infrared signals, which act as command signals to start operation, to the ventilation device 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. An infrared transmitter 48 (see Figures 29 and 30) is installed below these windows. Note that in practice, these windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. Naturally, this sheet is made of a material that allows infrared signals to pass through.

When detailed inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is to be manually displayed temporarily on the integrated display unit 30 while cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM3 is being performed, the input key 47 can be pressed. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. In this case, the inventory information may be, for example, the name of the frozen food (e.g., "rice" or "gyoza") and the amount (one portion, weight 200g, etc.).

When cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM3 is being performed, the cooking appliance 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing, regardless of the operation of the input keys 47. This will be explained later with reference to Figures 103 and 104.

In FIG. 19, 49 is a wireless communication unit (communication module) that includes an antenna (not shown) and a transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown) that receives radio waves from the outside and transmits radio waves or infrared signals to the outside. This wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display board 41, with a small gap between it and the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The reason for maintaining this gap is that there is a concern that if it gets too close to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16, the radio wave reception sensitivity will decrease.

When installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the top surface of the cooking device 1 is exposed above the kitchen furniture 2. Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and exhaust air from the exhaust port end 102E of the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15) can also be released above the kitchen furniture 2.

(Control Means of Upper Unit 100)
Next, the control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
29 to 31, some components are omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown.

Figure 29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. In Figure 31, only the main control means in Figure 29 are extracted, and the transmission and reception of control command signals, power supply relationships, etc. are indicated by arrows.

In FIG. 30, 97 is a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200V commercial power source 99 via a power cord and power plug (not shown). 91 is a power circuit to which electrical energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and 92 is a DC power conversion unit that converts AC power from the commercial power source into DC. This power circuit 91 is mounted on the power circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In Figures 29 and 30, MC is an integrated control device, and has the functions of a main controller or a host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device that is mainly composed of a microcomputer. This integrated control device MC is supplied with a predetermined constant voltage current from the power supply circuit 91.

As described above, the integrated control device MC is located on the underside of the central operation board 32 (shown in a dashed frame in Figures 24 and 25). However, it may also be located on the back (lower) side of the operation board 41. In any case, the integrated control device MC is built into the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200.

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts: an input section, an output section, a memory section, and a CPU (arithmetic control section), and the power control program for the three heating sources is pre-stored in the memory section. In addition to the memory section (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, it also has a built-in large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM that records abnormality monitoring information. The power control program for the three heating sources may be stored in this storage device MM.

90 is an IH control unit that is responsible for control during induction heating, and is composed mainly of a microcomputer. This IH control unit 90 pre-stores (stores) current control programs that correspond to various control menus during induction heating. It also has a built-in storage device (not shown) that records abnormality monitoring information.

In addition, some of the functions of the IH control unit 90 may be handled by a second IH control unit 90A (not shown). For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80, and the microcomputer may be responsible for input and output control of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all cooking operations, including induction cooking and microwave cooking, the integrated control device MC centrally monitors for electrical abnormalities.

In FIG. 30, 96 is a clock circuit also known as a real-time clock, which is supplied with power from a dedicated power source (built-in battery) BT1 separate from the power circuit 91 connected to the main power switch 97, and is designed to operate over a long period of time. This may be, for example, a radio-controlled clock, which will always notify the current date and the exact time down to the second when requested by the integrated control device MC, and is set to the correct date and time during the manufacturing process of this cooking appliance 1.

Even if the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and the clock circuit 96 has the function of always transmitting the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and stored with the correct time at the same time. Note that the clock circuit 96 may be omitted, and the integrated control device MC may have the timekeeping function.

In FIG. 30, 72 is a power control unit (also called a "demand control unit"). This power control unit 72 has a function of analyzing a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating from the integrated control device MC, and monitoring the total power consumption of the cooking device 1 so that it does not exceed a specified value or an upper limit set individually by the user, and also has a function of automatically limiting the heat (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed a specified value or an arbitrary set value.

In general, a "demand control device" or "demand control equipment" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (electricity demand). It automatically checks the electricity usage and if it is about to exceed a set value, it will issue an alarm or other warning. If automatic shutdown of devices that can be shut off is set, the device itself will automatically shut off electrical devices that can be shut off as set. After that, it is known to automatically turn on the electrical devices after a certain amount of time has passed, and it is said to be extremely effective in managing the contracted power with the power company in each household.

The power control unit 72 in this embodiment 1 is provided to provide the cooking appliance 1 itself with the power consumption suppression function described above. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function within the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware, and may be realized by incorporating a demand control program into the integrated control device MC from the beginning or adding it later.

The power control unit 72 of this embodiment 1 can set the maximum power consumption of the entire cooking device 1 to only one of the four levels as described above by operating the function setting input key 43KP. This setting can be set on the input operation unit 40 while viewing the numerical values of the above four levels displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when multiple specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed simultaneously. Such a simple setting method is introduced, for example, in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6012780.

As explained in Figures 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays a display that allows "peak cut value setting" and "HEMS registration setting", so that the total power consumption suppression function of the cooking appliance 1 as described above can be easily added or the function can be changed or canceled. When determining the "permission conditions" described later, the data on the upper limit value of the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in this power control unit 72 is used.

Reference numeral 73 denotes a signal transmission unit provided for transmitting various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200. For example, this corresponds to a signal line and connector capable of transmitting signals by wire. Alternatively, for example, an infrared communication unit may be used for transmitting and receiving signals wirelessly.
The signal transmission unit 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 .

The IH control unit 90 obtains temperature information from a temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether the main parts of the upper unit 100 are abnormally hot. For example, the central operation unit 40M is equipped with electronic and semiconductor components corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT, etc., but since these components are relatively sensitive to heat, they are monitored via the temperature detection circuit 93 to ensure that they do not exceed a predetermined temperature (for example, 60°C).

When the measured temperature exceeds the specified temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the device is in a "pre-abnormal state." Note that the pre-abnormal state is limited to when the detected temperature is in the range of 60°C to 65°C. If the temperature exceeds 65°C, the risk increases and the IH control unit 90 recognizes the device as being in a true abnormal state.

In this preliminary abnormality state, the induction heating operation does not immediately stop, but rather the power of the induction heating is controlled to be reduced. However, once the temperature exceeds 65°C, the IH control unit 90 determines that an abnormality has occurred and immediately stops the induction heating operation. Specifically, for example, if the IH coil being driven is the right-side IH coil 17R, the power supply to the inverter circuit 81R that supplies high-frequency power to that IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R, which includes the IH coil 17R and the resonant capacitor, is stopped. Note that 94L is the induction heating circuit for the left-side IH coil 17L.

In the above-mentioned abnormal standby state, the heat of induction heating may be maintained while improving the situation by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 that cools the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100. Furthermore, this may be used in combination with measures to reduce the heat of induction heating.

Then, (abnormality monitoring) information showing electrical and physical changes (for example, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30) in the main parts during induction heating at least during the period from such an abnormality preparatory state to an emergency stop is stored in the memory device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

In the above-mentioned abnormal standby state, the induction heating operation is not immediately stopped, and the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the number of rotations of the rotor blades is not changed), and the heating power of the IH coils 17L and 17R may be forcibly reduced to improve the condition.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the memory device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when a start command is received from the integrated control device MC until cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the "IH control menu" in the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "boiling water," "stewing," "frying," etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and information on the heat power of the induction heating are also recorded in chronological order. If an emergency stop occurs midway due to an abnormal condition, the abnormality monitoring information and information identifying the IH control menu up to that point will be saved in chronological order in the memory device 90R.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, in order to monitor the operation of the cooking appliance 1 over a wider range and acquire data, the integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information related to all heating and cooking states on the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 sides after the main power switch 97 is turned ON. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information on the presence or absence of abnormalities from the heating chamber control unit 159 and microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73.

The inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the right-side IH coil 17R, and an inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the left-side IH coil 17L.

These two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven independently of each other by the IH control unit 90. When these inverter circuits are referred to collectively, the reference symbol "81" is used.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be explained later with reference to Figure 33.

In Figures 29 and 30, 95 is a voice synthesizer that synthesizes electronically created voice. This voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice from a speaker 95S each time an input operation is guided or an abnormality occurs. The voice synthesizer 95 is a part that constitutes the notification unit AN (see Figure 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are used to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30, etc. The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from each of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control unit 90.

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be either non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or contact type such as a thermistor, and they may be used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two, TS5 and TS6, are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. These two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are placed in the gaps at the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, as shown in FIG. 19, and receive infrared signals from the direction of the top plate 15. In other words, this allows the temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object N, such as a metal pot or frying pan containing the food to be cooked, to be measured without contact.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two, TS3 and TS4, use thermistors as contact sensors. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the underside of the top plate 15 or in contact with the underside of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive intermediary object. This allows the temperature of the top plate 15 to be measured.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one, temperature sensor TS7 (see Figure 19), uses a thermistor as a contact sensor and is installed on the top surface of the holder 50. It detects the ambient temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40. The other two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 also use thermistors and are attached to the top surface of the heat sink 82 as described above. In addition, a thermistor-type temperature sensor TS10 is also installed to detect the internal ambient temperature of the heating chamber 113 as described above.

The lower unit 200 is also equipped with at least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 to detect the temperature of the internal space of the lower unit 200, but details will be explained later.

In Figures 29 and 30, 62 is a cooling fan drive circuit that controls the drive power of the drive motors 60M, 61M for the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. In other words, the air blowing capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is changed in multiple stages independently of each other by the control of the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

In FIG. 30, 63 denotes a display section drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, and has the function of displaying necessary information.
The display unit drive circuit 63 may be configured by a dedicated microcomputer. The control program (software) that realizes the functions of the display unit drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display unit drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, 84 is a vibration sensor that detects shaking during an earthquake. If it detects a seismic intensity (acceleration) or greater, it sends a vibration detection signal to the integrated control device MC. Upon receiving the signal, the integrated control device MC determines that an earthquake has occurred and instantly cuts off the power supply to all heating means in use.

In Figures 29 and 30, 49 is a wireless communication unit, also shown in Figure 19, which receives commands from the integrated control device MC to transmit information. It also receives commands from the integrated control device MC to obtain information from the outside. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces the total power consumption.

In Figures 29 and 30, EM is an abnormality detection unit. This abnormality detection unit is equipped with a detection electrode (not shown) arranged on the back surface of the top plate 15 and a judgment circuit (not shown) that monitors changes in the current flowing through this detection electrode and determines whether hot water, cooking liquid, etc. has boiled and overflowed from the heated object N during induction heating.

When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality, it sends an abnormality detection signal to the integrated control unit MC. The integrated control unit MC then issues an emergency stop command signal to the IH control unit 90 to bring the heating units 17HL and 17HR, which are in heating operation, to an emergency stop. Note that even in this case, the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continue to operate.

In addition, if microwave heating or oven cooking (including the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode) is being performed in the heating chamber 113 when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality, these heating operations continue without any effect. Therefore, if the two cooling fans 128, 129 are operating, their operation continues.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be described.
12 to 17, reference numeral 101 denotes a lower case (lower housing) that constitutes the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. This lower case 101 is formed by pressing a single thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates with spot welding, screws, etc. In the first embodiment, as described below, it is composed of three thin metal plates.

101H is a body portion that constitutes three surfaces (vertical surfaces) on the rear and left and right sides of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, which is a wall surface that inclines forward as it goes downwards so that the cooking appliance 1 does not hit the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when it is installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

101F is a front plate that constitutes the front surface of the lower case 101, and is a single flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 comes into close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F, preventing microwaves from leaking from the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114. 101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that rises vertically from the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101.

The lower unit 200 has two independent heating sources. One of them is a microwave heating source 189 for the microwave heating device 120. The other is an oven heating source 188 for the oven heating device 140.

The oven heating source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven compartment) 113 from the outside of its wall, but it may also be located inside the heating chamber 113 and directly heat the food being cooked. In the following explanation, unless there is a particular contradiction, it is assumed that the "microwave heating source 189" does not include the "inverter circuit board 121" described below.

12, 13 and 15 show the main parts of a microwave heating device 120.
Starting from the front, the main components are installed in the following order:
At the frontmost side, an inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which an inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is disposed.

Behind this inverter circuit board 121 are arranged a magnetron 122, which serves as a source of microwaves, and a waveguide 123 that surrounds the oscillator 122A of the magnetron 122.

Furthermore, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 inside the antenna case are disposed behind the waveguide 123 .
A motor 126 is disposed behind the antenna case 124 for rotating or turning the antenna 125 during microwave heating (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, 127 is a power supply circuit board that supplies microwave heating output and power to the magnetron 122, and is equipped with a power supply circuit section 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54, and a microwave heating control section 130, which will be described later.

In Figures 12 and 13, 128 is a third cooling fan, which is disposed directly below the box-shaped case A150 that houses the inverter circuit board 121. The entire bottom surface of the case A150 is open. In other words, it is a box-shaped case with no bottom surface.

129 is a fourth cooling fan, and is placed directly below the box-shaped case B151 on which the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. The heat dissipation section 122H has several parallel heat dissipation fins formed therein so that the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 can pass through. The case B151 is box-shaped with no bottom and the entire bottom surface is open.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are sometimes collectively referred to as the "lower cooling fans." This is because these two cooling fans 128, 199 have the function of cooling the inside of the lower space 300B.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending vertically away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
An inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is housed vertically within the vertical portion 308 .

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans.
The rotor is supported by a bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotation axis at the center of the rotor is oriented vertically.

As mentioned above, the entire bottom surface of case A150 and case B151 is open, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged so that they lie on the inside of the opening.

In FIG. 12, two rows of air deflectors 199 are provided inside the case A150, and are formed integrally or separately on the inside of the case A150. The air deflectors 199 are installed to efficiently direct the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and two communication ports 138A and 138B, which will be described later.

In Figures 12 and 13, 152F is a front air intake port formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This air intake port is composed of many small circular through-holes, or rectangular or elliptical through-holes. This air intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128.

In Figures 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This intake port is composed of many small circular through-holes, or rectangular or elliptical through-holes. This intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129.

As shown in FIG. 14, the ventilation hole (first air intake) 164 that introduces outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the interior of the upper unit 100 and the second air intakes 152B and 152F that introduce outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 into the interior of the lower unit 200 are located on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

In other words, when the cooking device 1 is viewed from the front side, the second air intakes 152B and 152F are located on the right side of the heating chamber 113, while the vent hole (first air intake) 164 and the vent hole 64 are located on the left side.

In FIG. 13, 153 is a duct installed on the upper part of the heat dissipation section 122H, which guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat dissipation section 122H downstream as shown in FIG. 16.

In Figures 12 and 13, 154 is case C, which houses the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 in a sealed state. This case C 154 is made of a plastic material with excellent electrical insulation properties.

The case C154 is composed of a rear cover 154A and a container- or box-shaped main body 154B at the front, stacked together. The cover 154A covers a large opening formed on the front side of the main body 154B from the rear.

Case C154 has a main body 154B at the front side, on which a power supply circuit board 127 and a board (not shown) on which a microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted are attached. During maintenance and inspection, this lid 154A can be opened to allow various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and microwave heating control unit 130 inside.

This case C154 is installed as far away as possible from the back of the heating chamber 113 so as not to be affected by heat from the heating chamber 113. It is also installed away from the bottom plate 101U, so that electrical insulation is not impaired even if liquid such as water or cooking liquid seeps into the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and behind the waveguide 123, the case C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As explained in FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 backward. The support bracket 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16.

In Figs. 12 and 13, reference numeral 131 denotes a door opening/closing detection mechanism provided as a measure against leakage of radio waves during microwave heating.
In order to ensure the safety of a microwave heating device, it is legally required to install a door opening/closing detection mechanism 131. Representative door opening/closing detection mechanisms 131 of this type are known from patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the above-mentioned patent document, it is proposed that the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 incorporates three types of switches: a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch, and that these switches are linked to the opening and closing of the door to detect opening and closing with a time lag.

In addition, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147 proposes using a first interlock switch and a second interlock switch to open and close the power supply to the inverter circuit, and also proposes providing a monitor switch to turn off the fuse inserted in the power supply circuit when the first interlock switch experiences a short circuit failure.

Figures 12 and 13 show the main parts of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 used in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch, and 132B is a door switch. A monitor switch 133 (not shown) is also provided to cut off the power supply to the inverter circuit 121A mounted on the inverter circuit board 121 if either or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality.

The latch switch 132A is pressed by a protruding pin 134 fixed to the door 114 side, and the built-in contacts are opened and closed. The door switch 132B is pressed by a protruding pin 135 fixed to the door 114 side, and the built-in contacts are opened and closed.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 136A denotes an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring (not shown) so that it always returns to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B denotes a link rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, 137 is a support plate to which the latch switch 132A, door switch 132B, monitor switch 133 (not shown), interlocking rods 136A, 136B, etc. are attached together. This support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with multiple screws. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 is configured around the various switches thus mounted on the support plate 137.

If there is variation in the mounting position of the latch switch 132A or the door switch 132B during the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing at which each switch is operated may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, a closure detection unit 139 (see FIG. 30) for the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137, and the entire support plate 137 is made removable. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with multiple screws. During manufacturing or after-sales service, the operation of the closure detection unit 139 can be checked, adjusted, replaced, etc.

In Figures 12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper part of the case A150 that houses the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower middle parts of the case A150.

The communication port 138A, as shown in FIG. 14, guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 141 described below.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 142 described below, and is used to cool the infrared temperature sensor 160 described below.

The temperature sensor 160 is mainly composed of a hollow sensor case (not shown), a sensor board (not shown) housed inside the sensor case, one or more infrared detection elements (not shown) mounted on the surface of the sensor board, and a lens (not shown) attached and fixed to the sensor case facing the infrared detection elements.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at multiple locations in the heating chamber 113 to enable temperature detection over a wide range, or the temperature sensor 160 may not be fixed in direction but may be automatically swung within a certain angle range to detect temperatures over a wide angle.

In FIG. 14, 161 is a detection window through which the temperature sensor 160 faces, and a gap may be formed between the outer circumferential surface of the temperature sensor 160 to allow cooling air to pass through. In the first embodiment, a gap of about several mm is formed.

In Figures 14 and 15, 162 is a cooking dish made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. This cooking dish 162 is formed with external dimensions that allow it to be inserted and removed from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 14, HV is the effective height dimension from the top surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the top surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the recess 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113.

In this embodiment 1, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is just one example, and the present disclosure is not limited to this dimensional configuration.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113. The heating chamber 113 is formed with this inner width dimension up to the front opening 113A, so it can also be said to be the opening dimension that determines whether the food to be cooked or cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. This inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In Figure 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113. Like the width dimension WH (see Figure 14), this dimension determines whether the food to be cooked, the cooking dish 162, and cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is approximately 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 includes a heater 163 .
The heater 163 is an electric radiation type heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and is, for example, a sheath heater, or a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire support plate made of thin mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two heaters, an upper heater 163 A and a lower heater 163 B. The power supply to these two heaters 163 A and 163 B is controlled independently of each other.
Reference numeral 163A denotes an upper heater fixed in close contact with or adjacent to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and reference numeral 163B denotes a lower heater fixed in close contact with or adjacent to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113.

The upper heater 163A can select multiple levels of heat power within a range from a maximum heat power of 1000 W to a minimum heat power of 50 W. The lower heater can also select multiple levels of heat power within a range from a maximum heat power of 1000 W to a minimum heat power of 50 W.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 166R denotes a right-side partition plate that is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R between itself and the right-side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is made of a thin metal plate.
Reference numeral 166L denotes a left partition plate that is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5L between itself and the left wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is made of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (heat radiation) from the heating chamber 113.

An upper heat shield plate 167 covers the entire upper part of the upper heater 163A and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is an enclosed space so that there is no air circulation with the outside. The peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed in intimate contact with the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, with the upper edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L sandwiched therebetween.

168 is a lower heat shield plate having a vertical cross-sectional shape that is vertically symmetrical to the upper heat shield plate 167. This lower heat shield plate covers the entire lower part of the lower heater 163B and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield 168 and the lower heater 163B, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap is an enclosed space so that air does not circulate with the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield 168 is fixed in intimate contact with the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113, with the lower edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L sandwiched between them.

169 is an upper case that is placed on the periphery of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper part of the upper heat shield plate 167. 170 is a lower case that is placed on the periphery of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower part of the lower heat shield plate 168.

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have a vertically symmetrical cross-sectional shape, and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap GP8 is an enclosed space so that there is no air circulation between it and the outside.

GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield 168, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap GP9 is also an enclosed space so that no air can circulate.

A sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175A (not shown) is placed in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175B (not shown) is placed in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175C (not shown) is placed in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175D (not shown) is placed in GP9. The insulating performance is further improved if each of these insulating materials 175A to 175D is made in a form of multiple layers stacked on top of each other rather than a single layer structure. The planar size (length and width dimensions) of each of the insulating materials 175A to 175D is at least larger than the installation range of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B, respectively.

In FIG. 14, 171 is a partition plate that defines a passage 172 through which the cooling air RF5 flows above the upper case 169. A communication port 173 is opened at the top of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171, and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to this communication port 173.

In FIG. 15, 174 is a communication port formed in the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the inlet of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to this communication port 174. 102E is the terminal portion that is the final outlet for the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 has two independent internal passages 102A, 102B at the top and bottom, of which the cooling air RF5 flows through the upper internal passage 102A after cooling the inverter circuit board 121.
Further, cooling air RF6 which has been introduced into the heating chamber 113 and has been heated flows through the other internal passage 102B.

As will be explained in detail in Figure 32, the exhaust duct 102 is the part where the internal passage (internal route) 102A that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and the internal passage (internal route) 102B that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 join together.

The wind speed of the cooling air RF5 increases due to the exhaust port of the cooling air RF5 having a narrow opening area of the air passage. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 near the exhaust port. Due to this action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, both of the two cooling air currents RF5 and RF6 are efficiently exhausted to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 from the exhaust port 20. Note that instead of adopting such an induction structure, a method in which the cooling air currents are joined at an upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large power supply port formed on the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes this power supply port 180 from the outside, and is formed in a plate shape from heat-resistant plastic or heat-resistant glass that is microwave-transmitting. Cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the rear wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire rear side of the cover 181. The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG. 15.

In FIG. 15, 123 is a waveguide connected to the rear side of the cover 181. The motor 126 for driving the antenna is fixed to the rear side of the waveguide 123 through a heat-resistant sealant 184.

126A is the rotating shaft of the antenna drive motor 126, and is installed horizontally facing the front-to-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end (front end) of the rotating shaft 126A. The rotating shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, but only a certain area from the antenna 125 side may be made of metal, and the area from there to the antenna drive motor 126 may be made of a material with high heat resistance and insulation, such as plastic or ceramic.

In FIG. 15, 185 is a radio wave sealing chamber formed with a predetermined dimension around the rotating shaft 126A. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. For more effective microwave leakage prevention, a radio wave absorber (not shown) may be placed closer to the antenna drive motor 126 than the choke structure to prevent microwave leakage from around the rotating shaft 126A. Note that the choke structure in a microwave heating device is described in Japanese patent documents such as JP 2011-174669 A, JP 2010-255978 A, and JP 63-172828 A (combined use of a quarter-wave choke chamber and a radio wave absorber), so a detailed description will be omitted.

In Figure 15, LA indicates the dimension from the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the very end of the antenna drive motor 126. Hereinafter, this dimension will be referred to as the "protruding dimension." It is desirable to reduce this protruding dimension LA, but in reality, as mentioned above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also necessary, and there is a limit to how small the external dimensions of the antenna drive motor 126 can be reduced. This protruding dimension LA is 70 mm.

15, GP10 is the gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101, and is 69 mm at the upper end of the motor 126, while the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is about 53 mm. It is dimensionally impossible to place the case C154 in this gap GP10. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the case C154 is positioned shifted to the right from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126.
This makes it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in the narrow space behind the heating chamber 113 .

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of the door 114 will be described.
In Fig. 15, reference numeral 190 denotes a metal or plastic frame constituting the outer shell of the door 114, and is formed in a picture frame shape when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 192 denotes an inner frame formed from a metal plate. An opening that serves as an observation window 192W is formed in the center of the inner frame 192.

191 is a cover whose outer periphery is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is made of transparent heat-resistant plastic or glass so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen through.

193 is an inner seal frame with numerous small holes in the area corresponding to the observation window 192W, the size of which does not allow microwaves to pass through. This inner seal frame is entirely formed by pressing a thin metal plate, and a choke chamber 194 with an entrance (slit) on the heating chamber 113 side is formed on the outer periphery.

195 is a seal plate made of a thin metal plate. The outer peripheral edge of this seal plate 195 is bent continuously toward the inner seal frame 193 as shown in FIG. 15. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge of this seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193.

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer periphery of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. Therefore, microwaves supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 do not leak out from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113.

196 is a transparent seal plate provided on the inside of the portion of the inner frame 192 that corresponds to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. 197 is a metal upper shielding plate that runs along the top surface of the door 114 and has a width dimension at least equal to the width of the door 114. This upper shielding plate 197 is provided in a eaves-like shape close to the top surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with fasteners such as metal screws so that it is electrically connected to the lower case 101.

The door 114 has its lower portion supported by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) on the lower case 101, so that the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by pulling the handle 115 toward oneself.
There is a concern that in the initial stage of such opening, a gap may momentarily form at the overlapping portion between door 114 and lower case 101, causing a portion of the microwaves to leak out. However, in this embodiment 1, the upper shielding plate 197 can suppress such unwanted leakage of microwaves above door 114.

As explained in FIG. 5, it is recommended that the height dimension C1 of the front slanting portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 be 40 mm or less. In view of this, in FIGS. 16 and 17, H10 is the height dimension from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 to the underside of the flange 16A. In this embodiment 1, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, the height dimension C1 of the front downward section 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), so when installed on the kitchen furniture 2, the upper case 16 does not protrude below the front downward section 2F. This makes the space below the upper case 16 larger than before, which is also advantageous when installing the lower case 101, as described below.

17, reference numeral 201 denotes an inlet formed in the front part of the right side wall of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a number of through holes having a diameter such that microwaves do not leak. The reason for providing this inlet 201 in the front part of the right side wall of the heating chamber 113 is to supply a part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inside of the door 114 and to suppress fogging of the observation window 192W of the door 114.
The cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the inlet 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the inlet 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and at the temperature sensor 160, a portion of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113, so the amount of cooling air RF6 that reaches the inlet 201 is small. However, the purpose of introducing air from this inlet 201 is to "prevent fogging" of the seal plate 196 on the inside of the door 114, and a small amount of air does not pose any problems. It is not necessary to supply air from a narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160.

(Control Means of Lower Unit 200)
Next, with reference again to the block diagram shown in FIG. 30, the various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described in detail.
In Figure 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna drive motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128, 129, and controls the start and stop of their operation, their operating conditions, etc.

The power supply circuit of this microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and is a dedicated circuit for the microwave heating device 120. Note that power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted on a power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electrical components (diodes, etc.) that convert AC power to DC are mounted on this power supply circuit board 127 and are housed in a sealed state in case C154.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates in response to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120, and has the function of sending a command signal to the inverter circuit 121A to reduce the output of the magnetron 122.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is equipped with a temperature sensor TS1 that detects the temperature of the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122. If the temperature of the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than a specified value even after microwave cooking is completed, a command signal is sent to the fourth cooling fan 129 to continue operating the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops. Note that the cooling fan drive circuits for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not shown in FIG. 30.

139 is a closure detection unit for the door 114. This closure detection unit 139 electrically detects the open/closed state of any one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B, and the monitor switch 133 by the current or open/close signal flowing through each circuit. In other words, it is a detection unit that corresponds to the operation of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 described above.

The circuit board that constitutes this closure detection unit 139 is attached to the support plate 137, so it can be inspected by removing the support plate 137 or by measuring it while it is installed to check whether it is functioning properly (see Figure 12).

158 is a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, and is composed of the temperature sensor 160 and a circuit (not shown) that analyzes the measurement signal from this temperature sensor and converts it into temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start and stop of their operation, as well as their operating conditions (heating power, i.e., amount of heat generated). The control circuit for this heating chamber control unit 159 is implemented on the power supply circuit board 127 (see Figure 13).

When the heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates in response to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and has the function of transmitting a command signal to reduce the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163. Note that in order to reduce the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the current flow rate per unit time is changed to change the effective heating power.

(Drive circuit for induction heating source 9)
Next, a description will be given of the configuration of the drive circuits for the IH coils 17L and 17R of the cooking device 1. For the sake of simplicity, a description will be given of an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R in FIG.

In the cooking appliance 1, high-frequency power is supplied to each of the IH coils 17L and 17R by the drive circuit 74, whereby an induction heating operation is performed.
Each IH coil is provided with a drive circuit 74. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the drive circuit 74 for the right IH coil 17R. The drive circuit for the left IH coil 17L may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonant capacitor 76, an input current detection unit 77a, and an output current detection unit 77b.
The current detection data from the input current detection unit 77 a and the output current detection unit 77 b are sent to the IH control unit 90 .

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power source 99 to the DC power source circuit 22, i.e., the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, i.e., the input current value, to the IH control unit 90. 99 is a commercial AC power source.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, and converts the AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, which is then output to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge type inverter in which IGBTs 79a and 79b serving as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d serving as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into AC power with a high frequency of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high frequency power, and supplies it to a resonant circuit consisting of the IH coil 17R and the resonant capacitor .

The resonant circuit including the resonant capacitor 76 has a resonant frequency that corresponds to the inductance of the IH coil 17R and the capacitance of the resonant capacitor 76, etc.

By configuring it in this way, a high-frequency current of several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17R, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current inductively heats the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R.

IGBTs 79a and 79b are made of, for example, silicon-based semiconductors, but may also be made of wide band gap semiconductors such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based materials.

The power control switching element 83 described with reference to FIG. 12 corresponds to the IGBTs 79a and 79b in FIG.
By using a wide band gap semiconductor for this IGBT, the current loss as a switching element can be reduced. Also, even if the switching frequency, i.e., the drive frequency, is set to a high frequency, i.e., even if switching is performed at high speed, heat dissipation is improved. Therefore, the heat dissipation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be made small, and the drive unit can be made small and inexpensive.

The output current detection unit 77b is connected to a resonant circuit consisting of the IH coil 17R and a resonant capacitor 76. The output current detection unit 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, i.e., the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH control unit 90. Although a half-bridge type inverter has been described in this configuration, the circuit that drives the IH coil 17R may also be a full-bridge type inverter. Also, although the circuit described in FIG. 33 is a current resonant type, a voltage resonant type may also be adopted.

As explained in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for wirelessly communicating with the home gateway 411, which comprehensively manages the power usage and operation information of the home appliances 400 in the home, and can transmit and receive wireless signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control device MC via a communication wiring. However, the longer the wiring, the more susceptible it is to noise. Therefore, it is desirable to place the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC close to each other and to shorten the wiring connecting the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of the noise mentioned above, in this embodiment 1, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation unit 40. Specifically, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41. Also, the integrated control device MC is installed in the center of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(Cooling air duct)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
In FIG. 12, the inside of the main body case HC of the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, and is partitioned by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16 into two spaces: an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall.
In other words, the bottom surface 16S functions as a "partition wall" and divides the inside of the main case HC into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.

The upper air passage AH, which guides cooling air to the IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils, introduces outside air from outside the lower case 101 through the ventilation hole 64 that penetrates the partition wall 16S.

Meanwhile, a lower air passage UH that guides cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. The heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is disposed in the lower air passage UH. This heat dissipation section 122H is cooled by air introduced from a second air intake 152B formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. The inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by air introduced from a second air intake 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101.

The cooling air that flows through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air that flows through the lower air passage UH do not merge along the way. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is exhausted into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52, and is released to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 through the exhaust port 20.

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 that extends vertically within the same gap GP1, and is finally released to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 through the exhaust port 20.

Next, the entire path of the cooling air passage will be described with reference to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 32, air outside the cooking appliance 1 (outside air) passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooking appliance 1 via two paths.

First path: A path that runs from the vent hole 164 formed on the left side surface of the lower case 101, through the vent hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, through the first cooling fan 60 to cool the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R, and to the exhaust port 20. In Fig. 32, this is indicated as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: Outside air is drawn in through two intake ports 152F, 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. One of the outside air flows through the third cooling fan 128 to cool the inverter circuit board 121. The other outside air flows through the fourth cooling fan 129 to cool the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122. Thus, although there are two second paths, they ultimately enter the common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is indicated as the "lower air duct" UH.

As described above, in this embodiment 1, the interior of the main body case HC is partitioned by the bottom surface (partition wall) 16S of the metal upper case 16 into two spaces: an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall 16S, and each space is provided with independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and each air passage is provided with its own dedicated cooling fan 60, 128, 129.
The upper unit 100 also includes a second cooling fan 61 , which cooperates with the first cooling fan 60 to cool the interior of the upper unit 100 .

(Central control panel control menu and cooking menu)
Next, the selectable control menu displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the central operation unit 40M will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the “control menu” of the “single cooking mode” that can be selected by the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R using the induction heating source 9 includes, for example, boiling water, boiling, frying (automatic cooking), etc., as shown in FIG. 38.
However, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (excluding the case of the linked cooking mode described later) as shown in Fig. 34. These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as the "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. The commands for executing these control menu groups are called "control menu programs" and are stored in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final dish obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or by the names of ingredients. In other words, the "control menu" mentioned here does not allow the direct selection of the food to be cooked.

The "control menus" in the "single cooking mode" and "combined cooking mode" selected by the central operation unit 40M can be considered to be broadly categorized based on the type, method, and conditions of heating required to complete the cooking process, and therefore the names of the control menus are conceptual and general, such as "warming" and "oven (cooking)."

The control menu of the "combined cooking mode" KM2 selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a control menu called the "range grill control menu" or "RG control menu" that uses the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a control menu prepared for each food to be cooked (e.g., "hamburger steak") targeted by the "linked cooking mode" KM3 described below.

The RG control menu and the "linked cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later, are fundamentally different. The RG control menu and the combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later, are also different. These will be explained in more detail later.

The various control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 34. Note that what is shown in FIG. 34 includes a control menu for the "single cooking mode" that uses the microwave heating source 189, but does not include a control menu for the "linked control mode" KM3.

The "left display area" in FIG. 34 refers to the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display section 30.
The "central display area" also refers to the second area 30M.
The "right display area" also refers to the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the control menu "Warm" in the left display area of FIG. 34 is always displayed first in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. This is because the RG control menu "Warm" is set as the default.

As is clear from the "left display area" of FIG. 34, in addition to "warm," there are a total of 11 RG control menus, including "manual microwave," "pre-boil leafy vegetables," "RG cooking," "grill," and "oven." However, the "center heater" listed at the bottom of the "left display area" of FIG. 34 is not supported by the upper unit 100, and is therefore not actually displayed.

The "RG control menu" is a general term for a control pattern that uses both microwave heating (range) and oven (heating chamber 113) heating (combined cooking mode KM2), and a control pattern that uses either microwave heating (range) or oven heating (single cooking mode KM1). In other words, it exceptionally includes a control pattern for the "single cooking mode KM1" that uses either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 alone.

The "center heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating section (center induction heating section) is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL in the upper unit 100, so strictly speaking it is neither a "range" nor a "grill."

"RG" is an abbreviation for range grill. Here, "range" refers to cooking using microwave heating source 189. "Grill" refers to cooking using oven heating source 188. In other words, range grill refers to a (heating) control pattern that uses microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188.

A total of 10 types are displayed in the first area of Figure 34, such as "warm" and "grill," but "combined cooking," which uses two or more heat sources, includes "RG cooking" and "RG manual."
In addition, "warming" is strictly speaking a control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 and not of the combined cooking mode KM2 because it uses only the microwave heating source 9. Furthermore, "warming" does not correspond to a cooking menu of the combined cooking mode KM3.

The contents shown in the "Central Display Area" in FIG. 34 indicate the contents displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings for the "Central Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Central Display Area."

The contents written in the "Right Display Area" in Figure 34 indicate the contents displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Right Display Area". A blank area means that nothing is displayed.

The database of the RG control menu is created according to the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP described below, and displays guidance information 30P that serves as reference for transitioning to the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
(2) When the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the composite cooking mode (RG control menu group) is selected, and the first area 30L displays one of the control menus, "Warm," as a default display, the second area 30M displays "80°C" indicating the temperature condition, and the third area 30R displays no control condition. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third area 30R displays the aforementioned guide information 30P, which is useful for cooking with heat. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 and the like.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, the "control conditions" (temperature, heat, time, etc.) corresponding to one RG control menu from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. 34 are simultaneously displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "composite cooking mode KM2", such as "RG cooking", then when the user operates the input key 43MS which commands the start of the heating operation, the mode transitions to the "composite cooking mode KM2" using both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the heating operation is started.
The collaborative cooking mode KM3 will be described later.

The specific contents of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, detailed data such as control conditions and additional information, and display programs, etc. are stored in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.
The main RG control menus will be outlined below.

(1) Warm: This is one of the "control menus for single cooking mode KM1" that uses the microwave heating source 189 to heat food. This "warm" mode is also suitable for reheating food. The default setting is "80°C," so microwave irradiation automatically stops when the food is heated to 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before heating begins.
As shown in Fig. 34, the temperature can be set in 5°C increments in the range of 0°C to 90°C. For heating frozen foods, the temperature can be set in 2°C increments in the range of -10 to 0°C. The microwave heating output is fixed at 500W.

(2) Manual Range: This refers to heating food using the microwave heating source 189, and is done by setting the heating time. The microwave heating output can also be selected from three levels: 500 W, 200 W, and 100 W. The default heating time is also one minute, but at 500 W output, it can be set between 10 seconds and 15 minutes.
This "manual range" is also one type of "control menu for the single cooking mode KM1." In other words, the RG control menu shown in Fig. 25 also includes the control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 of the microwave heating source 189.

(3) Parboiling leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food, particularly vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach, Chinese cabbage, and other leafy vegetables, using the microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "Standard" is displayed in the second area as the default display. The non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "parboiling leafy vegetables" is also one type of "single (heating) control menu."

(4) Parboiling of root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food using the microwave heating source 189, particularly for boiling root vegetables such as potatoes, whose roots and rhizomes are edible. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "Standard" is displayed in the second area as a default display. Note that the heat value is determined in advance by the cooking appliance 1, so when adjusting the heat, it is necessary to change (select) the "Standard" default display in the second area to "Weak" or "Strong", etc.
This "pre-boiling of leafy vegetables" is also a type of "single (heat) controlled menu."

(5) Meat thawing: This control menu is suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
This is one of the "control menus for single cooking mode KM1" for heating food using a microwave heating source 189.
(6) RG cooking: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is a combination of microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, this is one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2".
There are three types of control patterns: one in which microwave heating is performed first, and then the food is heated to a certain extent, and then the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B performs heating, one in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and one in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. These control patterns belong to the combined cooking mode KM2.
The heating power value (watts) during microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select the heating intensity by looking at the display in the second area 30M and selecting one of "weak", "strong", etc.

(7) RG Re-cooking: This is suitable for re-heating already-cooked food using the heating chamber 113. This is also one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2".
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are used in combination.
(8) RG manual: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and combines microwave heating and oven heating to cook. There are three types of this mode: microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B heats the food; the reverse order is used for heating; and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. This is also one of the control menus for the pure "combined cooking mode KM2."

(9) Grill: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. As mentioned above, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not managed, and there is no control to detect a rise in food temperature and stop the heating operation. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control unit 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. A typical applicable cooking is grilled fish. Incidentally, the rated heating power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated heating power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. This is one type of control menu for the "single cooking mode KM1".

(10) Oven: Heats food using heating chamber 113, and uses one or both of upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B as a heat source. The temperature of heating chamber 113 is measured by heating chamber control unit 159, and power supply control is performed by heating chamber control unit 159 so that the temperature reaches a set target temperature.
As shown in Fig. 25, the default temperature is 180°C, and the user can change this target temperature if necessary. As explained in the "Grill" section, the rated heating power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated heating power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supply rate to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, thereby controlling the heat generation amount of these two heaters 163A and 163B. This is one of the control menus of the "single cooking mode KM1".

Figure 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

Data indicating the names of individual control menus (e.g., "warm," "manual microwave," etc.) among the total of 10 RG control menus that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 is stored in the first layer of the memory device MM.

Data indicating the "control conditions" (e.g., "microwave output value", "power application time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 is stored in the second layer of the memory device MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (e.g., "grill cooking heating time") that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30, and reference information 30P, 30P1 are stored in the third layer of the memory device MM.

(Cooperative cooking mode)
Next, the "combined cooking mode KM3" will be described with reference to Figures 35 and 36.
As shown in Figures 35 and 36, inside the memory device MM, data for the first specific screen 30SP that is displayed when the input key 43MC is operated, and control data and an operation program for the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" that is read out when the input key 43M1 is subsequently operated (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "cooperative operation program") are stored in a memory area separate from the RG control menu.

The data for "Coordinated cooking mode KM3" and the "Coordinated operation program" include information identifying the multiple heating sources to be used to prepare each individual food item (e.g., hamburger steak), information on various control conditions (heat, standard heating temperature, etc.) and control parameters, and information on the cooking process including the order (sequence) of the heating sources to be operated. In other words, it is necessary for the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the internal processing circuits and processors that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

When one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is specified, the (multiple) heating sources that can be used and the order in which they will operate are automatically determined. For example, for "hamburger steak," which is one of the cooking menus that can be cooked in the cooperative control mode KM3, there is no need to first select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL. First, the first specified screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and the user can then move to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by looking at the display and selecting, for example, the right heating unit 17HR.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with a content indicating in advance that the left heating unit 17HL is to be used. The user can set in advance to use the right heating unit 17HR without using the left heating unit 17HL. However, there are cases where such a setting is not possible.
In addition, in the case where the right heating section 17HR is used in cooking step 1 and the subsequent cooking step 2 involves heating in the heating chamber 113 using the oven heating source 188, information on the series of cooking steps is stored in the memory device MM.

Additional information 331 that serves as a reference for transitioning to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 includes, for example, information on the cooking process described below, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), guidance information and instruction information that prompts the user to input information to proceed to the next cooking process, etc., which are stored in correspondence with each cooking menu of each collaborative cooking mode (e.g., "hamburger steak", "fried chicken")

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, the process up to raising the set (target) temperature is called the "preheating process", and the process of actually heating the food to be cooked after the set temperature is reached and contributing to cooking is called "cooking process 1" or "cooking process 2".
For example, in induction heating, the start of the "cooking process" occurs when the user places the food to be cooked on the food N, which has already been heated to the desired temperature after the preheating process, and actually begins heating.

(Information on how to use RG control menus, etc.)
Next, the use of the RG (range grill) control menu explained in FIG. 34 and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a classification table of the RG control menu and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9.
The names of the control menus shown in category 3 in FIG. 37 are also displayed in the first area 30L, as shown in part in FIG. 34, and are used by the user to select a control menu.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of Figure 37, information indicating the main points of each control menu is also stored as data in the first or second layer of the memory device MM, as explained in Figures 35 and 36.

Therefore, when operating input key 43M1, the user can optionally display information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 of FIG. 37.

When the user selects an RG control menu, the integrated control device MC can automatically display the information shown in category 2 on the integrated display unit 30 to assist the user in input operations. For example, when the user presses the input key 43M1 once and a predefined reference time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 in FIG. 37 is displayed in any of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above. Alternatively, the voice synthesis device 95 can notify the user by voice. For example, for "warm up," the information is given as "ideal for warming rice or lunch boxes to your desired temperature."

As shown in categories 1 to 4 in FIG. 37, information that can be used to guide the user when selecting the induction heating source 9 is stored in the memory device MM. Therefore, in step ST4 shown in FIG. 38, the information in category 2 in FIG. 37 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 at an appropriate timing to assist the user in selecting the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL.

(Operation of cooking device)
Next, an outline of the operation of the cooking device 1 having the above configuration will be described mainly with reference to Figs.

Figure 38 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation before cooking begins in the cooking appliance 1. Figure 39 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation during induction cooking in the cooking appliance 1. Figure 40 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation when microwave heating is performed during induction cooking in the cooking appliance 1. Figure 41 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 42 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 43 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 44 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking appliance 1 and the type of cooking.

Referring to Figure 38 .
A basic operation program from power-on to cooking preparation start is stored in a memory device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in type heating cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so the user turns on the power by pressing the operation button 98 (see Figures 20 and 30) of the main power switch 97 (step ST1 in Figure 38).

A specific low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power conversion unit 92 in the power circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is started. The integrated control device MC starts diagnosing itself for any abnormalities using its own control program.

Then, check for abnormalities in the IH control unit 90, which centrally controls the induction heating source 9, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130.

A total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are connected to the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature near the integrated display unit 30, etc., and the temperatures detected by these temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93. This allows the IH control unit 90 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (ST2).

The heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 can also obtain the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality.

In step ST2, it says "send start-up information to the outside", which means that the wireless communication unit 49 notifies the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT that the cooking appliance 1 will start operating. This will be explained later.

The IH control unit 90 collects temperature information from the main components built into the upper unit 100, and performs abnormal heating determination processing as abnormality monitoring control before cooking begins. For example, if the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistance temperature (e.g., 70°C) of electronic elements such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display unit 30, the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. It then notifies the integrated control device MC of the abnormality and performs processing such as displaying or notifying that operation cannot be started. This processing may also be performed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. The integrated display unit 30 is then started and displays the message "Since there is no abnormality, cooking can be started" (ST3). The display screen at this initial stage will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice the same content as that displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information useful for health management, such as control menus and recipe information, within the range previously set by the user. For example, information that the user of the cooking appliance 1 previously sent to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using an information communication terminal device 418 or the like can also be acquired when the integrated display unit 30 is started.

When the cooking appliance 1 acquires any information, it is advisable to notify the user by turning on a dedicated warning information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation unit 40 of the upper unit 100.

Inventory information for the refrigerator 401 is not acquired at this point. However, as shown in Figures 103 and 104, an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent to the home gateway 411 at this point.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide a notification and voice guidance to prompt the user to select a heating method (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has not been operated and individual heating cooking has been selected using the individual operation unit, the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R (STC).

If neither input key 43M1 nor input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace period (e.g., 30 seconds), it is determined that neither the linked cooking mode nor the combined cooking mode has been selected. If the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R immediately after step ST4 or within the grace period, it is determined that only the heating source of the upper unit 100, i.e., the IH coils 17L and 17R, has been selected ("Yes" in step ST6).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MC is operated in step STC, the process proceeds to step STR1 of the coordinated cooking mode. Step STR1 of the coordinated cooking mode will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 54 to 102, etc.

If step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, proceed to the next step ST10. The subsequent induction heating control steps will be explained later with reference to Figure 39.

On the other hand, if a heating source for the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to step ST8, which is a menu selection step for the two heating sources provided in the lower unit 200. Note that this step ST5 is performed when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

In step ST8, as shown in FIG. 38, three types of control menus (ST9A to ST9D) are displayed in a fixed order on the integrated display unit 30. These three types of control menus are the total of 10 control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L.

The control menu displayed at step ST8 in FIG. 38 is based on the assumption that the heat source of lower unit 200 is to be used, and the following three types of control menu are displayed.
(1) A cooking menu that uses at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (ST9A). This corresponds to "grill" or "oven" in the control menu shown in FIG.
(2) In addition to the above (1), a control menu (ST9B) using the microwave heating device 120 in combination. This corresponds to the "range grill" heating (cooking) in the control menus shown in Figs. 34 and 37.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) using only the microwave heating device 120. This corresponds to "manual range,""pre-boil leafy vegetables,""warm," and the like in the control menu shown in FIG.
In this case, the "combined cooking mode KM3" is not displayed.

If you find midway through that cooperative cooking mode KM3 is better, you can proceed to step STR1 in FIG. 67 by operating the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. In other words, you can proceed to cooperative cooking mode KM3.

Figure 39 shows the operational steps of the integrated control device MC after the step (ST11) in which the induction heating control menu is selected.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following, an example in which the right heating unit 17HR is used will be described.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control unit 90 determines that the user has commanded a heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not a heated object N (such as a metal pot or frying pan) is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether the bottom area of the heated object is larger than a predetermined value, and this estimation result is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, which determines whether to perform heating treatment suitable for a standard diameter pot or a large diameter pot (step MS1).
If the pot is compliant but has a large diameter, or is not suitable for heating, it will be treated differently from a standard pot.

Upon receiving a command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays a message on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 prompting the user to select the "IH control menu" for the desired cooking (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the "IH control menu", heat level, cooking time, etc., on the right operation unit 40R (MS3), full-scale induction heating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR (MS4).
The "IH control menu" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 includes seven options: "fast heating,""frying,""boilingwater,""preheating,""cookingrice,""boiling," and "boiling water + keeping warm."
However, in order to simplify operability, the above-mentioned "function setting" may be set so that some or all of the above seven IH control menus cannot be selected.

When the user selects one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to that IH control menu are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the amount of current (heat) and current duration of the IH coil 17R are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display is displayed on the display unit prompting the user to set the desired heat, current duration, etc. (MS5). Note that the operating program for the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC, not in the IH control unit 90.

Unless the user touches the input key 43R1 again to stop use within a certain time (for example, 15 or 30 seconds) after the above display is displayed, the IH control unit 90 will drive the inverter circuit 81R of the induction heating circuit 94R and start induction heating after the certain time has elapsed (MS6). Note that the input function of the input key 43R1 changes every time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start and stop of heating operation.

The "large diameter pot" is basically the same as steps MS1 to MS7 above, but some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 of Figure 39 cannot be selected as the IH control menu. The "high speed heating menu" can only heat a "normal pot" or a "large diameter pot" using the IH coil 17L on the left. In this embodiment 1, a small pot refers to one with a bottom diameter of less than 10 cm, which is detected as unsuitable for induction heating and cannot be induction heated.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources are used simultaneously, such as induction heating and microwave heating, will be described with reference to Figures 40 and 41. Note that the example described in Figures 40 and 41 is not for the "integrated cooking mode KM3" described above.

The example shown in Fig. 40 is a case where a user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction heating cooking is being performed previously using the upper unit 100. Even if oven cooking, grill cooking, or the like is performed using both or either one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during induction heating cooking, basic total power control (for the entire cooking appliance 1) as described in Fig. 40 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.
In this case, the combined cooking mode KM2 must be selected using the central operation unit 40M.

When a user wishes to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200, he or she must first turn on the main power switch 97 and select the heating source for the lower unit 200 using the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40.
However, a simple way to do this is to simply open the door 114. In other words, in this embodiment 1, if the upper unit 100 is operating (if the main power switch 97 is ON), cooking can be started directly by the lower unit 200. Therefore, there is no need to turn on the main power switch 97 as in the upper unit 100.

When the door 114 is opened, as explained in the main part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, there is a latch switch 132A and a door switch 132B that are opened and closed depending on whether the door 114 is opened or closed. Therefore, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC (through the function of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131) can detect the opening of both or either of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B.

In FIG. 40, when a signal is received indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened (step S1) as described above, the integrated control device MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guidance may be, for example, "To start heating, select microwave heating and press the start button."

The default setting for microwave heating is a target temperature of 80°C, so even if you close the door 114 and start heating, it will automatically stop when it detects that the temperature of the food being cooked has reached 80°C. If you want to change the temperature from 80°C (to 75°C, for example), you can change the temperature conditions and then press the input key 43MS (see Figure 21).

When the user selects, for example, "Microwave manual" from the composite cooking menu with input key 43M1 and then issues the command "Start heating" with input key 43MS on central operation unit 40M, the rated power consumption value determined by magnetron 122 is used along with the power consumption of third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan 129, etc., and the integrated control device MC determines in step S3 whether the total power regulation value is exceeded.

For example, the integrated control device MC holds data on the heat value of induction heating cooking that has already started and the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, so it can calculate the total power consumption of the upper unit 100 and the microwave heating device 120. Note that the integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption using power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81, etc., when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to either reduce the output of the operating IH coil 17R or reduce the heat of the microwave heating. In step S3, the priority of the induction heating cooking at that time is determined from the induction heating control menu and the cooking process. For example, if rice cooking (particularly the "boiling process") is being performed in the upper unit 100, the rice cooking (boiling process) is given priority, and the heat of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In addition, when deep frying is being performed in the upper unit 100, the heat is automatically increased in response to the addition of ingredients, etc., so that the temperature of the edible oil does not drop excessively. Therefore, even in such a case, the heat of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that induction heating has priority, then in order to reduce the power consumption of microwave heating, if the rated microwave output is assumed to be 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced to, for example, an output of 300 W. The user is then notified that such a restriction will be imposed. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start microwave heating at low heat (S7).
Since the microwave heating control unit 130 has a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, the microwave heating control unit 130 monitors whether the food has been heated and has reached the target temperature (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, a determination is made as to whether the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 has ended (S9). As long as the induction heating operation has not ended, steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, the microwave heating control unit 130 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12, where it is notified that microwave heating has ended.

On the other hand, if induction heating of the upper unit 100 has ended, the process proceeds to step S10, where a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130 to restore the heat power initially set by the user and continue microwave heating. Then, the temperature of the food being cooked continues to be monitored (S11).

When the target temperature is reached, the integrated control device MC receives a signal from the microwave heating control unit 130, proceeds to step S12, and reports that microwave heating has ended.

The example shown in Figure 40 is based on the assumption that the power priority between microwave cooking and induction heating cooking is determined based on the control menu (e.g., "deep frying") and cooking process (e.g., the "boiling process" of cooking rice) being executed during induction heating cooking, and thus the priority with induction heating at that time.

Therefore, if the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to induction heating, a warning message will be displayed, for example, on the integrated display unit 30 before an instruction to start microwave heating is given using the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. In addition, a warning message will also be issued from the voice synthesizer 95. Even if microwave heating is started after that, there may be cases where the heat value is forcibly lowered, as in the example above.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189 in the entire cooking device 1 can be set in the "Function Settings" described above. Once the power priority is set, the setting conditions are stored in the integrated control device MC and are carried over to the next cooking session and beyond, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off.

In the example shown in Figure 40, the temperature of the heated object is monitored, and microwave heating is terminated when the target temperature is reached. However, there is also a control method in which the microwave irradiation time is measured and cooking is terminated when a set time has elapsed, as will be explained next in Figure 41.

FIG. 41 shows an example of a control method in which cooking is completed based on the microwave irradiation time.
Since steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 40, the explanation will be omitted.

When microwave heating is started in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is reduced to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the extended time is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

During this process, if induction heating of the upper unit 100 ends, the required operation time (set time 2) is recalculated, taking into account the time elapsed since the start of heating (step S7).

When the set time 2 has elapsed, microwave heating is terminated and this is notified (S12). Note that temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 may also be used until the set time 2 has elapsed.

(Integrated control device and total power control)
Next, reference will be made to Figures 42 and 43.
42 and 43 are flow charts for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance 1. FIG.
The examples shown in these two figures are cases where a user first attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction heating cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100. Even in this case, the basic total power control (for the entire cooking appliance 1) as explained in Figure 40 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.

Unlike Figs. 40 and 41, Figs. 42 and 43 also show the transmission and reception of signals between the integrated control device MC and the microwave heating device 120, and the induction heating device consisting of IH coils 17L and 17R and an inverter circuit 81, etc.

In Figures 42 and 43, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, etc. When the main power switch 97 on the upper unit 100 is turned on, a start-up signal is sent to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the heating power and control menu of the IH coils 17L and 17R are determined on the input operation unit 40 (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 39), information indicating the contents is sent via the integrated control device MC (L2). In other words, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum heating power and operation time during induction heating from the integrated control device MC. Then, if there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 starts the heating operation using the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R.

We will explain the case where induction heating cooking is started in this way and microwave heating is also started. It is assumed that induction heating is started with the maximum heating power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, as described in FIG. 40, the latch switch 132A and/or the door switch 132B are opened, and the door open/close detection mechanism 131 (close detection unit 139), which monitors this, sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC (L3).

When the user inputs the heating power through the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply issues an instruction to "start heating" on the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start operation.

If there are no abnormalities on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, the microwave heating control unit 130 will send a "warning signal" to the integrated control device MC to start cooking (L4). For example, if the microwave output is 500 W and the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, the "warning signal" will include information to use 1000 W, as shown in Figure 42.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 uses the power consumption value known in advance, which reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc., in addition to the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122, to calculate the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed simultaneously, and determines whether this total value exceeds the total power regulation value (same as step S3 in Figures 40 and 41). The result is then transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As an alternative method, an upper limit for the total power consumption of the lower unit 200 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) can be determined (e.g., 2000 W), and a determination can be made as to whether the total power consumption limit will be exceeded when the lower unit 200 and upper unit 100 (induction heating source 9) are used simultaneously.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce the output of the operating IH coil 17R or reduce the heat of the microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated control device MC determines the priority of the induction heating cooking at that time from the induction heating control menu and the heating process.

In the example shown in Figure 42, microwave heating is set as the priority, so the power of microwave heating is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that microwave heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is instructed to control the IH coil 17R to lower the target heating power, temporarily reducing power consumption. The user is notified that such a restriction will be imposed. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.

Then, the IH control unit 90 commands the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low heat level (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side is completed, the IH control unit 90 determines that the power reduction has been completed from the current values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b. It then transmits a notification that the power reduction has been completed to the integrated control device MC (L6). In response to this transmission, the integrated control device MC transmits an authorization signal to the microwave heating device 120 to start the heating operation (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A has a current detection unit (not shown) similar to the input current detection unit 77a and output current detection unit 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, when microwave heating is completed, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines that the heating operation has ended from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal (L8). Microwave heating may also be performed for a certain period of time set by a timer, in which case the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the passage of that time and notifies that the heating operation has ended (L8).

After the microwave heating is completed, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the IH control unit 90 to return the heating power to the setting originally requested by the user (L9). Then, the heating power is increased to the initial target level to continue the induction heating (S10).

When the set cooking time or target temperature is reached, the IH control unit 90 ends induction heating and notifies the integrated control device MC that operation has ended (L10).

(Basic operation of induction heating cooking and cooling operation)
Next, basic operations of each part of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment when induction heating is performed will be described.

When the start of induction heating cooking is commanded through the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L, 94R corresponding to the specified heating unit, and drives the inverter circuits 81L, 81R of the IH coils 17L, 17R.

An operation command signal is sent from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62 .
Simultaneously with or slightly after the inverter circuits 81L and 81R start to drive, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start to operate.

The air blowing capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 does not have to be fixed.
For example, the air blowing capacity may be automatically changed between low and high operation depending on the temperature of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display unit 30.

Generally, when the cooling fan is changed from low to high operation, the fan noise increases, raising concerns that this may cause noise. Therefore, the temperatures detected by the two temperature sensors TS7, TS8 and the operating strengths of the cooling fans 60, 61 are determined in a correspondence table (data table) based on data from prior air blowing tests, etc., and this correspondence table is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. The IH control unit 90 may then change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as needed according to the data table.

The correspondence table (data table) that determines the operating strength of the cooling fans 60, 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is drawn in through the vent 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60. The cooling air RF1 is forced into the first air duct F1 from the air outlet 60A as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is drawn in through the vent 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61. The cooling air RF2 is forced into the second air duct F2 from the air outlet 61A as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24.

Here, we will explain one of the features of this embodiment 1. In particular, we will explain the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 with reference to Figures 24, 25, 27, and 28.

The first cooling fan 60 rotates the flat rotor blades 60T in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 60C advances to the air outlet 60A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27, and is blown out from the air outlet 60A in the direction of the inverter circuit board 80.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is not uniform across the entire area in the front-to-rear direction of the air outlet 60A. The cooling air swirling around the outermost periphery inside the fan case 60C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the center. This is shown diagrammatically in Figure 27 by three solid arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A travels in the direction of the air outlet line FL1, but due to the difference in speed between the rotation direction RD1 of the rotor blades 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself, as it approaches the heat sink 82, the cooling air gradually changes direction toward the rear, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 27.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is concentrated on the rear (back) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the two heat sinks 82 arranged in a front-to-back row. The cooling air then moves to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the rear surface of the partition wall 11. The dashed arrows in Figure 27 indicate the flow of the cooling air RF1 that flows around the heat dissipation fins 82FN.

The cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front, back, and top of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, so that the main components of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out of the air outlet 60A are not diffused to the surroundings, but are instead forced into the narrow space of the heat dissipation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82, which are located behind the partition wall 11.

In addition, since the first air passage F1 begins after passing the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is introduced into the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1, and is then transported in a straight line as the cooling air RF1 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, because there is no direct connection between the air outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70, and because there is a gap GP14 and a front cutout 70A, a portion of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out of the air outlet 60A turns rearward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows into an area with relatively low pressure. As a result, cooling air is also generated that flows in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L.

The flow of cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be explained with reference to Figures 25, 27, and 28.

The flat rotor 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 61C moves in the direction of the air outlet 61A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27. Then, the air is blown out from the air outlet 61A in the direction of the inverter board 80.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after it is blown out from the air outlet 61A is not uniform across the entire area in the front-to-rear direction of the air outlet 61A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost part of the fan case 61C moves at the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the center. This is indicated by three solid arrows in Figure 27.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A travels in the direction of the air outlet line FL2. However, due to the difference between the rotation direction RD2 of the rotor blades 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the speed of the cooling air 61FL itself, as it approaches the heat sink 82, the cooling air gradually changes direction toward the rear as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 27.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is concentrated on the front (front) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 arranged in two rows, front and rear. It then proceeds to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the front of the partition wall 11. The dashed arrow in Figure 27 shows the flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the heat dissipation fin 82FN.

A cover 70 is provided so as to surround the front, rear and upper sides of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a small gap therebetween.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is forced into the narrow space of the heat dissipation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 located forward of the partition wall 11 rather than diffusing to the surroundings.

In addition, since the first air passage F1 begins after passing the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is introduced into the inlet FI of the first air passage F1, and is then transported in a straight line as the cooling air RF2 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, because there is no direct connection between the air outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 and there is a gap (not shown) and a front cutout 70A, a portion of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out of the air outlet 61A leaks forward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows into an area with relatively low pressure. As a result, it flows as cooling air that branches off in the direction of the space directly below the front input operation unit 40, and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The vent hole 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the vent hole 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 60 are provided adjacent to each other on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but a large number of small hole groups may be provided and these small hole groups may be shared.

Diode 79c (see Figure 33) and other electrical components are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching elements 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Similarly, a power control switching element 83 is used for the other IH coil 17L.

These two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A flows to the right while cooling the various switches that receive input operations and are arranged on the input operation unit 40, the liquid crystal display screen, the display unit drive circuit 63, and other components.

As shown by the thick arrow in Figure 24, some of the cooling air RF1 changes direction upwards when it leaves the outlet FO of the cover 70, but due to the force of the cooling air RF2 joining it from the front, it is roughly divided into cooling air RF3 that turns around and travels to the left over the cover 70, and cooling air RF4 that travels in the direction of the filter circuit board 54.

The cooling air RF3 flows underneath the right-hand IH coil 17R, and then flows underneath the left-hand IH coil 17L. In the process, it cools the two IH coils 17R and 17L. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250°C to 300°C during induction heating operation. Therefore, as described above, cooling is performed using the two cooling airs RF1 and RF2 combined into cooling airs RF3 and RF4.

As explained in Figures 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R that has traveled to the right of the partition plate 14 travels rearward while cooling the filter circuit board 54, and is exhausted through the exhaust window 52B. 53R is an exhaust plate that has multiple through holes 53R1 formed therein.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L, 17R also changes direction and travels toward the exhaust window 52A, which serves as the final exhaust port, passes through a number of through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and is exhausted from the exhaust window 52A.
As a result, the cooling airflows RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. Then, the cooling airflows are discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As mentioned above, the components such as the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 are the components that need to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (IH coil installation space CK). The space for cooling these components is located in front of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B, there is a gap GP1 that connects to the exhaust port 20, but since there are no components to be cooled as described above inside this gap GP1, it does not serve as a cooling space for the upper unit 100.

(Basic operation during microwave cooking)
Next, a basic operation of each part of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned ON, microwave cooking can be started immediately even if induction heating cooking is not actually being performed in the upper unit 100. However, if the main power switch 97 is once turned OFF, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start microwave heating cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 is automatically reset and opened a certain time (e.g., 30 minutes) after the last use of any of the microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating. Alternatively, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened when the temperatures of the top plate 15, heating chamber 113, etc. all drop below a specified value. Such safety measures are adopted.

Next, the door 114 is opened, food or other items to be cooked are placed in the heating chamber 113, and after the door 114 is closed, a command to start microwave heating cooking is issued by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) on the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. The integrated control device MC then issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130, causing the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 to start operating.

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillator 122A. Note that the microwaves referred to here are radio waves of 2450 MHz ±50 MHz.

The generated microwaves are guided from the waveguide 123 into the antenna case 124. The motor 126 for driving the antenna 125 starts operating at the same time that the microwaves are generated, so the microwaves introduced into the antenna case 124 can be propagated evenly inside the heating chamber 113 by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. The action of this type of antenna and rotating shaft 126A is explained in detail in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is drawn into the inside of the case A150 through the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF5. The cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121, and then cools the various electrical components mounted on the circuit board.

The cooling air RF5 then passes through communication ports B138B and A138A, which are provided at the top and bottom of the case A150, and the cooling air RF5 that passes through communication port B138B hits the back of the temperature sensor 160.

The temperature sensor 160 is disposed in a mounting hole in the right-side partition plate 166 A. A minute gap of a few mm or less exists between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole.
The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out into the heating chamber 113 through the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160.

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided from the communication port A138A to the passage 172. In other words, it is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 that covers the top of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171. This passage has the effect of preventing high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side, even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 becomes so hot that it exceeds 300°C.

When the position of the communication port 173 is viewed from the communication port A 138A in a plan view, the communication port 173 is located diagonally rearward across the passage 172. In other words, the communication port 173 is located at the farthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173, passes through the communication port 173, and is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward (see FIG. 15).

When the cooling air RF5 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from below and is released into the room through the exhaust port 20.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
12 and 13, when the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, air is drawn into the inside of the case A 151 from the intake port B 152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF6. The cooling air RF6 first cools the heat dissipation part 122H of the magnetron 122, passes through the heat dissipation part 122H, and reaches the inside of the duct 153.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and travels forward. It is then introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. 17.

Because the inlet 201 is located close to the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, some of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114, eliminating fogging that occurs on the heating chamber 113 side of the sealing plate 196.

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging steam, smoke, and the like generated from heated objects such as food inside the heating chamber 113. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the cooling air RF6 moves from the front to the rear of the heating chamber 113, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the ceiling at the rear.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102, which extends horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. When the cooling air RF6 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted to the rising air current of the cooling air RF5 and merges with it, and is released into the room through the exhaust port 20.

Even if the initial air volumes of cooling air RF5 and cooling air RF6 are equal, due to the difference in the paths as in this embodiment 1, cooling air RF5 has a faster wind speed when it is released from duct 102. Therefore, it has the effect of attracting cooling air RF6 released from below.

To forcibly release the cooling air RF5 and RF6 from the exhaust duct 102, an exhaust fan may be provided midway through the exhaust duct 102. In this embodiment 1, such an exhaust fan is omitted, which can be realized at low cost and is advantageous when considering the arrangement of components inside the upper unit 100.

Next, we will explain Figure 44.
FIG. 44 is a table showing the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the cooking appliance 1 and the types of cooking.
As is clear from FIG. 44, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in the case of induction heating cooking.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated in the case of microwave cooking and oven cooking, respectively.

(Basic operation when cooking in oven)
Next, a basic operation of the oven heating device 140 in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the integrated control device MC assumes that some kind of cooking will be started and performs a preliminary startup. Therefore, even if induction heating cooking or microwave heating cooking is not actually being performed in the upper unit 100, oven heating cooking can be started immediately. However, if the main power switch 97 is once turned OFF, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start oven heating cooking.

Next, the door 114 is opened, food or other items to be cooked are placed in the heating chamber 113, and then a control menu for cooking using the heating chamber 113 is selected in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. For example, when cooking fish or meat by grilling, the heating time and heat are set. However, if the control menu for automatic grilling is selected, the heat is automatically set by the heating chamber control section 159. The selection of this control menu will be explained later in Figures 48 to 52.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives command signals from the integrated control device MC and controls whether or not the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized, the time period during which they are energized, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), the heat, etc.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal and transmits the detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159 via the temperature measurement unit 158. The heating chamber control unit 159 checks the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature and controls the power supply to both or either of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B so as to reduce the difference (feedback control). The temperature sensor TS2 is sometimes called the "second temperature sensor."

In addition, when the control method for timer cooking is input through the central operation unit 40M, the upper heater 163A and/or the lower heater 163B are energized for the set time. In other words, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the detected temperature data of the temperature sensor TS2.

After the door 114 is closed, when a command to start cooking in the oven (heating chamber 113) is issued on the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130, and starts the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129. Note that the heating chamber control unit 159 may also send a drive command signal directly to the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is drawn into the inside of the case A150 through the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. However, unlike the case of microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A, respectively, without cooling the inverter circuit board 121.

The cooling air RF5 that passes through the communication port A138A is blown out into the heating chamber 113 through the gap between the outer case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole, via the detection window 161.

The cooling air RF5 that passes through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. It then reaches the communication port 173 while cooling the upper case 169, and is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 passes through the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the inside of the duct 153. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, it is not generating heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the gap GP5R with almost no increase in temperature (see Figures 16 and 17).

The cooling air RF6 is then introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. 17. As a result, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inside portion of the door 114.

The food or other cooked object placed in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oily smoke, etc. due to the radiant heat from the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. Such steam, oily smoke, etc. is carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving from the front to the rear of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 15.

The cooling air RF6 is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102, which extends horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted by the cooling air RF5 rising upward and passes through the exhaust port 20, before being released into the room (see FIG. 15).

In the above-described first embodiment, after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the integrated control device MC controls the overall state of the cooking device 1 up to a certain stage, and then, if the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R is operated, the subsequent induction heating control is left to the IH control unit 90. However, the range of control by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the IH control unit 90 and the integrated control device MC.

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, after one of the control menus, induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating, is selected, the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 may basically perform the control operations related to heating.

In this case, if new input is made to the input operation unit 40 (including stopping heating), control will be temporarily performed by the integrated control device MC, but if no input is made, cooking can be performed by either the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130.

(Control during deep-frying by the IH control unit 90)
A specific example of the control operation of the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the IH control unit 90 when deep frying (automatic), which is one type of single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the cooking appliance 1.

When "deep frying (automatic cooking)" is selected in the induction heating cooking control menu by operating the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R, the temperature of the cooking oil placed in the heated object (metal pan) N is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the heat of the IH coils 17L and 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the control menu for deep frying (automatic), the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes a preheating process, a deep frying process, and a heat-up process, as shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the third specific screen 30ST displayed on the integrated display unit 30 displays necessary information and reference information (e.g., the estimated time required for preheating) in the form of characters, figures, etc. Also, it is displayed that this is priority cooking and power is not limited (suppressed) by the power control unit 72.

This allows the user to know that power will be secured as a priority during deep frying, even if microwave or oven heating is in use.

In the preheating process, if the target oil temperature set by the user is 180°C, the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) starts operating at a specified heating power value (maximum 1500W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rises rapidly from room temperature (e.g. 20°C) to the target temperature T1 of 180°C.

This temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93 described above, so when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) of 180°C has been reached, the IH control unit 90 adjusts the amount of induction heating, i.e., the inverter output, to maintain the target temperature as is (this control action of automatically adjusting the high-frequency heating power to approach the target temperature based on such temperature detection information is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

Then, a display command is sent to the integrated control device MC, and audio guidance is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95, such as "The oil temperature has reached the appropriate level. Please add ingredients."

When the user places ingredients, for example frozen croquettes, into the cooking oil, cooking step 1 begins at this point.
The cooking oil is cooled rapidly from the moment it is added by the cold ingredients (croquettes), so its temperature drops sharply as shown in Figure 45. However, the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors this temperature drop and immediately increases the heating power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) to the specified heating power of 1500W or 1800W, causing the oil temperature to rise again (temperature feedback control). When the oil temperature reaches the target temperature T1 again in this way (or after a specified time has elapsed), the process switches from the deep frying process to the heating power increase process.

During the heating power increase process, the control device 90 controls the inverter circuit 81R (81L) so that the oil temperature is maintained between the second temperature T2 (225°C) higher than the target temperature T1 and the upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3 (230°C) which is even higher than that.

As shown in FIG. 45, the heating power is about 900 W and the heater is driven intermittently.
The process after the first temperature T1 is reached is called the "deep-frying finishing process" and is an important process for finishing deep-fried foods crisply. If sufficient heat is not applied in this heat-up process, deep-frying will not be done well. The deep-frying process is not limited to a certain time, so when the user presses input key 44R (or input key 45L), all deep-frying is completed.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the (automatic) deep frying control menu, the period from the deep frying process to the heat-up process is defined as the "priority control menu execution time period", and during this execution time period, power reduction is prevented by starting other heating sources or changing operating conditions. In other words, the induction heating IH control unit 90 has the function of constantly knowing whether the control menu being executed is within the "priority control menu execution time period", and if it is within that execution time period, reporting this to the outside.

As is clear from the above explanation, when a specific heating process is started, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90 each time, and the progress of the heating process is entirely left to the control of the IH control unit 90.

In the "linked cooking mode KM3" described in detail later, when a control operation including such a "preheating process" is performed, the "cooking process" is the process that follows the "deep-frying cooking process" in which the food to be cooked is actually heated, and the preheating process is not included in the cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.).

(Display on integrated display unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display unit 30 and the various input keys of the central operation unit 40M, the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30. Figure 47 is a plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L before and after the start of induction heating cooking. Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram showing the change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 31L in the composite cooking mode. Figure 49 is explanatory diagram 1 showing the change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the composite cooking mode. Figure 50 is explanatory diagram 2 showing the change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the composite cooking mode. Figure 51 is explanatory diagram 3 showing the change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the composite cooking mode. Figure 52 is explanatory diagram 4 showing the change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the composite cooking mode.

Referring now to Fig. 46, when the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display unit 30 is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC performs a self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays the display screen 1 of FIG.

In the display screen 1 of Fig. 46, 30A is a display message notifying the user that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for directing the user to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a message explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.
When the two-dimensional code 30B is optically read by the information processing terminal 418, the information processing terminal 418 can be connected to an external server 417 that stores information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information 30C and the display text 30A are a type of "standby common information" 30N.

After the display screen 1 in FIG. 46 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. In the display screen 2A, the text display "Caution: Bumping" is one of the warning displays 30E. This "bumping" refers to the phenomenon in which, for example, when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is heated, the inside of the food becomes overheated above the boiling point, causing sudden and violent boiling. As steam escapes from the heated liquid, hot droplets may fly, which can be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping are said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from the outside. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing food is placed on the top plate 15 and induction heated, caution is displayed when stirring the food. The information displayed in this warning is one type of "common information during standby" 30N.

The three display screens shown in FIG. 46, display screen 1, display screen 2A, and display screen 2B, may be referred to as a common screen 30Z. Note that common screen 30Z may include forms other than these three.

In display screen 2B, 30E is a warning display that warns that the inside of heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature and to avoid careless contact. If the integrated control device MC detects that heating chamber 113 has not yet cooled down sufficiently after oven cooking has been performed in heating chamber 113, it automatically switches to this state of display screen 2. Note that display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed simultaneously, but they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to warn about both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Also, the warning contents of display screens 2A and 2B may be output in parallel as voice by a voice synthesizer 95.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A, 2B in Figure 46, these displays are made using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, rather than displaying partially in any of the first area 30L to third area 30R described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 30L to third area 30R are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user sees them displayed on the entire integrated display unit 30.

The display screens 1 to 2A and 2B are at stage ST3 in terms of the operation steps of FIG.
When a certain time, for example 10 seconds, has elapsed since display screen 1 to display screens 2A and 2B were displayed, the display content changes to one that prompts the user to select a heating source (heating means) (corresponding to operation step ST4 in FIG. 38).

Next, we will explain induction heating cooking. Note that what is explained in Figure 47 is the case of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, not the case of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3.

Figure 47 is a plan view of the left display unit 31L and left operation unit 40L for the left heating source 17HL. Before the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking with the left heating unit 17HL is not pressed, the state is as shown in Figure 47 (A).

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL. Then, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the integrated control device MC causes the individual light-emitting unit 27L3 to emit light, indicating that an operation input has been received.

The input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for input, so the individual light-emitting element 27L1 is made to blink. Also, the selection of the control menu is also waiting for input, so the individual light-emitting element 27L2 located directly behind the input key 44L is made to blink. In FIG. 47(B), the star symbol indicates that the light-emitting display element 27 is lit or blinking.

If the default heat level of the heat level indicator 67L, which shows the heat level during induction heating cooking, is set to "3," the light-emitting portion of the heat level indicator 67L will continuously light up from the left side (or change from blue to red) until it indicates heat level 3, thereby indicating the level of heat level to the user.

When the user wants to change the heat level to something other than the default setting, by pressing input key 43L2 or 43L3, the heat level will decrease or increase by one level each time the key is pressed, and the range of the light-emitting portion (or the red light-emitting portion) of heat level display unit 67L will expand from left to right or shrink to the left accordingly, thereby displaying the heat level adjustment status to the user.

Next, we will explain Figure 48.
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the left operating unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking appliance 1.
In Fig. 48, states A to C depicted on the left side are schematic diagrams of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L. State A in Fig. 48 shows the state before operation begins.

As described in FIG. 47, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light-emitting display section 27L3 emits light as shown in state B of FIG.
In state B, the light-emitting indicator 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input functions of both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are valid. Therefore, pressing the left input key 43L2 twice decreases the flame power. The increase or decrease in flame power can be seen from the light-emitting state of the flame power indicator 67L located immediately behind it.

Next, the "single (heating) cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9 will be described.
For ease of explanation, a case in which the left heating unit 17HL is used will be explained.

When the input key 43L2 on the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, the heat level is specified down to level 1, and the integrated control device MC determines that the "keep warm" control mode has been specified, and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays the "third specific screen" 30ST for keeping warm.

Furthermore, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "deep-fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific screen" 30ST corresponding to deep-fried food is displayed.
The "third specific screen 30ST" for deep-frying has a default temperature set to 180°C, so the text "Deep-frying 180°C" may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once more, the "third specific screen 30ST" corresponding to preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for making eggs, etc. may also be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A in Figure 48, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 displays a "schematic diagram of a container" 280 such as a pot, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form a wide horizontal display area.

The words "Keep Warm (Left IH)" are displayed in the combined space of the second area 30M and the third area 30R, indicating that the temperature for keeping warm is approximately 80°C. An explanatory text 30F indicates that this is a recommended control menu for soups, etc. At this stage of the display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left display section 31L. However, the temperature for keeping warm may be displayed as "80°C" as shown in FIG. 48.

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in the state B of FIG. 48, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" each time the input key 44L is pressed, and is displayed as shown on the display screen 3B.
In the example of the display screen 3B, it is shown that "deep-frying" has been selected. When a certain period of time has elapsed in state B of Fig. 48, the control menu of the left heating unit 17HL is confirmed as "deep-frying" and the driving of the IH coil 17L is started. As described in Fig. 39, the IH control menu group includes "boiling" and "water boiling" in addition to "deep-frying".

In the case of display screen 3B, the default temperature is set to 180° C., so the left display section 31L displays the words "Deep frying 180° C." as shown in FIG.
This temperature of "180°C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained at around 180°C. When 180°C is reached, a voice synthesizer 95 will notify the user by voice. In addition, the integrated display unit 30 will display "preheating temperature has been reached," which is expected to have the effect of encouraging the user to add ingredients, etc.

If you want to change the preheat (target) temperature in this frying (automatic) control menu, you can lower the temperature using input key 43L2 or raise the temperature using input key 43L3.

As can be seen from display screen 3B, display screen 30D combines second area 30M and third area 30R to form a wide horizontal display area, and in the combined space of second area 30M and third area 30R, a warning message 30G is displayed informing the user that preheating has started and that the user should not leave the vicinity of cooking appliance 1 during the preheating operation.

Next, in state B of FIG. 48, if input key 44L is pressed to select "suitable temperature" as another control menu, display screen 3C will be displayed. As shown in display screen 3C, the control menu "suitable temperature" is a control mode recommended for heating a pan or the like to a set temperature (default temperature is 180°C) and for making eggs and the like. A recommendation 30H is displayed so that this meaning can be understood. At this display screen 3C stage, text information saying "Preheat 180°C" is displayed on the left display section 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST may be displayed on the individual display units (left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation units (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L).

Next, we will explain Figure 49.
49 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when the central operation section 40M of the cooking appliance 1 is operated. The figure shows a scene in which the "combined cooking mode" is executed.
Since the display screen 4ST is a default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC, "Warm" is displayed in the center of the front-to-rear direction of the first area 30L.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific text 30J indicating the name of one control menu (of the RG control menus), "Warm," is displayed large in the center of the front-rear direction of the first area 30L.

As shown in FIG. 49, the position where the specific sentence 30J is displayed may be referred to as "display position A" in the following description.
Furthermore, the position (second area 30M) where the control conditions (target temperature information 30T, heating time information 30S, etc.) are displayed may be referred to as "display position C" in the following description (see Figs. 49 and 52). These control conditions may be referred to as "control condition A" in the following description.

The word "oven" is displayed slightly smaller on the BK side behind the specific text 30J for "warm" that is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, and conversely, the word "microwave manual" is displayed slightly smaller on the FR side in front of it.

When the user selects the control menu, the next options are "Oven" and "Microwave Manual." If the user presses the input key 43M1 (left side) located in the position corresponding to the first area 31L once at this stage, the word "Warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "Microwave Manual."
Moreover, when the input key 43M1 (on the right side) located in the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the word "warm" changes to "oven."

In FIG. 49, the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen, displays target temperature information 30T of "80°C" in the second area 30M. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, if the food temperature is 80°C, microwave heating will automatically stop when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80°C.

To raise the target temperature (80°C) in the second area 30M to 85°C, operate the right input key 43M2 located just before the second area 30M once. Conversely, to lower the temperature to 75°C, operate the left input key 43M2 once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the target temperature (80°C) in the second area 30M. Also, a downward-pointing (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed below the 80°C number.

The shape of this symbol 30UP is similar to that of the input key 43M2 (on the right side) of the central operation unit 40M, so that the user can easily understand that to increase the temperature or heat, etc., they should operate the input key 43M2 on the right side.

Conversely, because the shapes of the input keys 43M2 (on the left side) of 30DN and central operation unit 40M are similar, it is easy for the user to understand that to lower the temperature or heat, etc., they should operate the left input key 43M2. This correspondence rule also applies to the relationship between the display in the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, measures are taken to prevent users from making input errors (pressing the wrong input key).

In FIG. 49, 30K is a heating source display section that displays in text that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As mentioned above, 30P is reference information that is automatically displayed to indicate that this is a recommended control menu for warming side dishes, etc. The content of this reference information may be other additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for a few seconds on the display screen 30D.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 37, information (reference information) 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time in response to the operation of the input key 43M3.
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 30P that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warm up") is displayed so that the user does not hesitate as to whether or not to select each control menu (e.g., "warm up").
Furthermore, when reference information 30P is displayed as shown in FIG. 49, if the (two) input keys 43M3 located in front of the reference information 30P are touched, the reference information 30P1 can be displayed in the third area 30R instead of the reference information 30P.

Next, we will explain Figure 50.
FIG. 50 is another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking appliance 1 is operated to implement the combined cooking mode.

The display screens 5ST, 5UPN, 5DN1, etc. shown in FIG. 50 are all types of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "manual range", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC in the collaborative cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "manual range") and the default values of the control conditions (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are displayed as a set.

As explained in FIG. 21 and FIG. 49, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 49 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as one type of the second specific screen 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific text 30J changes to "Range Manual" and the display screen 5ST of FIG. 50 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, the specific text 30J of the control menu "Manual Range" is displayed large in the center of the front-to-back direction of the first area 30L.

In the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500 W" is displayed in the second area 30M. In addition, the adjacent third area 30R displays microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds." As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, although it is included in the combined cooking mode, in this "manual range" it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 will be used, so the heating source display section 30K as shown in Figure 49 (which displays in text the microwave heating source 189) does not need to be displayed.

If you want to lower the microwave output value (watt value) of 500 W in the second area 30M of this display screen 5ST by one step to 200 W, you can do so by operating the left input key 43M2 once.

Similarly, to increase the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute 10 seconds, operate the right input key 43M3 once, located immediately before the third area 30M. Conversely, to decrease the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, operate the left input key 43M3 once.

In the display screen 5ST in Figure 50, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number for the output (500W) in the second area 30M. Similarly, a downward-pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed below the number 500W.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 50 shows the minimum heat (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only above the minimum heat (100W) on the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only heats greater than this can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only above the number for the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. In other words, the symbol 30UP indicates that a time shorter than this cannot be selected.

Next, we will explain Figure 51.
51 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode. That is, it shows a situation in which the display contents of the second specific screen 30SC change from time to time in response to an input operation by the user.

When the display screen shown in FIG. 50 is displayed, by operating the left input key 43M1 corresponding to the first area 30L once, the setting can be changed from "Microwave manual" to "Pre-boil leafy vegetables" as shown in FIG. 51.

The display screen 6ST in Fig. 51 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, a specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, "Pre-boil leafy vegetables", is displayed in a large size.
In the second area 30M, the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard", and if cooking is started in this state, heating will be performed at 500 W. Note that the microwave output value in this "standard" case may be 500 W, but it may be other than this. In other words, the "standard" heating level when using the microwave heating source 9 differs for each composite cooking mode, and is not always the same output (for example, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 51, as explained in FIG. 49, a heating source display section 30K is displayed indicating in text that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As mentioned above, 30P is a recommendation (reference information) indicating that this is a recommended control mode for heating side dishes, etc. The content of this recommendation may be other additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for several seconds on the display screen 30D.

Instead of the recommendation text 30P in FIG. 51, as explained in FIG. 49, reference information 30P1 showing the main points of each control menu, as shown in category 2 in FIG. 37, may be displayed each time in response to a user request.

Next, we will explain Figure 52.
52 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 is performed. It shows a state in which the display contents of the second specific screen 30SC change from time to time in response to an input operation by the user.
FIG. 52 shows a scene where a range grill (RG) control menu "RG cooking" is selected.

As described above, the "RG cooking" is a control menu that allows cooking using the heating chamber 113 by combining microwave heating and oven heating.
There are three types of patterns: microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heating is performed by upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B, heating is performed in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. Note that "simultaneously" does not mean that the timing of the start and end of heating is exactly the same, but rather that the time periods of the heating operations overlap even partially.

The display screen 7ST1 shown in Figure 52 shows that the heating control (time control) pattern is to first drive both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 simultaneously to heat for one minute, and then stop the microwave heating and heat only with the oven heating source 188 for five minutes.

The reason why the term "range grill" is not used and the abbreviated form "RG" is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. If more characters were to be displayed, the area occupied by the first area 30L would increase.

In the example display shown in Figure 52, heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and subsequent grill cooking heating time information 30GY is also displayed in minutes (however, if the time is short, it is displayed in 10-second units).
The heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M and the heating time information 30GY shown in the third area 30R can be changed as appropriate by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 52, display screen 7ST2 shows a heating control (time control) pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 alone is used to heat for one minute (microwave output 500 W) at first, and then the oven heating source 188 alone is used to heat for five minutes. This display screen 7ST2 is the default display screen. Note that display screen 7ST1, in which both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating edge 188 are driven for only the first minute, is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance ("Function setting" using input key 43KP as described above).

Next, we will explain Figure 53.
Figure 53 is a schematic plan view illustrating the state of the display screen 6ST displaying the control menu for "pre-boiling leafy vegetables" shown in Figure 51 at a predetermined position (center position between front and back) in the first area 30L, and the operation of the central operating unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit drive circuit 63 causes the individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 to emit light in a unified color.

Thereafter, when the input key 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode is operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 51 is displayed as a default in the first area 30L.
At this display stage, all of the four input keys 43M1-43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can receive input, and therefore the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to the four input keys 43M1-43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screen 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed, the individual light emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the start input key 43MS changes from continuous illumination to blinking, as shown by the dotted circle in FIG. 53. The presence of the input key 43MS is then highlighted with light.

When the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 53, the mode transitions to the combined cooking mode KM2. In the case of a heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation starts immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43R1 or 43L1 once after transitioning to the combined cooking mode KM2. The same is true in the linked cooking mode KM3 after a command to transition to a cooking process using the induction heating source 9 is given (by the input key 43MS).

In this manner, in the first embodiment, a light-emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63) is provided which causes each of the light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 to emit light in the first light-emitting mode (continuous light emission) when the input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are valid.
The integrated control device MC is configured to, when displaying the reference information 30P, 30P1, cause only the light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the start selection section (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light emitting mode (flashing).

Because of the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state in which the device is waiting for a command to start the heating operation (in combined cooking mode KM2) by the blinking of the light-emitting unit 27M6. Note that the light-emitting unit 27M6 also supports the touch-type input key 43MT, which can stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations. Therefore, even after the heating operation has started, if the light-emitting unit 27M6 is emitting light, the input function of the input key 43MT is also valid, and a command to stop heating can be sent by touching it.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display drive circuit 63 may be configured to blink only the light emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS, which is the start selection element, from the beginning. The other light emitting elements 27M1 to 27M4 may be configured to emit light continuously and emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection element.

(Basic operation during heating and cooking in the linked cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the combined cooking mode KM3 will be described with reference to Figures 54 to 62.
Fig. 54 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking. Fig. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the input operations and steps when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 are performed. Fig. 56 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode. Fig. 57 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1. Fig. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys and cooking steps in the input operation unit in time series from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition. Fig. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operations and displays in time series until the transition between the composite cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, a first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 54 is displayed.
Even if the input key 43M1 is pressed first and the operation for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 as shown in Figures 49 to 53 is halfway completed, if the operation is at a stage before the input key 43MS is pressed, the input process for the combined cooking mode KM3 will be started from the stage at which the input key 43MC is pressed. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP will be displayed from this stage.

When the input key 43M1 is touched next after the input key 43MC, further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 330 is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) to identify the food to be cooked that is the target of the multiple linked cooking modes KM3 (the linked cooking menu).

In FIG. 54, the number of "food items" that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is three. That is, there are three: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef. In this way, the number of food items is called the "number of coordinated cooking menus."

In this embodiment 1, there are a total of eight collaborative cooking menus. Details are explained in Figures 77 to 78.

In FIG. 54, 330 is identification information, which in this embodiment 1 is information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).
There are eight pieces of identification information 330. In other words, the number of linked cooking menus is also eight. Reference numeral 331 denotes additional information presented to the user regarding cooking of an object to be cooked (e.g., a hamburger steak).

The position where the identification information 330 is displayed may hereinafter be referred to as "display position B." Note that in this embodiment 1, "display position B" and the "display position A" (see FIG. 49) are the same position, but they may be set to different positions. However, to avoid confusing the user, they should always be in the same position in the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Also, in the combined cooking mode KM2, it is preferable that the "predetermined specific position A" is always in the same position.

In this Figure 54, the additional information 331 indicates that "Press the start button to start heating the left IH." This means that by pressing the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M, induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL. However, in this embodiment 1, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS, followed by the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

As shown in FIG. 54, identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooking item (e.g., gratin) is displayed above the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Further, identification information 330B indicating the name of another food (e.g., roast beef) is displayed under the identification information 330. In the following description, when the identification information is collectively referred to, the reference numeral 330 is used.

Similar to switching the display of the "combined cooking mode KM2" described in Figures 49 to 53, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, it is possible to select the food that can be cooked in the combined cooking mode KM3.

That is, each time the input key 43M1 is operated once, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) changes its display by moving one step upward or downward in sequence. In other words, the identification information 330 can be displayed sequentially at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position) in the first area 30L by forward and reverse scrolling.

In this embodiment 1, as mentioned above, there are a total of eight types of food items in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all food items will be cycled through. Conversely, if the right input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all food items will be cycled through. This will be explained in detail in Figures 76 to 78.

The default display for the collaborative cooking menu is "Hamburger" as shown in FIG.
Identification information 330 indicating the name of this food (hamburger steak) is displayed in the center of the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). In this state, by operating the input key 43M1, identification information of another food can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 68).

In the present embodiment 1, the "first specific screen" 30SP refers to the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 shown in FIG. 54. The display content of this first specific screen SP is not always the same because it changes from time to time depending on the input by the user to the central operation unit 40M and the operating state of the cooking appliance 1.

The main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG.
(1) The first area 30L displays the identification information 330. In principle, the identification information 330 is always displayed even when the heating process of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 progresses. However, there are some exceptions, as shown in the display screen 10C of FIG.
(2) In the first half of the horizontally long area formed by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a pair of heating unit specifying parts 333R, 333L corresponding to the heating units of the induction heating source 9 to be used are displayed. Either one of these heating unit specifying parts 333R, 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The selected heating unit specifying part 333R, 333L changes color or brightness, for example, to show the character "left" in white as shown in Fig. 54, to indicate the selected heating unit (either the right or the left).
(3) In the latter half of the horizontally long area formed by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a horizontally long band-shaped process display section 332 is displayed. This process display section 332 is continuously displayed from before the transition to the coordinated cooking mode until all cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode are completed. Furthermore, the content is updated as the cooking steps progress, for example by displaying in black and white inversion or changing the color, so that the current cooking step can be identified. This will be described in detail later.
(4) Additional information 331 useful for cooking is displayed to the right of the heating unit identification sections 333R and 333L. In exceptional cases, the additional information 331 may be displayed over a wide area covering the entire integrated display section 30 (see display screen 10C in FIG. 87).

When the input key 43MS is pressed while the identification information 330 of the desired food item (e.g., hamburger steak) is displayed in the center of the front-to-rear direction of the first area 30L, a command to execute the linked cooking mode KM3 for heating and cooking the food item is issued to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 67).

Hereinafter, the position where the identification information 330 is displayed may be referred to as a "display position B." That is, the "display position B" is the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.
The position directly to the side of display position B is a "display position D" which will be described later.

When cooking using the induction heating source 9 in cooking step 1 (e.g., hamburger steak), either the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended depending on the linked cooking mode. For example, to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP for hamburger steak is as shown in FIG. 54, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes as the cooking process progresses and also changes depending on the food being cooked. The example shown in FIG. 54 explains that in order to start induction heating cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS.

When the input key 43MS is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 54, the cooking mode switches to linked cooking mode KM3 with "hamburger" as the food to be cooked.

When the input key 43MS is pressed, a preheating operation by the induction heating source 9 is started.
Then, a preheating operation of the object N to be heated, such as a frying pan or a pot, is started by the induction heating source 9. When an object to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak batter) is placed on the object N to be heated at a high temperature, the preheating process is started.

If the control program dictates that the next cooking step 1 will be performed by the left heating unit 17HL, pressing the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) on the left operation unit 40L will start cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9 (the stage shown in FIG. 54).

After cooking process 1 has started, to end cooking process 1, the input key 43L1 should be pressed once again.
At this point, in order to cancel the collaborative cooking mode KM3 itself and return to the initial standby screen 30Z (see FIG. 46), the input key 43MT may be pressed.

After the cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) is moved from the food N (e.g., frying pan) on the top plate 15 to the inside of the heating chamber 113 .
Then, cooking process 2 can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

Thereafter, to end the cooking process 2, the input key 43MT should be pressed once.
As shown in FIG. 54, the two input keys 43MS and 43MT serve as input means for starting and canceling (ending) the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
At the same time, it also serves as an input means for starting and stopping the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 .

For the above reasons, when cooking step 1 in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is completed, the heated object N (e.g., a frying pan) is moved from the heated object N on the top plate 15 to the inside of the heating chamber 113, and the input key 43MT is pressed once, cooking step 2 is completed.
Furthermore, by pressing the same input key 43MT, the collaborative cooking mode KM3 can be cancelled at this stage.

As described above, in this embodiment 1, the planar area of the input operation unit 40, particularly the central operation unit 40M, is restricted, making it difficult to arrange many input keys in a planar manner. However, as shown in FIG. 54, two input keys 43MS, 43MS are shared between the collaborative cooking mode KM3 and the other cooking modes. This allows the user to operate reliably even in a small installation area.

Next, we will explain Figure 55.
In the flow chart for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 38, the operation from step ST4 onwards is shown in FIG.

After the display/notification step (ST4) that prompts the user to select the heating method, the user can select cooking using the right heating unit 17HR with the right operating unit 40R (SP1). Also, cooking using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected with the left operating unit 40L (SP2).

Furthermore, after step (ST4), the central operation unit 40M can be used to select cooking using the microwave heating source 189 (SS1). The central operation unit 40M can also be used to select cooking using the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113 (SS2).

Furthermore, the combined cooking mode KM2 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS3A). Also, the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected (SS3B).

After the step (ST4), the user can select cooperative cooking by operating the input keys 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
In FIG. 55, CH1 is a first layer selection means for selecting one of three types of heat sources.
That is, the first layer selection means includes a total of four input keys: input key 43MC and input key 43M1 of central operation section 40M, input key 43L1 of left operation section 40L which is an individual operation section, and input key 43R1 of right operation section 40R.

As mentioned above, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single food item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.; the same applies below) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions (hereinafter referred to as "control conditions") can be set independently.

More specifically, in the “cooperative cooking” in this embodiment 1, the heating locations for one food item are on top of top plate 15 and inside heating chamber 113 .
The two types of heating sources for which heating operation conditions can be set independently are the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 perform heating operations during the same time period or with a time difference.

In the first embodiment, the "coordinated cooking" is made up of two coordinated cooking operations: a "first coordinated cooking" and a "second coordinated cooking".
The "first coordinated cooking" refers to first cooking with the induction heating source 9 in the left heating section 17HL, and then cooking with microwaves inside the heating chamber 113. The cooking process of this "first coordinated cooking", i.e., the cooking sequence, is defined by the "first coordinated cooking mode" (SR2A).

On the other hand, "second coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that is first performed inside the heating chamber 113 using microwave heating or the oven heating source 188, or using these two heating sources in combination, and then cooking is performed in the left heating section 17HL using the induction heating source 9.

The cooking steps of this "second coordinated cooking", i.e., the cooking sequence, are defined in the "second coordinated cooking mode" (SR2B).
In the case of the second collaborative cooking mode, normally (default setting condition), the integrated control device MC performs a process to restrict operation corresponding to menus other than the collaborative cooking mode KM3 for a specific period of time for either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, which are the heating sources used first.

The selection of the "first coordinated cooking mode" and the "second coordinated cooking mode" (SR2A, SR2B) is not made by the user each time he or she makes a decision to select, but is automatically selected (determined) by the integrated control device MC when the user selects identification information 330 (for example, the name of a dish called "hamburger steak") that corresponds to a coordinated cooking menu in the coordinated cooking mode.

In this embodiment 1, the heating parts of the induction heating source 9 that are used when the "coordinated cooking" menu is executed are both the right heating part 17HR and the left heating part 17HL. Therefore, if, for example, only the left heating part 17HL is being used during the execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the right heating part 17HR can be used freely during the execution of the coordinated cooking mode, independent of coordinated cooking. However, if the power control part 72 determines that the total power consumption during coordinated cooking and the power consumption of the right heating part 17HR used separately exceeds the limit value, the integrated control device MC issues a command to prohibit the use of the right heating part 17HR or to forcibly reduce the heat.

In FIG. 55, CH2 is a second-level selection means for selecting a control menu. That is, in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the second-level selection means is the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M.

On the other hand, the second layer selection means in the composite cooking mode KM2 is the input key 43M1 of the central operation section 40M.
Furthermore, as the second layer selection means, in the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, there are two input keys: the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L and the input key 43R1 of the right operation section 40R.

In other words, in this embodiment 1, the input keys for forwarding and backwards through the composite cooking menu and the linked cooking menu and displaying them at a predetermined display position on the integrated display unit 30 are both input keys 43M1. Therefore, when the user selects a cooking menu, the desired cooking menu can be displayed by the same input key, providing good operability.

As shown in FIG. 55, when induction cooking has started (SR5), the user can operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to specify the heating power (power consumption) of the left heating unit 17HL (SR6). Also, by operating the input key 43L1, the heating operation can be stopped at any time (SR7).

In addition, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the heating and cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is not generally set in advance, so the user can heat and cook for any desired time.

In addition, at the stage where induction heating cooking has started using the right heating unit 17HR (SR5), the user can operate the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R to specify the heating power (power consumption) of the right heating unit 17HR (SR6).

Furthermore, when the right heating unit 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Furthermore, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When the heating and cooking process using the left heating unit 17HL is ended using the input key 43L1, the cooking process in the linked cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the next step (described in detail in FIG. 56).

When the induction heating process is completed during the cooking steps of the first coordinated cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When a command to resume this coordinated cooking is issued (SR9), it may be possible to increase or decrease the microwave output value during microwave heating by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 on the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there are also control menus in which the cooking process proceeds with the microwave output fixed at, for example, 500 W.

When microwave cooking is ended by input key 43MT, all cooking steps in cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed (SR11). Note that although it is not a cooking step in cooperative cooking mode KM3, the user may operate central operation unit 40M thereafter to further perform microwave cooking (through the control menu of cooperative cooking mode KM3 or single cooking mode KM1).

Continuing with the description of FIG.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 55 show the operation steps when microwave cooking and oven cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, by operating the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M, the independent control mode KM1 for microwave heating and oven heating and the combined cooking mode KM2 are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 34). Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, one of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the independent control mode KM1 can be selected (SS3).

Next, by pressing the input key 43MS, execution of one of the combined cooking modes KM2 or the independent control mode KM1 is commanded (SS4), and cooking can be started (SS5). Note that in the explanation of FIG. 34, the overall explanation was given as a combined cooking mode, but menus such as "manual range" only include microwave heating. In other words, in reality, the control menu for the independent heating mode KM1 is also exceptionally included. This was explained in FIG. 37.

For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the above-mentioned control menu "range grill (RG) cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit. This "RG cooking" is a combination of microwave heating cooking and grill cooking.
On the other hand, by operating the same input key 43M1, "warm" can be selected, which is cooking using the microwave heating source 189 alone, and is one type of single cooking mode.

After the microwave heating or oven heating is started, the heating conditions (for example, heating time) may be changed (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, a command is issued to stop the execution of one control menu (SS7), and the microwave heating or oven heating operation is stopped (SS8).

Continuing with the description of FIG.
SP1 to SP8 in FIG. 55 show operation steps when induction heating cooking is performed using the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40R.
For example, by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, cooking using the right heating unit 17HL can be selected (SP2). Then, even if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is not operated, the induction heating control menu is automatically confirmed after a certain period of time (SP3). Note that the "induction heating control menu" here refers to the IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely separate from the coordinated cooking menu of the “coordinated cooking mode” KM3 displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the first specific screen 30SP.

The execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode KM1" can be started (SP5).
The term "single cooking" in step SP5 means that the heating source used is the induction heating source 9 alone.
If, after induction heating has started, the user operates input key 43R2 or 43R3 to command a change in the heating power of induction heating, the integrated control device MC changes the heating power, which is one of the control conditions (SP6).

In both the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, the command to start the cooking process using microwave heating is input key 43MS. Also, the command to start the cooking process in the independent cooking mode KM1, in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are each driven independently, is also input key 43MS.

As described above, in this embodiment 1, there is no dedicated switch (button or input key) for the induction heating source 9 to command the start of cooking, but a dedicated switch or input key (in addition to input key 43MS) may be provided.

Pressing input key 43R1 commands the right heating unit 17HR to stop (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, pressing input key 43L1 is sufficient. In this way, input keys 43L1 and 43R1 are used both when selecting a heating unit to start operation, and when ending cooking.

Next, Fig. 56 will be described. Fig. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9. It is also a schematic diagram showing that the operation of the heating source used during cooperative cooking is restricted.
The coordinated cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 56 is the "first coordinated cooking mode" described in FIG.

In this example, the "first coordinated cooking mode" operates the induction heating source 9 in cooking process 1, and after the heating operation is completed, operates the microwave heating source 189 as a heating source in cooking process 2. Also, in cooking process 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 55, one collaborative cooking mode KM3 is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the collaborative cooking mode until the input key 43MS is subsequently pressed.

P2 is a heating and cooking period (cooking step 1). Note that this cooking step 1 does not include the "preheating step" (see Figs. 59, 60 and 64) in which the food to be cooked is not actually heated.
P3 is a pause period (also called a "transition period TR") during which the operation of the heating means used in cooking step 1 is temporarily stopped and heating by the other heating means is started in order to switch from cooking using the heating means used in cooking step 1 to cooking in cooking step 2, which uses a different heating means. The length of this pause period depends on the timing of the user's operation. In other words, the earlier the user issues a command to start cooking step 2, the shorter this pause period will be.
P4 is a heating and cooking period (cooking process 2) by the heating means (the heat source may be either single or multiple) used in cooking process 2.

In this embodiment 1, a "cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4" is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 will be described in detail in Fig. 65, and an example of a cooking menu that utilizes the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of this "hamburger steak," the preheating process is performed by the induction heating source 9, but the heating operation of the preheating process is not stopped at the start of cooking process 1. Therefore, from an electrical standpoint, the oven heating source 189 and microwave heating source 189 in charge of cooking process 1 and the induction heating source 9 are energized in parallel during the same time period.

In other words, in the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4, the heating source (induction heating source 9 in the above explanation) that has been operating before cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of cooking process 1, and both the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 or microwave heating source 189 may be energized during cooking process 1.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following explanation will be based on the assumption that the linked cooking mode KM3 includes the linked preheat cooking mode KM4.

As is clear from FIG. 56, when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (on the displayed first specific screen 30SP).

Specifically, among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L, at least the input key 43L1 is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This "disabled" means that a valid command signal is not sent from the input key 43L1 to the integrated control device MC, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the integrated control device MC does not process the command signal as a valid command signal. In either case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed, the right operation unit 40R of the right heating unit 17HR can be used. If the right heating unit 17HR is already being used for another control menu (heating operation is ongoing), the right heating unit 17HR can be used as is. On the other hand, since it is determined (by the integrated control device MC) that the linked cooking mode KM3 cannot be used, the above-mentioned "disable use" process is not performed.

Therefore, only the left heating section 17HL is "occupied" by the selection of the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the induction heating source 9 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the left side) of the two heating sections is "restricted." Note that, when the right heating section 17HL is not being used for other cooking, this right heating section 17HR may also be in an occupied state, or may not be in an occupied state. Note that the control program may be modified so that the "occupied" state is entered at the point when the input key 43MS is pressed after the coordinated cooking mode is selected.

Here, the use of the induction heating source 9 will be described, focusing on the function of the input operation unit 40.
As described above, the input operation unit has the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
After the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L has started, this input key 43L1 can stop the operation at any time. That is, when the input key 43L1 is pressed once at first, it has the function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when the input key 43L1 is pressed once again after induction heating has started, it can instantly stop the heating operation.

On the other hand, the input operation section has an input key 44L. This input key 44L is a touch-type input key with which a "control menu" for induction heating cooking by the left heating section 17HL can be selected.
In this case, the "control menu" includes "boiling water,""boiling,""cookingrice,""frying(automatic)," etc., from which only one can be selected.

To select cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. When the input key 43MC is pressed, if the above-mentioned "permission conditions" are met, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed.
When this first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 56), or when a "start input command" for switching to the cooperative cooking mode is entered using the input key 43MS (see FIG. 57), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, and at the same time, the heating source to be used becomes "occupied."

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the "occupied state" will be described.
There are two methods by which the integrated control device MC can occupy the left heating section 17HL.
(1) First Method:
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, and the input functions of the other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, and 44L are all disabled.
In this case, after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input key 43MS was pressed, the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L begins.
Therefore, when induction heating that has started (in the combined cooking mode KM3) is to be stopped, it is sufficient to press the input key 43L1 once.
Furthermore, in order to start heating again for additional heating in this state, the input key 43L1 can be pressed once again (the cooperative cooking mode is not cancelled even at this stage).
(2) Second Method:
The input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, and 43L4 in the left heating unit 17HL are disabled, except for the input key 44L, which remains enabled even when the cooperative cooking mode is entered.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is finalized only when the input key 44L is pressed once after the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Thereafter, when the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L is started and induction heating is started, the input function of the input key 43L1 is immediately restored. Therefore, the induction heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43L1 once. Moreover, the induction heating operation can be resumed by pressing the input key 43L1 again (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not released even at this stage).

In the following explanation, the first method will be selected, but the basic effect of this disclosure will not be affected if the second method is adopted.

As shown in FIG. 56, in cooking step 1 (P2), after induction heating has started, the user can increase or decrease the heat by operating the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L.

In cooking process 1, it is necessary to first press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) on the left operation unit 40L only once, at which point a command to start induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC.

It is also possible to omit the operation of the heating start command using the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, and have induction heating cooking start at a fixed heat level (low or standard heat level) a fixed time (e.g. 10 seconds) after the input using the input key 43MS.

Furthermore, in cooking process 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching input key 43L1 on left operation unit 40L.
When the heating operation is stopped, cooking step 1 ends immediately, but the combined cooking mode itself is not cancelled.

Therefore, the heating operation (linked cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation to restart the heating operation is the same as in the case of the single heating mode KM1 as described in Figures 47 (A) and (B), and it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 again just once to restart cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Furthermore, when the user specifies the heat level, by pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3, the heat level decreases or increases by one step each time it is pressed, and the desired heat level can be set.

As shown in FIG. 56, after cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated food is moved to the heating chamber 113. It is possible to place the metal dish used during induction heating directly in the heating chamber 113 and heat it with microwaves, but if the food is completely surrounded by metal, it is not possible to heat the food inside with microwaves, so it is necessary to transfer it to an open metal container, heat-resistant glass, or a porcelain container.

During the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwaves generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 are guided into the heating chamber 113, and the heating and cooking period (cooking step 2) (P4) begins.

After microwave heating is started by input key 43MS, the user can set the microwave heating control conditions as desired by operating various input keys 43M2, 43M3 on central operation unit 40M (default values can be changed). However, depending on the individual food being cooked that is the target of linked cooking mode KM3, there may be some restrictions on changing the control conditions. For example, the microwave heating output is basically 500W, so the control program does not allow this to be increased or decreased during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 56, after cooking step 2 (P4), there are two types of cases: the cooking step ends automatically when a predetermined time (default time) specified in the control program has elapsed without the need to set the microwave heating control conditions (e.g., heating time), and the cooking step ends at any stage by the user operating the input key 43MT on the central operation unit 40M.

In addition, once cooking step 2 is stopped, it is treated as if all cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 have been completed. Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is cancelled, and as in the case of implementing the combined cooking mode KM2, the input key 43M1 can be operated again to set a control menu such as "microwave manual" to perform additional heating and cooking. Note that if the operating program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 expects cooking step 3 to follow cooking step 2, the cooking mode will proceed to cooking step 3 after a transition period TR following cooking step 2.

As shown in FIG. 56, in this coordinated cooking mode KM3, only the left heating unit 17HL of the first heating source 9 is used, so there are no restrictions on the use of the right heating unit 17HR during the preparation period (P1) through cooking step 2 (P4). Therefore, during cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, another heating cooking can be performed simultaneously in parallel using the right heating unit 17HR. For example, the right operating unit (first operating unit on the right side) 40R can be used to perform an IH control menu item such as "boiling water" using the right heating unit 17HR.

Next, we will explain Figure 57.
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the combined cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source, and is an example in which the configuration of FIG. 56 is slightly modified.
As shown in FIG. 57, in the combined cooking mode KM3, the start time at which the operation of the heat source being used (in this case, the induction heating source 9) is restricted may be changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, at the stage of selecting the coordinated cooking mode KM3, i.e., when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP), the left heating source 17HL is not yet occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL is operable for input, and cooking from the IH control menu (e.g., "boiling water") can be selected in the single cooking mode KM1.

In other words, during this preparation period P1, it is possible to input a new (single cooking mode KM1) using the left operation unit 40L.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 43L1 of the various input keys on the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This is different from FIG. 56. All input keys on the left operation unit 40L may be disabled. Note that the meaning of "disable" in FIG. 57 is the same as that explained in FIG. 56.

Next, the basic operations of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in this embodiment 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 58 to 64.

Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram showing in chronological order the relationship between the input keys on the input operation unit and the cooking steps, etc., from the selection to the transition to the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 59 is an explanatory diagram showing in chronological order the relationship between the input operations and the display in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Figure 60 is explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various steps and operations in the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 61 is explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the various steps and operations in the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 62 is explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the various steps and operations in the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 63 is flowchart 1 showing the notification operation of the cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 64 is flowchart 2 showing the notification operation of the cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode.

Referring to Figure 58 .
FIG. 58 shows the case of a coordinated cooking mode KM3 (coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4) in which cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating section 17HL and cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113.
In Fig. 58, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to the start and end of a cooking process are shown in white rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are illustrated.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, pressing 43MS transitions to the linked cooking mode KM3 (at this stage, the heating cooking period P2 is entered).

When the user selects the left heating unit 17HL, cooking step 1 is carried out in the left heating unit 17HL.
For this reason, it is necessary to press the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L as shown in Fig. 58. Note that, since the control conditions such as heat and heating time are automatically displayed in the default setting, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the heating and cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 58, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M have been disabled.

When the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from that input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the induction heating operation stops at this stage and the heating and cooking period P2 ends.

Next, the heating pause period P3 is entered. In other words, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all enabled (each input key is indicated by a solid line frame).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all maintained as valid, so the left heating unit 17HL may be used for other cooking during the transition period TR or the heating and cooking period P4 (in this case, the control menu is selected in the single cooking mode KM1).

When the user touches input keys 43M1 or 43MS on the central operation unit 40M, cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 starts. Then, by pressing input key 43MT, cooking step 2 can be ended at any time.

Note that cooking process 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released as soon as cooking process 2 ends.

Therefore, if you want to perform additional heating in the heating chamber 113 again using the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 immediately after the end of cooking step 2, you can operate the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc., and the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2.

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (e.g., within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode, and the process may wait for the user's input (operation of the input key 43MS).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can remove the food from the heating chamber 113 and check the doneness, etc., and if it is not heated enough, he or she can immediately return the food to the heating chamber 113 and touch the input key MS waiting for additional operation by the user. This method also improves usability for the user.

Referring to Figure 59 .
The operation procedure for transitioning to the composite cooking mode KM2 basically requires four inputs as shown in Fig. 59. In other words, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3, and 43MS. When transitioning to the composite cooking mode KM2, the input key 43R1 or 43L1 must be operated to actually perform heating operation of the induction heating source 9.

On the other hand, the operation procedure to switch to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 requires four inputs as shown in FIG. 59. In other words, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS.

When switching to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 as described above, the user operates the input key 43M2 on the central operation unit 40M, and then operates the input key 43R1 on the right operation unit 40R to operate the right heating unit 17HR first.

When the user selects to use the left heating unit 17HL in the coordinated cooking mode, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

In this way, after switching to the linked cooking mode KM3, the start of the heating operation can be commanded from the operation unit corresponding to the heating source. The heating stop operation can also be performed from the same operation unit, so that the user does not get confused about the location of the operation unit or input keys when starting and stopping heating.

Next, we will explain Figure 60.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing various steps in the coordinated cooking mode on the horizontal axis, and the operation of the main components such as user operations and the display unit on the vertical axis.

FIG. 60 shows the process up to the start of cooking operation in the combined cooking mode KM3.
In item A on the left side of Fig. 60, "user operation" refers to various input operations in central operation unit 40M and right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" process, five operations A1 to A5 are performed.

"Pressing relay button" in A1 refers to operating the input key 43MC to select the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
The "menu selection" of A2 refers to the selection of a desired cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This selection is made using the input key 43M1.

The "heat source selection" of A3 is an operation for selecting either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed by the input key 43M2. In this example, the case where the right heating section 17HR is selected is shown.
"Pressing the start button" in A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
"Pressing the right IH input button" in A5 refers to operating the input key 43R1 of the right operation section 40R.

In item B on the left side of Fig. 60, "cooking process" indicates the type of process up to the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The process here is different from the cooking process 1 and cooking process 2.
"Selecting a coordinated cooking mode" in B1 indicates a process of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 corresponding to that object.
"Grill heat source on standby" in B2 indicates a period during which the oven heat source 188 is on standby. "Heating" in B3 indicates a period during which induction heating is performed by the right heating unit 17HR.

In item C on the left side of FIG. 60, "left IH display unit" refers to the left side display unit 31L.
"Off (operation not accepted)" in C1 means that no information is displayed on the left display unit 31L. As described above, until the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60), the user is performing input operations while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user will use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the left display unit 31 is not started as part of putting the left heating unit 17HL into an "occupied state." At the same time, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

"Off (accepts normal operations)" in C2 means that no information is displayed on the left display unit 31L. However, after the input commanding the start of the transition to the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP has been completed. Therefore, it is determined that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, and there is no longer any possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, there is no need to put the left heating unit 17HL in an "occupied state." For this reason, at this stage, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is made available for acceptance. By actually pressing the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L, the control menu (for example, "boil water") of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected.

In item D on the left side of FIG. 60, "Right IH display unit" refers to the display content of the right side display unit 31R.
"Off (no operation accepted)" in D1 means that no information is displayed on the right display unit 31R.
As described above, until the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60), the user is performing input operations while viewing the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the right display unit 31 is not started in conjunction with the right heating unit 17HR being in an "occupied state." At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

Thereafter, when the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has already ended.
The "heating standby state" of D2 refers to a state in which the right heating unit 17HR is waiting for a user operation A5 after the user has confirmed that the right heating unit 17HR will be used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, this is the stage in which the right heating unit 17HR is waiting for a command to start cooking process 1.

"Preheat display" in D3 means displaying information on the preheating state on the right display section 31R. For example, it is to display information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature (e.g., 180°C) is reached.

In item E on the left side of FIG. 60, “central display section” refers to the display content of integrated display section 30 .
The "initial screen of coordinated cooking" in E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 88).
"Change menu" at E2 means operating the input key 43M1 to select one desired food item from among the linked cooking modes and to select the corresponding linked cooking mode (see FIG. 89).

"Change selected heating source (select right IH)" in E3 refers to selecting the right heating unit 17HR while viewing the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made using the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 89).

The "right IH input button press guidance display" in E4 means that the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 displays a message that the input key 43R1 located on the right operation unit 40R needs to be operated in order to start coordinated cooking. In other words, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 to start cooking step 1 of coordinated cooking (see FIG. 90 (A)).

The "IH preheating display" in E5 indicates that the right heating section 17HR has started preheating. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180°C is reached. In contrast, the integrated display section (central display section) 30 displays information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress" or "Preheating completed" in the first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 90 (B)).

In item F on the left side of FIG. 60, “notification means” refers to the notification contents notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .
As shown by F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooking is performed, a total of five audio notifications are issued.
The notification content of F1 is, for example, "This is a hamburger steak. It will be cooked on the induction cooker and then finished on the range grill." In other words, the first specific screen 30SP also displays the food to be cooked and the cooking process, but the same information is also notified to the user by voice.

The content of the notification in F2 is, for example, "This is fried chicken. It will be cooked in the range grill and then finished on the induction cooker." In other words, in response to the user's menu selection operation A2, the result of the collaborative cooking mode selection and an explanation of the cooking process are displayed in real time.

The content of the notification for F3 is, for example, "Right IH." In other words, because the user selected right IH (right heating unit) 17HR through operation A3, the result of the heating source selection is immediately notified.

The notification content of F4 is, for example, "Press the right IH input button to start heating." In other words, the user is asked to perform operation A3 of menu selection, followed by operation A4 of the start button (input key 43MS). When this operation A4 is performed, the user is asked to operate the "input key" on the right operation unit 40L. Note that the input key referred to here is input key 43R1.

The notification content of F5 is, for example, "Preheating the pan to 180°C."
After coordinated cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR begins, and preheating operation is started so that the temperature of the heated object N, such as a pot placed on the top plate 15, reaches the target temperature of 180°C, and this fact is notified.

In item G on the left side of Figure 60, "left IH drive unit" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In item H on the left side of Figure 60, "right IH drive unit" refers to the operation of inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating step" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven and a preheating step is being performed.

In item J on the left side of Figure 60, "range grill drive unit" refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the power supply to the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B that make up the oven heating source 188, and the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 of the microwave heating source 189. In other words, it collectively refers to the operation of the drive unit that performs the above-mentioned "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

Next, we will explain Figure 61.
Fig. 61 shows a case where "hamburger steak" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. As in Fig. 60, this is an explanatory diagram in which the horizontal axis shows various steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the vertical axis shows user operations and the operation of the main components such as the display unit.

The meanings of items A to J on the left side of FIG. 61 are the same as those explained in FIG.
In FIG. 61, the operation content of A11 is to first select the right heating unit 17HR as cooking process 1 (corresponding to cooking process B11 in FIG. 61) in order to cook a hamburger steak, and then press the input key 43R1.

"Press IH off/on button" in A12 means that the user first selects the right heating unit 17HR as the input switch and presses input key 43R1 to end hamburger cooking process 1.

The "open grill door" in A13 is an operation in which the user opens the door 114.
"Press the start button" in A14 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the time button" in A15 refers to pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

"Press the start button" in A16 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the cancel button (canceling grill heating in the middle of the process)" in A17 means pressing the oven heat source 188.
"Pressing the cancel button" in A18 refers to pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, the series of heating operations in the coordinated cooking mode is all terminated (the coordinated cooking mode is cancelled).

In item B (cooking process) of FIG. 61, "IH heating process" in B11 indicates the induction heating process in the right heating unit 17HR selected by the user.
The "grill heating standby step" of B12 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is on standby until the user performs the operation A14.
The “grill heating process” of B13 indicates a heating process using an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189.

The "grill heating extension standby process" in B14 indicates a standby period during which the grill heating process in B13 is once completed, and the user is awaited to determine whether or not to command an extension process.
The "extended heating step" of B15 is a step in which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven again (power is started) because the user performed operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extended standby step of B14. The extended heating step is started by pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 61, the "extended heating process" B15 can be performed multiple times, not just once, if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, once the "cancel button" of A18 is pressed, the coordinated cooking mode is cancelled when input key 43MT is operated, so to cook again in heating chamber 113, oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189 must be operated using the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display) of Fig. 61, "Preheat display" of C11 refers to displaying the target preheat temperature in the preheating process on the right display section 31R or the left display section 31L (see Fig. 80 and Fig. 83). For example, the target preheat temperature (e.g. 180°C) is displayed.

C11a to C11d show progress display 1 to progress display 4. For example, progress display 1 is a display that says "preheating", and "progress display 4" is a display that says "suitable temperature". This "suitable temperature" indicates that the object to be heated (such as a pan) N has been heated to the target preheating temperature (for example, 180°C). During the preheating display (C11), the progress displays 1 to 4 (C11a to C11d) are displayed in accordance with the progress of preheating (temperature rise). In this FIG. 61, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating unit 17HL is displayed on the left display unit 31L.

The "cooking process" in C12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HR has been cooking the object N since it reached the target preheating temperature (e.g., 180°C). In other words, it indicates that cooking process 1 has started.

Item E (center display section) in FIG. 61 shows the display contents of the integrated display section 30.
The "IH preheating display" of E11 displays on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display section 30 that preheating has started by the left heating section 17HL (see FIG. 90).

In Figure 61, the "IH heating display" of E12 indicates that preheating has been completed and heating is possible with the left heating section 17HL (see Figure 91). In other words, it indicates that the stage is now moving on to cooking process 1 using induction heating (IH heating).

The "grill door opening and closing operation guidance display" in E13 prompts the user to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber (heating compartment) 113 (where cooking process 2 will be performed) since induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed (see FIG. 93). One example of additional information 331 in this scene is a display that reads, "Please place food in the heating compartment."

As shown in FIG. 92, if the user wishes to stop the induction heating operation using the left IH coil 17HL at any time during the cooking, additional information 331 stating "Press the left IH on/off button" may be displayed.

In FIG. 61, E14's "alternating display of heat power change display and start prompt display" indicates that the heat power for range grill cooking (combined heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further indicates that grill cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 94).

In FIG. 61, the "grill heating display" of E15 indicates that the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2) (see FIG. 95). In this embodiment 1, a method is adopted in which both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously, and the food to be cooked is heated from both the inside and outside at the same time by the synergistic effect of the microwaves and radiant heat.

In FIG. 61, E16's "alternating display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" indicates that the grill heating process B13 has ended, and that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and grill heating can be performed again (see FIG. 96).

If the user does not wish to perform extended heating, the display indicates that the user can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to end the linked cooking mode without performing extended heating (see FIG. 96). These two types of information are displayed alternately on the first specific screen 30SP, for example at intervals of a few seconds.

The "time setting display" of E17 displays the result of setting the extended time when the cooking time is extended using input key 43M2 and grill heating is performed again (see FIG. 97). After this time setting display, the aforementioned "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) of FIG. 61, the notification content of F11 is "Preheating the pan to 180°C will begin." This is a voice notification that the preheating process has begun by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating process B11.

In FIG. 61, the notification of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking." This notifies the user that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached the target temperature (e.g. 180°C) and prompts the user to start heating using the right operating unit 40R.

FA1 in FIG. 61 is a notification of the first reference information. In the following explanation, this "first reference information" FA1 will be referred to as "reference information 1." The gist of this reference information may be displayed in the form of text or graphics on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 1."

The notification of reference information 1 (FA1) is performed when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the start of cooking process 1 (G12 in FIG. 61) by the left IH coil 17L.
This will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 61, the notification for F13 is "The pan is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when placing food inside." This is to alert the user that cooking process 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR has finished, and that food should be moved to the heating chamber 113 for cooking process 2, and that the top plate 15, etc. are hot.

The notification content of F14 is "Press the start button to begin heating the range grill."
This notifies the user that range grill cooking can be started by operating the input key 43MS.
The notification content of F15 is "Starting standard range grill finish." This notifies that cooking step 2 of the range grill will start and cooking (e.g., hamburger steak) will be completed. Note that "Starting standard" means that the heat during range grill cooking will be "standard."

FA2 in FIG. 61 is a notification of second reference information. In the following explanation, this "second reference information" FA2 will be referred to as "reference information 2." The gist of this reference information may be displayed in the form of text or graphics on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 2."

The notification of reference information 2 (FA2) is made when a predetermined time (second elapsed time TN2) has elapsed since the start of cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 61) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113. Or, it is made when a predetermined temperature (second rising temperature TN2) has been exceeded since the start of cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 61). These will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 63.

The notification F16 informs the user that cooking on the range grill has finished and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). It also informs the user that the linked cooking mode KM3 will end without extended heating if the user operates the cancel button (input key 43MT). In addition, it warns the user that the heating chamber 113 is hot and that the user should wait until it cools down before cleaning the interior.

The notification F17 notifies the user that after the cooking process (B13) of the range grill is finished, the user will operate the extended heating to start heating for an additional 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After this notification F17, the notification F16 is issued again. If the user again commands extended heating, notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH drive unit) of FIG. 61, G11 indicates the induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows the induction heating operation for cooking process 1 which is carried out following the preheating process.

In item J (range grill driving section) of Figure 61, J11 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and cooking process 2 is carried out during this period.
J12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are activated for the extended heating step.

Next, Fig. 62 will be described. Fig. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various steps and operations when "fried chicken", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode.
As in Figures 60 and 61, the horizontal axis indicates various steps in the collaborative cooking mode, and the vertical axis indicates user operations and the operation of major components such as the display unit.

In FIG. 62, the operation content of A21 in item A (user operation) is to first select the left heating unit 17HL as a preheating process to cook fried chicken, and press the input key 43L1 (see G21 in FIG. 62).

The operation of A22 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113. At this stage, induction heating (preheating) has already started in the left heating section 17HL.
The operation of A23 is called "pressing the start button" and is performed by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By the operation of A23, the "range grill driving unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. Note that the "range grill driving unit" refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating unit 17HL is completed, the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill driving unit" in the heating chamber 113 is started.
In this way, since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately even when the oven heating source 188 is energized, the time to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is determined taking into account the time required to raise the temperature.

The operation A24 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating process B23 by the "range grill driving unit" is completed. This allows the food to be removed from the heating chamber 113.

Meanwhile, even before the door 114 is opened and the food item (food) is removed from the heating chamber 113, the cooking utensil for deep-frying (food item N, such as a dedicated pot) is heated in the left heating section 17HL (cooking process G22), and the cooking oil is heated (the preheating process is started).

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M2 called the time button in order to perform the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill driving unit" again.
The operation A26 is to press the input key 43MS to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation A27 is to press the input key 43MT to end the grill heating process B23 at any time during the process, thereby canceling the cooperative cooking mode.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 62, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is a preheating step using the induction heating source 9, in which preheating is performed using the left heating section 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and then waits for the operation A23 to start heating.
B23 is a grill heating step (cooking step 1).
B24 is cooking process 2 in which heating is performed by the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user in the IH heating process.

Next, item C (left IH display unit) will be described with reference to FIG.
The display C21 indicates that preheating is being performed by the left heating section 17HL.
Displays C21a to C21d are displayed in sequence during the period of display C21, with C21a being progress display 1, C21b being progress display 2, C21c being progress display 3, and C21d being progress display 4.
The display C22 indicates completion of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL (cooking process).

In FIG. 62, item E (center display section) will be described.
The display E21 is an IH preheating display, and it can be seen that the preheating operation is being performed by the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 98(A)).
E22 is a grill door opening/closing operation guidance display, which prompts the user to open the door 114 and place the food to be cooked (food) into the heating chamber 113 to perform the grill heating step B23 (see Figure 98 (B)).

E23 alternates between a heat level change indication and a start prompt indication, and indicates that when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit," the heat level can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing input key 43MS (see FIG. 99 (A)).

E24 is a range heating display, which indicates that the cooking heat can be changed when driving the "range grill drive unit", and after cooking has begun, displays the remaining time until completion, etc. (see Figure 100).
As shown in Figures 101 (A) and (B), E25 alternately displays an extension operation guide display and an IH preheating completion display.
After the cooking process B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit," is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2), and a message is displayed indicating that the heating and cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, it is displayed that preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has been completed. That is, these two types of information are displayed alternately in the first specific screen 30SP at intervals of, for example, several seconds.

E26 is a time setting display, which indicates that the cooking process B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit", will be performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see FIG. 102).
.

Item F (notification means) will be described with reference to FIG.
The notification F21 is, for example, a voice message such as "Preheating pan to 180° C." that notifies the user of the target preheat temperature and that the preheating process has begun by the left heating unit 17HL.
The notification of F22 is "The left IH will soon reach the set temperature. Please put food inside the oven." This is to inform the user that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target preheating temperature (e.g., 180°C) and to encourage the user to put food or the like into the heating chamber 113 so that range grill cooking can begin in the heating chamber 113.

The notification of F23 reads, "Press the start button to begin heating in the microwave."
That is, pressing the input key 43MS notifies the user that grill cooking will begin.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "The range is starting to cook at standard temperature." In this case, "standard temperature" means that the heat is at a standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 62 is a notification of the third reference information. In the following explanation, this "third reference information" will be referred to as "reference information 3." Note that the gist of this reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 using text or graphics. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 3."

The notification of reference information 3 is made when a predetermined time (third elapsed time TN3) has elapsed since cooking process 1 (B23 in FIG. 62) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by user operation input (A23 in FIG. 62). This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 64.

The notification F25 is related to the user's operation when the cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, "The cooking on the range grill is finished. You can extend the cooking time by pressing the time button.
Please remove food from the oven and begin cooking on the induction cooker."

The F26 notification informs you that cooking on the range grill will start again after cooking on the range grill has finished. For example, the notification "Range grill starting for 2 minutes" is made. This means that because the extension time has been set to 2 minutes, cooking on the range grill will start for the next 2 minutes.

FA5 in FIG. 62 is a notification of the fifth reference information. In the following explanation, this "fifth reference information" FA5 will be referred to as "reference information 5." Note that the gist of this reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 using text or graphics. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 5."

Reference information 5 is notified when a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed since cooking process 3 (B23 in FIG. 62) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by user operation input (A26 in FIG. 62). This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 64.

In FIG. 62, in item G (left IH drive unit), the preheating process of G21 is a preheating process by the left heating unit 17HL, and indicates the drive period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 62, G22 also indicates the period of heating operation (driving inverter circuit 81L) for the cooking process by left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (range grill drive section), the heating step J21 indicates the drive period by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. Note that the combined cooking mode described in FIG. 61 is for cooking "fried chicken," so in reality, only the microwave heating source 189 needs to be driven.

Next, we will explain Figures 63 to 65.
63 to 65 show the process by which the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" are notified when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

FIG. 63 shows a case where hamburger steak is cooked in the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
FIG. 63 is a flowchart corresponding to the various steps of the coordinated cooking mode shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the cooking step 1 of the hamburger steak is performed, for example, by the left heating unit 17HL, and the cooking step 2 is performed by the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). That is, the cooking step 2 uses both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking process 1) is started on the object N that has already been heated to the preheat temperature (e.g., 180°C) by the left heating unit 17HL, and as explained in FIG. 61, a voice notification F12 is issued saying, "The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please begin cooking." Note that this "set temperature" refers to the preheat temperature set by the user. The default value is 180°C. Also, this cooking process 1 does not begin from the point in time when the IH coil 17L begins induction heating. The start point is when the object N that has reached the preheat temperature is placed on the object (in this case, a hamburger steak) and heating begins.

In the next step SA2, measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
The elapsed time TN1 is measured by a clock circuit 96.

At Step SA3, it is judged whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded.
When grilling a hamburger steak, three things are important: the amount (weight) of the hamburger steak, the grilling time, and the grilling heat. If the standard time for cooking a given amount of hamburger steak (e.g., 300 g) at a standard heat level (e.g., 1000 W) is "7 minutes," then the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

If the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know the approximate timing for turning the hamburger steak upside down (flipping it over) halfway through, in the above example, the notification FA1 at the point when five minutes have elapsed will let the user know the timing for turning it upside down. The actual notification content is, for example, "Five minutes have elapsed since heating began. Heating will be completed in two minutes."

In the case of other linked cooking modes, the notification will also let you know when to add water, seasonings, or cooking liquid during cooking, for example.

If the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed, step SA3 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SA4, where the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1.
In synchronization with this, reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed on the left display section 31L.

After step SA4, a decision is made as to whether the user wants to stop the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if a stop command is given, the process proceeds to step SA6.

In step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As described in FIG. 61, a voice notification F13 is issued to the effect that "The pot is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself when placing food inside the oven."

The user moves the food to be cooked (in this case, a hamburger steak) into the heating chamber 113. In this case, the metal pan used for induction heating is not used. Instead, tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a dedicated tray 145 (not shown) is used. The hamburger steak is placed in such tableware or tray and then placed in the heating chamber 113.

When the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is closed, in the next step SA7, as explained in FIG. 61, a voice notification F14 is issued to the effect that "Press the start button to begin heating the range grill."

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes "Yes", and range grill cooking is started as cooking process 2.
As explained in FIG. 61, a voice notification F15 saying "Standard oven grill finish setting is about to begin" is issued (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189 that serves as the heat source for the range grill is driven at a standard heating power. For example, as described above, operation is started at an output of 500 W.
Additionally, upper heater 163A of oven heating source 188, which serves as the heat source for the range grill, begins to be energized at 1000 W.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the point in time of step SA10 is started (SA11). Then, when it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has been exceeded (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, where the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of the second reference information (reference information 2). In synchronization with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 2 (FA2).

The notification content of reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has passed since the start of cooking process 2. If the standard time for cooking process 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, setting the elapsed time TN2 to 4 minutes and 30 seconds will allow the user to know that cooking process 2 is about to end 30 seconds before the end of cooking process 2.

It is generally said that once ingredients are heated to a certain degree, the degree of heating of the ingredients progresses rapidly. In particular, if the user is not accustomed to cooking with that ingredient, there is a concern that the ingredient may be overheated. Therefore, in cooking process 1, reference information 1 (FA1) is notified before the end of the process.

Similarly, in cooking step 2, reference information 2 (FA2) is notified before the end of the cooking step. This makes it possible to prompt the user to pay attention to the end of cooking and to prepare for the next step.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After this, the notification of F16 shown in Fig. 61 is made. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). Furthermore, by operating the cancel button (input key 43MT), all cooking steps of "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode are terminated.

Next, we will explain Figure 64.
In Fig. 64, "fried chicken" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and cooking process 1 is performed using the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). Cooking process 2 is performed using the left heating unit 17HL, for example.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 64, there is also a cooking process 3, which is carried out in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).
FIG. 64 is a flowchart corresponding to the various steps of the coordinated cooking mode shown in FIG.

As explained in FIG. 62, when cooking step 1 is started (A23), a voice notification F24 is issued, for example, "Microwave, starting standard finish." In this case, "standard finish" means that the heat is at a standard level. For example, heating operation is started with a microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

In the next step SB2, measurement of the temperatures of the heating chamber 113 and the food to be cooked is started. That is, measurement of the temperature rise TN3 of the chicken meat that is the base for the "fried chicken" is started.
The temperature TN3 is measured by a temperature detection circuit 93.

At the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When the chicken meat that is the ingredient of "fried chicken" is heated with microwaves, the temperature rises, and it is determined whether the measurement result of this temperature has reached a predetermined rise in temperature TN3.

The rate at which the temperature TN3 rises varies depending on three factors: the amount (weight) of fried chicken, the cooking time, and the heat. The temperature rise pattern when a given amount (e.g., 300 g) of fried chicken ingredients is cooked using standard heat (e.g., microwaves with an output of 500 W) is stored as control data by the integrated control device MC based on the results of prior experiments, etc.

In other words, the integrated control device MC has data that shows that when finishing with standard microwave output (500 W), it is best to heat up to a certain temperature and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the integrated control device MC notifies the user when the temperature has risen to that elevated temperature (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can be notified in advance that the time to end the (microwave) heating of the fried chicken is approaching by the audio notification of reference information 3 (FA3). In addition, the user can also be notified in synchronization with this by reference display 3 on the integrated display unit 30.

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to the cooking time exceeding). The user may also stop it midway. For example, if the control program is such that one minute after the temperature has risen to TN3, the integrated control device MC stops the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating operation may be stopped at the user's discretion before one minute has elapsed after receiving a notification of reference information 3 indicating that the temperature has risen to TN3.

Then proceed to cooking step 2, which uses induction heating unit 17H. To do this, the user must move the food to be cooked in heating chamber 113 onto top plate 15. This will be explained in Figure 65.

In FIG. 64, step SB7 is a notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in cooking process 2. This is determined based on the elapsed time TN4 or the increased temperature TN4 from the point when the user places the food to be cooked on the food to be heated N, which has been heated to a high temperature by preheating, after preheating is completed by induction heating unit 17H.

In this step SB8, the user does not perform any input operation on the input operation unit 40. The food to be cooked is simply moved. Therefore, the starting point of the elapsed time TN4 is the information that detects the timing when the temperature of the food to be heated N drops. Since the temperature of the food to be heated N drops sharply once the food to be cooked is placed or inserted, this point in time is detected by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the elapsed time from this detection time can be counted.

The next step SB8 is a step for determining whether or not to issue a command to carry out cooking step 3 in heating chamber 113 after cooking step 2 has been completed. The user carries out the operation of A26 shown in FIG.
To do this, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before step SB7, the user must return the food that has been induction heated (cooking step 2) on top plate 15 back into heating chamber 113. This will be described with reference to FIG.

In the next step SB9, cooking step 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification F26 is for informing the user that cooking on the range grill will be started again after cooking on the range grill has finished. For example, a notification such as "Range grill will start for 2 minutes" is made.

In the next step SB10, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start of the cooking process 3 is started.
The elapsed time TN5 is measured by a clock circuit 96.

In next step SB11, it is determined whether or not an elapsed time TN5 has elapsed.
For example, if the cooking time for the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to 2 minutes before the start of cooking step 3 (before step SB8), the elapsed time is set to 1 minute 30 seconds, for example. In other words, it is set to 30 seconds before the end of cooking step 3.

If the elapsed time TN5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SB12.
In step SB12, reference information 5 (FA5) is notified by voice. Reference information 5 includes, for example, guidance such as "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." Since the user knows that the final cooking process is about to end, the user can start preparations for removing the "fried chicken" from heating chamber 113 from the point in time when reference information 5 is notified. Synchronously with this, reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SB13, the cooking process 3 is automatically stopped.
A notification F25 shown in Fig. 62 is also made. This notification is related to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, it may say "Cooking on the range grill is finished. You can extend cooking by pressing the time button. Please remove food from the oven." Note that cooking step 3 can be stopped by opening the door 114 without the user having to operate the input operation unit 40.

Next, we will explain Figure 65.
Fig. 65 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Fig. 65 is a time chart corresponding to Figs. 62 and 64.
In Fig. 65, #1 to #9 indicate user operations and state changes of the cooking appliance 1. The other symbols correspond to Fig. 62 and Fig. 64.

In FIG. 65, before starting cooking step 1 to cook "fried chicken", the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1 (operation A21 in FIG. 62).
Then, preheating is started for the object N placed on the top plate 15. In this case, the object N is a metal pan for deep frying, in which a certain amount of cooking oil is poured.

Meanwhile, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and places ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
After closing the door 114, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This operation is performed by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 64, reference information 3 is notified (SB4 in FIG. 64).

During this cooking step 1, the preheating of the left induction heating unit 17HL is also completed (for example, the heated unit N is heated to the standard preheating temperature of 180°C). The completion of preheating is notified to the user by the notification unit AN through voice and text (#2).

The user can stop microwave cooking at any time during cooking step 1. To stop cooking, the user simply opens door 114. Note that pressing input key 40MT on central operation unit 40M will cancel the selection of "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode.

By opening door 114, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and cooking step 1 ends (#3).
Next, the user moves the food material that has been heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N that is being preheated on the top plate 15 (#4).

Then, cooking process 2 is started in the left heating section 17HL (#5).
In cooking process 2, the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed first before starting preheating, and at that point a command to start induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC.

To start cooking process 2 (#5), the user does not need to operate the input operation unit 40 in any particular way.
The cooking process 2 starts when the food to be cooked is placed on the preheated food N and is ready to be heated.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user operating the left operating unit 40L.

The user then moves the food again.
First, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 113, and the door 114 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

5
Reference information 5 (FA5) is notified when a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed from the time when cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by user input (A26 in Figure 61).

The reference information 5 (FA5) includes information such as, for example, "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." In addition, since the user knows that the final cooking process is about to finish, the user can start preparing to remove the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the point in time when the reference information 5 is notified. In synchronization with this, the integrated display unit 30 also displays the reference information 5 (FA5).

Thereafter, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and cooking step 3 is completed (#7). Note that cooking step 3 can be stopped immediately if the user opens door 114.
Then, the user moves the food heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object N that is being preheated on the top plate 15 (#8). In this case, since the object N is maintained in a heated state by induction heating, it may be further heated by induction (cooking step 4) (#9). In this case, if the object N is already in a preheated state, it is sufficient to simply move the object to be cooked to the object N on the top plate 15.

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation unit 40L. In other words, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L that corresponds to the left heating unit 17HL.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 65 can shorten the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1.
That is, cooking step 1 is started by placing ingredients (food to be cooked) in heating chamber 113 before the completion of preheating of induction heating source 9 or notification of the completion of preheating.

Because the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed before the completion of cooking process 1, the food to be cooked can be transferred immediately to the food to be heated N on the top plate 15 after the end of cooking process 1, and cooking process 2 can be started.

Note that cooking step 3 and cooking step 4 are not necessarily required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the user's wishes, it is sufficient to finish with the necessary cooking steps.

In addition, in FIG. 65, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the induction heating source 9 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time after cooking step 2 is completed by the left operation unit 40L. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 65, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

Next, we will explain Figure 66.
Fig. 66 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, similar to Fig. 65. Fig. 66 is a time chart corresponding to Figs. 62 and 64.
In Fig. 66, #1 to #9 indicate user operations and state changes of the cooking appliance 1, as explained in Fig. 65. The other symbols correspond to Fig. 62 and Fig. 64.

The difference between FIG. 66 and FIG. 65 will now be described.
FIG. 66 shows a case where cooking step 1 is started in the heating chamber 113 after the induction heating source 9 has completed preheating the object N to be heated and a notification of this (#2) has been received.

When the completion of preheating of the object N by the induction heating source 9 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP and the left and right display units 31L, 31R, and is also notified by voice via the voice synthesis device 95, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and places the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
After closing the door 114, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 64, reference information 3 is notified (SB4 in FIG. 64). After this, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 65.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 66, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1 is longer than that in FIG.
However, since heating of the ingredients (food to be cooked) in the heating chamber 113 starts after the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed or a notification of the completion of the preheating is received, there is a guarantee that the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 can be started immediately when the food to be cooked is moved at the end of cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113. Therefore, this method is suitable for users who are not very familiar with the linked preheating cooking mode KM4.

In addition, in FIG. 66, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the induction heating source 9 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time after cooking step 2 is completed by the left operation unit 40L. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 66, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

In the configurations shown in Figures 66 and 67, the induction heating source 9 is first energized to start the preheating operation, while the cooking process 1 is carried out in the heating chamber 113.
The "linked preheat cooking mode" of the first embodiment is not limited to the cooking process 1 being performed in the heating chamber as described above.

Another coordinated preheating cooking mode is a method in which first, the induction heating source 9 is energized, the heated object N, such as a frying pan, is heated to a preheat target temperature (e.g., 180°C), and when the object N has reached the target temperature, the cooked object is placed on top of the heated object N, thereby starting cooking process 1.
After this preheating step, the food to be cooked may be moved into the heating chamber 113 while still placed on the food to be heated N, and cooking step 2 may be performed by heating the food to be cooked together with the food to be heated N in the heating chamber 113 using a microwave heating source 189 or an oven heating source 188.

Next, we will explain Figures 67 to 69.
Fig. 67 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device before switching to the coordinated cooking mode. Fig. 68 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until switching to the coordinated cooking mode. Fig. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the permission conditions and the determination results before switching to the coordinated cooking mode.

Now, Fig. 67 will be described. Steps ST2 to ST4 have been described with reference to Fig. 38, so they will be described briefly here.
In step ST2, the IH control unit 90 determines whether or not there is an abnormality. The heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 are also diagnosed by the integrated control device MC.

At step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays the message "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." At this stage, the integrated control device MC also checks whether it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 40 regarding the upper limit of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide a notification and voice guidance to prompt the user to select the heating means.
In step ST4, the initial standby screen (display screens 1, 2A, 2B) is displayed on the integrated display section 30, and warning information is also displayed (see FIG. 46).

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than the input key 43MC (e.g., 43M1) has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. In step STR1, it is checked whether the "permission conditions" are met. For example, the usage state of the heat source used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is checked.
The permission conditions and the determination results will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG.

In step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, it is determined whether individual heating cooking was selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which are the individual operation units, before the input key 43MC is pressed, and it is also determined whether the composite cooking mode KM2 was selected by the central operation unit 40M.

When the input key 43MC is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), the "combined cooking mode KM3" starts to be displayed as described above.
On the other hand, if the input key 43MC is not operated and the input key 43M1 is touched, the result of step STC is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 67, steps STR1 and STR2 are "operation step A" of the "permission conditions" that determine whether or not cooking in the combined cooking mode KM3 is permitted.
Step STR1 is a step for judging "permission condition 1."
Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more;
(2) If a power reduction command signal is received from an external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more. If these two conditions are met, step STR1 is judged as "Yes."

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) In the case where a central heating section is provided in the induction heating source 9, the central heating section is not in heating operation.
(2) Either or both of the oven heating means 188 and the microwave heating means 189 are not in heating operation.
(3) Neither the right heating section nor the left heating section of the induction heating source 9 is in heating operation (or only one of them is in heating operation).

If the above three conditions are met, the determination in step STR2 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 68).
If the determinations in steps STR1 and STR2 are "No", the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 inform the user that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, we will explain the meaning of the requirement of "5000 W or more" in "Permission Condition 1" above. For simplicity, the following explanation will not specifically mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the upper cooling fan 60.

The reason why the required demand (pre-securing of power demand) for implementing the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is 5,000 W or more is because the maximum (instantaneous) power of each heating source during operation when the collaborative cooking mode is executed is as follows:
(1) When operating the range (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) Oven operation: 2000W (upper heater: 1000W, lower heater: 10
00W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500W (microwave heating source 189: 500W, upper heater: 1000W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for the automatic control menu of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (two types: deep frying and suitable temperature) is 1500W.
Therefore, in the collaborative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate simultaneously.
In other words, the maximum power is 3500 W in total, which is the sum of the "1000 W" of the microwave heating source 189, the "1000 W" of the oven heating source 188 (2000 W is alternately energized by 1000 W each), and the "1500 W" of the induction heating source 9.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 5000W:
When the right heating section 17HR is performing heating at 3000 W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
When coordinated cooking mode KM3 is implemented from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) and coordinated cooking can be started.

If the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food (requiring a maximum of 1500W) in the right heating section 17HR, the remaining demand is 2500W.
When coordinated cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the 3500 W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heat of the right heating unit 17HR must be reduced.
However, if the heat is reduced while an automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not be performed properly, so the heat cannot be reduced during an automatic control menu.
In the end, 4000W is not enough to provide the necessary heat for the automatically controlled menus (two types: deep frying and optimum temperature).

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the coordinated cooking mode, it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether there is a demand (power demand secured in advance) of 5000 W, which is the sum of the power required for coordinated cooking (3500 W) and the power required for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (1500 W).

Next, we will explain Figure 68.
In the coordinated cooking mode of this embodiment 1, there is a pattern (first coordinated cooking mode) (see Figure 55) in which the induction heating source 9 is driven first, and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven.
There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in which the order is reversed.

The steps in FIG. 68 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
In step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and information on the coordinated cooking mode is displayed (hereinafter, this step may be referred to as "operation step B"). As shown in Fig. 54, in order to select a cooking menu for each coordinated cooking mode, the "name of the food to be cooked" (e.g., "hamburger steak") 330 is displayed as a type of identification information.

In the next step STR4, it is determined whether input key 43M1 has been operated. As explained in FIG. 54, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of identification information 330 indicating the name of the food that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) changes by sequentially moving upwards or downwards. In this embodiment 1, since there are a total of eight types of food, for example, operating the left input key 43M1 once in the state shown in FIG. 54 switches identification information 330 from "hamburger steak" to "gratin."

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), step STR5 is judged as "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step for selecting one of the two heating unit specifying parts 333R and 333L displayed on the first specifying screen. When the user operates the pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the user can select one of the heating unit specifying parts 333R and 333L.

The right heating unit 17HR may be set as the default, and the heating unit specification section 333R may be displayed first on the first specification screen 30SP, and the process may proceed directly to step STR7. In the example described in FIG. 54, when making hamburger steak using coordinated cooking, the left heating unit 17HL is set as the default, and the heating unit specification section 333L is displayed so that the left heating unit 17HL is selected preferentially.

The next step STR6 determines whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the collaborative cooking mode. If the input key 43MT has been operated, the result is determined to be "No" and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 70).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the result is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
If the input key 43MS is operated, the operation proceeds to step STR8 according to the operation program.
In step STR8 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "operation step C"), the control conditions such as the finally selected heating unit (e.g., right heating unit 17HR) and the microwave heating output value of 500 W are displayed in the first specific screen 30SP, and the process proceeds to the next step STR9, from which the mode shifts to the linked cooking mode. In other words, after this, if the input key 43R1 is pressed, the mode automatically advances to cooking in the linked cooking mode.

The display content of the first specific screen 30SP for step STR8 (operation step C) is that the first cooking step 1 uses the right heating unit 17HR, and the next cooking step 2 uses the microwave heating source 189. This information is displayed in the step display section 332. The content and transitions of these display screens will be explained in detail later.

When the cooperative cooking mode is entered, induction heating cooking starts from the moment the input key 43R1 on the right operation unit 40R is pressed. As explained in FIG. 39, induction heating does not start immediately. Step STR9 and onwards is step MS4 shown in FIG. 39.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, the result is determined to be "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If steps STR3 to STR7 are still cycling through even after 30 minutes have elapsed since the input key 43MC was operated, the main power may be automatically turned off or the process may return to step ST4 (see FIG. 67).

Next, we will explain Figure 69.
FIG. 69 shows the determination processes in steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG.
Step STX1 is the stage where the input key 43MC is operated.
The next step STX2 is a stage in which the integrated control device MC checks the latest state of the cooking appliance with respect to the above-mentioned permission conditions 1 and 2.

The next step STX3 in FIG. 69 is a judgment process stage that corresponds to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 67. In this step STX3, the integrated control device MC compares the latest state of the cooking device with the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above, and judges whether the state satisfies permission conditions 1 and 2.

In step STX3 of FIG. 69, notifications 1 to 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the voice synthesizer 95.
Moreover, Display 1 to Display 4 indicate the contents displayed on the integrated display section 30. Note that Display 1 to Display 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP that is displayed from step STR3 (operation step B) in Fig. 68, but are displayed on the integrated display section 30 where the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the prerequisites for switching to the coordinated cooking mode (permission conditions 1 and 2) are met.

Next, we will explain FIG. 70.
The control mode in Fig. 70 is for a (second) coordinated cooking mode different from the (first) coordinated cooking mode in Fig. 68. There are two heating sources used in the coordinated cooking mode in Fig. 70, the first to be used is the microwave heating source 189, and the second to be used is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9. The control mode in Fig. 70 differs greatly from that in Fig. 68 in step STR11.

In the "warm" (automatic range) setting of the range grill cooking (combined cooking) menu mentioned above, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature of the walls of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops microwave oscillation when the "target temperature" is reached. Therefore, if heat from a previous cooking session remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the start, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. Note that the default value for the "target temperature" here is 80°C, but this can be set higher or lower using the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (e.g., 70°C), there is a concern that the temperature measuring unit 158 may detect the high temperature too early and stop microwave heating before cooking is complete.

In the control shown in FIG. 70, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L display the fact that the coordinated cooking mode KM3 cannot be executed at that time (STR12). Furthermore, this may also be displayed on the integrated display unit 30. It is more reliable to notify by voice using the voice synthesis device 95. Note that the reason that this is displayed on the left and right display units 31L and 31R is because at this stage the user has not yet selected either the left or right heating unit 17HL, 17HR.

In addition, the first specific screen 30SP, which is displayed when permission conditions 1 and 2 are met, is not displayed at this stage, so in addition to or instead of displaying it on the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in Figures 67 and 69, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determined whether or not to transition to the collaborative cooking mode, but step STR11 in Figure 70 can be said to correspond to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, the user can be notified that the heating source to be used first (in this case, microwave heating source 189) is unavailable during the collaborative cooking mode selection stage.

In addition, when displaying or informing the user in step STR12 that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, the device may also convey useful information to the user, such as that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 will drop more quickly if the door 114 is opened.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used during execution of the coordinated cooking mode, regardless of the coordinated cooking.
In embodiment 1 of Figure 71, as described in Figure 60, the heating source used in the coordinated cooking mode is first the right heating section 17HR of the induction heating source 9, and the next heating sources used are the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

When the cooking process in the above-mentioned linked cooking mode has already progressed to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the user wishes to use the left heating unit 17HL to perform another cooking operation, and operates the left operating unit 40L, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, just like the "permission condition 1" described above, it is determined that the usage will not exceed the total power regulation value of 5000 W, for example.

If the determination in step SH2 is "No", the process proceeds to step SH8, where, for example, the maximum heat value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the sum of the maximum amount of power when the left heating unit 17HL is used and the amount of power of the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) during coordinated cooking does not exceed the regulated value of the power control unit 72, and the notification unit AN notifies the user of the limited value.

On the other hand, when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being performed with the heating source, if lowering the power (induction heating power) used by the left heating unit 17HL would still exceed the total permitted power amount, then in step SH8, disallowance processing for the left heating unit 17HL is performed. Specifically, a message indicating that it cannot be used is displayed on the left display unit 31L, and a voice notification is given by the voice synthesizer 95. The reason for the unavailability is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

In the next step SH3, the user's input operation result is analyzed to determine whether it is an "allowed control menu" that does not fall under a prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as a "prohibited control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance taking into consideration the amount of electricity to be used (required for cooking). For example, two items are specified: "(automatic) deep frying" as described in Figure 45, and rice cooking.
Both the (automatic) deep frying and rice cooking employ control methods that anticipate situations in which a large amount of electricity will be used during the cooking process, and so there is a concern that in order to secure that electricity, there may be disruptions to the power supply to the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) while the linked cooking mode KM3 is running.

For the above reasons, in step SH3, a determination is made as to whether the item corresponds to an "authorized control menu." For example, a check is made to see whether the item corresponds to "water boiler," which is one of the authorized control menus.

In step SH3, if it is determined that the device does not fall under the "permission control menu," the above-mentioned denial process is performed, and a notification is given that the device cannot be used.

If the answer in step SH3 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SH4, where the drive mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the heating power value set by the user or the heating power value selected by the IH control unit 90 is determined. After this, if the input key 43L1 is pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the inverter circuit 81L starts to be driven, and induction heating cooking begins (SH5). After this, monitoring is performed to see if a stop command from the user is input by the input key 43L1 (SH6), and if a stop command is received, the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Then, the left display unit 31L displays the end of cooking. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice that cooking is complete (SH7).

In step SH8, if a change to the permitted conditions (for example, lowering the heat) is possible, the change is made and notified.
If there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL desired to be used cannot be permitted to be used, a notification of denial is made. If the change processing has been completed, the process returns to step SH2.

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when additional heating is performed after the heating source that was initially used has finished heating in one cooking process of the linked cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 72 is for cooking in the coordinated cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 to be used second is driven for a time period set by the user (for example, five minutes).
For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heat source 188 is omitted.

In the embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 72, the heat source used in cooking step 1 of the coordinated cooking mode is the right heating unit 17HR, which is set by default, as described in FIG. 68. The heat sources used in the following cooking step 2 are the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

FIG. 72 illustrates a situation in which a user uses the microwave heating source 189 to perform cooking step 2 in one of the collaborative cooking modes KM3 described in FIG. 68 .
After the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR is completed, when the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is next operated, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, the inverter circuit 121A starts to be driven (SJ2), and measurement of the set time for timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) starts (SJ3).
The microwave heating output value remains at the default value (500 W), but the user can change the heat output by operating the central operation unit 40M (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the heating chamber control unit 159 starts energizing the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188.
In this embodiment 1, the energization of upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B starts simultaneously with the start of the oscillation operation of magnetron 122 of microwave heating source 189 .

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized while the magnetron 122 is oscillating. In other words, the food to be cooked is heated simultaneously by microwaves and electrical radiation heat (cooking process 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period, so in the following explanation, only the microwave heating time will be explained, and the explanation of the heating time of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B will be omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT for commanding the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the driving of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
If the input key 43MT for commanding to stop heating is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeated within the set time of the timer cooking. If the set time of the timer cooking has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is displayed to allow the user to decide whether or not to continue the microwave cooking that was temporarily stopped for an additional predetermined time or for a time specified by the user. Specifically, the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 displays text such as "Do you want to extend the cooking time? If you want to extend the cooking time, press the time key."

The reason for allowing such an extension is that if the user determines after checking the cooking condition of the food that it is still not heated enough, heating (in this case microwave heating and radiant heating) can be resumed quickly to cook the food in a better condition.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that an operation signal has been received, and if an operation signal has been received, a "Yes" determination is made.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. Alternatively, the program may be set so that if the input key 43M3 is operated once before pressing the input key 43MS, the cooking time is extended by a fixed time (e.g., 3 minutes), or so that pressing the input key 43M3 once extends the cooking time by 3 minutes and pressing it twice in succession extends the cooking time by 5 minutes. Even if cooking is started again, the heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press it within the "hold time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11, and the operation of the final cooking step of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 ends. Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays this fact, and the voice synthesizer 95 also performs an announcing operation (SJ11). Note that if the door 114 has not been opened even once since step SJ8 and the hold time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may sound an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is completed, the integrated control device MC automatically stores in the memory device MM in chronological order the control conditions under which the microwave heating source 9, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source 188 operated (when storing, the end date and time of the cooking process is recorded at the same time).

After that, when a specified command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the previous stored coordinated cooking mode and control conditions are called up from the memory device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the function is such that they are used to implement the next coordinated cooking mode KM3. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that not only the previous coordinated cooking mode is called up, but also all cooking history (including information on the date and time when cooking was performed) from the past few times or over a certain period (for example, one month), and the user can select the desired one from among them. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to "function mode", the user can set various aspects of the repeatability of the cooking history.

As described above, the start of the RG cooking process also starts the flow of electricity to the oven heating source 189, so the integrated display unit 30 does not display information on whether or not to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. However, if the sequence is to operate the microwave heating source 189 first and then the oven heating source 188, or if they are operated in the reverse order, it is possible to set the microwave heating time extension and the oven heating source 188 time extension separately.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 73 and 74.
Fig. 73 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. Fig. 74 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Figure 73 shows the input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular the steps of the assistance operation when the user makes an input error or is unsure of how to operate.

The steps in FIG. 73 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
When the user operates the input key 43MC, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 (step SL1).

The first specific screen 30SP displays identification information 330, 330A, and 330B for selecting a coordinated cooking menu as information for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 54) (step SL2).

In the next step SL3, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described in FIG. 68, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) changes by sequentially moving upward or downward, and the identification information 330 corresponding to another food is displayed in the center of the first area 30L (step SL9).

In this Figure 73, the step of selecting one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L described in Figure 54 is omitted from the illustration.

In the next step SL4, it is determined whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the linked cooking mode. If the input key 43MT has been operated, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step ST4 in FIG. 70. In other words, the process returns to the initial standby screen state.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the result is "Yes", and the process proceeds to next step SL5.
Next, if an input key on the central operation unit 40M that is not necessary for setting the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is operated, step SL5 is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL11.

Here, "input keys that are not necessary for setting the collaborative cooking mode KM3" are, for example, input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M. Also, input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

As explained in FIG. 56, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected with the input key 43MC, the right heating unit 17HR is occupied, and input using the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R is invalid. However, it is possible that the user may not notice this.

Therefore, in step SL11, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the erroneous operation immediately when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated. Note that when the right heating unit 17HR is occupied and the integrated control device MC is controlled so that it cannot detect whether the input keys of the right operation unit 40R are touched or not, the erroneous operation of the input keys 43R1 and 44R cannot be detected. However, as described above, when the input itself from the input key 43R1 etc. is enabled and the integrated control device MC processes it so that it does not consider it to be a valid signal, the erroneous operation can be detected.

In step SL11, it is notified that the operation is incorrect, and then the process proceeds to step SL12.
In step 12, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3 which also serves as the guide key has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the correct operation and the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL13). Then, the process returns to step SL3, and it is recommended that the user redo the operation.

If no erroneous input key operation has been performed in step SL5, the result of step SL5 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL6.

In step SL6, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL13, where detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, an overview of the food to be cooked corresponding to the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL7 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL8, which starts cooking step 1, in accordance with the program of the coordinated operation. Note that a preheating step may be started before cooking step 1 to start the preheating operation. Note that if the input key 43MS has not been operated, the process returns from step SL7 to step SL3.

Next, we will explain Figure 74.
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.
FIG. 74 shows input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular shows steps of assistance operations when the user makes an input error or is unsure of how to operate.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 (step SL20), the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display section 30.
Furthermore, the second specific screen 30SP displays a control menu for cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 (see FIG. 49) (step SL21).

In next step SL22, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 is further operated.
As described in Figures 49 to 53, by operating a pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the display of the specific text 30J indicating the name (including abbreviation) of the control menu that can be adopted in the composite cooking mode KM2 changes by sequentially moving upward or downward, and the specific text 30J of another control menu is displayed in the center of the first area 30L.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated in step SL22, the display of the specific text 30J of the control menu "Warm" that is defined as the default display is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SL23.

If the input key 43M1 is operated, step SL22 is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL28.
In step SL28, as described above, a specific text 30J indicating the name (including the abbreviation) of another control menu that can be used in the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to next step SL23.

In the next step SL23, it is determined whether the input key 43M2 has been operated. By operating the input key 32M2, the control conditions such as the heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M can be changed to other control conditions (see FIG. 52).

When the user operates the input key 43M2, step SL23 is judged as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL29. In step SL29, another control condition is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL24.

In the next step SL25, if an input key on the central operation unit 40M that is not necessary for setting the composite cooking mode KM2 is operated, the result is determined to be "No" and the process proceeds to step SL30.

Here, "input keys that are not necessary for setting the composite cooking mode KM2" are, for example, input keys 43KP and 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. Also, input keys 43R1 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R.

In step SL30, the notification unit AN notifies the user that the operation is incorrect. For example, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of the incorrect operation as soon as the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated. Then, the process proceeds to step SL31.

In step SL31, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the correct operation and the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL32). Then, the process returns to step SL22, and it is recommended that the user redo the operation.

If no erroneous input key operation is found in step SL24, step SL24 will be judged as "Yes" and the process will proceed to step SL25.

In step SL25, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL32, where detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, reference information 30P1 regarding the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL26 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL27, which starts cooking process 1, in accordance with the operation program of the composite cooking mode KM2.

(Various displays and input operation section in collaborative cooking mode)
Next, we will explain Figures 75 to 102.
These figures show the control operations of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 and left display unit 31L) when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 75 is a plan view showing the control operations of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 and left display unit 31L) when the collaborative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the symbol FG denotes the user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 75. The three pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the collaborative cooking menu correspond to the three items to be cooked: "hamburger steak," "gratin," and "roast beef." These pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B are displayed simultaneously.

75 and the next FIG. 76, the process display section 332 is omitted from the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330. In the examples of Figures 75 and 76, the additional information 331 displays "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL."

The individual light emitting portion 27M6 adjacent to the input key 43MS flashes as indicated by the dashed circle in FIG. 75, guiding the user to operate the input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source to be used first in the coordinated cooking mode is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, the light-emitting display sections 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG.

Then, operating the input key 43MS switches to the coordinated cooking mode KM3. At that time, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, so when this input key 43L1 is pressed, heating and cooking is performed in the left heating unit 17HL.

At the same time, the heat power indicator 67L, which indicates the heat power level during induction heating cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, lights up (the number of heat power indicators that light up is determined by a default value).
Even if the left heating unit 17HL is used individually (irrespective of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) during the cooperative cooking mode, if the operation of the left heating unit 17HL is prohibited by the integrated control device MC as described above (occupied state), the light-emitting indicator 27L3 will not emit light as shown in Fig. 75. The heat power indicator 67L will also not be lit.

Furthermore, as described above, even if an operation is performed to temporarily use the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the coordinated cooking mode KM3 during cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the fact that the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used is displayed as reference information on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. For example, a message such as "Left IH cannot be used because coordinated cooking is in progress" or "Left IH and heating chamber are currently unavailable because coordinated cooking is in progress" is displayed.

As is clear from the above explanation, the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting the execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is located in the center of the top surface of the top plate 15, so the user's gaze naturally focuses on the center. Furthermore, the selection of the coordinated cooking mode and the guidance display leading up to the start of cooking are also concentrated on the integrated display unit 30 in the center.

Furthermore, the central operation unit 40M also has an input key 43MS for proceeding to the next heat source when cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heat source, has been completed.
In other words, the main input operations, such as selecting the coordinated cooking mode, starting the first cooking step 1, and starting the next cooking step 2, can all be performed centrally at the front left/right center of the cooking appliance 1 (central operation unit 40M).

Next, we will explain Figure 76.
FIG. 76 is a plan view showing the operations of central operation unit 40M and left operation unit 40L and the display contents of first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of cooking appliance 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the three identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the collaborative cooking menu are simultaneously displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (display screen 8A), as shown in FIG. 76 (B).

Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 76, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL."

When the left input key 43M1 is pressed once more, the identification information 330 of the food to be cooked (named "Hamburger") that was displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 moves backwards, and the identification information 330B of "Roast beef" that was displayed in the front is displayed in the center instead (display screen 8B).

Each time the left input key 43M1 is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 is updated one by one in a fixed order.

When the right input key 43M1 is pressed, each time it is pressed, the display screen is selected in the reverse order, from the display screen 8D in FIG. 76(B) to the display screen 8C, for example.
76, only four coordinated cooking menus are shown, but as described above, there are a total of eight coordinated cooking menus. These display screens 8A to 8D are all first specific screens 30SP.

Next, we will explain Figure 77.
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of coordinated cooking menus available when the coordinated cooking mode of the cooking appliance is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 77, the eight coordinated cooking menus are displayed in sequence (forward or backward) on the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43M1.

Next, we will explain Figure 78.
FIG. 78 is a table showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in the integrated display section when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
Immediately before the start of the cooking process, the process display section 332 has several types as shown in FIG. 78 according to the cooking menu (8 types from hamburger steak to gratin).

The additional information 331 is consistent throughout the entire cooperative cooking mode, as shown by additional information A and additional information B. The additional information A and additional information B are displayed alternately for a fixed period of time (for example, every 5 seconds).
Furthermore, in the additional information B, the heating section of the induction heating source 9 to be used is indicated as "changeable" because there are two heating sections, the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR.

Figure 79 is a plan view showing the control operations and display contents of the input operation unit 40, integrated display unit 30, and left display unit 31L when the linked cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 as shown in FIGS.
The first specific screen 30SP displays identification information 330 of the three coordinated cooking modes. That is, as shown in Fig. 79, the identification information 330 of "Hamburger" is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30. At the same time, additional information 331 and a cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed in a list state on the first specific screen 30SP.

When the identification information 330 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the user can select either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L.

The example in Figure 79 shows a case where the left heating unit 17HL is recommended by default. As shown in Figure 79, the left heating unit selection mark 334L, which is displayed with the word "Left" written in white, is always displayed on the initial first specific screen 30SP.

A pair of left and right input keys 43M2 can be used to select either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L. For example, by pressing the left input key 43M2, the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected, and as shown in FIG. 79, the mark is changed to a white character to indicate that it has been selected.
Conversely, in the state shown in FIG. 79, by pressing the right input key 43M2, the right heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected.

When the identification information 330 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 54) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 59), the right heating unit 17HR is occupied to execute the coordinated cooking mode. Therefore, the right heating unit 17HR is in a state where it cannot accept settings for other control menus (by the integrated control device MC).

Therefore, the user places an object to be heated N, such as a frying pan, above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then, induction heating starts automatically. Note that the operation of pressing the input key 44L may be omitted, and the induction heating in the left heating unit 17HL may be automatically started after a certain time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input key 43MS was pressed.
As described above, when the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL is started, the right heating unit 17HR is released from its occupied state, and therefore the input of the single cooking mode in the right operating unit 40R can be started immediately.

It is also possible to cancel the occupation of the right heating section 17HR when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected using the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. However, because the selection of the heating section using the input keys 43M2 can be easily changed, the occupation of the right heating section 17HR is not canceled when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected, as described above.

The "optimum temperature 180°C" means that the temperature to preheat the heated object N, such as a metal pot or frying pan that is the container for the "hamburger steak" to be cooked in this case, is 180°C. In other words, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the heat level so that the temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object N becomes 180°C through the action of the inverter circuit 81L and the temperature detection circuit 93, etc.

As the preheat temperature rises, the heat display unit 67L, which shows the heat level during induction cooking, does not display the heat level, but rather displays the degree of rise in the preheat temperature and the degree of approach to the target preheat temperature.

In Figure 79, the dashed circle shown in the heat display section 67L indicates the current temperature range, and as the temperature rises, the dashed circle gradually moves to the right. In other words, the state of temperature rise can be seen from the illumination state of the heat display section 67L. Details will be explained in Figure 80.

Additional information 331 displays "You will be notified when the set temperature is reached" as shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 is displayed in text in a strip shape that crosses horizontally across the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display section 30.

As can be seen from the cooking process display section 332 in FIG. 79, when cooking hamburger steaks in a coordinated manner, the preheating process is started first by the induction heating source 9, followed by cooking process 1, and finally cooking process 2, which involves range grill heating (RG heating).

As shown in FIG. 79, until the moment the collaborative cooking mode is started, the user's fingertips FG and line of sight are on the front right of the integrated display unit 30, in other words, the central operation unit 40M, in order to operate the input keys 43MS.
After that, the user's line of sight moves to the left heating section 17HL as shown by the arrow. That is, when the object N containing the object to be heated is placed above the left heating section 17HL, the user's line of sight moves leftward.

After starting the collaborative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body will move from the center to the left, as shown by the large, long horizontal arrow in Figure 79. However, this movement to the left is not large, and is not enough to burden the user.

Next, we will explain FIG. 80.
FIG. 80 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the coordinated cooking mode is selected, and displays the change in preheating temperature in chronological order.

Figure 80 (A) shows the left-hand heat power indicator 67L. In Figure 80 (A), the dashed circle indicates the current temperature range. For example, when the target preheat temperature is 180°C, the four heat power indicators 67L are illuminated as shown in Figure 80 (A) from the beginning of the induction heating cooking process. The leftmost light-emitting element is flashing as shown in the dashed circle. This flashing state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheat temperature rises, the current temperature also rises, so the position of the "flashing part" mentioned above moves gradually to the right. When the preheat temperature is reached, the flashing part stops.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80(B), at the beginning of the induction heating cooking process, the target value of the preheating temperature can be changed by operating either of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 on the left operation unit 40L.

For example, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the preheat temperature can be lowered by one step each time the left input key 43L2 is pressed once. Conversely, the preheat temperature can be raised by one step each time the right input key 43L3 is pressed once. In this way, the process of changing the preheat temperature is displayed on the left display unit 31L each time, as shown in FIG. 75(C), so the user can easily check the displayed contents.

Next, we will explain Figure 81.
FIG. 81 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the coordinated cooking mode is selected.

When the object N placed on the left heating section 17HL reaches the set preheat temperature, the heat power display section 67L stops flashing as shown in FIG.
When the heating temperature reaches the preheating temperature in this manner, the integrated display section 30 displays "preheating completed" using additional information 331, as shown in FIG.

The display content of the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 changes. Specifically, the display of "IH preheating" is replaced by the display of "IH heating" of the next cooking process 1 in white letters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage has come where induction heating can be fully implemented. In other words, the temperature of the heated object, such as a frying pan, placed on the left heating unit 17HL has reached a suitable temperature for heating the object.

The pair of input keys 43L2, 43L3 on the left operation section 40L has the function of specifying the heating power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. Therefore, when moving from the preheating process to the actual heating process (cooking process 1), each time these input keys 43L2, 43L3 are touched once, a specific heating power level one step higher or one step lower can be selected from the data table of prescribed heating power values. This allows the user to freely raise or lower the temperature of the heated object when induction heating.

Next, we will explain Figure 82.
FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the change in the display content of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the collaborative cooking mode is selected.
82A, when the preheating process is completed, the integrated display unit 30 notifies the user that cooking process 1 (full-scale induction heating) can begin. Moreover, cooking process 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L.

The display of (A) and (B) in FIG. 82 is automatically switched repeatedly at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. Then, after full-scale induction heating cooking process 1 has begun, only (C) in FIG. 82 is displayed. The heat at this point is shown to be "slightly weak." It also shows that this heat level can be adjusted by the user (information 30V indicating the microwave output level). The control condition (microwave output) shown by this information 30V is sometimes called "control condition B."

In FIG. 82, the center of the second area 30M where the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard" may be referred to as "display position D" in the following description. This "display position D" is located directly next to the above-mentioned "display position B." In other words, "display position B" and "display position D" are in a corresponding positional relationship. Note that the control condition (microwave heating power level) is displayed at "display position D" as described above.

Next, FIG. 83 is a plan view showing the display content of the integrated display unit 30 when the collaborative cooking mode is selected. The display content has been slightly changed from that of FIG. 82, and the preheating temperature value (e.g., 180°C) is included in the additional information 331. The display content shown in FIG. 82(B) may be changed as shown in FIG. 83.

FIG. 83 shows a stage where the induction heating cooking process 1 has not yet started when the combined cooking mode is selected.
Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting portion 27M6 is in a flashing state as indicated by the dashed circle.

In the state of Figures 82 and 83, even if the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 cannot display the control menu of the combined cooking mode, including "manual range" and "automatic range". To cancel the linked cooking mode KM3 at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, pressing the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L only ends cooking step 1 of the left heating unit 17HL that is used first, and does not cancel (cancel) all settings of the linked cooking mode KM3.

Next, we will explain Figure 84.
84 shows a scene where the user ends the induction heating cooking process 1 using the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already ended, the heat power display unit 67L does not emit any light.

Meanwhile, the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process has progressed to cooking process 2, i.e., "range grill cooking" (RG cooking), based on the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332. Specifically, the progress from the white display of IH heating to the final cooking process 2, RG cooking, is displayed in white letters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage has come to carry out cooking step 2, which combines microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188.

The command to start cooking step 2 in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 must also be given using the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 84, the individual light-emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS flashes, as indicated by the dashed circle, to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS.

On the other hand, the stage in FIG. 84 is after the user has ended induction heating cooking step 1 using input key 43L1 of left operation unit 40L, so the left heating unit 17HL is no longer occupied. Therefore, by operating input key 43L1 of left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be used to start cooking in independent cooking mode KM1, which is separate from cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At this stage, if you input using the left operation unit 17HL, you can start another cooking menu using the induction heating source 189. However, because the linked cooking mode KM3 has not yet been released, you cannot perform another cooking operation that uses the heating chamber 113 (cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2). The left heating unit 17HL has simply been released from occupation.

Next, we will explain Figure 85.
Fig. 85 shows that when the combined cooking mode KM3 is selected and the stage is reached for "range grill cooking" (RG cooking), the microwave heating output level can be adjusted. Note that although "RG" is displayed, this does not mean that the combined cooking mode KM2 is being implemented.

Specifically, the microwave heating output level is displayed in five stages, such as "slightly weak" and "weak" in the second area 30M of the integrated display section 30. This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating microwave output level" described in FIG. 83. Therefore, the user can select the microwave heating output level by operating a pair of input keys 43M2.

Next, we will explain Figure 86.
FIG. 86, like FIG. 85, shows that when the integrated cooking mode is selected, the microwave heating output level can be adjusted when proceeding to cooking process 2.

As shown in Fig. 86(B), the microwave heating output level is displayed in a total of five stages from "strong" to "weak" in the second area 30M. The user can select such microwave output level by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the microwave heating intensity depending on the finished state of the food to be cooked.

In the final cooking step 2 described in FIG. 86, the user's operations and line of sight are concentrated in the range of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. This allows the user to stay in the center of the front of the cooking appliance 1 and concentrate on completing cooking step 2.

During cooking step 2, if the user wishes to remove the food inside heating chamber 113 from heating chamber 113 and check it directly, the user can simply open door 114 at any time.
When the door 114 is opened, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 instantly stops the transmission of microwaves, and also stops the power supply to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

If the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating will start instantly again. Note that if the door 114 is opened in the middle of cooking step 2 as described above, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 will continue to operate.

Next, we will explain Figure 87.
FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the operations in the final stage after cooking process 2 in FIG. 86 and the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user wishes to end the final heating and cooking process (cooking process 2), he or she operates input key 43MT. Pressing this cancels the entire control sequence of the linked cooking mode. Therefore, to resume microwave heating or oven heating after pausing in this way, it is necessary to select the heating source with central operation unit 40M and then press input key 43MS again.

Therefore, in this embodiment 1, in order to make it easy to perform additional heating, when RG cooking is ended, pressing the input key 43MS again within a certain period of time will instantly start microwave heating again.

To allow the user to know the timing for the RG cooking process, which is the final process of heating and cooking (cooking process 2), to end, the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on display screen 10B after display screen 10A, as shown in FIG. 87(B). It is configured to display that cooking process 2 will soon end.

This display screen 10B is displayed as a result of the process in which the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, determines the load of the food being cooked, etc., and the integrated control device MC predicts the time it will take to complete the process.

In addition, instead of detecting the temperature rise of the food or the heating chamber 113 to predict when cooking will be completed, the user may set a timer in advance and end cooking step 2 by time control. In this case, the load judgment described above is not necessary.

As described above, if the user sets the timer in advance and ends cooking step 2 by time control, reference information 2 can be notified (FA2) as described in FIG. 63. That is, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on display screen 10B after display screen 10A, and displays information that matches reference information 2 as part of the notification (FA2).

Display screen 10C in Figure 87 (B) is an example showing that heating can be started again within a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds, except that if door 114 is opened, 15 seconds from that point) immediately after cooking process 2 is completed.
The "time button" on the display screen 10C refers to the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature due to cooking immediately prior to this, additional information 331 such as "Caution: Grill is too hot" is displayed to enhance user safety.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, changes to the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 during the period until the transition to the combined cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. 60 will be described in detail.

Figures 88 to 90 show the correspondence between the contents of displays E1 to E5 described in the "Central Display Section" of item E and the input operation section in the explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various processes and operations described in Figure 60.

The state in Figure 88 shows the stage of "E1: Initial screen for collaborative cooking" and shows the relationship between the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M.
89(A) shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of "E2: Change Menu" and the central operation unit 40M. This is the stage at which the input key 43M1 is operated to select one desired food item from the linked cooking modes, and the corresponding linked cooking mode is selected.

Figure 89 (B) shows the stage of "E3: Change selected heating source (select right IH)." This shows the stage where the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made using the input key 43M2.

Next, Figure 90 (A) shows the stage of "E4: Guidance displayed for pressing input button for right IH." This is the stage where the first specific screen 30SP displays a message indicating that the input key 43R1 located on the right operation unit 40R needs to be operated in order to start coordinated cooking. In other words, the user is being recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start cooking step 1 of coordinated cooking.

Figure 90 (B) shows the "E5: IH preheating display" stage. At this stage, the first specific screen 30SP shows that the preheating operation has begun in the right heating section 17HR. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180°C is reached. In response to this, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress", "Preheating completed", and "Notification that the temperature has reached the set temperature" is displayed within the first specific screen 30SP.

Next, Figs. 91 to 97 show the correspondence between the contents of displays E11 to E17 in the "center display section" of item E and the input operation section in explanatory diagram 2, which shows the relationship between the various steps and operations of cooking "hamburger steak" (linked cooking mode) described in Fig. 61.

Figure 91 (A) shows the stage of "E11: IH preheating display" explained in item E (center display section) of Figure 61. The first specific screen 30SP displays a message (additional information 331) indicating that preheating has started by the right heating section 17HR and that the set temperature will be reached.

Figure 91 (B) is the stage of "E12: IH heating display" also explained in Figure 61. At this stage, preheating has been completed, and the additional information 331 indicates that heating is now possible with the right heating unit 17HR. In other words, this indicates that it is time to proceed to the induction heating (IH heating) process.

The stage in FIG. 92 shows the display content that is displayed a certain time (e.g., one minute) after the display in FIG. 91 appears. The display in FIG. 92 is not shown in item E in FIG. 61.

At the stage shown in FIG. 92, it is shown that in order for the user to end the currently running cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

The next Figure 93 is the stage of "E13: Grill door opening and closing operation guidance display" described in Figure 61. At this stage, since induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed, additional information 331 prompts the user to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 (to carry out cooking process 2).

The next Figures 94 (A) to (C) show the stage of "E14: Alternating display of heat power change display and start guidance display" explained in Figure 61. At this stage, it is displayed that the heat power of range grill cooking (combined cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, it is displayed that grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS).

In FIG. 94(C), the input key 43MS is in a blinking state as indicated by the dashed circle, indicating that it is waiting for a user operation. Note that the displays in FIG. 94(A) and FIG. 94(B) are alternated, for example, every 5 seconds.

The next Figures 95 (A) to (C) show the "E15: Grill Heating Display" stage described in Figure 61. Here, it shows that the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2).

Figure 95 (A) shows that the heat can be adjusted, and Figure 95 (B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously for combined heating. Figure 95 (C) shows that this RG cooking process (cooking process 2) will end in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

The next Figures 96 (A) and (B) show the stage of "E16: Alternating display of extension operation guide and end operation display" explained in Figure 61. Here, the RG heating process has ended, so it is displayed that the time can be extended using the time button (input key 43M2) and grill heating can be performed again.

If the user does not wish to perform extended heating, the display indicates that the user can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to end the linked cooking mode without performing extended heating. Note that the first specific screen 30SP with the contents of FIG. 96(A) and FIG. 96(B) are displayed alternately, for example, at intervals of a few seconds.

The next figure, 97, is the "E17: Time setting display" stage. Here, when the heating cooking time is extended using input key 43M2 and heating cooking is performed again inside heating chamber 113, the result of setting the extended time is displayed. After this time setting display, the aforementioned "E15: Grill heating display" and "E16: Alternating display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 98 to 102.
Figures 98 to 102 show the contents of displays E21 to E26 described in the "central display section" of item E and the state of the input operation section in explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the various steps and operations of cooking "fried chicken" using the collaborative cooking mode KM3 described in Figure 62 (collaborative cooking mode).

Fig. 98(A) shows the stage of "E21: IH preheating display". Here, it can be seen that the left heating section 17HL is performing preheating. In other words, induction heating has already started for the object N placed on the left heating section 17HL.
Fig. 98(B) shows the stage of "E22: Grill door opening/closing operation guidance display". Here, the display prompts the user to open the door 114 and place the food to be cooked (food) in the heating chamber 113 to perform the grill heating step B23 (see Fig. 62).

The next figures 99 (A) to (C) show the stage "E23: Alternating display of heat level change indication and start guidance indication." Here, when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill driving unit," it is displayed that the heat level can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing input key 43MS.

The displays of FIG. 99(A) and FIG. 99(B) are alternated, for example, every 5 seconds.
Moreover, if the door 114 remains open, the display shown in FIG. 99(C) will be displayed.

Next, Figures 100(A) and (B) show the stage of "E24: Microwave heating display".
FIG. 100(A) shows that the heat level of cooking can be changed when driving the "range grill driving unit."
100(B) shows the content displayed after cooking has started, and is an example of displaying the remaining time until cooking is finished, etc. This is the stage at which cooking process 1 has started.

The next Fig. 101 (A) (B) shows the stage of "E25: Alternating display of extension operation guide display and IH preheat completion display". Here, it is displayed that after the cooking process B24 (see Fig. 62) performed by driving the "range grill driving unit" is completed, the heating cooking time can be extended by extending the time with the time button (input key 43M2).
The display screen of FIG. 101(A) and the display screen of FIG. 101(B) are displayed alternately as a first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

Figure 102 shows the "E26: Time setting display" stage. Here, it is displayed that the cooking process B24 will be extended for an additional period of time, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. If the "Range Grill (RG)" heating is completed at this stage in Figure 102, the user can then proceed to cooking process 2 in the left heating section 17HL, which has already been preheated.

(Home appliance operation management system)
Next, Fig. 103 to Fig. 112 will be described. Fig. 103 to Fig. 112 relate to the cooking appliance 1 and the home appliance operation management system that are the subject of the present disclosure.

Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking appliance 1 during cooking in the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 103 shows the control operation on the cooking appliance 1 side. Figure 104 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking appliance 1 in the example shown in Figure 103.

FIG. 105 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing the exchange of information among the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking appliance 1 in the example shown in FIG.
Fig. 106 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after start-up in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 108 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after start-up in the cooking appliance 1.

Figure 109 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after startup of the cooking appliance 1. Figure 110 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after startup. Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in Figure 1. Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the exchange of information between the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 when the linked cooking mode is implemented.

Referring to Figure 103 .
The operational steps shown in FIG. 103 are defined in a control program for executing the coordinated cooking mode of the integrated control device MC.
The stock inquiry signal RQ1 is sent at a point prior to this first step SD1, that is, at the stage of step ST2 in FIG.

The operational steps shown in FIG. 103 correspond to the steps following the user's operation (A23) shown in FIG. 65. In step SD1, when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and cooking process 1 is started, the ingredients begin to be heated by microwaves.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in Figure 64. At this stage, a voice message is issued saying "Range, starting standard finish," as in notification F24 in Figure 62.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN3 from step SD1 is started (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG. 64.

In the next step SD3, the contents of the started integrated cooking mode KM3 are verified. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and the integrated control device MC can verify that cooking of "fried chicken" is being performed.
It is also clear at this point that in cooking "fried chicken", cooking step 1 uses heating chamber 113. In other words, it is clear that once cooking step 1 is completed, heating chamber 113 will no longer be used.

In addition, step SD3 may be omitted and dedicated programs may be prepared for each of the linked cooking modes (e.g., fried chicken, hamburger steak, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not the current mode is a specific coordinated cooking mode. This "specific coordinated cooking mode" is, for example, one of the following:
(1) Foods that can generally be classified as side dishes, such as "fried chicken,""hamburgersteak," and "gyoza."
(2) The items cooked in each coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) and items that are usually eaten at the same time (e.g., soup, French fries).

If the answer is "No" at step SD4, the operation of FIG. 103 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether cooking process 1 is being performed in heating chamber 113. If "No" in this step SD5, the operation in Fig. 103 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", proceed to the next step SD6. In step SD6, a query signal RQ3 (see FIG. 104) is sent to the home gateway 411 to inquire about the inventory information of ingredients stored in the refrigerator 401.

At the time when the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 as described with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment 1, the conditions are further narrowed down, and at the stage where it is determined that there is a high possibility that stock information is required (step SD6 in FIG. 103), a stock inquiry signal RQ3 is transmitted.

In the next step SD7, food inventory information is obtained from the home gateway 411. The integrated control device MC then temporarily stores this information in the memory device MM.

In the next step SD8, the received ingredient inventory information is analyzed.
In this step SD8, a search is made for the presence or absence of ingredients highly related to the cooking being performed in the linked cooking mode (in this case, fried chicken). The "relatedness" referred to here typically refers to ingredients (e.g., frozen vegetables) that are often eaten together with the side dish of fried chicken, or rice as a staple food. Therefore, in the following explanation, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted in this step SD8.

If step SD7 returns a "No" result, the process in FIG. 103 ends without any notification to the user.

In next step SD9, it is determined whether the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed.
Then, in the next step SD10, a notification is given that cooking step 1 will soon be completed. This notification is not shown in Fig. 61. Also, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after the end of cooking step 1, a different cooking menu that effectively utilizes heating chamber 113 that will not be used for cooking fried chicken is notified.
As described above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended cooking menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether the user has performed an operation to stop cooking process 1. If the user has performed a stop operation in this step SD12, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, a notification that cooking process 1 is completed (F25: see FIG. 62) is given.
Then, the user takes out the food to be cooked (fried chicken ingredients) from the heating chamber 113 and places it in the food to be heated (frying pan, etc.) N, which has already been preheated to a high temperature, to start cooking step 2. At this stage, the cooking oil placed in the food to be heated N is already at a high temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, in step SD8, which is a stage before the cooking process 1 is completed, the user can know the recommended cooking menu.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use heating chamber 113 to cook another dish prior to cooking step 2.

As described above, in the combined cooking mode for deep-fried chicken, the staple food rice can be defrosted and heated at the same time, so the actual total time from start to finish of combined cooking can be shortened. This improves user convenience.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed cooking step 1 in the integrated cooking mode is used within a short period of time after the end of cooking step 1, it is expected that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 will be high.
As described above, in the "warm" (automatic range) control menu that uses microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops the microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, if high heat remains in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, when using the heating chamber 113 after completing cooking step 1 in the coordinated cooking mode, the user can select the "manual range" control menu (single heating cooking). In other words, the user can set the microwave heating time.

As explained in FIG. 57, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in order to perform coordinated cooking, the left heating unit 17HL becomes unusable, but no processing (by the integrated control device MC) is performed to continue occupying the heating chamber 113 until after cooking process 1 is completed. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Furthermore, if a control method is adopted in which the heating chamber 113 continues to be occupied even after cooking step 1 of the coordinated cooking has been completed in the heating chamber 113 (after cooking step 2), the control program may exceptionally release the heating chamber 113 from its occupied state only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8 above.

Next, we will explain Figures 104 and 105.
104 and 105 are diagrams for explaining, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on.
The following will be described with reference to Figure 104, assuming that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to a commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time they are installed in the kitchen KT.
The home gateway 411 issues a command signal to the alarm device 445 to monitor in "at-home mode" (step SE1 in FIG. 104). "At-home mode" refers to an operation pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. When all the residents are away from home, the mode is switched to "home sitting mode."

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 103). Then, cooking begins in response to the user's input operation.

As explained in FIG. 103, the cooking device 1 transmits an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 at the start of cooking process 1 (step SD1). . This inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives detection information from the human detection unit 413H, which detects the presence and movement of people in the kitchen KT, and determines that it is time to cook, and switches to mutually linked operation with the cooking appliance 1 (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401.
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is sent from communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 to a wireless communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401. Other signals are also transmitted and received via wireless communication between communication unit 446 and the communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401.

Refrigerator 401 searches for the inventory of food stored in refrigerator compartment 401B and multiple freezer compartments 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores it in its own memory (step: SE4). Food stored in the refrigerator comes in various forms, such as food that has been partially processed at home or bagged food purchased outside. Many methods have already been proposed for identifying and searching this inventory information, including the use of images taken with a camera, RF tags, and two-dimensional codes.

Additionally, various methods have been proposed, such as a method of manually inputting data such as the name and attributes of food when putting food into refrigerator 401, or a method of automatically reading information about food, etc. optically or magnetically and storing inventory information.
In the present embodiment, since there are no restrictions on identifying the food when it is placed in refrigerator 401 or after it has been placed therein, either method may be used.

Refrigerator 401 transmits the collected inventory information data all at once to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as a reply signal RS1.
Home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data transmitted in reply signal RS1 in storage device 450 (SE5). Note that "temporarily" here refers to the period from when the inventory information data is transmitted again from refrigerator 401 until it is received, and does not mean that the data is stored continuously for a long period of time. The inventory data in storage device 450 is always overwritten with the latest data and saved.

As explained in FIG. 103, when cooking process 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113 of the cooking appliance 1, an inventory inquiry signal RQ3 is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 103) (SE6).

The home gateway 411 transmits the latest inventory data stored in the memory device 450 as an inventory data signal RS2 from the communication unit 446 to the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking appliance 1.

In the cooking appliance 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the memory device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of Fig. 103, the integrated control device MC notifies the user of another cooking menu (such as the names of ingredients or dishes) that is directly related to one cooking menu of the active cooperative cooking mode from the inventory data (SE8).
In the example of Figure 103, only "fried chicken" has been described as the coordinated cooking mode in which cooking process 1 is performed in heating chamber 113, but as shown in Figure 78, "stir-fried vegetables,""porkcutlet,""tempura," etc. may also be used.

Next, we will explain Figure 105.
FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating the operations after step SE8 in FIG.
When the cooking appliance 1 has completed all cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode (SE9), it transmits main data indicating the contents of the coordinated cooking (hereinafter referred to as "cooking execution data") to the home gateway 411 as a signal BS1.

Here, the "cooking execution data" refers to at least one of the following pieces of information:
(1) Identification information 330 that can identify the food to be cooked. For example, the name of the food to be cooked (including abbreviations), such as "fried chicken" or "stir-fried vegetables."
(2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked; (3) Information indicating the control conditions for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 (e.g., microwave output of 500 W, heat of 1500 W during induction heating, or “medium heat”); (4) Information indicating the time required from cooking process 1 to the end of cooking process 2; (5) Information indicating the end time of cooking process 2 (or the final cooking process); (6) Information indicating the time required from the start of the preheating process to the end of all cooking processes 2; (7) Information identifying the heating source that performed the heating/cooking operation (e.g., left heating unit 17HL); (8) Information regarding restrictions the user will be subject to during the next heating/cooking operation (e.g., that microwave (automatic) heating cannot be performed because the heating chamber 113 is too hot).
(9) Information related to the safety of the user, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber 113

The "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food being cooked" is, for example, information such as "fried chicken: 300 g." This can be estimated by the integrated control device MC from the rate of temperature rise of the food being cooked (fried chicken) in cooking step 1.

The “cooking execution data” can be useful information for the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 .
In addition, the “cooking execution data” can also be useful information for the alarm device 445.

For example, among the "cooking implementation data," "(4) information indicating the time required to complete cooking process 2," "(5) information indicating the end time," and "(6) information indicating the time required to complete all cooking processes 2" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411. By accumulating this data, it becomes possible to estimate the time periods during which cooking is concentrated in the kitchen KT.

Furthermore, among the "cooking implementation data," "(9) information related to the user's safety, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can also be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440. This is because it can tell the "deviation" between the current temperature on the cooking device 1 side and the temperature optically measured and estimated by the temperature monitoring device 440 side.

The "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the refrigerator 401. For example, the "cooking execution data" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate periods of time when cooking is concentrated, and it can then be used to predict when food will be stored in the refrigerator 401.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information indicating the state of the external environment from an external electrical device (e.g., an air conditioner or a cooking device) and controls the operating state of each part, such as a cooling device, has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-211153. However, in the conventional proposals, the environmental information provided by the cooking device 1 was often vague and was not necessarily useful from the refrigerator's perspective. In contrast, the "cooking execution data" in this embodiment 1 is based on a specific control menu and is highly useful.

The home gateway 411 converts the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 into a signal BS2 including the "cooking execution data" and transmits it to the refrigerator 401. The contents of the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 and the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS2 may basically be the same, but may also be different. The "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 includes information useful to the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445, but since this information is not necessary for the refrigerator 401, it may be deleted by the home gateway 411 before being transmitted to the refrigerator 401.

The refrigerator 401 analyzes the contents of the "cooking execution data" and collects and analyzes data that is useful for the operation of the refrigerator 401 (SE10).
Next, the refrigerator 401 changes the operating conditions of the refrigerator 401 based on the analysis result of the "cooking execution data" (SE12).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 stores the "cooking execution data" in the storage device 450. It also updates the "cooking history data" in the schedule management unit 451. This records the execution date and time of this one heating cooking (linked cooking), the time period, the cooking menu (e.g., the name of the cooking process "fried chicken"), and other related information (e.g., estimated fried chicken weight "300g").

Furthermore, if specific ingredients or cooking menus such as "frozen rice" are recommended based on the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 (see step SD8 in FIG. 103), the schedule management unit 451 may also include the fact of the recommendation in the "cooking history data" recorded. If such daily cooking activities are accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 that utilizes artificial intelligence or the like will have improved "learning and prediction" capabilities, and the value of providing information to the user will gradually increase.

After all cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 have been completed, the cooking appliance 1 transmits an operation end notice signal BS3 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
Thereafter, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end notice signal BS3, it ends the "interconnected operation mode". It then switches the alarm device 445 to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). This allows the temperature change in the interior space of the kitchen KT to be monitored regardless of whether the user is in the kitchen KT.

(Display example 1 of inventory information)
FIG. 106 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the surrounding area of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 106 shows the scene of step SD11 in FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 106 is the stage where "fried chicken," one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode, is being performed.
While cooking step 1 is being performed in heating chamber 113, integrated display section 30 displays the presence of "frozen rice" as inventory information. The voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user by voice.

106, if the input key 43MT is pressed, the microwave cooking in cooking step 1 will be stopped. The collaborative cooking mode setting will not be cancelled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is removed from the heating chamber 113, and the food to be cooked is placed on the food to be cooked N placed on the left heating section 17HL, induction heating cooking (cooking step 2) can be started from that point. As shown in the integrated display section 30, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L is pressed at the initial preheating start stage as explained in Figure 62 (see operation A21 in Figure 61), so there is no need to operate the left operation section 40L again.

(Inventory information display example 2)
FIG. 107 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display section 30 of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 107 shows an example in which the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in FIG. 106 are changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 107(A), time-saving information 333, which indicates that time can be saved, and cooking recommendation information 338, "warming," are displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the larger display surface is used to display "Can be heated and defrosted in the heating chamber." In other words, it indicates that "heating" and "defrosting" can be performed using the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 107(A), symbols 335U and 335D indicate that there is more information available, and by pressing one of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right keys) that correspond to this symbol, the next information is displayed.

In another example shown in FIG. 107(B), refrigerator information 334 is displayed in text form in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30.
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the resulting larger display surface is used to display information 339 on two types of individual ingredients, "frozen rice" and "oden." In other words, the user is informed that the ingredients in the refrigerator 401 are "frozen rice" and "oden."

The individual ingredient information is information that identifies one food item. The "ingredient information" of the refrigerator 401 refers to a collection of the individual ingredient information 339.

The display of FIG. 107(A) and FIG. 107(B) may be alternated, for example, every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In either case, the user can understand that, in the middle of cooking step 1, another dish can be prepared in the heating chamber 113 using the ingredient information stored in the refrigerator 401.

FIG. 108 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 108 shows an example in which the display contents of FIG. 46 have been improved.

In this FIG. 108, display screen 1, display screen 2A and display screen 2B are the same as those explained in FIG. 46, so the explanation will be omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen that is displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. The display screen 2C prompts the user to perform an input operation to select a heating source by using a recommendation sentence 30R1.

Next, FIG. 109 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 109 shows yet another example in which the display contents of FIG. 46 are improved.
In this FIG. 109, the display screen 2D is a screen that is displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

The display screen 2C in FIG. 109 informs the user that the cooking appliance 1 is automatically checking the food ingredient information in the refrigerator 401. In other words, it notifies the user that the inventory information acquisition operation is in progress.

As explained above, in step ST2 shown in FIG. 38, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted.
The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D in FIG.

Next, FIG. 110 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
After display screen 2D shown in Fig. 110, display screen 2E informs the user that the ingredient information has been acquired. Immediately thereafter, display screen 2E informs the user that the specific ingredients are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "gyoza". Note that the heating source can be freely selected before display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heating source is selected (see step STC in Fig. 38) immediately after display screen 2C appears, display screens 2D to 2E will not be displayed.

(Example of Home Gateway Operation)
FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the operation of the home gateway.
The home gateway determines whether the schedule management unit 451 has entered the "cooking time slot" during the period when the alarm device 445 is operating in the "home mode" as described with reference to FIG.

The "cooking time slot" may be manually input by the resident using the input unit 449. For example, the cooking time slot may be set to be from 6:30 to 7:30 a.m. on weekdays.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operating time periods of the cooking appliance 1 for the past 30 days, for example, and determines that the average time period is between 6:20 and 7:30 a.m.

In the above-mentioned situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether the current time is within the cooking time slot.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, then as described above, it is within the average time period (6:20 to 7:30 a.m.), so the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human detection sensors 452, 453 of the human detection unit 413H have detected a human.
For example, if a resident moves through the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking appliance 1, or stands still in front of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking appliance 1, such human movement is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to the next step SF3.
In step SF3, it is determined whether or not the door (not shown) of refrigerator 401 has been opened based on operation information from refrigerator 401. If it is detected that the door has been opened and then closed (SF4), the latest status of the foods stored in refrigerator 401 is confirmed in the next step SF5.

The confirmation of inventory information in step SF5 is the "inventory data search command signal RQ2" as described in FIG. 104.

Refrigerator 401 transmits the collected inventory information data collectively as a reply signal RS1 to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as described in FIG.
Main control unit 447 of home gateway 411 then compares the latest collected inventory information data with the inventory information data previously sent from refrigerator 401, and if there is no change, ends the process in step SF6.

In step SF6, if there is a change from the previous inventory information data, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with the new data (SF7).

Then, the process prepares for an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 from the cooking appliance 1 to arrive.
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires inventory information of the refrigerator 401 even before the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on, and operates to provide the inventory information quickly when an inquiry is made from the cooking appliance 1.

It is believed that a certain amount of time is required to investigate the inventory of food stored in refrigerator 401 in detail, and there is also a concern that if the door of refrigerator 401 is left open, light from external lighting will become disturbance light and interfere with optical detection, image analysis, etc. For these reasons, the inventory information is quickly obtained immediately after the door of refrigerator 401 is closed.

The above configuration makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the inventory data collection reply signal RS1 described in FIG. 104 is delayed from the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 of the cooking appliance 1. In other words, the system allows the cooking appliance 1 to obtain the latest inventory information.

(Displaying information on individual ingredients during the heating pause period)
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing another operation program for acquiring individual ingredient information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the coordinated cooking mode of the cooking appliance 1.

In the operation program of FIG. 103, inventory information is automatically acquired midway through cooking process 1 in heating chamber 113, and a recommended cooking menu is notified.
In contrast, the example shown in Figure 112 notifies the user that another cooking process can be performed during the "heating pause period" between cooking steps 1 and 2 in the coordinated cooking mode, and can notify the user in response to commands.
Therefore, there is no contradiction between the operation according to the operation program of Fig. 103 and the notification method according to the operation program shown in Fig. 112. Therefore, both notification programs may be adopted (used together).

The cooking device 1 described up to FIG.
(1) Operate the induction heating source 9 (IH) Single cooking mode KM1
(2) Operate the microwave heating source 189 (range) in the single cooking mode KM1
(3) Operate the oven heating source 188 (oven) Single cooking mode KM1
(4) A coordinated cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source are operated sequentially through a transition period TR whose start and end timings are determined depending on a user's input operation.
The above function is executed in response to user input operations.

Furthermore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking process 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR,
The integrated control device MC was configured to notify, during the cooking process 1, at least one of a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 and individual ingredient information of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu after the completion of the first cooking process, via the notification unit AN.

In contrast, the example shown in FIG. 112 notifies the user that after cooking step 1 is completed, another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (simultaneously with cooking step 2) even during the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in FIG. 57), and can notify the user in response to a command.

In FIG. 112, step SG1 is the stage at which the collaborative cooking mode is selected and the user selects the cooking menu desired by the user (e.g., fried chicken) from the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, similar to step SD5 in FIG. 103, it is determined whether cooking process 1 of the selected combined cooking mode KM3 is to be performed in the heating chamber 113.
If the answer is "Yes" at step SG2, the process proceeds to next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, an inquiry is made to the home gateway 411 about inventory information. In this step SG3, the inventory information, particularly information about frozen foods and reheated foods, is obtained. Note that in this Figure 112, the steps of receiving inventory information and temporarily storing it, such as step SD7 in Figure 103, are omitted, but the operating program in this Figure 112 also performs similar processing.

The next step SG4 is to determine whether cooking process 1 being performed in heating chamber 113 has ended.

If cooking process 1 has ended at step SG4, the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in Figure 57) begins from that point. In other words, the heating operation of the coordinated cooking is paused, and the device is waiting for a command from the user to start cooking process 2.

During such a transition period TR, step SG5 determines whether another cooking operation can be performed. This corresponds to step SD8 in FIG. 103.

If step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, where the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that there are suggestions for other cooking options that can be prepared in the heating chamber 113. If the determination result of step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

In the subsequent step SG6, if a specific input key on the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 (see FIG. 20) is operated, the result is determined to be "Yes."

In step SG7, one or more other cooking menus that can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (for example, "warming gyoza") are displayed. The display may be on the integrated display unit 30 that displays the cooking steps in the linked cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8, where the process waits for a command to start cooking step 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
Fig. 113 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 114 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. Fig. 115 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.

Figure 113 shows an example of the display of the integrated display section 30 in the scene of step SG6 in Figure 112. As is clear from this Figure 113, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see Figure 21) of the integrated display section 30 are combined into one, forming a horizontally long display area.

In FIG. 113, reference numeral 338 denotes recommended information indicating in text that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and reference numeral 337 denotes a display guide section that explains the operation of the input key 43M2 to display the suggested cooking menu of the recommended information.

In the state shown in FIG. 113, the individual light emitting section 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 flashes as indicated by a dotted circle to prompt the user to perform an input operation. In this state, by pressing one of the (two) input keys 43M2, individual ingredient information 339 such as a specific recipe recommendation (e.g., "frozen rice") can be displayed on this first specific screen 30SP.

When the input key 43M2 is pressed in Fig. 113, the display screen is switched to that of Fig. 114. The recommended information 338 shown in Fig. 113 changes to the contents of Fig. 114.
In FIG. 114, reference numeral 339 denotes individual ingredient information indicating in text other cooking menus (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 113.

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the weight and freezing temperature of refrigerated "gyoza" and frozen "rice" are displayed. In other words, the individual ingredient information includes the name and weight of each ingredient, as well as information on the refrigerated or frozen state (temperature, etc.). Note that it may also include related information such as expiration date information and the start date (date) of storage in the refrigerator 401.

Next, FIG. 115 shows the display contents that will automatically switch if the display contents shown in FIG. 113 remain unchanged for a few seconds. In other words, after the state shown in FIG. 113 is reached, if a few seconds pass without the input key 43M2 being pressed, the display will switch to the display screen shown in FIG. 115. Also, if a few seconds pass in this state of FIG. 115, it will automatically return to the display of FIG. 113.

As is clear from Figures 113 to 115, the integrated control device MC is configured to notify, during the cooking process 1, at least one of the cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 and the refrigerator inventory information related to the cooking menu after the completion of the first cooking process, by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the example shown in Figures 112 to 115, after cooking process 1 is completed, during the transition period TR ("heating pause period P3" in Figure 57), it is notified that another cooking can be carried out in the heating chamber 113 (simultaneously with the cooking process 2), and information about the ingredients to be used in the "another cooking" can be notified in response to the user's instructions.
Therefore, for example, when one cooking A (e.g., fried chicken) in the linked cooking mode has entered cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, another cooking B (thawing and warming frozen rice) can be carried out simultaneously in the heating chamber 113. In other words, when cooking A and cooking B are to be eaten in one meal, cooking can be done in parallel, rather than starting cooking B after cooking A is finished. This shortens the overall cooking time and improves user convenience.

Summary of embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating an object N containing an object to be cooked on a top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about cooking;
An integrated control device MC for controlling a heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 serving as an input means is provided,
The integrated control device MC has an independent cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently;
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which a cooking process is automatically performed by automatically combining a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2;
A cooking mode KM3 including a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed in response to a command from the input operation unit 40.
The single cooking mode KM1 is a mode in which a control pattern (e.g., “water boiling” or “boiling”) of the first heating means HM1 is determined and a heating operation is started.
The composite cooking mode KM2 is a mode in which a heating source and a control pattern (e.g., “range grill”) to be used in the second heating means HM2 are determined and a heating operation is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the food to be heated (e.g., “hamburger steak” or “fried chicken”) is determined and the heating operation is started.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM3. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the input operation unit 40 is configured to have separate input keys (43L1, 43R1, etc.) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1, an input key (43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2, and an input key (43MC) for selecting the linked cooking mode KM3.

With this configuration, the three cooking modes can be selected using the respective input keys (input means), improving user operability even in a cooking device 1 with an increased number of heating sources.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN is configured to display a dedicated display screen (first specific screen SP) that displays the order of the cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and the cooking process using the second heating means HM2, and identification information 330 indicating the food to be cooked.

Because of this configuration, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, in which multiple heating means are used in combination, the first specific screen 30SP can be used to check and input the necessary information. This improves the user's operability even in a cooking device 1 with an increased number of heating means.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN is configured to display a dedicated display screen (second specific screen 30SC) that displays the heating source (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) to be used among the second heating means HM2.

Because of this configuration, in the composite cooking mode KM2, in which multiple heating means are used in combination, the second specific screen 30SC can be used to confirm and input the necessary information. This improves the user's operability even in a cooking device 1 with an increased number of heating means.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the single cooking mode KM1 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN displays a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) (see FIG. 48) that displays information indicating one type of control pattern (e.g., "keep warm", "preheat", "boil water", etc.) of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and standard control conditions that can be applied to that control pattern (default setting values: e.g., keep warm 80°C, preheat 180°C, etc.).

This configuration allows the control pattern and control conditions in the single cooking mode KM1 to be confirmed on the third specific screen 30ST. This improves operability and convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, a configuration was disclosed in which the first specific screen 30SP displays standard control conditions (default settings, for example, heat power is "standard") that can be applied to the food to be cooked (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the coordinated cooking mode (see FIG. 95, etc.).

This configuration allows the control conditions during cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 to be confirmed on the first specific screen 30SP. This improves operability and convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, a configuration was disclosed in which the second specific screen 30SC displays standard control conditions (default setting values) applicable to the heating source (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) used in the second heating means HM2 (see Figures 49 to 52, etc.).

This configuration allows the control conditions during cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 to be confirmed on the second specific screen 30SC. This improves operability and convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the first heating means HM1 is disclosed as having an induction heating source 9 equipped with IH coils 17L and 17R.

With this configuration, cooking can be performed on the top plate 15 .
This can improve convenience.
If a combustor equipped with a gas burner is installed instead of the induction heating source 9, the heating operation in the single cooking mode can be performed on the top plate 15 by the gas burner, and the same effect can be expected.

The heating source constituting the second heating means HM2 is a configuration including a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 that heats the food using a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189.

Because of this configuration, even if the same heating chamber 113 is used for cooking, the heating principles are different, so a suitable heating method can be adopted for various foods. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device 1 that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A heating chamber 113;
Display means (integrated display section 30, left side display section 31L, and right side display section 31R);
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N in which the object is accommodated outside the heating chamber 113;
A second heating means HM2 (a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that receives the command from the input operation unit 40 and controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an independent cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently, and an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 are combined,
When the main power supply is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays an initial standby screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) on the integrated display unit 30, and during the period when the initial standby screen (common screen 30Z) is being displayed,
(1) When a first command (a selection command by the input key 43MC: see FIG. 35) is received, the identification information 330 of at least one food item (e.g., “hamburger steak”) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30,
(2) When a second command (a selection command using the input key 43L1 or 43R1) is received before the first command is received, information indicating at least one control pattern (e.g., “boiling water”) in the single cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the third specific screen 30ST of the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 48 ).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform cooking in both the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM3. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, when the main power is turned on, the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) is displayed first, and by giving the first or second command while this standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) is being displayed, it is possible to display information that can identify the food to be cooked in the coordinated cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") or information that indicates the control pattern in the single cooking mode KM1 (e.g., "boiling water"), respectively, which is expected to prevent user operation errors and improve operability.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC is configured to display a specific screen (first specific screen 30SP) different from the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) on the integrated display unit 30 when the first command is received (the common screen 30Z is switched to the first specific screen 30SP).

This configuration allows the user to recognize the selection result of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 on the first specific screen 30SP, improving user operability and convenience.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC is configured to display a specific screen (third specific screen 30ST) different from the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) on the integrated display unit 30 when the second command is received (the common screen 30Z is switched to the third specific screen 30ST).

This configuration allows the user to recognize the selection result of the single cooking mode KM1 on the third specific screen 30ST, improving user operability and convenience.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the first specific screen 30SP discloses a configuration in which information on the applicable control conditions (see "Information 30V indicating microwave output level" in Figures 87 and 99) is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 for each of the identification information 330.

This configuration allows the control conditions during cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 to be confirmed on the first specific screen 30SP. This improves operability and convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the third specific screen 30ST is configured to display information on the applicable control conditions for each control pattern of the single cooking mode KM1 (e.g., "keep warm", "boil water", etc.) on the integrated display unit 30.

With this configuration, for example, control conditions such as keeping warm at 80°C and preheating at 180°C are displayed on a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) (see Figure 48), improving operability and convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC discloses a configuration for performing a composite cooking mode KM2 in which a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the first heating means HM1 are started to operate simultaneously or with a time lag, or are automatically switched and operated.

Because of this configuration, even when cooking using the same heating chamber 113, the heating principle is different, so a heating method can be adopted according to the food being cooked. In addition, the heating source is automatically switched, so the burden on the user is small. As a result, a highly convenient cooking device 1 can be provided that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is disclosed as having a first cooperative cooking mode in which cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1 and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means HM2, and a second cooperative cooking mode in which cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2 and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1.

This configuration uses a method of switching between multiple heat sources to heat the food to be cooked in two locations, the heating chamber 113 and above the top plate 15, making it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker 1 that can handle a wide variety of food to be cooked.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N on the top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
An input operation unit 40 for receiving a command signal from a user;
an integrated control device MC that controls the heating operations of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are used in combination,
The integrated control device MC has operation steps STR1, STR2 ("operation step A", see FIG. 67) for determining whether or not cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is permitted for a specific food item (e.g., "hamburger steak") selected by the input operation unit 40, operation step STR3 ("operation step B", see FIG. 70) for issuing a first specific notification including information about the food item (e.g., "hamburger steak") to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 if cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is permitted, and operation step STR8 ("operation step C", see FIG. 70) for transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 if a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit 40 after the first specific notification.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration prevents situations in which cooperative cooking becomes impossible midway through due to, for example, a power shortage, and allows cooking in cooperative cooking mode KM3 to be performed reliably using two or more heating means. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the first specific notification is configured to display a first specific screen 30SP on which the identification information 330 of the food to be cooked and information on at least the cooking process that is to be started first, between the cooking process by the first heating means (induction heating source 9) and the cooking process by the second heating means HM2, are displayed together.

This configuration allows the user to check the food to be cooked in advance, providing a user-friendly cooking device.

As is apparent from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A heating chamber 113;
An integrated display unit 30 serving as a display means;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N in which the object is accommodated outside the heating chamber 113;
A second heating means HM2 (a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that receives the command from the input operation unit 40 and controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an independent cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently, and an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 are combined,
When the main power supply is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays a standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) common to the first and second heating means HM1 and HM2 on the integrated display unit 30, and during the period in which this standby initial screen is displayed,
(1) When a first command (by operating the input key 43MC) specifying the cooperative cooking mode is received, the standby initial screen is switched to a first specific screen 30SP, and a cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) that can be the target of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed.
(2) When a second command (operation of the input key 43M1) specifying a desired control pattern for the second heating means HM2 is received, the standby initial screen is switched to a second specific screen 30SC, and a control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 (e.g., "Microwave manual" is displayed (see Figs. 37 and 51),
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, when a command is received (through operation of input key 43M1) specifying the desired food to be cooked, the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 (e.g., "hamburger steak") is displayed, and when a command is received (through operation of input key 43M1) specifying the desired control pattern for the second heating means HM2, the control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 (e.g., "microwave manual") is displayed, thus providing a heating cooker with high operability.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, when the integrated control device MC receives a selection signal for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 during the period when the standby initial screen is displayed, the integrated control device MC displays identification information 330 for identifying the food to be cooked (e.g., "hamburger steak") in association with guide information 30P serving as a reference for the user's operation on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Because of this configuration, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, in which multiple heating means are used in combination, the first specific screen 30SP can be used to check and input the necessary information. This improves the user's operability even in a cooking device 1 with an increased number of heating means.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when a selection signal for the single cooking mode KM1 is received, information for specifying the control pattern (e.g., "microwave manual") (specification text 30J: see FIG. 50) and information on a control condition applicable to one of the control patterns (microwave output value information 30X: see FIG. 50) are displayed in correspondence with each other on the second specific screen 30SC.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Because of this configuration, even if the cooking device 1 uses a combination of multiple heating means, the control pattern and the control conditions can be checked in correspondence with each other. This improves operability for the user.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N containing an object to be cooked on a top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about cooking;
An integrated control device MC for controlling a heating operation;
an input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated preheating cooking mode KM4 having a preheating process of preheating the object N by using the first heating means HM1, a cooking process 1 of heating the object (e.g., "hamburger steak") by the first heating means HM1 after the preheating process, and a cooking process 2 of using the second heating means HM2 after the cooking process 1.
The present inventors have disclosed a cooking device 1 characterized by the above features (see Figs. 54 and 61).

This configuration allows for the execution of an integrated cooking menu in which an object to be cooked N, such as a frying pan or pot, placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, an object to be cooked (e.g., a hamburger steak) is placed on the object to be cooked N, and cooked (cooking step 1), and then the object to be cooked is cooked by a second heating means in the heating chamber 113. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the notification unit AN includes a display unit (integrated display unit) 30 that displays identification information 330 of the applicable food to be cooked (e.g., “hamburger steak”) when the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is selected by the input operation unit 40.
The present inventors have disclosed a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see FIG. 54).

This configuration makes it possible to provide a highly operable cooking device that allows the user to easily select a specific food to be cooked (e.g., "hamburger steak") to which the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4 is to be applied using the identification information 330.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The input operation unit 40 has first operation units (left operation unit, right operation unit) 40L, 40R that set heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 and command the start and stop of a heating operation, and a second operation unit (center operation unit) 40M that sets heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and command the start and stop of the heating operation,
The cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is selected by the second operation unit 40M.
The preheating process is terminated by the first operation units 40L and 40R.
The cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is started and ended by the second operation unit 40M.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Because of this configuration, the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4, which uses a combination of multiple heating means, can be selected with the second operation unit 40M, and the cooking process performed with the second heating means HM2 using the heating chamber 113 is also started and ended with the second operation unit 40M, so the user can start and end heating cooking in the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 with the second operation unit 40M.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 as a plurality of heating sources capable of heating independently of each other.
The integrated control device MC has an independent cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently;
a combined cooking mode KM2 for automatically combining the plurality of heating sources in the second heating means HM2 to automatically proceed with one cooking process;
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration automatically combines the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, which have different heating principles (heating characteristics) for the food being cooked, and automatically progresses one cooking process in the heating chamber 113, providing a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated control device MC further has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 including a cooking process 1 using either the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2, and a cooking process 2 that is started after the cooking process 1 is completed using either the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2 that is not used in the cooking process 1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows multiple heating means to be automatically combined to heat and cook one food item in two locations: above the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking needs.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 equipped with a display screen,
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
When the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
When the single cooking mode KM1 is selected by the input operation unit 40, a third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Because of this configuration, when the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, or the single cooking mode KM1 is selected, one of the corresponding first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC, and third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in this first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N containing an object to be cooked on a top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about cooking;
An integrated control device MC for controlling a heating operation;
an input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated preheating cooking mode KM4 having a preheating process of preheating the object N by using the first heating means HM1, a cooking process 1 of heating the object N by the second heating means HM2 in parallel with the preheating process, and a cooking process 2 of using the object N preheated in the preheating process and the first heating means HM1 after the cooking process 1.
A cooking device 1 was disclosed (see Figs. 54 and 61).

This configuration allows for the execution of a coordinated cooking menu in which preheating of the object to be heated N, such as a frying pan or pot, placed on the top plate 15 is started, cooking process 1 is carried out in the heating chamber 113 in parallel with this preheating process, and then the object to be cooked (e.g., a "hamburger steak") is cooked on the preheated object to be heated N (cooking process 2). This makes it possible to shorten the overall cooking time, including the preheating time, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in this first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the seventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A composite cooking mode KM2 having multiple control menus for operating two or more heating sources in a predetermined sequence;
An integrated cooking mode KM3 having a plurality of integrated cooking menus, in which the heating sources are operated in a predetermined order in the interior of the heating chamber 113 and above the top plate;
A display means (integrated display unit) 30 for selectively displaying the control menu and the collaborative cooking menu;
An input operation unit 40 that allows the user to select the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking mode,
When at least two of the control menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means 30 and the start key 43MS of the input operation unit is operated, the control menu displayed on a predetermined display position A (the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction) of the display means 30 is selected, and the process proceeds to a cooking process of the composite cooking mode KM2.
When the start key 43MS is operated while at least two of the cooperative cooking menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means 30, one of the cooperative cooking menus displayed in a predetermined display position B (the center of the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) is selected, and the process proceeds to a cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The input operation unit 40 has an input key 43M1 arranged adjacent to each other, the input key 43M1 for displaying the control menu in a forward direction at the display position A of the display means 30 each time the input key 43M1 is operated, and the input key 43M1 for displaying the control menu in a reverse direction at the display position A of the display means 30 (the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction) each time the input key 43M1 is operated,
The input operation unit 40 has an input key 43M1 that displays the linked cooking menu in a forward direction at the display position B (the center of the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) each time the input key 43M1 is operated, and an input key 43M1 that displays the linked cooking menu in a reverse direction at the display position B (the center of the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) each time the input key 43M1 is operated, arranged adjacent to each other;
The input key 43M1 for forwarding and backwardly displaying the control menu and the cooperative cooking menu at the display position A (the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction) and the display position B, respectively, is shared by the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

With this configuration, the user can select between the control menu for the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking menu by scrolling forward and backward through the menu, so there is no confusion. This allows the user to select between composite cooking and linked cooking with a simple operation, providing a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
In the display means 30, when at least two of the control menus are simultaneously displayed, a second display position (second display area 30M) adjacent to the predetermined display position (the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction) displays control conditions (e.g., heat and heating time) applicable to one of the control menus displayed in the predetermined display position (the center of the first area 30L).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Because of this configuration, in the composite cooking mode, the control conditions applicable to one control menu can be easily confirmed in the second area 30M, making it possible to provide a cooking device with high operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 40 has an input key 43M2 for displaying the control conditions applicable to one control menu in a forward manner at a predetermined display position C (second display area 30M; see FIG. 49) of the display means 30, and an input key 43M2 for displaying the control conditions in a reverse manner at the display position C (second display area 30M) each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the input key 43M2 being arranged adjacent to each other.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the user to easily check the control conditions displayed in the second area 30M, providing a cooking device that is easy to operate.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
In the display means 30, when at least two of the coordinated cooking menus are displayed simultaneously, a control condition (e.g., information 30V indicating an output level, see FIG. 82) applicable to one of the coordinated cooking menus (e.g., "hamburger") displayed at the display position B (the center of the first area 30L, see FIG. 82) is displayed at a predetermined display position D (second display area 30M, see FIG. 82(C)) adjacent to the display position B (the center of the first area 30L, see FIG. 82);
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

With this configuration, even in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the user can easily visually check the control conditions (e.g., heat level) displayed in the second area 30M, providing a cooking device with high operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key 43M2 for displaying the control conditions in the second display position (second display area 30M) of the display means 30 in a forward manner each time the input key 43M2 is operated, and an input key 43M2 for displaying the control conditions in the second display unit (second display area 30M) in a reverse manner each time the input key 43M2 is operated, the input key 43M2 being arranged adjacent to each other.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the control conditions (e.g., heat level) to be displayed in a predetermined display position (second display area 30M) by scrolling forward and backward using input key 43M2, making it easy for the user to check, and providing a cooking device with high operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input key 43M2 for forwarding and backward the control conditions of the control menu KM2 and the control conditions of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 to selectively display one of them on the second display unit (second display area 30M) is shared by the complex cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Because of this configuration, even if it is not possible to secure a large area for the input operation unit 40, the installation area for the input keys 43M2 can be kept to a minimum, and operability is improved through sharing, making it possible to provide a cooking device that is highly convenient for the user.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
When the control menu is displayed at the predetermined display position (the center of the first area 30L), auxiliary information 30P (reference information 30P: recommendation text) including at least one of information (heat source display section) 30K specifying the heating source to be used for the control menu displayed at the predetermined display position, information indicating the category of the food to be cooked (vegetables, meat, etc.) (see FIG. 51), and information 30P1 (see FIG. 49) indicating the characteristics of the control menu is displayed on the display means 30.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the user to correctly understand the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM3 using the auxiliary information 30P, making it possible to provide a cooking device with improved operability and convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The auxiliary information 30P includes summary information that is always displayed simply in characters or symbols when the control menu is displayed, and detailed information that is displayed in characters according to a user's display command or a previous function setting.
The present inventors have disclosed a cooking device 1 characterized by the above features (see Figs. 37, 49 and 51).

This configuration allows the user to correctly understand the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM3 using the auxiliary information 30P, making it possible to provide a cooking device with improved operability and convenience for the user.

As is clear from the above description, in this first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body case HC;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N in which the object is accommodated outside the heating chamber 113;
A second heating source HM2 having a plurality of heating sources 188, 189 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
a first selection unit 43MC for displaying one cooking menu selectably from a plurality of cooking menus prepared according to the type of food in an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which one food is heated using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
In a composite cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of the heating sources 188, 189 are automatically combined to heat one food item simultaneously or at a time lag, a second selection unit 43M1 selects one control menu (e.g., "parboil leafy vegetables") from a plurality of control menus that are common to a plurality of types of food items;
An integrated control device MC that receives the selection of the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1 and controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the user to easily select the control menu for the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking menu using the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1, providing a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body case HC further includes an input operation unit 40.
The input operation unit 40 is provided with a first input key constituting the first selection unit 43MC and a second input key constituting the second selection unit 43M1,
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the user to easily select the control menu for the composite cooking mode and the linked cooking menu using the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1, providing a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 40 further includes a function setting input means 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC,
At least one of the display method of each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the display method of each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be changed by the function setting input means 43KP.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Because of this configuration, when the function mode is selected, the display method of the control menu for the composite cooking mode and the display method of the linked cooking menu can be changed, providing a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body case HC further includes an integrated display unit 30 as a display means.
The integrated display unit 30 displays the selection result of the first selection unit 43MC and the selection result of the second selection unit 43M1,
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the user to easily distinguish between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 on the integrated display unit 30, providing a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Other features disclosed in embodiment 1:
The following characteristic configurations were disclosed:

(1) Part 1:
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting a degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and automatically notifies at least one of the first reference information FA1 and the second reference information FA2 related to the cooking process 2 by the notification unit AN during the cooking process 1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, it has a function to detect and determine the degree of progress of cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, for example, by the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and automatically notifies the user of reference information midway through cooking step 1 or cooking step 2. Therefore, even if the number of types of heating sources increases, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to alleviate anxiety, and mistakes such as impairing the execution of efficient coordinated cooking can be avoided by pausing the heating operation midway to check. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(2) Part 2:
The integrated control device MC has an integrated cooking mode KM3 that integrates the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, and a cooking process 2 using the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device MC automatically performs the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 in response to a command from a user, and after the cooking process 1 is ended, starts the cooking process 2 in response to a start command from the user, and automatically performs the cooking process 2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting a degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and automatically notifies at least one of the first reference information FA1 for the cooking process 1 or the second reference information FA2 for the cooking process 2 by the notification unit AN during the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, it has a function to detect and determine the degree of progress of cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, for example, by the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and automatically notifies the user of reference information midway through cooking step 1 or cooking step 2. Therefore, even if the number of types of heating sources increases, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to alleviate anxiety, and mistakes such as impairing the execution of efficient coordinated cooking can be avoided by pausing the heating operation midway to check. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(3) Part 3:
A cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation,
When the linked cooking mode is set, it is possible to reserve a cooking step 1 in which the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113 is heated, and a cooking step 2 in which the food to be cooked is induction-heated by the induction heating source on the food to be cooked N placed on the top plate 15 after the cooking step 1 is completed.
When a reservation for cooking using the linked cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking process 1 to start the preheating process,
(2) During the preheating step, cooking step 1 can be started in the heating chamber 113 by the microwave heating source 189;
(3) After the microwave heating source 9 is stopped and the cooking process 1 is completed, the cooking process 2 can be started on the object N preheated by the induction heating source 9.
(4) A cooking device is disclosed that is characterized in that, in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, information showing the progress of the cooking steps is notified by the notification unit AN.

This configuration allows the induction heating source 9 and microwave heating source 189 to be used in combination. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, cooking process 1 can be started while the preheating process using the induction heating source 9 is still in progress prior to cooking process 1, and then the food to be cooked can be moved toward the preheated food N to perform cooking process 2.

In addition, reference information is automatically provided to the user midway through cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, so even if the number of types of heating sources is increasing, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking, eliminating anxiety, and the heating operation can be temporarily stopped midway to check, preventing mistakes such as impairing the execution of efficient coordinated cooking. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(4) No. 4:
The integrated control device MC includes:
(1) an IH only cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated alone; (2) a range only cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated alone; (3) an oven only cooking mode in which the oven heating source 188 is operated alone; and (4) a coordinated cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are operated sequentially through a transition period TR whose start and end timings are determined depending on a user's input operation,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed before the transition period using the heating chamber 113, and a cooking process 2 performed at a location other than the heating chamber 113 after the transition period,
During the transition period TR, the integrated control device MC causes the notification unit AN to notify reference information regarding the cooking process 2 or information indicating that cooking other than the cooking in the combined cooking mode KM3 can be performed in the heating chamber 113.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the linked cooking mode and combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking using the linked cooking mode, during the transition period TR when the heating operation is stopped (preheating operation may continue), it is possible to notify the user that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 that has completed cooking step 1.
This will reduce the time the user spends on cooking, enabling cooking to be done more quickly than before, and is expected to reduce the burden on the user and improve usability.

(5) Part 5:
The integrated control device MC controls a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 to start driving with a time lag;
A composite cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are started to be driven simultaneously or with a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven;
It has the function of performing
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking process 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode, and notifies the user through the notification unit AN that, before the cooking process 1 is completed, cooking other than the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed using either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the linked cooking mode and combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking using the linked cooking mode, once cooking step 1 occupying the heating chamber 113 has finished, the user can be notified in advance that another cooking step can be performed using the heating chamber 113. This reduces the time the user spends on cooking, enabling cooking to be performed more quickly than before, and is expected to reduce the burden on the user and improve usability.

(6) No. 6:
A heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
An induction heating source 9 for heating an object N to be heated;
a transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 for transmitting and receiving information to and from an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
An alarm unit AN;
an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are cooperatively used to perform cooking,
The cooperative cooking mode is a mode in which a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started in response to a command from a user after the cooking process 1 is completed are executed,
The integrated control device MC acquires reference information related to the cooking to which the collaborative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device 411 via the transceiver unit 49.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking with heat in the linked cooking mode, information on ingredients in the refrigerator 401 can be obtained as reference information related to cooking to which the linked cooking mode is applied, which is expected to reduce the cooking burden on the user and improve usability.

(7) No. 7:
A heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
An induction heating source 9 for heating an object N to be heated;
a transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 for transmitting and receiving information to and from an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
An alarm unit AN;
an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are cooperatively operated by a cooperative cooking program to perform cooking.
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2 that is started in response to a user's command after a transition period TR during which no heating operation is performed,
The integrated control device MC transmits cooking execution data related to the cooking performed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device 411 via the transmission/reception unit 49.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking is performed in the linked cooking mode, data on the cooking process is provided to an external information processing device (home gateway) 411, which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401. The use of such information can ultimately contribute to improving the convenience and safety of users, as well as maintaining and improving a comfortable space.

(8) No. 8:
When the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, it is configured to display a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, that is, as an example, display either the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC, thereby allowing the user to easily identify the cooking mode.

This configuration allows the provision of a cooking device that can use two heating sources, such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189, and can easily switch between the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.

Furthermore, the configuration was provided with an input operation unit 40 for inputting to select either the linked cooking mode or the composite cooking mode, and an integrated display unit 30 for alternatively displaying the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC.
Therefore, either the cooperative cooking mode or the composite cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display section 30, which is convenient.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 was common to the first and second heating means, and had an operation unit 98 of a main power switch 97 that supplies power to the integrated control device MC, and an input key 43MS (cooking start input means) that commands the start of individual cooking in the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.
Therefore, operations from turning on the main power to issuing a command to start heating can be performed using the input operation unit 40, providing good operability.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT which serves as a cooking mode canceling means for deciding the end of each cooking step of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Therefore, both the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be cancelled by the input key 43MT, providing good operability.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC is configured to accept input of any one of the composite cooking mode, the coordinated cooking mode, and the single cooking mode at the input operation unit 40, and display a specific screen (first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC, and third specific screen 30ST) corresponding to the cooking mode on the integrated display unit 30.

Moreover, for each cooking menu item in the linked cooking mode, such as "hamburger steak" or "fried chicken," the heat sources for cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and useful information for the user, such as the first reference information FA1 and the second reference information FA2, is also displayed, thereby reducing cooking mistakes by the user and providing a heating cooker with improved convenience.

In addition, after the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC displays an initial standby screen (common screen 30Z) on the integrated display unit 30, which displays warning information and reference information before cooking, and then displays the first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC, etc. on the integrated display unit 30 in accordance with the input from the input operation unit 40.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 can be used effectively, and caution information can be provided to the user before cooking with heat.

The specific screens are a first specific screen 30SP for the collaborative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the composite cooking mode, and the first specific screen and the second specific screen are configured to be displayed alternatively on the integrated display unit 30.
This eliminates the risk of confusion between the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, making it easy for users to use.
.

(9) Number 9:
Furthermore, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 has been pressed, it displays cooking process information 332 for one linked cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger") and one or more "control condition" information applied to the menu (including one or more combinations of heat, heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
The integrated control device MC is configured to display additional information 331 such as guidance to encourage the user to perform an operation, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, it starts the execution of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 (see Figure 54).

According to this embodiment 1, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by three types of heat sources, the display screen 30D can display at least three pieces of information at once, such as the heat source according to one control menu selected from the group of coordinated cooking modes, the cooking process, and the user's input operation, so that even a combined heat cooker with three heat sources can be made to be a heat cooker that is easy to use.

(10) Number 10:
In order to detect the progress of cooking process 1 or cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC measures the elapsed time or temperature rise from the start of cooking process 1 or cooking process 2, and reports the first reference information FA1 or the second reference information FA2.
Therefore, the notification of the reference information can be ensured.

(11) Part 11:
The input operation unit 40 includes:
(1) IH only cooking mode selection means 43L, 43R for operating the induction heating source alone;
(2) a range-only cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the microwave heating source alone;
(3) a means 43M1 for selecting an oven-only cooking mode for operating the oven heat source alone;
(4) a composite cooking mode selection means 43M1 for automatically switching between the microwave heating source and the oven heating source simultaneously or with a time lag;
(5) The integrated cooking mode selection means 43MC is provided.
This has the advantage that each heat source can be easily selected without increasing the installation space for the means for selecting the three heat sources (input keys, etc.).

(12) No. 12:
The input operation unit 40 has a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L which are dedicated operation units for the induction heating source 9, and a common operation unit (central operation unit) 40M for the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188,
The common operation unit 40M includes a first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC) is started before the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1), a first specific screen (30SP) for inputting information about cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed,
When an input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1) is started before the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC), a second specific screen 30SC for input related to cooking in the composite cooking mode is displayed.
Therefore, the first operation to select the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is valid. Moreover, since separate specific screens are displayed, there is no risk of an erroneous operation when selecting between the two cooking modes.

(13) No. 13:
In the cooking steps 1 and 2, at least one of the heating conditions of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 was configured to be automatically determined by the integrated control device MC. For example, in "manual range" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from 100 W, 200 W, and 500 W, but the default value is set to 500 W. In other words, unless otherwise specified, the output is set to 500 W.
This reduces the number of input operations required by the user, improving usability.

(14) No. 14:
The end of cooking process 1 and the end of cooking process 2 using the induction heating source 9 were determined by input operations to the dedicated operation units (right operation unit 40R and left operation unit 40L). Specifically, the start and stop timings of the induction heating operation were determined by input keys 43L1 and 43R1.
Therefore, after selecting to execute the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the user can stand in front of either the right operation unit 40R or the left operation unit 40L and concentrate on starting and ending induction heating.
In other words, there is no need to use both the central operating unit 40M and the left and right operating units 40L, 40R to start and end cooking process 1, so there is no confusion for the user in the operation.

(15) No. 15:
In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heating conditions of at least one of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 were configured to be determined by the user operating the input operation unit 40 (40M, 40L, 40R).
This allows the heating conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.) to be set according to the food to be cooked, the heating method, and the heating source, resulting in excellent cooking results.

(16) No. 16:
The notification unit AN had a first display unit (31L, 31R) that performs a display operation during the execution of the IH only cooking mode, and an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode.
Therefore, particularly when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 using multiple heating sources, the cooking processes, heating conditions, etc. are displayed in a concentrated manner on a single integrated display unit 30, allowing the user to focus attention on the integrated display unit 30.

(17) No. 17:
In the collaborative cooking mode KM3, identification information 330 identifying multiple cooked foods is displayed in a fixed order on the first identification screen 30SP, and each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the identification information 330 becomes selectable in sequence.
Therefore, when a desired cooking operation (e.g., hamburger steak) is to be performed, the identification information can be displayed in sequence and selected, so that the selection method is simple and the operability for the user can be improved.

(18) No. 18:
The combined cooking mode is classified by a control menu for driving the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (see Figs. 34 and 37).
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information for specifying the control menu (for example, specific sentences 30J such as "Warm" and "Microwave Manual" in FIG. 49).
This allows the user to easily select the control menu.

(19) No. 19:
The configuration has been disclosed in which the reference information acquired by the integrated control device MC from the home gateway 411 via the transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 is information on ingredients that can be cooked with heat.
This eliminates the need to go to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to obtain information about ingredients, thus reducing the user's workload.

(20) No. 20:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the reference information (ingredients information) in the memory device MM until cooking in one of the integrated cooking modes is completed.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform special operations to record reference information each time, or to write it down on paper.

(21) No. 21:
The food ingredient information is information stored in the refrigerator 401. Furthermore, the food ingredient information includes information on the refrigeration temperature or freezing temperature of the food ingredient.
Therefore, when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode with the heating cooker 1, this can be used as a reference when determining the control conditions (including one or more combinations of heat, heating intensity, target temperature, etc.), and better finished cooking can be expected.

(22) No. 22:
The integrated control device MC was configured to transmit a signal (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 104) requesting the provision of the ingredient information from the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411 before the start of the cooking process 1.
.
This eliminates the need to go to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to obtain information about ingredients, thus reducing the user's workload.

(23) No. 23:
Before the start of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC is configured to transmit a signal from the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411 requesting the provision of the reference information, and further to notify the user via the notification unit AN that reference information is requested (see Figure 110).
Therefore, the user can refrain from moving to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to check, thereby reducing the user's effort.

(24) No. 24:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the cooking execution data in the memory device MM after the cooking process 2 is completed.
Therefore, the user does not need to perform any special operations or write down on paper in order to record the cooking execution data.

(25) No. 25:
The cooking execution data is transmitted after the end of the cooking step 2, and includes at least one of the following pieces of information:
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked; (2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked; (3) Information indicating the control conditions for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2; (4) Information indicating the time required from cooking process 1 to the end of cooking process 2; (5) Information indicating the end time of cooking process 2; (6) Information identifying the heat source used for the heating and cooking operation; (7) Information regarding restrictions the user will be subject to during the next heating and cooking operation; (8) Information related to the safety of the user, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber. This eliminates the need for the user to perform special operations or record cooking execution data accurately and in detail, or to record the data on paper.

(26) No. 26:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store, after the cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is completed, information on the time required to complete the cooking in the memory device MM.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform special operations or to write down on paper the information on the time required for cooking each time.

(27) No. 27:
In the home appliance operation management system of embodiment 1, when an information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects the presence of a person in the space in which the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed and receives startup information from the cooking appliance 1, the information processing device (home gateway) 411 determines that it is the cooking time zone and issues a command to the refrigerator 401 to collect inventory data (see step SD6 in FIG. 103).
Therefore, when a user (resident) is near the refrigerator 401 or the cooking appliance 1 and is likely to cook, the inventory data collection operation can be performed automatically, and further, the user is not required to perform any special input operations to collect the data when cooking, and useful information can be obtained without much effort, thereby realizing an overall highly convenient operation management system.

Embodiment 2.
116 to 126 show a cooking device according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 116 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is closed in the cooking device 1 (built-in type combination type) according to the second embodiment. FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is open in the cooking device 1. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the upper unit in the cooking device 1 with the top plate removed. FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the upper unit in the cooking device 1 with the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the upper unit in the cooking device 1 with the top plate, the IH coil, and the cover removed. FIG. 121 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the cooking device 1. FIG. 122 is a bottom (lower surface) view of the upper unit of the cooking device 1. FIG. 123 is a block diagram explaining the overall control function of the cooking device 1. FIG. 124 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device 1. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the single control menu. Fig. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit in the case of the cooperative cooking mode. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the first embodiment described in Figs. 1 to 115 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The second embodiment differs significantly from the first embodiment in that an outside air intake port for the cooking device 1 has been added (modified) and the control configuration has also been changed.

The configuration of the input operation unit 40 also differs significantly from that of the first embodiment. Furthermore, the restrictions on the operation of the heat source used when implementing the collaborative cooking mode KM3 are different.

Furthermore, the operating patterns of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are also significantly different from those in embodiment 1.

The following description will focus on the differences from the first embodiment and will be given with reference to the drawings.
Referring to Figure 116 .
Reference numeral 118 denotes a connecting member for integrating the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, and since it also serves the purpose of reinforcement, it may also be called a "reinforcing member."

The connecting member 118 has a shape that continuously covers the right side surface, the lower surface, and further the left side surface of the lower unit 200 .
Although not shown, the connecting member 118 further has a left vertical portion 118L which overlaps and is fixed to the left side surface of the front portion of the lower unit 200 in a tight contact state, and a central flat portion 118M which is formed continuously with the right vertical portion 118R and the left vertical portion 118L. The central flat portion 118M overlaps and is fixed to the underside of the bottom plate 101U in the front portion of the lower case 101 in a tight contact state.

Next, we will explain Figure 117.
The mounting portion of the hinge portion 176, which will be described later, has a robust structure that will not bend or deform even if it receives a load or the like when the door 114 is opened or closed. As a result, the door 114 can be reliably supported when it is opened or closed.
Therefore, even when used for a long period of time, door 114 fits tightly around the front periphery of opening 114A of heating chamber 114, ensuring that opening 114A is closed securely, resulting in a highly safe cooking device with no radio wave leakage.

The connecting member 118 is formed by pressing a single thin metal plate (e.g., 1 mm thick) to integrally form the right vertical portion 118R (not shown), the central flat portion 118M (not shown), and the right vertical portion 118L.

In Figures 116 and 117, 101RP is a protrusion formed integrally with the side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101. This protrusion is formed by pressing the side vertical wall 101R from the inside to the outside of the lower case 101, and is intended to increase the mechanical strength of the side vertical wall 101R. Similarly, the side vertical wall 101L on the left side of the lower case 101 also protrudes outward by a certain area to form a protrusion 101LP (not shown).

116 is a metal arm that supports the door 114 in a horizontal position and pulls it in the direction of closing when closing the door 114. This arm 116 is guided by a through hole (guide hole) 117 formed in the front plate 101F of the lower case 101, and moves in the front-rear direction through the through hole 117. Note that the door structure of a high-frequency heating device that uses the arm 116 is introduced in, for example, JP 2002-39541 A, JP 2010-181106 A, and JP 2007-218544 A, and therefore a detailed description will be omitted.

In FIG. 117, 176 denotes a pair of hinges, one on the left and one on the right, which are fixed to both the door 114 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This allows the door 114 to be supported rotatably on the lower case 101. The hinges 176 are sandwiched between the connecting member (reinforcing member) 118 and the bottom plate 101U, and are fixed at multiple points by fasteners (combinations of bolts and nuts, screws, etc.).

With the above structure, the door 114 opens and closes with the hinge 176 as a fulcrum. The pair of left and right arms 116 are supported from below by rollers (not shown) or sliding members (not shown) that are rotatably mounted on the lower back side of the through hole 117, and when the door 114 is opened or closed, the arms 116 move back and forth while contacting the upper surface of the rollers or sliding members.

In addition, although not shown, the arm 116 is constantly pulled toward the inside of the cooking appliance 1 by a tension spring, so that even if the appliance is subjected to vibrations such as an earthquake, the door 114 will not easily open due to the vibrations (electromagnetic wave leakage from the door 114 is prevented during microwave heating operation).

Reference numeral 112 denotes front covers provided on both the left and right sides of the front surface of the lower unit 200, and is made of plastic or metal.
The front cover 112 has a symmetrical shape, and each of them projects to the left and right more than the width of the lower case 101 and is fixed to the lower case 101. When the cooking appliance 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 covers as much of the entire front of the gaps between the kitchen furniture 2 (right gap 301R and left gap 301L) as possible, thereby making the gaps 301R, 301L less noticeable when viewed from the front.

198 is a metal support bracket that has a length that spans the entire width of the lower case 101. This support bracket 198 is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101 with screws 186.

Reference numeral 146 denotes a box-shaped front operation unit fixed to the front (surface) side of the right-side front cover 112. This front operation unit 146 is used during microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113.
The input operation section 40 is made up of four sections: the front operation section 146, a central operation section 40M, a right operation section 40R, and a left operation section 40L.

147 is a display unit equipped with an LCD screen, and is located on the ceiling surface of the front operation unit 146, so that the user can visually check the display contents from above when cooking. Note that this front operation unit 146 is not rotated and stored inside the cooking device 1, unlike the operation unit of the conventionally known "kangaroo pocket mechanism," but is always exposed in front of the front cover 112.

On the top surface of the front operation unit 146, near the display unit 147, multiple touch-type or push-button input keys (not shown) are arranged. By operating these input keys, it is possible to input control conditions for microwave heating and oven heating, and to command the start and stop of heating operations.

In FIG. 117, 145 is a dedicated tray used inside the heating chamber 113, and is made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc. This tray 145 has external dimensions that allow it to be easily inserted and removed from the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

Tableware, usually made of porcelain or a highly heat-resistant material, is placed on the tray 145, and food placed in the tableware is heated and cooked using microwaves. However, if microwave heating is not used, the tableware may be made of metal. For example, a cooking utensil (object to be heated) N made of a magnetic metal, such as a frying pan (not shown), may be placed on the top plate 15, and food (e.g., hamburger steak) may be induction-heated to a certain extent on the cooking utensil, after which the cooking utensil may be moved into the heating chamber 113, where further heating is performed by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B to complete the cooking (this cooking method is one type of linked cooking mode).

In Figures 116 and 117, 152S1 and 152S2 are auxiliary air intakes consisting of a number of small holes, and are provided at the lower end of the side vertical wall 101R that constitutes the right side surface of the lower case 101.

The auxiliary air intake 152S1 is an auxiliary air intake of the air intake (second air intake) 152F for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air.
Similarly, the auxiliary air intake 152S2 is an auxiliary air intake of the air intake (second air intake) 152B for cooling the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air. The maximum aperture of these auxiliary air intakes 152S1 and 152S2 is about 3 mm, taking into consideration the effect of preventing microwave leakage.

The intake of the third cooling fan (cooling fan A) 128 for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating source 189 with outside air is located near the auxiliary intake port 152S1, although not shown. Similarly, the intake of the fourth cooling fan (cooling fan B) 129 for cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air is also located near the auxiliary intake port 152S2.

Next, a description will be given of Figure 118. Figure 118 shows a state where the top plate 15 has been removed.
Reference numeral 30W denotes a display window, which is formed in the holder 50 with a size corresponding to the outer shape of the integrated display unit 30.

31LW and 31RW are display windows. These display windows are formed in the holder 50 at positions corresponding to the left display section 31L and the right display section 31R, respectively.

56 is a choke coil, which is one of the important electrical components in the filter circuit board 54. 17C is a coil base (coil support frame) on whose upper surface the two IH coils 17L and 17R are mounted.

The left-side induction coil 17L has a maximum outer dimension (diameter) of 236 mm. This allows it to handle large pots, frying pans, and other heated objects. Therefore, when implementing the linked cooking mode, if a large metal container or cooking utensil (all without a lid) used in the heating chamber 113 is moved directly to the left heating section 17HL for heating, it can be efficiently heated by the left heating section 17HL.

Also, when implementing the coordinated cooking mode, if a large surface area or a large number of foods are heated in the heating chamber 113, and then the foods are transferred to a large metal container or cookware and heated on the left heating unit 17HL, they can be efficiently heated by the left heating unit 17HL. For these reasons, in this second embodiment, it is desirable to occupy the left heating unit 17HL for the coordinated cooking mode. The right-side IH coil 17R is the same as in the first embodiment, and has a diameter of 168 mm.

The coil base 17C is integrally formed from a highly heat-resistant plastic material. The coil base 17C is circular overall to match the shape of the IH coils 17L, 17R, but has multiple arms 17CH extending radially from the center. In this second embodiment, there are eight arms 17CH. A large gap is formed between each arm 17CH to provide a ventilation space.

17F is a ferrite plate provided between each pair of adjacent arms 17CH. In the left IH coil 17L, TS3 is a contact-type temperature sensor such as a thermistor.
One temperature sensor TS3 is installed in the center of the IH coil 17L. The other two temperature sensors TS3 are installed slightly away from the center of the IH coil 17L and at outer positions thereof.

TS5 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. In the right-side IH coil 17R, TS4 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor. One temperature sensor TS4 is installed in the center of the IH coil 17R. The other two temperature sensors TS4 are installed slightly away from the center of the IH coil 17R, each at an outer position.

TS6 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. Measurement data from each of these temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 is input to a temperature detection circuit (temperature detection processing unit) 93. These temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 may be referred to as the "first temperature sensor."

In FIG. 118, reference numeral 66 denotes a magnetic shielding ring made of a metal such as aluminum, which is fixed to the coil base (coil support frame) 17C so as to surround the coil base 17C.
Reference numeral 41R denotes a right-side touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 in the first embodiment. Reference numeral 41L denotes a left-side touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41. These two touch key boards 41L and 41R are also supported on the upper surface of the holder 50.

Next, we will explain Figure 119.
Reference numeral 57 denotes a transformer, which is one of the important electric components in the power supply circuit board 55. In Fig. 119, the left end of the cover 70 is cut out in the range of the horizontal dimension W11. A temperature sensor TS5 supported by the coil base 17C on the IH coil 17L side is disposed in this cutout. In other words, the cutout is made so that the temperature sensor TS5 and the cover 70 do not come into contact with each other.

Next, referring to Fig. 120, reference numeral 58 denotes a capacitor, which is one of the important electric components in the inverter circuit board 80.
As is clear from Fig. 120, there are four aluminum heat sinks 82 in total, two on the left and right (two rows) and two on the front and back. The four heat sinks 82 are installed so that two on each side face each other closely together. Reference numeral 59 denotes a diode bridge circuit (diode module) attached to one heat sink 82. The heat generated during operation of the diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59 is dissipated by the heat sink 82, so that the diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59 does not overheat.

As is clear from FIG. 120, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 are spaced apart by a distance LD of about 50 to 100 mm.
Next, Fig. 121 shows the flow of cooling air in the configuration shown in Fig. 120. The cooling air is indicated by thick arrows.

Next, Figure 122 is a bottom view (lower surface) of the upper unit 100. D5 is the maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100 in the front-to-rear direction, which is 432 mm. W4 is the maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100 in the left-to-right direction, which is 544 mm.

The vertical and horizontal dimensions (maximum inner vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are set to a size that allows the upper case 16 to fit inside, taking into consideration the maximum front-to-rear width dimension D5 and maximum left-to-right width dimension W4 of the upper case 16 described above.

Structurally, it is configured as described above, so when induction heating cooking is performed in the upper unit 100, the inverter circuit board 80, the input operation unit 40, the power supply circuit board 55, and the filter circuit board 54 are cooled by the cooling air RF1, RF2, RF3, and RF4 blown out from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively, as shown by the thick arrows in Figure 121.

Next, we will explain Figure 123.
Fig. 123 is a block diagram for explaining the overall control function of the cooking appliance 1. In Fig. 123, arrows shown by dashed lines indicate command signals for control.
The cooking device 1 according to the second embodiment has a total of six control devices each mainly made of a microcomputer. This is a major difference from the first embodiment.

Of the six control devices mentioned above, the one that is responsible for the overall control of the cooking device 1 is the integrated control device MC. The IH control unit 90 receives commands from this integrated control device MC and controls the induction heating cooking. The control device 105 controls both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This control device 105 is a combination of the heating chamber control unit 159 and microwave heating control unit 130 described in the first embodiment.

The two control devices 90 and 105 described above perform prescribed control according to instructions from the integrated control device MC and return the processing results to the integrated control device MC, and are therefore sometimes called slave microcomputers. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

Of the six control devices mentioned above, the remaining three will be described below.
The first is a right-side input control device 23 that processes inputs from the right-side touch keys arranged on the right operation unit 40R in the input operation unit 40 and the display on the display unit 31R. This right-side input control device 23 further processes inputs from the touch keys of the central operation unit 40M.

The second is a left input control device 24 arranged on the left operation unit 40L, which processes input from the left touch keys and display on the display unit 31L.
The third is a power switch control device 28 .
The power switch control device 28 detects the operation of an operation button (operation section) 98 of a main power switch 97 arranged on the input operation section 40 and determines whether the power is turned on or off.

In FIG. 123, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (AC) power source 99. Power with a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is conducted to the filter circuit board 54 via the power cord 106. The filter circuit board 54 is built into the upper unit 100.

The right-side input control device 23 is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
The right input control device 23 transmits input signals from the touch keys of the central operation unit 40M to the integrated control device MC.

As explained in the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC determines whether a specific input key (one or more) other than the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M has been "pressed and held." In other words, when the right-side input control device 23 transmits a signal from the time when the touch keys are touched to the time when they are not touched to the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC measures the duration of the touch and determines whether it was a "long press."

The filter circuit board 54 has a main relay 107 that turns the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 on and off, and a sub-relay (not shown). Figure 1233 shows only the main relay in schematic form.

The main relay 107 performs an opening and closing operation in response to a predetermined relay control signal from an integrated control device MC that is responsible for the overall control of the cooking appliance 1. The sub-relay performs an opening and closing operation in response to a relay control signal from a power switch control device 28, as will be described later.
The power switch control device 28 has a function of detecting the operation of the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 and determining whether the power is turned on or off. The main power switch 97 is composed of the main relay 107 and the sub-relay.

The integrated control device MC constantly acquires operational information from the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28, and integrates this information to determine and control the processing.

The integrated control device MC controls the central operation unit 40M, the display operation of the integrated display unit 30, the voice synthesis device 95, and the wireless communication unit 49. This integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23, and the power switch control device 28 are attached to the central operation board 32 that constitutes the input operation unit 40.

The right operation board 32R (not shown) and the left operation board 32L (not shown) are attached to the lower surface side of the holder 50. Therefore, they are not shown in Figures 118 to 121.
The central operation board 32 is composed of a right operation board 32R and a left operation board 32L, and the integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23, and the right display unit 31R are mounted on the right operation board 32R. The two operation boards 32L, 32L are made of a plastic material with excellent electrical insulation. The left input control device 24 and the left display unit 31L are mounted on the left operation board 32L (see FIG. 123).

Above the central operation board 32, at the front position of the holder 50, a pair of left and right touch key boards (operation boards) 41L, 41R equipped with various touch-type input keys are installed.

55 is a power supply circuit board to which commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit 54, and as shown in FIG. 123, it is equipped with a power supply circuit A34 to which power is applied via a rectifier circuit 33, and a power supply circuit B36 to which power is applied via a rectifier circuit 35. These two power supply circuits A34 and B36 convert the 200V power into multiple low voltage DC power sources, such as 24V, 18V, 6V, 5V, etc. In other words, multiple DC power sources with different voltages are generated.

The 5V power is supplied as a power source to the integrated control device MC, the IH control section 90, the control device 105, the right-side input control device 23, the left-side input control device 24 and the power switch control device .
The 6V power is used as a power source (including a backlight power source) for the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31R.

The power supply circuit board 55 is installed in the upper unit 100, and as described above, the power generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 is used as a power source for the control and various display sections within the upper unit 100.

Reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board for the induction heating source 9 disposed inside the upper unit 100 .
The inverter circuit board 80 includes a right-side inverter circuit 81R equipped with a DC power supply unit 75R, and a left-side inverter circuit 81L equipped with another DC power supply unit 75L.

AC power of 200V is applied from the filter circuit 54 to the inverter circuit board 80. 90 is an IH control unit that is responsible for the overall control of induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.

The IH control unit 90 transmits a drive signal to the drive circuits 37L, 37R that drive the IGBTs 79a, 79b in the inverter circuits 81L, 81R. The two drive circuits 37L, 37R operate on 18V power supplied from the power supply circuit A34 and power supply circuit B36, and control the IGBTs 79a, 79. This controls the drive frequency of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R.

For example, the drive circuit A37R detects the conduction time of the power switching element 83 (semiconductor switching element) (IGBT79a, 79b) and switches the conduction time to lower the drive frequency of the inverter circuit 81R to reduce the heating power, or conversely, to increase the drive frequency to increase the heating power. These drive frequency commands are issued from the IH control unit 90.

Reference numeral 77a denotes an input current detection unit provided on the commercial power supply side of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R, and reference numeral 77b denotes an output current detection unit that detects the power on the output side of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R.
The detection values of the input current detector 77 a and the output current detector 77 b are input to the IH control unit 90 .

In the initial stage of induction heating cooking, the IH control unit 90 determines the material of the object to be heated.
For example, when the driving frequency is changed from one to another, the change in the input current value is observed, and the material of the heated object such as a pan is judged to be magnetic metal, non-magnetic stainless steel, aluminum, etc., and the driving frequency of the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a, 79b is automatically adjusted to an appropriate value. If the material of the heated object is judged to be non-magnetic stainless steel, it is driven at a driving frequency (e.g., 31 kHz) higher than the driving frequency (e.g., 23 kHz) when the material is judged to be iron.

TS5 and TS6 are non-contact temperature sensors installed in the gaps of IH coils 17L and 17R, and TS3 and TS4 are contact temperature sensors installed in the center of IH coils 17L and 17R. Additionally, TS8 and TS9 are contact temperature sensors installed on the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80. The temperature detection data of each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated control device MC.

In the first embodiment, a temperature detection circuit 93 was provided, but in this second embodiment, such a hardware-type temperature detection circuit 93 is not provided. Temperature detection, temperature comparison, and abnormality detection are performed by software (temperature detection processing unit) in the integrated control device MC.

131 is a door open/close detection mechanism. This door open/close detection mechanism 131 has one switch that opens and closes in response to the opening and closing of the door 114, and a monitor switch that detects whether the switch is opened and closed correctly. This is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

120P is the power supply circuit section of the microwave heating device 120, which generates AC power as a low-voltage (e.g., 24 V and 5 V) power source from the commercial voltage (200 V) power supplied from the filter circuit 54.

The 5V power is supplied as a power source for the control device 105, and the 24V power is supplied to the drive circuits 177 of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129. Although not shown in FIG. 123, 200V power is supplied to the drive power source for the antenna drive motor 126.

The upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B, which heat the heating chamber 113, have their energization controlled by the control device 105 opening and closing relays 178A and 178B. The relays 178A and 178B may be semiconductor switching elements that allow for fine control of the energization rate, but in this second embodiment, relays are used because only ON-OFF control is required. The upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B are operated by applying a voltage of 200V, the same as the commercial power supply.

Reference numeral 132M denotes a door open detection switch that constitutes a part of the door open/close detection mechanism 131.
This switch itself is installed inside the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, but in FIG. 123 it is drawn in a different position to indicate that the opening/closing signal is input to the control device 105.

160 is an infrared sensor (third temperature sensor) that measures the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113, and TS1 is a contact (temperature) sensor that measures the temperature of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120.

TS10 is a contact sensor such as a thermistor, and is installed on the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 113 or on the inner space or wall surface of the exhaust duct 102. For example, it is installed on the outer ceiling part of the inlet of the exhaust duct 102 near the rear surface of the heating chamber 113.
This temperature sensor TS10 constantly measures the temperature not only when cooking is performed by driving the oven heating source 188, but also during cooking (for example, thawing frozen food) using the microwave heating source 189.

The temperature detection data from the temperature sensors 160, TS1, and TS10 are all input to the control device 105.

121A is an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the magnetron 122, and its oscillation is controlled by a relay 182 inserted in the power supply side circuit. The relay 182 is opened and closed by the control device 105.

60P and 61P are drive circuits that drive the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively. These drive circuits 60P and 61P operate in response to commands from the IH control unit 90.

In this figure 123, no temperature sensors are shown in the upper space 300A to monitor the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40, but in reality such temperature sensors are installed and the integrated control device MC constantly acquires temperature measurement data (at regular intervals) during cooking to monitor the temperature so that it does not become abnormal.

As mentioned above, all temperature detection data from the various temperature sensors 160, TS1, and TS10 that measure the temperatures of the heating chamber 113 and the food being cooked is input to the control device 105, so the temperature measurement unit 158 described in the first embodiment is not provided in this second embodiment. The function of the temperature measurement unit 158 is realized by the computer program of the control device 105.

Since the cooking device 1 of this second embodiment is configured as described above, when starting cooking, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed and held for, for example, several seconds to turn on the main power switch 97. This operation is detected by the power switch control device 28, which then closes the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54.

For this reason, commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power supply circuit board 55. Then, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55, and applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated control device MC is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before the heating operation starts to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred. It also starts the integrated display unit 30 and displays the initial information.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 to use the microwave heating device 120, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the control device 105. The control device 105 then sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC presumes that the user will be performing microwave cooking, displays the necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts the user to enter input to start heating.

When the user places the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 again sends a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. Therefore, when a command to start heating is given from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right-side input control device 23 detects whether or not the input key for microwave heating has been touched. Therefore, a signal indicating a command to start heating is sent from the right-side input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

In this second embodiment, the combined cooking mode KM2 has three patterns: a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heated by the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B; a pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order; and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously.

In addition, the control menus of the individual cooking modes KM1 for microwave heating and oven heating using the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B can also be executed.
Furthermore, a collaborative cooking mode KM3 can also be executed, as described below.

Generally, food is cooked in heat-resistant plastic containers or dishes and then microwave-heated. If the upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B is then turned on in this state, there is a risk that the containers, dishes, etc. mentioned above will burn due to the high heat.

In the combined cooking mode KM2, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, warning the user not to place a plastic container inside the heating chamber 113 and heat it. In other words, when the control menu "range grill" is executed, this warning message is one type of "standby common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

In the "Warm" (automatic range) control menu, the control device 105 detects the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, if heat from a previous cooking session remains and the temperature is high from the start, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, in this second embodiment, the user is notified to select the "manual range" control menu (single heating cooking). Since "manual range" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, cooking can be performed without any problems even if the temperature of the food in the heating chamber 113 or the temperature of the wall of the heating chamber 113 is high. Such display text displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is also a type of "common information during standby" 30N described in the first embodiment.

When a user issues a command to start heating via the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC sends a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A to start microwave heating. At the same time, it sends an operation command signal to the drive circuits 177A and 177B of the third and fourth cooling fans 128 and 129, starting the operation of these two cooling fans 128 and 129. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 123, it drives the antenna drive motor 126 to rotate the antenna 125. This introduces microwaves into the heating chamber 113, and the food is cooked.

As is clear from the above explanation, during the period when microwave cooking is being performed, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not operated at all unless it is a "non-normal time" (abnormal overheating). Therefore, the power consumption of the entire cooking device 1 can be kept low.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 2 includes an IH control unit 90 for controlling the induction heating source 9, a control device 105 for controlling both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and an integrated control device MC (master microcomputer) MC for integrated control of these two control devices (slave microcomputers) 90 and 105.
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from a commercial power source 99, and a power supply circuit (34, 36) that converts the power from the filter circuit board 54 into a specified power supply voltage.
The control device 105, the control device 90, and the integrated control device MC are supplied with low voltage power generated by the power supply circuits 34 and 36 as a power source.
The inverter circuit 81 of the induction heating source 17, the microwave generating source 122 of the microwave heating device 120, and the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B of the oven heating device 140 are configured to receive power (200 V power supply) distributed between the filter circuit 54 and the power supply circuits 34 and 36.

This configuration simplifies the overall power supply configuration of the cooking device 1 and is expected to suppress the propagation of unnecessary noise, ensuring reliable operation.

In addition, with this configuration, three types of heating can be performed in one cooking device: induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

123 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation unit 40 and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. In this embodiment 2, the central operation unit 40M includes various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, 43MS, and 43MT for the coordinated cooking mode.
These input keys are of a type that allows input by utilizing a change in capacitance when the user lightly touches them with a finger, etc. No input key corresponding to the input key 43M3 described in the first embodiment is provided.

In this second embodiment, the input operation unit 40 includes four parts: a right operation unit 40R, a central operation unit 40M, a left operation unit 40L, and the front operation unit 146. Although not shown, the operation key (touch input type) 98 of the main power switch 97 is located on the top surface of the main body 110, forward of the top plate 15 and near the right end of the top plate 15, just like the central operation unit 40M in the first embodiment.

The right operation unit 40R is an individual operation unit since it is used for inputting the induction heating source only. Similarly, the left operation unit 40 is also an individual operation unit.
In contrast, a portion of the central operation unit 40M is used in common when the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is implemented, and is therefore a cooperative operation unit 40MC.

In the first embodiment, the input operations for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 were performed at the central operation unit 40M, but in the second embodiment, this function is provided by the front operation unit 146.

In FIG. 124, 43MS is a touch-type input key that can command the start of a heating operation in the linked cooking mode KM3 when the linked cooking mode KM3 uses the heating chamber 113. This input key 43MS has a slightly different function from the input key 43MS in the first embodiment, and has two functions, one to start cooking and one to stop cooking.

When the user presses the input key 43MS once, it transmits a command signal to the integrated control device MC to start the heating operation, and when the user presses the input key once more, it transmits a command signal to stop the heating operation.
Depending on the number of times that the keys are operated in this order, different signals are transmitted. This is different from the input key 43MS in the first embodiment.

The screen configuration of the integrated display unit 30 is also slightly different from that of the first embodiment, being made up of two areas: a first area (left area) 30L and a second area (center area) 30M.

The reason for limiting the number of areas to two, 30L and 30M, is that in this integrated display section 30, the identification information 330 of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is displayed in the first area 30L, and additional information 331 and cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed in the second area 30M.

The input key 43MC is not an input key for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. This input key 43MC is an input key for selecting only the linked cooking mode KM3. Since the input key 43MC itself lights up, the individual light-emitting unit 27M2 provided in the first embodiment is omitted in this second embodiment.

Continuing with the explanation of FIG.
FIG. 124 corresponds to FIG. 53 of the first embodiment.
The cooperative operation section 40MC dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which is provided in the central operation section 40M, has an input key 43M1 arranged at its left end.
The input key 43M1 is touched when selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Note that a push button switch may be used instead of a touch key.

The input key 43MC appears illuminated by a light source (not shown) such as a light-emitting diode installed below during the transition to the collaborative cooking mode.

The pair of input keys 43M1 are input keys for selecting the target identification information 330, in other words, the food to be cooked, from among the multiple identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30, when the integrated cooking mode KM3 is performed. The touch key portion is a pair on the left and right.
Each time the left input key 43M1 is pressed, the display contents can be switched in a certain order, and each time the right input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screens can be switched in the reverse order.

Next, we will explain Figure 125.
125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source, which shows that the operation of the heating source used is restricted during cooperative cooking.
The coordinated cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 125 is the "second coordinated cooking mode" described in FIG. 55 of the first embodiment.

In this example, the "second combined cooking mode" operates the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means HM2) first, and after the heating operation is completed, the induction heating source 9 operates as the first heating means HM1. Note that the oven heating source 188, which is a type of the second heating means HM2, may be operated simultaneously with the microwave heating source 189.

As shown in FIG. 125, the second collaborative cooking mode consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the coordinated cooking mode until cooking is started by the input key 43MS.

P2 is a heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189).
P3 is a pause period during which the operation of the microwave heating means 189 is temporarily stopped and cooking by the induction heating means 9 is started in order to switch from cooking by the second heating means HM2 to cooking by the first heating means HM1 (in this case, the induction heating source 9).
P4 is a heating and cooking period by the induction heating source 9 (cooking step 2).

As is clear from FIG. 125, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable from the point in time when the start of cooking is decided by the input key 43MS, not when the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is selected, i.e., when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. In addition, input operations of the front operation unit 146 are also restricted.

Specifically, the integrated control device MC performs the following function restriction process.
(1) Among the input signals from the front operation unit 147, signals for selecting a control menu such as "warm" are disabled. As a result, even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the front operation unit 146 can still be used, but only two inputs, "stop" and "start heating," can be made. This results in a state in which cooking that is not substantially related to the linked cooking mode using the heating chamber 113 cannot be performed by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Note that the heating power (power consumption) during oven heating may be increased or decreased by an input key (not shown) on the front operation unit 146.
(2) A process is performed in which the input signal from the left operating unit 40L is not recognized as a valid signal. As a result, when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operating unit 40L becomes unusable. This makes it impossible to perform induction heating cooking with the left heating unit 17HL. However, it is possible to use the right heating unit 17HR.

In this way, when the heating and cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the integrated control device MC prevents the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 from being freely used.

Therefore, the left heating section 17HL is "occupied" by the selection of the coordinated cooking mode. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the induction heating source 9 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the left side) of the two heating sections is "restricted."

The front operation unit 147 also becomes "limited" in function when the coordinated cooking mode is selected. Therefore, when "cooking step 1" of the coordinated cooking mode is started, it becomes impossible to use the front operation unit 146 to execute either the single cooking mode KM1 using an individual heating source or the combined cooking mode KM3.

As shown in FIG. 125, when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the restricted state is released, and the individual cooking mode can be executed by operating the front operation unit 147. However, after the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the individual cooking mode cannot be started by operating the front operation unit 146. This is because the food heated in the combined cooking mode is present in the heating chamber 113.

Therefore, only when the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has been opened after the heating and cooking period (cooking process 1) has ended, the integrated control device MC starts heating and cooking in response to a command to start microwave heating or oven heating and cooking from the front operation unit 147.

Furthermore, even if the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has been opened after the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) has ended, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the integrated control device MC or the control device 105 will mistakenly recognize the abnormally high temperature as meaning that cooking is complete even before the single cooking mode is executed.
For this reason, even after the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the "automatic microwave" control menu cannot be immediately executed in the control menu. The manual microwave control menu can be executed. Therefore, in parallel with the execution of cooking step 2, another cooking (for example, defrosting and heating "frozen rice") can be executed in the heating chamber 113.

Next, we will explain Figure 126.
FIG. 126 shows a cooperative operation section 40MC dedicated to cooperative cooking provided within the central operation section 40M, and the display contents of the integrated display section 30.
The integrated display section 30 displays three types of display screens 11A to 11C.

The cooperative cooking mode KM3 implemented in FIG. 126 corresponds to both the "first cooperative cooking mode" and the "second cooperative cooking mode" described in FIG. 55 of the first embodiment.
For convenience of explanation, the following will be described in the case of the “first integrated cooking mode”, that is, the case where the first cooking step is performed by the induction heating source 9.

When the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the right-side input control device 23, which processes input from the touch keys of the central operation unit 40M, transmits the input result to the integrated control device MC.
The integrated control device MC grasps the usage status of the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR from information from the IH control section 90, and first determines whether or not "permission condition 1" and "permission condition" 2 are satisfied, as described in embodiment 1.

When neither the left heating section 17HL nor the right heating section 17HR is being used, the integrated control device MC confirms that the "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied.
Then, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30SP.

The display screen 11C in FIG. 126 is the screen that is first displayed after the process described above.
That is, the name "Hamburger" is displayed as identification information 330 in the first area 30L.
When the identification information 330 of the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display section 30 of the first specific screen 30SP, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, both the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L are displayed. This is because, as described above, both the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR can be used.

As shown in FIG. 126, the default setting gives priority to the left heating unit 17HL. This is because the left heating unit 17HL uses an induction coil 17 with a larger diameter than the right heating unit 17HL. In other words, it can accommodate a heated object N with a larger bottom than the right heating unit 17HR.

For this reason, the left heating unit selection mark 334L, which is displayed with the word "LEFT" written in white, is to be selected.
When it is acceptable to switch to the cooperative cooking mode in this state of the left heating unit 17HL, the input key 43MS, which is circled in dotted lines to prompt an input operation, is pressed. The dotted circle indicates that the individual light-emitting unit 27M6 is flashing.

As shown in FIG. 126, the first specific screen 30SP provides the user with additional information 331 regarding starting coordinated cooking of an item to be cooked (e.g., a hamburger steak). In the example of FIG. 126, the user is prompted to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL.

When the user wishes to confirm the combined cooking mode using the right heating unit 17HR instead of the left heating unit 17HL, the user need only touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M.
Specifically, when the input key 43M2 on the right side of the two key operation units on the left and right is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11C to 11B.

On the display screen 11B, the left heating unit selection mark 334L disappears, and only the right heating unit selection mark 334R is displayed, for example, as the white character "Right." At this point, the input key 43MS is still waiting for input from the user, so the individual light-emitting unit 27M6 is flashing.

Additional information 331 may, for example, display "Confirm with start button." This means that the collaborative cooking mode is confirmed by pressing input key 43MS. In other words, the right heating unit 17HR can be confirmed as the heating source to be used first.

When the user wishes to confirm the combined cooking mode using the left heating unit 17HL instead of the right heating unit 17HR, the user need only touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M.
Specifically, when the right input key 43M2 of the two input keys 43M2 on the left and right is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11B to 11A.

On the display screen 11A, the right heating unit selection mark 334R disappears, and only the left heating unit selection mark 334L is displayed, for example, as the white characters "LEFT". At this point, the input key 43MS is still waiting for input from the user, so the individual light-emitting unit 27M6 is flashing. Note that, for example, "Press the start button to confirm" is displayed as additional information 331.

Summary of embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in the second embodiment, a cooking device according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the second embodiment is
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N containing an object to be cooked on the top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about cooking;
An integrated control device MC for controlling a heating operation;
An input operation unit (a central operation unit 40M, a front operation unit 146) 40,
The integrated control device MC has an independent cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means H1 is operated independently;
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which a cooking process is automatically performed by automatically combining a plurality of heating sources of the second heating means HM2;
and an integrated cooking mode KM3 having a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2, which are switched and executed in response to a command from the input operation unit 40.
The single cooking mode KM1 is a mode in which a control pattern of the first heating means HM1 is determined and a heating operation is started.
The composite cooking mode KM2 is a mode in which a heating source and a control pattern to be used in the second heating means HM2 are determined and a heating operation is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the food to be heated is determined by the input means and a heating operation is started.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

With this configuration, two or more heating means HM1 and HM2 can be used to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM3. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in this second embodiment, a cooking device according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the second embodiment is
A heating chamber 113;
An integrated display unit 30;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N in which the object is accommodated outside the heating chamber 113;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that receives the command from the input operation unit 40 and controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an independent cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently, and an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 are combined,
When the main power supply is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays an initial standby screen (see FIG. 46) on the integrated display unit 30, and during the period when this initial standby screen is displayed,
(1) When a first command is received, identification information 330 of at least one food to be cooked that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30;
(2) When a second command is received before the first command is received, information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform cooking in both the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM3. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In this second embodiment, the same configuration as in the first embodiment can be expected to produce the same effects as those described in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3.
Fig. 127 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fans of the cooking device 1 and the types of cooking to disclose embodiment 3. Fig. 128 is a time chart 1 showing the timing of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of Fig. 127.
Fig. 129 is a time chart 2 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of Fig. 127. Fig. 130 is a time chart 3 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of Fig. 127.
Fig. 131 is a time chart 4 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of Fig. 127. Fig. 132 is a time chart 5 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of Fig. 127.
In addition, parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations explained in the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals.

In the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 127, the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 basically start operating at the same time as cooking begins.

As shown in FIG. 127, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are operated in the following pattern.
Induction Cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated.
Microwave cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated.
Oven cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 is operated.
The fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated.

As described above, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in all three cooking modes: induction cooking, microwave cooking, and oven cooking.

In the case of microwave cooking, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
Even in the case of microwave cooking, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in order to prevent the upper unit 100 from overheating.

The upper unit 100 contains a filter circuit board 54 and a power supply circuit board 55, and the electronic components mounted on these circuit boards (e.g., a transformer 57) are supplied with power and their temperature increases during both microwave heating and oven heating.
Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.

In the case of oven cooking, the third cooling fan 128 is operated. This is the same as in the first embodiment.
However, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated. This point differs from embodiment 1. In the case of oven cooking, the magnetron 122 to be cooled by the fourth cooling fan 129 is not driven, so that the heat dissipation portion 122H does not become very hot.

The four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 start operating when each heating source starts its heating operation. In the case of the induction heating source 9, if a preheating operation is started, operation starts in synchronization with the start of the preheating operation.

The timing at which the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 stop operating differs in some areas because each cooling fan has a different cooling object and cooling air path, as described below.

Next, we will explain Figures 128 to 132.
The solid arrows in FIGS. 128 to 132 indicate the periods from when the operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 starts to when it ends.
The dashed arrows following the solid lines indicate the "additional operating time for heat dissipation" described below. Note that the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 do not actually stop operating at the end of the solid arrows, but continue operating for the additional operating time.

In the third embodiment, the time from the start to the end of operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: Starts operation when the heating operations of the heat sources start.
In the case of induction heating cooking, the operation is terminated by performing heat dissipation for a maximum of 10 minutes from the time when the heating operation is terminated. In this case, the "heat dissipation time Th1" is determined taking into consideration the time required to cool the high-heat parts such as the top plate 15 during induction heating cooking.
During induction heating cooking, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is selected from three levels, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes, depending on the value determined by the "product" of the length of the heating operation time and the maximum heat power used (power consumption of the inverter circuit). This is performed by the IH control unit 90.
On the other hand, during microwave cooking and oven cooking, the first cooling fan 60 starts the heat dissipation operation from the point in time when these heating operations are completed.

Second cooling fan 61: The "heat dissipation operation time Th2" is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60. This is done by an operation start command and an operation end command from the IH control unit 90. Note that operation starts at the same timing as the first cooling fan 60.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "heat radiation operation" is performed for only 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. In other words, this "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes. This operation control is performed by the microwave heating control unit 130.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: Since the microwave oscillator 122 is not driven, the heat dissipation section 122H does not become hot either. Therefore, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated at all.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: the "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" is the same as that of the fourth cooling fan 129. In addition, the start and end of operation are controlled by the microwave heating control unit 130, like the fourth cooling fan 129.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured repeatedly at regular intervals by at least one of the temperature sensors TS2 and 160, but a thermistor-type temperature sensor or the like that measures the outside temperature of the wall of the heating chamber 113 by contact may be added (see temperature sensor TS10 described in Figure 123 of embodiment 3).
All the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the control device 105. Ultimately, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the microwave heating control unit 130, and the fourth cooling fan 129 continues to operate until an operation end command is issued to the fourth cooling fan 129. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" changes from time to time.

Next, each cooking mode will be described.
FIG. 128 shows a case where cooking process 1 is performed by the induction heating source 9 and cooking process 2 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 in the coordinated cooking mode KM3.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time, and continue to operate until after the microwave heating operation ends and the notification unit AN issues notification 6. The "heat dissipation operation times Th1" and "Th2" start counting at least from the point at which the microwave heating ends.

As can be seen from FIG. 128, in the case of microwave cooking, the "heat radiation operation time Tm2" of the fourth cooling fan 129 may be longer than the "heat radiation operation time Tm1" of the third cooling fan 128. This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that supplies cooling air directly to the inside of the heating chamber 113, as explained in embodiment 1 (FIG. 32). In other words, when microwave cooking is performed once, hot air remains in the heating chamber 113, and it takes time to cool it down to the normal temperature.

In Fig. 128, notification 1 notifies the user that induction heating cooking has started, or that a preheating operation has started.
The notification FA1 is a notification of the first reference information (reference information 1) described in the first embodiment (FIG. 61). For example, the timing of the notification is determined based on the measurement results of "elapsed time TN1" (five minutes have passed since the start of heating) and "rising temperature TN1" (measurement of the magnitude of the temperature rise). The content of the notification FA1 also includes a prompt to the user to turn over the food to be cooked. The IH control unit 90 does not determine an abnormality when the food to be cooked is turned over in the heated food N (for example, a metal pot), so the induction heating operation continues.

Notification 3 notifies that induction heating has ended (or that cooking process 1 has ended).
The "transition period" (heating pause period) TR shown in FIG. 128 is the same as that explained in the first embodiment.
After induction heating is performed on the top plate 15, the food to be cooked must be moved into the heating chamber 113 in order to switch to microwave heating.

The transition period TR provides a time leeway for such movement. The maximum length of this transition period TR is determined in advance by the integrated control device MC.

Notification 4 notifies the user that microwave cooking has started as a result of a command given by the user via central operation unit 40M.
At substantially the same time as this notification 4, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 start operating.

Notification FA2 is a notification of the second reference information (reference information 2) described in embodiment 1 (Figure 61). For example, the timing of the notification is determined from the measurement results of "elapsed time TN2" (three minutes have passed since the start of microwave heating) and "rising temperature TN2" (the magnitude of the temperature rise).

Notification 6 notifies that microwave heating has finished (or that cooking process 2 has finished).

Next, we will explain Figure 129.
FIG. 129 shows a case where cooking process 1 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 and cooking process 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the coordinated cooking mode KM3.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time as the microwave heating source 189 starts operating.

The fourth cooling fan 129 starts operating at the same time as the microwave heating source 189 starts operating.
The operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 ends after the lapse of the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" from the end of the operation of the microwave heating source 189 (the end of cooking process 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not stop once the microwave heating operation (cooking process 1) is completed. They continue to operate until after the heating operation (cooking process 2) by the induction heating source 9 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 will automatically stop operating after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "Th2" have elapsed from the time when the induction heating operation (cooking process 2) is completed.

In FIG. 129, notification FA3 is the same as the notification of the third reference information (reference information 3) described in embodiment 1 (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the timing of the notification is determined from the measurement results of "elapsed time TN3," which indicates that five minutes have passed since heating began, and "rising temperature TN3," which measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 129, notification FA5 is the same as the notification of the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in embodiment 1 (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the timing of the notification is determined from the measurement results of "elapsed time TN4," which indicates that five minutes have passed since heating began, and "rising temperature TN4," which measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. Note that the content of notification FA4 also includes urging the user to turn the food (during induction heating in cooking step 2).

Next, we will explain Figure 130.
FIG. 130 shows a case where cooking process 1 is performed by the oven heat source 188 and cooking process 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the coordinated cooking mode KM3.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time that the oven heat source 188 starts operating.

The third cooling fan 128 starts operating at the same time that the oven heat source 188 starts operating.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 ends when the "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" has elapsed since the operation of the oven heat source 188 ends (cooking process 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not stop once the oven heating operation (cooking process 1) is completed. They continue to operate until after cooking process 2 is stopped.

The fourth cooling fan 129 does not operate at all while the oven heat source 188 is operating (cooking process 1). It also does not operate during cooking process 2.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop operating after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "Th2" have elapsed from the time when the induction heating operation (cooking process 2) is completed. In FIG. 130, the period from notification 1 to notification 3 for the fourth cooling fan 129 is indicated by a dashed arrow. This indicates that the fan is not operating during this period.

In FIG. 130, notification FA6 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in embodiment 1 (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the timing of the notification is determined from the measurement results of "elapsed time TN6," which indicates that five minutes have passed since heating of the heating chamber 113 began, and "rising temperature TN6," which measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 129, notification FA7 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in embodiment 1 (FIGS. 60 and 63). For example, the timing of the notification is determined from the measurement results of "elapsed time TN7," which indicates that five minutes have passed since heating began, and "rising temperature TN7," which measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of notification FA7 includes a prompt to the user to turn the food over, and also includes a warning that cooking step 2 will soon be completed.

Next, we will explain Figure 131.
131 shows a case where cooking step 1 is performed by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, and cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Note that, although the case where the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 have exactly the same heating operation time will be described, one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Also, the operation of the two heating sources does not have to end at the same timing.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start operating at the same time as the start of the cooking process 1.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 start operating at the same time as the start of the cooking process 1.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 finish operating after the "heat radiation operation time Tm1" and the "heat radiation operation time Tm2" have elapsed since the end of cooking process 1, respectively.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not stop once cooking process 1 is completed. They continue to operate until after cooking process 2 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 will automatically stop operating after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "heat dissipation operation time Th2" have elapsed from the time cooking process 2 is completed.

In Figures 131 and 132, notification FA8 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in embodiment 1 (Figures 62 and 64). For example, the timing of the notification is determined from the measurement results of "elapsed time TN8" that indicates that five minutes have passed since heating of the heating chamber 113 began, and "rising temperature TN8" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 131 and FIG. 132 described below, notification FA9 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in embodiment 1 (FIGS. 62 and 64). For example, the timing of the notification is determined from the measurement results of "elapsed time TN9," which indicates that five minutes have passed since heating began, and "rising temperature TN9," which measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. Note that the content of notification FA9 includes not only notifications of temperature and elapsed time, but also a warning that cooking process 2 will soon be completed.

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated slower than the third cooling fan 128.
This is because, as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 32), the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air into the heating chamber 113. In other words, when oven cooking is performed once, the heating chamber 113 is heated continuously for a maximum of 60 minutes.
Therefore, the entire heating chamber 113 becomes hot (for example, 200° C.), and it takes time to cool down such heating chamber 113.

If the temperature of heating chamber 113 is not lowered, the next time microwave cooking is performed immediately, the temperature of heating chamber 113 may be high from the beginning.
If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, it will be impossible to use the microwave heating source 189 to perform cooking in the "warm (automatic range)" mode as described in the first embodiment. This is because the "warm" control menu employs a control that automatically stops microwave irradiation when the food is heated and reaches, for example, 80°C (default value). Therefore, in order to avoid confusing the user, for example, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is initially 80°C or higher, it is necessary to perform error processing and not accept cooking by heating. Alternatively, it is advisable to have the notification unit AN notify the user that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is being lowered by operating the cooling fan 129.

The above explanation is based on the assumption that the airflow volume (airflow capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 during cooking is constant, but it is also possible to make changes such as increasing the airflow volume during cooking and decreasing the airflow volume during heat dissipation operation. Also, it is also possible to perform variable capacity operation such that the airflow volume is decreased when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or upper unit 100 is low rather than when it is high.

In addition, the "control program" that realizes the operating conditions that determine the operating times (starting and stopping) and airflow of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 is not limited to the form stored in the IH control unit 90, the microwave heating control unit 130, etc. (see Figure 30 in embodiment 1).
For example, the integrated control device MC may store the above-mentioned program as a ventilation control program. Also, as in the second embodiment, the control device 105 may control the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

As is clear from the above explanation, in this third embodiment, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 3, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are operated as follows.
(1) During all cooking operations (cooking steps) using the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 were in operation.
(2) When only the heating operation is performed by the microwave generating source 122, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and further, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated.
(3) In the case of heating operation using only the oven heating source 188, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and further, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated.
(4) An operation was specified to automatically execute only the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and only the heating operation by the oven heating source 188 in sequence, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 were operated during the period when one control menu (RG continuous cooking) was being executed.
(3) By using the input operation unit 40, only the heating operation using the IH coil 17 is specified, and during the period when one control menu is being executed, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated.

With this configuration, when a user selects one cooking menu or control menu and starts cooking, the operation of the various cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is stopped temporarily when induction heating or microwave heating ends, and then restarted. Instead, the operation mode smoothly transitions from the end of cooking (cooking process) to the heat dissipation operation mode.

(Modification of the third embodiment)
FIG. 132 shows a modified example of the time chart showing the timing of starting and stopping the operation of the cooling fan of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIGS. 126 to 130. In FIG.

Figure 132 shows a case where, in coordinated heating cooking, cooking step 1 is performed using oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189, and cooking step 2 is performed using induction heating source 9. Note that, although the case where the heating operation times of oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189 are exactly the same will be described, one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Also, the heating operations of oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189 do not have to end at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 132, this example is characterized in that the "tenth reference information" FA10 is notified by the notification unit AN during the transition period TR.

The tenth reference information FA10 is capable of acquiring the recommended information 338 described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 113-114). In particular, it is notification information corresponding to step SG7 in FIG. 112. Therefore, the individual ingredient information 339 that can be performed in the heating chamber 113 that has completed cooking step 1 can be known on the integrated display unit 30.

The timing for acquiring the tenth reference information FA10 is during the transition period FR, as shown in FIG. 132. In other words, since this is a period in which neither cooking process 1 nor cooking process 2 is being performed, during this transition period, the cooking appliance 1 may be set to acquire the reference information FA10 when the input key 47 arranged on the input operation unit 40 is pressed.

Alternatively, the voice synthesizer 95 may guide the user to press a specific input key in the central operation unit 40M, and when that input key is pressed, the tenth reference information FA10 may be acquired. Also, the integrated control device MC may automatically notify the user of the reference information FA10 after entering the transition period TR, without the user having to give any command, thereby further reducing the burden on the user.

Summary of embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, in the third embodiment as well, the same effects as those in the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 3, after cooking step 1 is completed, during the transition period TR, a notification is given that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (simultaneously with cooking step 2), and information on ingredients to be used in the "another cooking" can be given in response to a user command or automatically (see FA10 in FIG. 132).

For this reason, for example, when one cooking A in the coordinated control mode has entered cooking step 2 in the left heating section 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, another cooking B can be carried out simultaneously in the heating chamber 113. In other words, if cooking A is a side dish and cooking B is a staple dish (e.g. rice) in one meal, cooking A and cooking B can be completed in parallel, rather than starting cooking B after cooking A is finished. This shortens the overall cooking time and improves user convenience.

In the third embodiment, the cooking device 1 having the following configuration is disclosed.
That is,
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started to be driven with a time lag, and a composite cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are started to be driven simultaneously or with a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven.
The integrated control device MC, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, includes a cooking process occupying the heating chamber 113, and when the cooking process occupying the heating chamber 113 is terminated, notifies (acquires reference information FA10) through the notification unit that cooking other than the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed using the heating chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189 at a time point before or after the end of the cooking process.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods with the combined cooking mode and linked cooking mode.

Furthermore, when a cooking process occupying the heating chamber 113 is completed, the system notifies the user that cooking other than the linked cooking mode can be performed using the heating chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189. This allows the user to be notified of time-saving cooking that they may not be aware of, allowing them to cook more efficiently and improving user convenience.

Furthermore, in embodiment 3 (FIGS. 128 to 132), the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 capable of performing a preheating process for a heated object N that contains a cooked object;
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
A cooperative control mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation,
When the cooperative control mode KM3 is set, it is possible to reserve a cooking process 1 in which the microwaves from the microwave heating source 189 heat the food contained in the heating chamber 113, and a cooking process 2 in which the food N placed on the top plate is induction-heated by the induction heating source 9 after the cooking process 1 is completed.
When a reservation for cooking is made in the cooperative control mode KM3,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking process 1 to start the preheating process,
(2) During the preheating step, cooking step 1 can be started in the heating chamber 113;
(3) After stopping the operation of the microwave heating source to complete the cooking process 1, the cooking process 2 is started (in response to a start command from a user) on the object N to be heated that has been preheated by the induction heating source 9;
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information showing the progress of the cooking process is automatically notified.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking thanks to the combined cooking mode that allows preheating as well.

In addition, the user is automatically notified of information indicating the progress of cooking step 1 or cooking step 2. This makes it possible to avoid mistakes such as the user temporarily pausing the heating operation in the middle of a cooking step to check, which would impair the efficient execution of coordinated cooking.

According to this third embodiment, even though the cooking device 1 has an increased number of types of heat sources, it is expected that the user's sense of security and ease of use will be further improved.

Furthermore, in embodiment 3 (FIGS. 127 to 132), the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
When a cooking reservation is made using the linked control mode,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking process 1 to start the preheating process,
(2) During the preheating process, the cooking process 1 can be started and ended in the heating chamber 113 by the first operating unit (central operating unit 40M);
(3) After the cooking step 1 is completed, the cooking step 2 can be started by placing an object to be cooked on the preheated object to be heated N without the user operating the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M).
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information showing the progress of the cooking process is automatically notified.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of induction heating source 9 and microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking thanks to the combined cooking mode that allows preheating as well.

In addition, the information showing the progress of cooking step 1 or cooking step 2 is automatically notified to the user, which can alleviate the user's sense of anxiety and prevent mistakes such as the loss of efficient coordinated cooking by pausing the heating operation midway through to check. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

Furthermore, the preheating process of the induction heating source can be started before the cooking process 1, and during this preheating process, cooking process 1 can be started and ended by the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M), and after cooking process 1 is ended, cooking process 2 can be started using the object to be heated N that has completed the preheating process by induction heating, without operating the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M). This reduces the user's input operations and provides a user-friendly heating cooker.

Further, in the third embodiment, the notification unit AN displays a dedicated input screen (first specific screen) 30SP for setting the heating cooking in the coordinated cooking mode,
The input screen 30SP displays the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2 in the order in which they are to be executed.
The present invention discloses a heating cooker characterized by the above-mentioned.

Thanks to this configuration, the input screen 30SP allows the user to easily understand the steps of collaborative cooking, preventing the user from becoming confused or making mistakes in operation. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

Embodiment 4.
133 to 136 show a (built-in combination) cooking device according to embodiment 4 of the present disclosure.
Fig. 133 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body in the cooking device. Fig. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing information exchange between the cooking device 1 shown in Fig. 133 and an external information management device, etc., in a time series. Fig. 135 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 30L in the cooking device shown in Fig. 133. Fig. 136 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 30L in the cooking device 1 shown in Fig. 133. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the first embodiment described in Figs. 1 to 115 are given the same reference numerals.

In the cooking appliance 1 shown in the fourth embodiment, there are three display units arranged on the upper surface of the main body 10, but there is no difference between the three in terms of display function, effective area of the display screen, and planar shape.
In other words, in this embodiment 4, the left display unit 31L and the right display unit 31R also have the function of the integrated display unit (center display unit) 30 shown in the first embodiment. However, the initial standby screen (see FIG. 46) at the time of start-up immediately after the main power is turned on to the cooking appliance 1 is displayed only on the central integrated display unit 30.

The integrated display unit 30 located in the center, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R display the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST at appropriate timing. However, as explained below, the integrated display unit 30 in the center has priority in terms of display timing.

The integrated display section 30 displays information on the range/grill related "combined cooking mode KM2/single cooking mode KM1."
The left display section 31L displays information related to the left heating section 17HL and the left operation section 40L.
The right display section 31R displays information related to the right heating section 17HR and the right operation section 40R. Note that the input keys 47 for instructing wireless communication with the outside are omitted in FIG.

The integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R display various information in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and related information is displayed when operating in the cooperative control mode KM3.

In the cooking device 1 shown in Figures 133 to 136, the cooking modes can be broadly divided into two: one that selects the range/grill-related "combined cooking mode KM2/single cooking mode KM1," and one that selects the "linked cooking mode KM3."

As shown in FIG. 133, the central operation unit 40M is provided with a linked operation unit 40MC. As in the first embodiment, this linked operation unit 40MC is a collection of various input keys that are shared by four cooking modes: independent heating cooking with the microwave heating source 189, independent heating cooking with the oven heating source 188, combined (heating) cooking, and linked (heating) cooking. In FIG. 133, the range of the linked operation unit 40MC is indicated by a dashed frame.

Referring to Figure 134 .
In this embodiment 4, the information management device 411 does not exist inside the house HA. A router 419 is installed inside the house HA, and the cooking appliance 1 is connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 via the router 419. The information management device 411 having the home gateway function of embodiment 1 is wirelessly connected to the Internet 416. The information management device 411 may be composed of one or more server devices. The servers may be distributed according to the main parts such as storage, search, and information processing.

In FIG. 134, steps SK1 to SK11 show the main operations of the integrated control device MC of the cooking appliance 1.
FIG. 134 shows the operational steps for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and illustrates the period from when it is decided to execute the cooperative cooking mode to when cooking process 2 is completed.

When it is decided to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the details of the operation (including, for example, information that the food to be cooked is a hamburger steak) are notified by the notification unit AN and transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK1). Note that in the following explanation, since the cooking device 1 and the information processing device 411 are capable of communicating with each other, the destination of the information transmitted from the cooking device 1 is not specified.

Next, the start of cooking operation in the combined cooking mode KM3 is notified, and a signal is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK2).
If preheating is required for the cooking, a notification is issued that the preheating operation has started, and a signal is also sent from wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK3).

Next, a notification is issued that cooking process 1 has actually started in the cooperative control mode, and this is also transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK4).

Next, in cooking process 1, when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed since induction heating was started, reference information 1 (FA1) is notified. The content of this notification is also transmitted to the outside from wireless communication unit 49 (step SK5). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the heated object N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and reference information 1 is notified (step SK5).

Next, notification information from outside in response to step SK5 is received (step SK6). The source of this notification information may be the information processing terminal 418 described in embodiment 1.

The information received in step SK6 may include a remote control signal, such as a command to lower the heat level. Depending on the content of the received notification information, the notification unit AN may notify the user. In particular, in the case of a remote signal, notification is necessary to prevent unnecessary confusion for the user.

Next, when cooking process 1 has automatically ended, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. Alternatively, when the user manually stops cooking process 1 at any time, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. The notification information is then transmitted to the outside (step SK7).

At the stage of step SK7, the heating operation is stopped and the transition period TR begins.
Then, when the user prepares for cooking process 2 and issues a command to start cooking process 2, the notification unit AN notifies the user that the transition period TR has ended and cooking process 2 has started. The notification is also transmitted to the outside from wireless communication unit 49 (step SK8). In this case, the notification content includes information about the heating source for cooking process 2. If cooking has been started with a timer set, the notification also includes information about the timer setting time.

Next, in cooking process 2, for example, when a predetermined time (second time TN1) has elapsed since the start of microwave heating, reference information 2 (FA2) is notified. The contents of this notification are also transmitted from wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK9). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object N to be heated has risen to a predetermined temperature, and reference information 2 is notified (step SK9).

Next, notification information from outside in response to step SK9 is received (step SK10). This received information may include, for example, a "remote control signal" to reduce the power of the flame.
Depending on the contents of the notification information, the notification unit AN may notify the user. The "remote control signal" may be issued from the information processing terminal 418 described in the first embodiment.

Next, when cooking process 2 ends automatically, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. Alternatively, when the user manually stops cooking process 2 at any time, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. The notification information is then transmitted to the outside (step SK11).

As is clear from the above explanation, the contents of the collaborative investigation of the cooking appliance 1 are transmitted to the outside in real time, so the information processing device 411 and the information processing terminal device 418 that receive the transmitted contents can grasp the progress of the cooking in a location away from the kitchen KT. Therefore, particularly in the collaborative cooking mode, cooking may take a relatively long time, lasting more than an hour, and since the operating information is received by the information processing terminal device 418, it is possible to monitor the cooking from another room in the house using the information processing terminal device 418.

In addition, if the remote control signal sent from the outside to the cooking appliance 1 is limited to two commands, namely, lowering the heat and stopping the cooking operation, there is no risk of the cooking appliance 1 operating erroneously due to erroneous operation from the outside.

Next, we will explain Figure 135.
The cooperative operation section 40MC and the integrated display section 30 operate in the order of steps SX1 to SX6.
As described in the first embodiment, the cooperative operation section 40MC is disposed in the left-right center of the input operation section 40 that is provided horizontally on the top surface of the main body 10 .
The layout of the various input keys of the input operation unit 40 is the same as that of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS.

To select the "combined cooking mode KM2/single cooking mode KM1" for the range/grill, there is a course to use the induction heating source 9 by selecting the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR, and a course to use either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, using the central operation unit 40M (linked operation unit 40MC).

The case where the combined cooking mode KM3 is selected for cooking will be described below.
135, first, the input key 43MC of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed to transmit a command signal to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (SC1). Next, upon receiving this signal, the integrated control device MC displays at least the integrated display unit 30 (SC2).

In step SC2, the integrated display section 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP.
At least the following three pieces of information are simultaneously displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. The information may be displayed in a list format.
(1) Identification information 330 for each food item in the cooperative cooking mode KM3
(2) Cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2) and preheating process (3) Heat source and heating unit used (in the case of induction heating source 9)

The user operates the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40M to select "identification information" 330 that identifies only one menu (type) of food to be cooked in one cooperative cooking mode KM3 (SC2). As described in the first embodiment, it is desirable that the first identification screen 30SP simultaneously displays the identification information 300 and multiple pieces of identification information 330A, 330B, etc., of the next candidate food to be cooked.

Next, with the identification information 330 corresponding to the desired food being cooked displayed in a predetermined position on the first specific screen 30SP (such as the center of the first area 30L), the control conditions such as heating temperature and heat displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R are selected using the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 (SC3).

Thereafter, when the input key 43MS of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is confirmed (SC4).
Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays that cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is about to begin (SC5). Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 displays the control conditions, such as the heating temperature and heat level, that have been selected up to this stage, and information indicating whether or not a cooking process and a preheating process are being performed (SC5).

In this fourth embodiment, the operation program for the combined cooking mode KM3 defines the following two types of sequences according to the food to be cooked, similarly to the first embodiment.
(1) The induction heating source 9 is used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188.
(2) At least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 are used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the induction heating source 9.
In addition, the above pattern (2) of using at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 first also includes a pattern of starting the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 first (cooking “fried chicken” described in embodiment 1; see Figures 62 and 65).

The example in Fig. 135 is a pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 or oven heating means 188 is used first in cooking step 1. Next, the induction heating source 9, which is responsible for cooking step 2, performs cooking that requires a preheating operation.

The display operation of the integrated display section 30 starts earlier than that of the other two display sections (31L, 31R).
The integrated display unit 30 displays the details of cooking process 1. However, since the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 in charge of cooking process 2 also starts, for example, when cooking process 2 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL, the left display unit 31L displays that the preheating process has started.

As described above, when the preheating process is started, the left display unit 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL is activated and displays that the preheating process has started (SY1). After that, the preheating temperature is displayed as, for example, "200°C" and the fact that preheating is in progress is also displayed (SY2).
After this, the process proceeds to cooking process 1, transition period TR, and cooking process 2, but these are omitted from FIG.

The operation input procedure and display sequence shown in FIG. 136 are basically the same as those in the first embodiment.
In the fourth embodiment, when the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking process 1, the following operation input procedure is carried out, which is different from the first embodiment.

FIG. 136 shows a case where a cooking menu different from that shown in FIG. 135 is performed.
Specifically, this is the case where "fried chicken" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
In the case of "fried chicken", cooking step 1 is performed using induction heating source 9 as described in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment 4, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is in charge of the process up to the stage of selecting the "identification information" 330 of one cooperative cooking menu (step SC2) by operating the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC. In other words, the cooperative operation unit 40MC displays the identification information 330 indicating one of the cooperative cooking menus (e.g., "fried chicken") on the integrated display unit 30 (displays the first specific screen 30SP), and then performs the process up to the stage of selecting the identification information 330 corresponding to the desired food to be cooked using the input key 43M1.

If the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is in the coordinated cooking mode specified in cooking process 1 at step SC2, any subsequent input commands cannot be made by the coordinated operation unit 40MC.

In other words, if the left heating unit 17HL is used in cooking process 1 for the (linked cooking) menu of the linked cooking mode selected in step SC2 (e.g., "fried chicken"), subsequent input operations are performed by the left operating unit 40L.

As shown in FIG. 136, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the left display section 31L. Then, on the first specific screen 30SP, text is displayed indicating that a linked cooking menu will be cooked (step SX1).

Next, the control conditions such as heating intensity (heat) and heating time displayed on the first specific screen 30SP are selected using the various input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L (step SX2).

Furthermore, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L is operated, which commands the start of a cooking process for one linked cooking menu (SX3).
Thereafter, a display is displayed indicating that the heating cooking operation has started and that cooking step 1 has begun (SX4), and further, information indicating that coordinated cooking is in progress and the cooking steps, etc. is displayed (SX5).
Meanwhile, the integrated display unit 30 displays information indicating that coordinated cooking has started, information indicating the heat source for the cooking process, and the like (SC12).

Due to the above-described configuration, when the heated object N is placed on the left heating section 17HL before starting cooking process 1, the user's body should be slightly to the left of the center of the cooking appliance 1, i.e., in front of the left operating section 40L.
Therefore, cooking of the linked cooking menu can be started directly by operating the left operating unit 40L, which has the advantage that the user can operate the left operating unit 40L and the left display unit 31L from the start of cooking process 1.

If the left heating section 17HL is already being used for another cooking operation, the reason why coordinated cooking is not possible is notified to the user through the integrated display section 30 during the selection step (SC2) of the identification information 330 (the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user in a similar manner).

At step SX1, the user knows that the first cooking step 1 will be performed in the left heating unit 17HL. The user is guided by the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the left display unit 31L to place the food to be cooked on or inside the food to be heated N, such as a dedicated frying pan or pot (the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user in a similar manner).
Therefore, after placing the food to be cooked on the left heating section 17HL, the user operates the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 30L to command the start of a cooking process for one linked cooking menu (SX3).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays that cooking step 1 (first cooking step) of the linked cooking menu has started. Since the user focuses their attention on the left display unit 31L and the left operation unit 40L during cooking step 1, all basic information is displayed on the left display unit 31L.

When the cooking process 2, which uses the heating chamber 113, is reached, the display changes to focus on the integrated display unit 30. Also, the operation changes to the central operation unit 40M located in front of the integrated display unit 30 (control of the heating operation).

The specific functions of this fourth embodiment will now be described.
When an input key 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC shown in Fig. 133 is pressed, a function setting menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30. Up to this point, the cooking device is the same as that of the cooking device 1 described in the first embodiment.
In the fourth embodiment, the following function settings can be further made to the integrated control device MC.

(1) Limiting the information transmission to only specific items among the information transmission to the outside shown in FIG. 134 (steps SK1 to SK11). For example, in the case of cooking "tempura" or "fried chicken" where cooking oil is added to the heated item, in order to maintain the monitoring function, when a specific cooking menu (for example, "tempura" or "fried chicken") is performed in the linked cooking mode, transmission steps SK3 and SK5 shown in FIG. 134 are performed at a certain temperature stage each time. For example, when the preheating temperature is set to 180°C and preheating begins, the temperature rise process is notified in detail, such as 160°C, 170°C, etc.

(2) The inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 can be limited to a specific range (for example, frozen foods). In this case, the condition setting can be further specified as "information on freezing temperature" and "meat", so that only information on "meat with a freezing temperature lower than a specified value" is collected.
For example, a method for aging meat in a refrigerator is known in which an independent cooling space (room) is provided in the refrigerator, and meat such as beef, pork, or chicken is placed in the freezer compartment, and the temperature of the air in the freezer compartment is maintained at 2°C to 5°C (hereinafter referred to as "aging temperature"), the humidity is maintained at 87% to 98%, and the meat is exposed to cold air within a certain range (volume of circulating cold air). Thus, if information on food ingredients stored within a specific aging temperature range is collected in this way, user convenience can be further improved.

(3) Setting of expert mode and beginner mode.
When the beginner mode is selected, all of the external notifications shown in FIG. 134 (steps SK1 to SK11) are carried out.
When the expert mode is selected, the external information transmission (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in Fig. 134 is limited to SK7. However, the display contents on the first specific screen 30SP are the same in the expert mode and the beginner mode.
(4) The inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 includes information regarding storage period and freshness.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-124053 proposes a refrigerator that photographs food stored in the refrigerator, stores multiple images of the food in association with the photographed images and the photographed dates and times, extracts the differences between identical images taken at different photographed dates and times, and, if there are any areas where there are no differences for a certain period of time, determines that the food has been stored for a certain period of time or more and estimates the storage period.

In addition, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-89913 proposes a refrigerator that extracts food images of food stored in a storage compartment from images of the interior of the refrigerator, generates information regarding deterioration of the food corresponding to the food image from changes in the food image over time, and transmits the food images and the information regarding the deterioration to an external mobile information terminal device via a communication device.
Therefore, in this fourth embodiment, if the above-mentioned information on the refrigerator side is acquired, user convenience can be further improved.

Although the reference information 1 (FA1) and the reference information 2 (FA2) of this embodiment 4 have not been described in detail, as described in the first to third embodiments, in addition to the elapsed time (first time TN1) from the start of the cooking process 1 and the elapsed temperature, the time-saving information 333 indicating that the user can shorten the cooking time and the cooking recommendation information 338 may be added to the reference information FA1 and FA2 as shown in FIG. 107(A) of the first embodiment. Alternatively, a notification (display or audio guide) may be given instead. The refrigerator according to the present invention includes a storage compartment for storing food, a photographing device for photographing the inside of the storage compartment to obtain an image of the storage compartment, a control device for extracting food images of the food stored in the storage compartment from the image of the storage compartment obtained by the photographing device, and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit, and the control device generates information on the deterioration of the food corresponding to the food image from the change over time of the food image, and transmits the food image and the information on the deterioration to the mobile terminal via the communication device. The refrigerator according to the present invention comprises a storage compartment for storing food, a photographing device for photographing the interior of the storage compartment to obtain an image of the interior of the storage compartment, a control device for extracting food images of food stored in the storage compartment from the images of the interior of the storage compartment obtained by the photographing device, and a communication device for communicating with a mobile device having a display unit, and the control device generates information relating to deterioration of food corresponding to the food image from changes over time in the food image, and transmits the food image and the information relating to the deterioration to the mobile device via the communication device.

As is clear from the above explanation, the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 4 can be expected to have the same effects as embodiment 1 for the parts that have the same configuration as embodiment 1.

In this fourth embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
An integrated display unit 30;
A left display section 31L and a right display section 31R of the induction heating source 9;
an integrated control device MC for controlling the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display unit 30, and the left display unit 31L;
The central operation unit 40M is configured to give commands from a user to the integrated control device MC, and the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R are configured to
The left operation unit 40L is an operation unit dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9,
The central operation unit 40M has a cooperative operation unit 40MC for the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the cooperative cooking modes KM3 on the integrated display unit 30 (step SC2), a function of causing the integrated control device MC to select one of the displayed cooperative cooking modes KM3 (step SC3), and a function of starting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (step SC4).
Furthermore, in the case where the heating unit to be used in the cooking process 1 for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 to be executed is the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9,
(1) Information regarding the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the dedicated display unit 31L of the (left heating unit 17HL).
(2) The cooking process is displayed on the left display section 31L (step SX1).
(3) The control conditions such as heat, temperature, etc. are displayed on the display section 31L, and the control conditions are selected on the left operation section 40L (step SX2).
(4) An input command to start the cooperative cooking mode is transmitted from the left operation unit 40L (step SX3).
The configuration had the following functions:

As a result, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is used in cooking process 1, the role of the coordinated operation unit 40MC is clearly defined up to the stage of displaying the coordinated cooking mode. Also, once the cooking process 1 is started by a command from the left operation unit 40L, all subsequent changes to the control conditions, the end of cooking process 1, and related displays are executed by the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 30L.
This provides the effect of providing a cooking device 1 that is easy to use.

If the contents of the coordinated cooking mode to be displayed, the display format (including the display format of the identification information 330), the configuration of the first specific screen 30SP, etc. are made the same between the integrated display unit 30 and the display unit 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL, there will be no concern that the user will be confused; however, they do not necessarily have to be identical.
This is because there may be cases where the integrated display unit 30 and the display unit 31L have different display areas, or where the physical display principles are different.

Embodiment 5.
137 to 139 show a (built-in combination) cooking device according to embodiment 5 of the present disclosure.
Fig. 137 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking device. Fig. 138 is a block diagram showing the main control function parts of the cooking device 1 shown in Fig. 137. Fig. 139 is a flow chart showing the operation of the cooking device of Fig. 137 from turning on the main power supply to selecting a cooking mode or a control menu. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configuration of the first embodiment explained in Figs. 1 to 115 are given the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 shown in this embodiment 5 is characterized in that the coordinated cooking mode KM3 can be preferentially displayed on the display means (integrated display unit 30) according to a user setting.

That is, the cooking device 1 of the fifth embodiment is as follows:
A heating chamber 113;
An induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating an object N to be heated that is accommodated in the heating chamber 113 outside the heating chamber 113;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 188, oven heating source 189) for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
An input operation unit 40 as a selection means for selecting a combination cooking menu for a combination cooking mode prepared for each type of food to be cooked and a control menu shared by a plurality of types of food to be cooked;
an integrated control device MC that receives a command from the input operation unit 40 and controls an integrated display unit 30, which is one of the display means, the first heating means HM1, and the second heating means HM2, respectively;
A function setting unit 550 for limiting a function of the integrated control device MC,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a composite cooking mode KM2 using either one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 in combination, and an integrated cooking mode KM3 combining a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a function of controlling the integrated display unit 30 according to information set in the function setting unit,
When the integrated control device MC is supplied with a main power source and starts up the integrated display unit 30, if the integrated cooking mode KM3 is selected or the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened, and if the permission conditions preset in the function setting unit are satisfied, the integrated control device MC displays a first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30, on which a cooking menu of the integrated cooking mode KM3 is displayed.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

Details of the fifth embodiment will be described below.
137, reference numeral 30 denotes an integrated display unit, which has a rectangular dot-matrix liquid crystal display screen 30 D. The basic configuration of this integrated display unit 30 is as described in the first embodiment.

In FIG. 137, the input key 43KP located at the far left is a key (button) portion of a function setting input switch (not shown) that enables the user to set various operations, displays, etc. of the entire cooking appliance 1 as desired.
After pressing switch 97 of the main power switch 98 to supply main power to the integrated control device MC, pressing the input key 43KP switches the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, to a "function mode," and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 changes to a display screen configuration showing the "function setting menu."

The "Function Setting Menu" includes at least the following four items.
(1) Peak cut setting (maximum power consumption can be selected from four levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W)
(2) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu, identification information 330 to be displayed as default) of each cooking menu (e.g., “Hamburger steak”) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. (3) Setting the display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as default) of each control menu (e.g., “Grill range”, “Parboil leafy vegetables”) of the composite cooking mode KM2. (4) Setting to automatically display the cooking menu or control menu of the last used cooking mode on the integrated display unit 30 when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on.

Figure 137 shows an example of setting whether to give priority to the display of each cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, or the cooking menu or control menu of the last used cooking mode.

In Fig. 137, reference numeral 340 denotes a function setting title display section. This title display section 340 indicates that the setting screen is for setting a cooking menu to be preferentially displayed.
Reference numeral 341 denotes an explanatory display message that prompts the user to operate the input keys.

On the left side in front of the explanatory text 341, a linked cooking mode selection section 342L is displayed in the form of a square frame. To the right of the linked cooking mode selection section 342L, a composite cooking (RG) mode selection section 342M is displayed. Also to the right, a selection section 342R for the cooking menu or control menu of the previously used cooking mode is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 137, the composite cooking (RG) mode selection section 342M displayed in the center of the title display section 340 is displayed in white letters, which means that at this point in time, the composite cooking mode is set to be displayed preferentially.

The input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 arranged in front of the three selection sections 342L, 342M, and 342R described above all have an active input function.
Individual light emitting sections 27M3, 27M4, and 27M5 adjacent to and corresponding to these input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3, respectively, are in a light emitting state as indicated by star-shaped figures.

In FIG. 137, if the input key 43M1 is pressed, the linked cooking mode selection section 342L is selected, and the linked cooking mode selection section 342L changes to a form in which the characters are displayed in white. At the same time, the composite cooking (RG) mode selection section 342M stops displaying the characters in white.

To change the function setting title display section 340 to another function setting, press the input key 43MC. Finally, press the input key 43KP to complete the setting work for the "function setting menu." Normally, at this stage, the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 returns to the initial standby screen (see FIG. 46).

The individual light-emitting element 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP is surrounded by a dashed circle, which indicates that the individual light-emitting element 27M1 is in a blinking state. The individual light-emitting element 27M1 continues to blink from the start to the end of the function mode.

Next, we will explain Figure 138.
The memory device MM, which is formed from a semiconductor memory device or the like, stores a basic operation program for the integrated control device MC. The basic operation program includes computer programs for executing various cooking modes and control menus from the standby mode before the main power switch 97 is closed.

In Figure 138, solid arrows are drawn from the input operation unit 40 to each component, and these arrows indicate the flow of command signals, control data, etc.

551 is a function setting data storage unit. This function setting data storage unit 551 is prepared as one storage area in the memory device MM or as an independent storage element (such as a semiconductor memory) on the hardware.

The setting information input to the function setting unit 550 using the input keys 43KP and 43M1 to 43M3 described in FIG. 137 is stored in this function setting data storage unit 551, and each time the main power switch 97 is closed and the integrated control device MC is started up, the stored information is read out by the integrated control device MC.

Next, we will explain Figure 139.
This FIG. 139 corresponds to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment.
In the built-in type heating cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so the user turns on the power by pressing the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 (step SU1 in Figure 139).

Then, as explained in the first embodiment, a predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC is started. The integrated control device MC starts diagnosing itself for abnormalities using its own control program.

The integrated control device MC then checks whether there are any abnormalities in the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, the IH control unit 90 transmits the temperature measurement results of each part measured by the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 to the integrated control device MC. This allows the integrated control device MC to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (SU2).

If no abnormality is found, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays "Since there is no abnormality, cooking can be started" (SU2). Note that the display screen at this initial stage is the same as the initial standby screen described with reference to FIG.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice the same content as that displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (SU2).

In the next step SU3, the integrated control device MC reads out function setting information from the memory device MM.
If the function setting unit 550 has been set in advance by the input operation unit 40 so that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is preferentially displayed, such information "collaborative cooking mode priority" is read out.

In the next step SU4, a notification and audio guidance are provided to prompt the user to select a heating source.
At this stage, the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 is the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46).

When the user opens the door 114, as described in embodiment 1 (Figures 30 and 40), the door open/close detection mechanism 131 (close detection unit 139) transmits a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC (SU5).

The next step SU6 is a "permission condition" judgment step that determines whether or not cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is permitted. This judgment step was explained in detail in the first embodiment (FIG. 66), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but for example, a judgment is made as to whether "the peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more."

If it is determined in step SU6 that the permission conditions are not met, step SU6 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SU8, where the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays that cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be performed. Then the process returns to step SU4.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SU6 that the permission conditions are satisfied, the result in step SU6 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SU7, where the first specific screen 30SP for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. That is, the initial standby screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) is switched to the first specific screen 30SP.
Thereafter, a cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (e.g., "hamburger steak") can be selected to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, but further explanation will be omitted.

A case where the door 114 is not opened in step SU5, that is, where the door 114 remains closed, will be described.
As shown in step SU10, when various input keys of the input operation unit 40 are operated, one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 is selected according to the operation.

As shown in step SU11, in response to the input operation of step SU10, one of the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Then, waiting for a subsequent input operation, cooking begins.

If the input operation unit 40 is not operated at all in step SU10, the process returns to step SU5. However, if a certain period of time has passed without the user setting the cooking mode or control mode, a display or audio guidance may be displayed to prompt the user to make a selection, as shown in step SU9.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 139, in step SU11, before the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, there is a judgment step of the "permission conditions" to determine whether or not to permit cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, just like in step SU6.

Summary of embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, in the fifth embodiment as well, the same effects as those in the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 5, the cooking device 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body case HC;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N in which the object is accommodated outside the heating chamber 113;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources 188, 189 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
a first selection unit 43MC for selecting one cooking menu from a plurality of cooking menus prepared according to the type of food in an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which one food is heated using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
In a composite cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of the heating sources 188, 189 are automatically combined to heat one food item simultaneously or at a time lag, a second selection unit 43M1 selects one control menu from a plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of food items;
and an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to selection by the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the fifth embodiment,
The input operation unit 40 further includes an input key 43KP serving as a function setting input means for changing the function of the integrated control device MC,
The function setting input means 43KP is configured to enable setting as to whether to give priority to the display of each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or to give priority to the display of each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2.

Because of this configuration, when the function mode is selected, the priority between the display of the control menu for the composite cooking mode and the display of the linked cooking menu can be changed, providing a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 5, the cooking device 1 according to the ninth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
The integrated control device MC is configured to be able to display on the integrated display unit 30 a first specific screen 30SP showing a cooking menu for the integrated cooking mode KM3 when a cooking menu for the integrated cooking mode KM3 is selected or when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after main power is supplied and the integrated display unit 30 is started, if the permission conditions preset in the function setting unit are satisfied.

Therefore, when the user preferentially uses the cooperative cooking mode, by opening the door 114, the first specific screen 30SP showing the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be displayed.
This is expected to further improve usability for users.

Embodiment 6.
140 to 144 show a (built-in combination) cooking device according to embodiment 6 of the present disclosure.
Fig. 140 is a plan view of the front part of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking device. Fig. 141 is a block diagram showing the main control function parts of the cooking device 1 shown in Fig. 140. Fig. 142 is a flow chart 1 showing the operation up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions of the cooking device 1 of Fig. 140. Fig. 143 is a flow chart 2 showing the operation up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions of the cooking device 1 of Fig. 140. Fig. 144 is a flow chart 3 showing the operation up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions of the cooking device 1 of Fig. 140. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the first embodiment described in Figs. 1 to 115 are given the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 shown in this sixth embodiment is characterized in that it allows the selection of a linked cooking mode KM3, a combined cooking mode KM2, etc., by voice input.

In FIG. 140, an input key 43MX for selecting voice input is arranged in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. This input key 43MX may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch-type input switch like input keys 43M1 to 43M3.

27M7 is an individual light emitting unit that emits light when the input function of the input key 43MX is enabled, and continues to emit light until the input function is disabled.

Next, we will explain Figure 141.
In Fig. 141, the input operation unit 40 includes a voice signal receiving unit 40VR that receives the voice uttered by the user and converts it into a predetermined voice signal, and a voice signal analyzing unit 40VS that receives the voice signal from the voice signal receiving unit 40VR and analyzes the content of the voice. The voice signal receiving unit 40VR is connected to a microphone that collects voice, although not shown.

The memory device MM includes a memory unit MM1 for the coordinated cooking mode KM3, a memory unit MM2 for the combined cooking mode KM2, and an authorization condition memory unit MM3 that stores the conditions for whether or not to permit the coordinated cooking mode KM3.

MNP is a search unit that receives a command signal from the audio signal analysis unit 40VS, searches the stored data in the memory units MM1, MM2, and MM3, and extracts a cooking menu or a control menu. The function of this search unit MNP may be stored as a search program in the integrated control device MC, as shown in the dashed frame in FIG. 141.

373 denotes a signal line that connects various functional components and control components inside the upper unit 100. Note that this signal line 373 is part of the signal transmission unit 73 described in embodiment 1.

The notification unit AN in this embodiment 6 includes a display command unit 63SP for the first specific screen 30SP, a display command unit 63CS for the second specific screen 30SC, and a display command unit 63ST for the third specific screen 30ST.

The display unit drive circuit 63, which drives the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31L, respectively, and the three display command units 63SP, 63CS, and 63ST are controlled by a common control microcomputer (not shown). The functions of the three display command units 63SP, 63CS, and 63ST may be realized by the integrated control device MC.

Next, we will explain 142.
FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions, and shows the steps up to the determination of the cooking menu, control conditions, etc. after the input key 43MC or the input key 43MX is used to select the coordinated cooking mode KM3.

Steps S20 to S35 are executed by the integrated control device MC.
The operating program shown in Fig. 142 is characterized in that the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (e.g., "hamburger steak") and the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "range grill"), as well as the control conditions (e.g., "microwave heating output value" and "heating time") can be input by voice. As described in the first embodiment, the control menu of the "single heating cooking mode" using either the microwave heating source 189 using the heating chamber 113 or the oven heating source 188 (e.g., "range manual") can also be selected.

After closing the main power switch 97, when the user presses the input key 43MC of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M), a command signal SN1 is issued to the integrated control device MC.
On the other hand, when the user presses the input key 43MX of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M) after closing the main power switch 97, a command signal SN2 is issued to the integrated control device MC.

Step S19 is a user input step. Two cases are assumed: pressing input key 43MC or pressing input key 43MX.

In step S20, it is determined whether the above-mentioned signal SN1 has arrived, and if the signal SN1 has arrived, the process proceeds to a route in which the user touches the input operation unit 40 to confirm the cooking menu, etc.

When the input key 43MC is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected as explained in the first embodiment, and the food to be cooked can be selected by the input key 43M1. The cooperative cooking menus prepared in the memory unit MM1 explained in FIG. 141 are displayed one by one on the integrated display unit 30 according to the number of operations, such as "hamburger steak" when pressed once and "fried chicken" when pressed twice in succession.

On the other hand, as explained in steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 67 or step STX2 in FIG. 69 in embodiment 1, the "permission conditions" must be met before the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is permitted. Therefore, in step S21, it is determined whether the permission conditions are satisfied.

If step S21 is judged as "No", the process proceeds to the error notification process of step S35. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 notify the user that "the collaborative cooking mode cannot currently be selected". Then the process returns to the stage before step S19.

If the determination in step S21 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S22.
After this, when input of the input key 43M2 is also completed (step S23) and it is determined that the input key 43MS has been pressed (step S24), the process proceeds to the heating and cooking process for one linked cooking menu, and the identification information of the cooking menu and the control conditions are displayed in a corresponding state (e.g., side-by-side state) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. Therefore, the one linked cooking menu to be executed (e.g., "hamburger steak") is determined at the next step S33.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S20 is "No", the next step S25 determines whether the above-mentioned signal SN2 has arrived, and if the signal SN2 has arrived, the voice input processing step starts from the next step S26.

In step S26, the voice input assistance mode is started. The user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to a route where the user can confirm the cooking menu, etc. The voice synthesis device 95 prompts the user to input voice, for example, by saying, "We will now accept voice input. Please tell us the menu you would like."

In step S27, it is determined whether or not an audio signal has been input. If an audio signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S28.
On the other hand, if there is no voice input, the voice synthesizer 95 gives voice guidance to the user as shown in step S34.

In step S28, there are steps for searching for the control menu and control conditions in the combined cooking mode KM2, for searching for the cooking menu and its control conditions in the linked cooking mode KM3, and for searching for the control menu and control conditions in the single cooking mode KM1.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 142, step S28 includes step S28A of searching for the control conditions of the combined cooking mode KM2, step S28B of searching for the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, and step S28C of selecting the control conditions of the single cooking mode KM1.

If the name of the food to be cooked, for example "hamburger steak," is input by voice in step S27, a search is made in step S28 for cooking modes and control menus that can cook hamburger steak.

However, if the voice input is "Grill chamber. Hamburger", the voice input "Grill chamber" is used to search for only the collaborative cooking mode KM3 (S28B).

Step S29 also reads and compares the learned data of past search results with previously implemented collaborative cooking menus and the control conditions at that time from the memory device MM (see step SJ11 in Figure 79 of embodiment 1).

Like step S21, step S30 is a step for determining whether the permission conditions are met. In this step S30, as explained in steps STR1 and STR2 of FIG. 67 or step STX2 of FIG. 69 in embodiment 1, it is determined whether the "permission conditions" are met before permitting the collaborative cooking mode KM3.

If step S30 is judged as "No", the process proceeds to the error notification process of step S35 described above. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 notify the user that "as a result of the search, the linked cooking mode was selected, but that linked cooking cannot currently be selected." The process then returns to the stage before step S19.

In the next step S31, the search results are announced by voice and displayed on the integrated display unit 30. At this stage, the collaborative cooking mode KM3 has not yet been selected, but the first specific screen 30SP is displayed.

The user checks the results extracted in step S31, and if they match what the user desires, the user can give a voice input of approval, such as "confirm" or "hamburger OK." Alternatively, the user can press the input key 43MS to command the start of cooking (step S32).

By taking the steps in step S32, the cooperative cooking menu and its control conditions are finalized (step S33).
In addition, if, for example, "Boil spinach" is voice-input in step S27, "parboil leafy vegetables" (sole heating by microwave heating source 189), which is one of the control menus of the composite cooking mode KM2, is extracted.

When boiling spinach in water heated by the induction heating source 9, the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R should be operated instead of the central operating unit 40M.

Next, 143 will be described.
Fig. 143 is a flow chart showing the operation up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions of the cooking appliance 1 of Fig. 140, and shows the steps up to the determination of the control menu and the control conditions, etc., after the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the input key 43MX is input. As explained in the first embodiment, the control menu (for example, "manual range") of the "single cooking mode" using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 using the heating chamber 113 can also be selected.

Steps S20A to S35 are executed by the integrated control device MC.
In Fig. 143, step S19 is a user input step, which assumes two cases: pressing the input key 43M1 or pressing the input key 43MX.
Steps S22 to S35 are the same as those described with reference to FIG.

The operating program shown in FIG. 143 is characterized by the fact that the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "range grill") and even the control conditions (e.g., "microwave heating output value" and "heating time") can be input by voice.

After closing the main power switch 97, when the user presses the input key 43M1 of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M), a command signal SN3 is issued to the integrated control device MC.
On the other hand, when the user presses the input key 43MX of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M) after closing the main power switch 97, a command signal SN2 is issued to the integrated control device MC.

In step S20A, it is determined whether the above-mentioned signal SN3 has arrived, and if the signal SN3 has arrived, the user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to a route for confirming the control menu in the composite cooking mode KM2.

When the input key 43M1 is pressed, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected as explained in the first embodiment, and the control menu can be selected by the input key 43M1. Depending on the number of operations, such as "warming" when pressed once and "parboiling leafy vegetables" when pressed twice in succession, the control menus of the composite cooking mode KM2 prepared in the memory unit MM1 explained in FIG. 141 are displayed one by one on the integrated display unit 30.

After this, when input of the input key 43M2 is also completed (step S23) and it is determined that the input key 43MS has been pressed (step S24), the process proceeds to a heating and cooking process using one of the control menus of the composite cooking mode (e.g., "range grill"), and the specific text 30J and control conditions (e.g., microwave output value 500 W) of one of the control menus are displayed on the second specific screen 30SC of the integrated display unit 30. In other words, the control menu of one of the composite cooking modes KM2 to be executed is determined at this stage of step S33.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S20A is "No", the next step S25 determines whether the above-mentioned signal SN2 has arrived, and if the signal SN2 has arrived, the voice input processing step starts from the next step S26.

In step S26, the voice input assistance mode is started. The user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to a route for confirming the cooking menu, etc. The voice synthesis device 95 prompts the user to input voice, for example, by saying, "We will now accept voice input."

In step S27, it is determined whether or not an audio signal has been input. If an audio signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S28.
On the other hand, if there is no voice input, the voice synthesizer 95 for voice input provides voice guidance to the user as shown in step S34.

In step S28, there are steps for searching for the control menu and control conditions in the combined cooking mode KM2 (S28A), for searching for the cooking menu and its control conditions in the linked cooking mode KM3 (S28B), and for searching for the control menu and control conditions in the single cooking mode (S28C).

In step S27, if the name of a control menu, for example "range grill" (specific sentence 30J), is input by voice, in step S28, a search is made for a control menu that can set the range grill heating pattern.

However, if the user inputs "grill chamber, hamburger steak" by voice, the term "grill chamber" is also used in the search, and only the search for the linked cooking mode (S27B) is performed.

Step S29 also reads and compares the learned data of past search results with previously implemented collaborative cooking menus and the control conditions at that time from the memory device MM (see step SJ11 in Figure 72 of embodiment 1).

Like step S21 shown in FIG. 142, step S30 is a step for determining whether the permission conditions are met. In this step S30, as explained in steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 67 or step STX2 in FIG. 69 in embodiment 1, it is determined whether the "permission conditions" are met before permitting the collaborative cooking mode KM3.

If step S30 is judged as "No", the process proceeds to the error notification process of step S35 as described in FIG. 142. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 notify the user that "as a result of the search, the linked cooking mode was selected, but the linked cooking cannot currently be selected." Then the process returns to the stage before step S19.

If the search results in step S28 are not related to the coordinated cooking mode (for example, the control menu "Defrost" in the combined cooking mode KM2), the determination in step S30 is not made and the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the search results are announced by voice and displayed on the integrated display unit 30. At this stage, the composite cooking mode KM2 has not yet been selected by the user, but the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.

The user checks the results extracted in step S30, and if they match what the user desires, the user inputs voice approval, for example, "Grill range confirmed" or "OK." Alternatively, the user can press the input key 43MS to command the start of cooking (step S32). Note that immediately after step S32, the "voice input assistance mode" started in step S26 is released.

By responding to each of the above steps, the composite cooking mode KM2 and its control conditions are determined. For this reason, the voice synthesizer 95 will give a voice instruction such as "The range grill will start heating" (step S33).

In addition, if, for example, "Boil spinach" is voice-input in step S27, "Parboil leafy vegetables" (sole heating of microwave heating source 189), which is one of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2, is extracted.

When boiling spinach in water heated by the induction heating source 9, the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R should be operated instead of the central operating unit 40M.

Next, we will explain 144.
FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the operation of the cooking cooker 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and control conditions.
FIG. 144 illustrates the function restrictions of various input keys of the central operation unit 40M after the "start of the voice input support mode" described in step S25 of FIG.

After the processing of step S24 in FIG. 143, when the voice input assistance mode is started in step S25, the integrated control device MC disables the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (step S25A).

In other words, when the input key 43MX switches to the voice input assistance mode, the input key 43MC for selecting the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 do not generate any valid input signal even if they are touched. In addition, the input key 43M2 for setting control conditions such as microwave output and heating time also becomes inoperable.

For this reason, from step S25A onwards, the central operation unit 40M can only input voice to the integrated control device MC. However, the input functions of the input keys 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT are still valid, so for example, if the input key 43MT is pressed at step S30, the input results from the voice signal up to that point are cancelled, and the process returns to step S25.

If the input key 43MX is pressed after step S25, the entire voice input assistance mode is cancelled. Therefore, even if search results such as cooking menus are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 after step S25, they are all automatically erased. Also, since the process returns to step S19, the integrated display unit 30 returns to the initial standby screen.

In step S29, the search results are announced by voice and displayed on the integrated display unit 30. At this stage, the composite cooking mode has not yet been selected, but the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.

If the user checks the results extracted in step 29 and finds that they match what he or she desires, the user can give a voice input of approval, such as "Grill range OK." Alternatively, the user can press input key 43MS to command the start of cooking (step S30). Note that immediately after step S30, the "voice input assistance mode" started in step S25 is cancelled. At the same time, the input functions of input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 and 43MS, whose input functions were disabled in step S25A, are restored at this point (step S30A).

The next step S30B is a step for finally confirming the start of cooking. This step S30B cannot be processed by voice input. Since it is an important decision to start heating, a physical operation by the user is required. In other words, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
If a certain period of time passes without the input key 43MS being pressed in step S30B, the process from step S25 to S30A is cancelled and the process returns to step S19, causing the integrated display unit 30 to return to the standby initial screen.

In the above explanation, the cooking menu, etc. specified by the user is extracted by the voice signal analysis unit 40VS and the search unit MNP provided inside the heating cooker 1, but functions such as analyzing the voice signal and searching the control menu may also be shared by an external device (e.g., a home gateway 411, an external server 417, an information processing terminal device 418) connected via the wireless communication unit 49.
In other words, the cooking appliance 1 does not necessarily have to have all of the voice input processing functions inside.

Summary of embodiment 6.
As is clear from the above description, in this sixth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating an object N containing an object to be cooked on a top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about cooking;
An integrated control device MC for controlling a heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 serving as an input means is provided,
The integrated control device MC has an independent cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently;
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which a cooking process is automatically performed by automatically combining a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2;
A cooking mode KM3 including a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed in response to a command from the input operation unit 40.
The single cooking mode KM1 is a mode in which a control pattern (e.g., “water boiling” or “boiling”) of the first heating means HM1 is determined and a heating operation is started.
The composite cooking mode KM2 is a mode in which a heating source and a control pattern (e.g., “range grill”) to be used in the second heating means HM2 are determined and a heating operation is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the food to be heated (e.g., “hamburger steak” or “fried chicken”) is determined by the input means, and a heating operation is started.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

With this configuration, two or more heating means can be used to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM3. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the input means (input operation unit) 40 includes a voice signal receiving unit 40VR to which a voice signal from a user is input, and a voice signal analyzing unit 40VS,
The cooking mode selection unit (MNP) selects one of the composite cooking mode (KM2) and the cooperative cooking mode (KM3) based on the audio signal data from the audio signal analysis unit (40VS).
When the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 is extracted by the search unit MNP, the notification unit AN notifies the user of the control pattern by displaying the control pattern (on the second specific screen 30SC) or by voice.
It was a composition.

With this configuration, the cooking menu of the two cooking modes and the control menu can be selected by voice, so that the user's operability can be improved even in a heating cooker 1 with an increased number of heating sources.
Furthermore, even if the user is in a situation where he or she has touched the input operation unit 40 too many times and is unable to operate it, voice input can be assisted, so that a highly convenient cooking device can be provided.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, when one cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 is extracted by the search unit MNP, the control conditions applicable to that cooking menu can also be presented, so that the user can be saved the trouble of setting the control conditions, improving the operability for the user.

As is clear from the above description, in this sixth embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object to be cooked, which is placed on a top plate;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heat sources for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification means for notifying information about cooking;
A control unit MC for controlling a heating operation;
an input operation unit 40 for determining a cooking menu and a control menu;
The control unit MC automatically combines a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 to automatically proceed with the cooking process, and
A cooking mode KM3 including a cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed in response to a command from the input operation unit 40.
The cooking device further includes a voice signal receiving unit 40VR to which a voice signal from a user is input, and a search unit MNP for extracting one of the cooking menus or the control menus designated by the voice signal from among the plurality of control menus belonging to the composite cooking mode KM2 or the plurality of cooking menus belonging to the linked cooking mode KM3.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

With this configuration, if you input the desired cooking name, heating cooking status, etc. by voice, the desired cooking and control menu can be easily extracted from the database of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, and cooking can be performed. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Embodiment 7.
145 to 163 relate to the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 145 is a block diagram 1 showing the main control-related parts of the cooking device 1 disclosed in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 146 is a block diagram 2 showing the main control-related parts of the cooking device 1. FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an example of the operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. 148 is a flow chart for explaining the overall control operation of the cooking device 1 before cooking starts. FIG. 149 is a flow chart for explaining the overall control operation of the cooking device 1 after cooking starts. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the main internal functions of the portable information terminal. FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram 1 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram 2 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram 3 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram 4 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram 5 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram 6 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram 7 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram 8 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram 9 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram 10 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 161 shows a modification of the seventh embodiment, and shows an operation management system for the cooking appliance 1 and the home appliance 400. FIG. 162 shows a modification of the seventh embodiment, and is an explanatory diagram 1 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 163 shows a modification of the seventh embodiment, and is an explanatory diagram 2 of the display operation of the portable information terminal. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 115 are given the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 shown in this seventh embodiment is characterized in that the cooking mode and control conditions can be set using a remote control signal from the portable information terminal device 418.

One of the features of the cooking device 1 of this seventh embodiment is that it has an "external notification mode."
The "external notification mode" automatically notifies the portable information terminal 418, whose device identification code is registered, of detailed information about cooking processes up to intermediate stages.

One of the features of the cooking device 1 of this seventh embodiment is that it further improves the voice input mode described in the sixth embodiment, and enables voice input at least during the period from the start to the end of the cooking process.

Furthermore, one of the features of the cooking device 1 of embodiment 7 is that it adds a function to detect when a user is near the cooking device 1, and activates the voice input mode when the user is near the cooking device 1, thereby further improving safety.

In FIG. 145, JC is a human detection sensor. It also has a receiving section (not shown) that emits ultrasonic waves or infrared rays forward of the cooking appliance 1 and receives the reflected input. This human detection sensor JC is installed inside the upper unit 100 so that it emits ultrasonic waves or infrared rays from the top or front surface of the upper unit 100. Note that there is no dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiving section, and the received signal is analyzed by the integrated control device MC to determine whether or not a person is present.

In the following Figure 145, QC is a seismic device (vibration detection unit) that detects shaking during an earthquake, and if it detects a seismic intensity (acceleration) or greater, it sends a vibration detection signal to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC receives this signal and determines that an earthquake has occurred, and instantly shuts off the inverter circuit 82, etc., to stop all heating sources in use, or at least cooking that is taking place on the top plate 15. However, the operation of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is not stopped in an emergency.

When cooking on the top plate 15, there is a risk that a boiling pot (including a frying pan) may tip over or move sideways due to an earthquake. However, cooking inside the heating chamber 113 is less dangerous than cooking on the top plate 15 because the door 114 is closed with a certain force, so there is no need to make an emergency stop with a signal from the seismic sensor QC.

In Fig. 146, 40VS is the audio signal analysis unit explained in embodiment 6. In this embodiment 7, an audio signal analysis function is incorporated in the computer program of the integrated control device MC.
The function of the search unit MNP explained in the sixth embodiment is stored as a search program in the integrated control device MC, as shown in a solid line frame in FIG.

Next, we will explain Figure 147.
Fig. 147 is a time chart showing an example of operation of the cooking appliance 1 after the main power switch is turned on. In particular, the operation of the human sensor JC and the audio signal receiving unit 40VR is described. TL1 to TL13 indicate the timing of the operation of the cooking appliance 1 or the user's operation, and are from TL1 to TL13 in the order of occurrence.

First, the main power switch 97 is closed (TL1).
Then, the human presence sensor JC detects the presence of a person. When a human presence is detected, a detection signal is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (TL2).

The input functions of the various input keys of the input operation unit 40 are enabled (TL3). For example, input of input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43R1, etc. becomes possible. Note that the input function of the operation button (key) 98 of the main power switch 97 is enabled before these input keys, so the main power can be turned on as described above.

In this embodiment 7, an input key 43MX is provided for selecting voice input as described in embodiment 6. When this input key 43MX is pressed, the voice input mode is entered as described in embodiment 6, but unlike embodiment 6, it is also permitted for the user to directly touch the input keys of the input operation unit 40 (TL4). In other words, it is possible for the user to both operate with their finger and input by voice.

If no cooking has been performed previously, the heating chamber 113 is available for use (TL5).
If the user selects, for example, the integrated cooking mode KM3 by voice input or touch operation after the time TL4, it is determined at the time TL6 whether the permission conditions are met. The "permission conditions" here have been explained in detail in the first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 147, if cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected (TL7), cooking step 1 of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is started in the right heating unit 17HL (TL8). At this point, the audio signal receiving unit 40VR is still in a state where it can accept input. In other words, the audio input mode is maintained.

Therefore, while cooking step 1 is being performed, the user can set up another cooking process. For example, a new heating operation can be started with the unused left heating section 17HL, and a heating operation for various control menus (preheating, boiling water, etc.) using the induction heating source 9 can be started.

Incidentally, one of the features of this seventh embodiment is that the initiation of such a heating operation can be initiated by an audio signal.
In other words, when the user is in the middle of performing one cooking task or preparing for another cooking task and touch operations are difficult, the user can command heating and cooking by voice without performing touch operations.

This configuration allows another cooking task to start sooner, shortening the total cooking time and helping to reduce the burden on the user.

In the coordinated cooking mode KM3, when cooking step 1 is completed, there is a heating pause period (transition period) TR afterwards, but even at this timing, it is possible to start heating cooking in the heating chamber 113, change the control conditions, or even stop the heating operation by voice input (TL9).

After the transition period TR ends, cooking process 2 can be started by either touch operation or voice input (TL10). During this cooking process 2, the heating chamber 113 is occupied by the linked cooking mode KM3, so other cooking cannot be performed.

Thereafter, when the cooking process 2 of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is finished, at this point, the receiving function of the audio signal receiving unit 40VR is disabled by the integrated control device MC (TL13).
Therefore, voice input is no longer possible after this, and to set the voice input mode again, it is necessary to press the input key 43MX.

As is clear from the above explanation, the voice input mode allows the heating operation to be controlled by voice from start to finish only during the period when the presence of a person is detected by the human detection sensor JC. For example, if the user goes away from the vicinity of the cooking appliance 1, voice input is no longer possible, thereby ensuring safety.

When the human detection sensor JC detects that the user has left the vicinity of the cooking device 1, the notification unit AN may issue an alarm at that point. Also, when the human detection sensor JC can no longer detect the presence of a person, the voice input mode may not be disabled, but only input limited to two commands, namely, stopping heating and reducing the heat of the induction heating source 9, may be enabled.

Next, we will explain Figure 148.
148 is a flow chart for explaining the overall control operation before cooking starts in the cooking appliance 1. A basic operation program from power-on to the start of cooking preparation is stored in the memory device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

Steps SW1 to SW3 are the same as those shown in FIG. 38 in the first embodiment, so only steps up to SW3 will be briefly described.
When the main power switch 97 is closed (step SW1), the integrated control device MC is started up. The integrated control device MC starts to diagnose itself for abnormalities by its own control program (SW2).

In step SW2, the wireless communication unit 49 notifies the information processing device 411, such as a home gateway, in a living space, such as the kitchen KT, of the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1. This notification signal corresponds to the signal L2 described in FIG. 42 of the first embodiment.
Further, the cooking appliance 1 transmits an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 for the refrigerator 401 to the information processing device 411.

If the information processing device 411 is not inside the house HA, the cooking appliance 1 transmits information corresponding to the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 to an external server 417 via a router 419 (not shown) and a wide area communication network 416. A portable information terminal device 418 owned by a user or resident is connected to the wide area communication network 416.

If the integrated control device MC detects no abnormality, the integrated display unit 30 is started and the voice synthesizer 95 issues a voice guidance to the driver to start driving (SW3).
To prompt the user to select the heat source to be used, the integrated display unit 30 displays a message, and the voice synthesizer 95 also provides a voice guide to prompt the user to select the heat source (SW4). At this stage, instead of selecting a heat source, the user may select a cooking mode such as the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2.

Although not shown in FIG. 148, if the "external notification mode" has not been set, the external notification mode is set at this stage using the input operation unit 40.
Specifically, the input key 43KP is pressed to switch to a “function mode” to be described later, and setting operations are performed according to the display on the integrated display section 30.
In this functional mode, a specific portable information terminal 418 owned by a user is registered as one notification destination.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 7, when the seismic sensor QC detects an acceleration of a certain level or more, the integrated control device MC has a function of instantly stopping the induction heating source 9 during heating operation, and in this function mode, it can also be set to automatically transmit a signal to the outside via the wireless communication unit 49. This allows a warning signal to be sent to the home gateway 411 as well, and an alarm can be issued from the alarm device 445.
When the function mode is selected, the function mode is released after the necessary setting input is completed.

When the cooking appliance 1 of this seventh embodiment is set to the "external notification mode" as described above, or when it is otherwise in a state where it can wirelessly communicate with the mobile information terminal device 418, it is not possible to select the "function setting menu" that would be possible when the input key 43KP is pressed. In other words, the function mode is restricted to when the user directly operates the input operation unit 40 of the cooking appliance 1, thereby enhancing safety.

In the next step SW5, it is determined whether input has been completed in the input operation unit 40. As described in the first embodiment, if the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc. have been operated to select the desired cooking menu (e.g., "fried chicken"), control menu (e.g., "manual microwave"), etc., then this step SW5 becomes "Yes."

In the next step SW6, if the input key 43MS is pressed on the input operation unit 40, the result becomes "Yes" and the driving of the heating source actually starts (SW7). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43L1 or 44L. In the case of the right heating unit 17HR, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43R1 or 44R (these key input procedures may be omitted).

On the other hand, if the input from the input operation unit 40 has not been completed in step SW5, the input is awaited for 30 minutes. During this 30 minute period, measurement was started in step SW4.

In step SW8, a determination is made as to whether 30 minutes have been exceeded, and if so, the integrated control device MC automatically turns off the main power switch 97 (SW14).

During the 30-minute grace period for input, the input operation unit 40 repeatedly checks whether input has been completed and whether there is an external input (step SW9) unless the wireless communication unit 49 receives a "remote control signal" (external input) from the outside, which will be described later.

When the wireless communication unit 49 receives a remote control signal (external input) from the outside, step SW10 determines whether the signal is a command to specify the linked cooking mode or something else.

If the command is to specify the collaborative cooking mode, the process proceeds to step SW11. In this step SW11, a determination is made as to whether or not the permission conditions such as "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" described in embodiment 1 (particularly, Figures 67 to 69) are met.

If it is determined in step SW11 that the permission conditions are met, the process proceeds to step SW12, where processing is performed in external notification mode (external input priority mode).

On the other hand, if the cooperative cooking mode is not active, step SW10 is judged as "No" and the process proceeds to step SW12.

In step SW12, the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is judged and processed.
First, when the cooking mode designated from the outside is the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the integrated display section 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP.
Next, when the cooking mode designated from outside is the combined cooking mode KM2, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. On the other hand, when the cooking mode is the single cooking mode KM1 of the induction heating source 9, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SW13, a response is sent to the information processing device 411 or external server 417 that sent the remote control information, indicating that the remote control information has been received.

If it is determined in step SW4 that the permission information is not met, a response is sent to the information processing device 411 or external server 417 that sent the remote control information, indicating that control using the remote control information is not permitted.

In addition, at the stage of step SW11 or SW12, the user may manually change the control conditions (heat, microwave output, heating time, control temperature, etc.) set by the remote operation information using the input operation unit 40. At the stage of step SW12, the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC, and 30ST are displayed, respectively, so the control conditions may be set so that the user directly inputs them using the normal input operation unit 40.

Figure 148 describes the operation of the cooking device 1 when the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is set.

Next, we will explain Figure 149.
As explained in Fig. 148, in the cooking device 1 of the seventh embodiment, during standby before starting cooking operation, the input operation unit 40 is operated to switch to the "function setting" mode and set to the "external notification mode". Therefore, as will be explained below, this is convenient when the user cannot always be in front of the cooking device 1 and attend to cooking.

For example, immediately after starting cooking, the user may move around the kitchen KT or may use other cooking appliances or home appliances in the kitchen KT. However, when cooking a dish that uses edible oil, such as for deep-frying, if the human detection sensors 452 and 453 do not detect a person near the cooking appliance 1, an alarm will be issued from the alarm device 445 (see FIG. 4).

The cooking appliance 1 itself is also equipped with a human sensor JC whose detection range is set from near the door 114 toward the front, so that when cooking a specific menu such as "deep-frying," if no human is detected for a certain period of time (e.g., 15 seconds), a warning message is issued from the voice synthesizer 95. The heat of the induction heating source 9 is then reduced, and the heating operation is then stopped.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the integrated control device MC after the start of the heating and cooking operation.
149 shows an operation program when the "external notification mode" is set among the basic operation programs from the start of cooking process 1 to the start of cooking process 2. This program is also stored in the memory device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

The following explanation is based on the assumption that in the linked cooking mode, cooking step 1 of the selected cooking menu is performed in the heating chamber 113, and cooking step 2 is performed in the left heating section 17HL.

FIG. 149 shows the operational steps following step SW7 of FIG.
When cooking step 1 is started and microwave heating commences, the integrated control device MC confirms that it is set to the "external notification mode" (step SW20).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of cooking process 1, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user that cooking has started (step SW21).

Furthermore, information indicating that coordinated cooking has started is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside.
Since the portable information terminal 418 is registered in advance as an external notification destination of the cooking appliance 1 , information on the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1 is received via the external server 417 .

Measurement of an elapsed time TN1 starts from the time of step SW21.
In the seventh embodiment, in the next step SW22, the stock inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted to the outside. If the information processing device (home gateway) 411 is located inside the house HA as in the first embodiment, the stock inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted to the information processing device 411.

On the other hand, if the device corresponding to the information processing device 411 is an external server 417, inventory inquiry information RQ3 is sent from the cooking appliance 1 via the wide area communication network 416.

After this, a check is made to see if there is any abnormal operation during cooking process 1 (SW23), whether the user has issued a command to stop cooking process 1 (SW24), and whether the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded (SW25).

These steps SW23 to SW25 are repeated at short intervals, but if an abnormality is detected, the integrated notification unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 will notify the user of the abnormality (SW34). As part of the "external notification mode" processing, the external server 417 will also be notified, and the mobile information terminal 418 will also be notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

When it is determined that the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded (SW25 is "Yes"), the reference information 1 is notified on the first specific screen 30S of the integrated display unit 30. At the same time, the reference information is transmitted to the outside. This reference information also passes through the information processing device 411 and the external server 417, and finally reaches the mobile information terminal device 418.

In the next step SW27, a determination is made as to whether inventory data has been received from an external source in response to the refrigerator 401 inventory information inquiry RQ1 (see step SW2 in FIG. 148).

If inventory data has been received, it is stored in the memory device MM at that point, but the stored information is also checked in the next step SW28.

Next, when inventory data has arrived at the integrated display unit 30, the integrated control device MC evaluates and analyzes the actual related cooking menu from the acquired inventory data.
When a cooking menu recommendation is extracted, the integrated display unit 30 does not notify the user that there is a cooking recommendation menu at this point (SW29), and does not transmit the recommendation to the external server 417.

As an exception, if the user performs the above-mentioned "function setting" and sets it to be sent before the transition period TR, the notification data is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 at this point. The notification data is also sent to the mobile information terminal device 418.

After this, the device repeatedly checks whether or not there is a command from the user to end cooking step 1 (SW30). If cooking step 1 is performed using a timer setting, cooking step 1 will end automatically when the time set by the user has elapsed.

When cooking step 1 is complete, the next step SW31 notifies the integrated display unit 30 that cooking step 1 is complete and that the process will move on to cooking step 2 upon waiting for a user command.

In step SW31, as one of the processes in the "external notification mode", the external server 417 is also notified that the cooking process 1 has been completed.
Furthermore, similar to the notification performed in step SW29, when there is a cooking menu that can be recommended for the cooking appliance 1, the notification is made on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and also to the external server 417. Therefore, the portable information terminal device 418 can also know the existence of a recommended cooking menu by a display screen 480 as shown in Fig. 159 described later.

As can be seen from FIG. 149, step SW31 is a transition period TR during which the heating operation is paused, and the user must remove the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 and move it to the food to be heated (such as a pot) N prepared on the left heating section 17HL.

The length of the transition period TR can be freely determined by the user until the user gives the command to start cooking (cooking process 2) (however, if there is a long pause, such as 30 minutes or more, an error will occur and the linked cooking mode will be automatically cancelled).

The user can use this pause period TR to consider the value of the recommended cooking menu. If necessary, the ingredients in the refrigerator 411 can be checked at this point, and the occupant's opinion can be heard. During the pause period TR, the monitoring level of the human detection sensor JC is automatically changed to a low level, so that the cooking appliance 1 will not immediately sound an alarm just because the user has left (become absent) in front of the cooking appliance 1.

When the user presses the input key 43MS, the pause period TR ends immediately and induction heating (cooking process 2) begins in the left heating section 17HL (SW32).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of cooking step 2, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user of the start of cooking. In addition, the wireless communication unit 49 transmits information to the outside world indicating that cooking step 2 of the coordinated cooking has started (SW33).

Next, the portable information terminal 418 shown in FIG. 150 will be described.
The portable information terminal device 418 has a transmitting and receiving unit 460, a communication control unit 461, a central processing unit (CPU) 462, a ROM and RAM 463, a speaker 464, a touch-type operation unit 465, a display unit 466 having a display screen, a cooking appliance database (storage unit) 468, a posture detection unit 469, a remote operation information generation unit 470, and a storage unit 467. The transmitting and receiving unit 460 has an NFC input/output unit 472 for short-range wireless communication.

Reference numeral 475 denotes an audio input unit that converts audio into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 466, the display unit 467, and the voice input unit 475 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation unit 471. A search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 475 and performs term search, information search, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the portable information terminal 418, or may be provided in the external server 417, so that the search function is provided outside the portable information terminal 418.

The attitude detection unit 469 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the portable information terminal device 418. As a result, a signal that detects the up-down direction of the portable information terminal device 418 is output to the central processing unit 462.

The central processing unit 462 receives a detection signal from the attitude detection unit 469 and controls the display direction of the display unit 467 .
The central processing unit 462 inputs a signal received from the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking appliance 1 to the remote control information generating unit 470 .

The cooking appliance database 468 holds “notification data” 472 of the cooking appliance 1 in order to generate notification information (including image information) for the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 of the cooking appliance 1 .
The cooker database 468 also holds “remote control data” 473 for the integrated control device MC of the cooker 1 .

The notification data 472 and remote control data 473 may be stored in the portable information terminal device 418 from the beginning, or may be acquired by downloading from an external server 417, which is an information providing means, connected via a wide area communication network 416. In other words, the cooking appliance database 468 does not need to be constructed with fixed storage, and may be in a form in which information is acquired as needed and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The remote control information generating unit 470 processes the signal acquired from the cooking appliance 1 via the central processing unit 462 and the input signal from the display operation unit 471, and generates remote control information for the cooking appliance 1.

The "remote operation information" referred to here includes information regarding input operations corresponding to all cooking modes of the cooking appliance 1, including the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, display information of the integrated display unit 30 in the linked cooking mode, combined cooking mode, etc., and display information regarding the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L. However, in all cooking modes, including the linked cooking mode KM3, information that serves as a command to start a heating operation is not included. Therefore, the cooking appliance 1 does not receive a command to start a heating operation from this remote operation information.

The central processing unit 462 executes the overall processing of the portable information terminal device 418 according to a control program stored in the ROM/RAM, reading data required in the process of executing the processing from the ROM/RAM, and storing data generated in the process of executing the processing in the ROM/RAM. The storage unit 471 is a non-volatile memory made of a semiconductor, and can store information about the cooking appliance 1 read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 460.

When the user touches a specific portion of the display unit 467 of the portable information terminal 418, the remote operation information generating unit 470 generates remote operation information based on the touch signal.
The remote operation information is transmitted from the transmitting unit and the receiving unit 460 to the cooking appliance 1 .

The integrated control device MC of the cooking appliance 1 that receives the remote operation information treats this remote operation information as input operation information for the cooking mode. For example, when a remote operation signal related to the linked cooking mode is received, this causes the first display screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 to transition to a selection screen for one cooking menu in the linked cooking mode, as shown in FIG. 158, which will be described later. However, this does not mean that the cooking appliance 1 will unconditionally operate according to the remote operation information of the mobile information terminal device 418. This is as described in FIG. 148.

On the other hand, on the side of the portable information terminal device 418 that transmitted the remote operation information, the display of the display unit 467 changes based on the remote operation information. In other words, the contents of the display screen by touch operation on the display operation unit 471 of the portable information terminal device 418 and the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1 change according to similar operation procedures, but the state of the change is not transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 one by one in real time.

Even if the portable information terminal device 418 generates remote operation information, it is not until a cooking mode confirmation signal is transmitted that the cooking appliance 1 recognizes the remote operation information as a regular remote operation signal. In other words, the remote operation information from the portable information terminal device 418 is transmitted all at once when a predetermined confirmation key is pressed on the portable information terminal device 418 to confirm the cooking mode.

The remote operation information transmitted from the mobile information terminal device 418, for example, regarding the collaborative cooking mode, is information necessary to cook a specific cooking menu in the collaborative cooking mode (e.g., "fried chicken"), and includes the heat source, details of the cooking process, and control conditions (parameters) such as heat and heating time. In other words, it also includes detailed control conditions that the user can set on the first specific screen 30SP.

There have already been many proposals for controlling microwave ovens and induction cooking appliances using wireless signals from a portable information terminal 418.
For example, there have been proposed technologies in which cooking procedure information is transferred to a cooking appliance via short-range wireless communication from a portable information terminal (home network terminal) placed near the cooking appliance (JP Patent Publication No. 2011-113787), and technologies in which heating control information is transferred to a cooking appliance via wireless communication from a portable information terminal (JP Patent Publication No. 2005-37068 and JP Patent Publication No. 11-14063).

A technology has also been proposed that generates a remote control signal, including graphic information corresponding to the operation of a cooking appliance (gas stove), and transmits the signal wirelessly from a mobile information terminal (see, for example, JP 2014-163539 A).

In this seventh embodiment, the following explanation focuses on the display contents of the display screen (also used as the input operation screen) 480 of the portable information terminal device 418.

151(A) and (B) show the display screen of the portable information terminal device 418.
The display screen 480 is formed by covering the surface of a liquid crystal display screen or an organic EL display screen with a glass plate.
Although they do not appear as physical structures on the upper surface (front surface) of the glass plate, various icons (input keys) 491L, 491M, 491R, 492 to 496, which will be described later, can be visually recognized by displaying them on the display screen 480. Although specific parts of the glass plate itself do not emit light or generate images, in the following explanation, the expression "displayed on the display screen" is used from the standpoint of a user who sees the display of characters, figures, and other information.

The "icons" allow the user to perform desired input. In other words, each icon has a capacitance sensing key located thereon. When the user touches the icon, the touch operation unit 466 (see FIG. 150) generates a command signal for the central processing unit 462.

To indicate the presence and function of an icon, a specific function is displayed in text or graphics (at least when it is capable of accepting input). For example, in the example of Figure 151 (A), "Left IH operation unit" is displayed in text 491L.

481 is a menu display section in the initial screen shown in FIG. 151(A). This menu display section 481 changes to a menu selection display section 482 for the left heating section in FIG. 151(B). Also, in FIG. 152(A), it changes to a heating source selection display section 483 called "Select heating source."

Furthermore, the menu display section 481 changes to a range grill control menu selection display section 484 called "RG control menu selection" in FIG. 152(B).
Furthermore, the menu display section 481 changes to a cooperative cooking menu display section 485 labeled "Select cooperative cooking menu" in FIG. 158 (A).

In FIG. 158(B), the menu display section 481 changes to a preparation information display section 486 called "Next Preparation Guide." In FIG. 159(A) and (B), the menu display section 481 changes to a linked cooking menu name display section 487 showing "fried chicken," one of the linked cooking menus.

In FIG. 151(A), reference numeral 490 denotes a warning information display section as an initial screen during standby.
Before operation begins, the heating chamber 113 may already be hot due to heat from a previous cooking session, and Figure 151 (A) is an example that calls attention to this fact.
It also indicates that the power is already on.

491M is a selection section (icon) of the central operation section 40M. By operating the central operation section 40M, cooking can be performed using a heat source other than the induction heating source 9, as described in the first embodiment.

491L is a selection portion (icon) of the left operation unit 40L, and 491R is a selection portion (icon) of the right operation unit 40R.
An advice display selection section (icon) 492 is displayed. When this is touched, the voice synthesizer 95 or the integrated display section 30 displays reference information for an operation corresponding to the touched situation.

FG indicates the user's fingertips.
In Figures 151 (A) and (B) and other figures, triangular marks (icons) 501 and 502 are screen switching marks.

The next Figure 152 (B) also has a screen switching mark 503. When these marks are touched, the display screen 480 can be switched in a certain order with each touch. Incidentally, when the screen switching mark 502 is touched in Figure 151 (B), the display screen 480 moves to the right, and the next display screen 480 appears from the left side.

The screen switching marks 501 to 503 may be omitted by providing a scroll function in which the fingertip FG is moved while touching the display screen 480, and the display screen is moved accordingly to switch screens.

In FIG. 151(A), when the left operation section selection section (icon) 491L is touched, the display screen is switched to the display screen 480 shown in FIG. 151(B) without touching the screen switching marks 501 to 504.

In FIG. 151(B), 493 is a control menu display section (icon) for the IH only cooking mode.
There are a total of eight control menus for the IH only cooking mode. Five of them are displayed in the right half of the display screen 480 in Fig. 151 (B). These control menu display sections (icons) 493 are "Boil water", "Boil", "Cook rice", "Boil water + keep warm", and "Combined cooking".

The remaining three control menus are displayed on the left half of the display screen 480: the "Keep Warm" control menu display section (icon) 488, the "Deep Fry" control menu display section (icon) 494, and the "Preheat" control menu display section (icon) 489.

In FIG. 151(B), reference numeral 495 denotes a menu screen display portion (icon) for selecting to return to the initial menu display screen.
Numeral 496 denotes an input confirmation display section (icon) for confirming the selection of one of the control menus (for example, "boiling water") in Fig. 151 (B). When this is pressed, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "boiling water", the screen automatically switches to a control condition setting screen for boiling water.

Next, we will explain Figure 152 (A).
Reference numerals 497A and 497B denote induction heating source selection sections (icons) for selecting the left heating section 17HL or the right heating section 17HR. Reference numeral 497C denotes a heating source selection section (icon) for selecting the microwave heating source 189.

In FIG. 152(A), reference numeral 498 denotes a range grill heat source selection section (icon), and 499 denotes an associated cooking selection section (icon).
In FIG. 152(A), when the range grill heat source selection section (icon) 498 is touched, the display screen changes to that of FIG. 152(B).

Next, we will explain Figure 152 (B).
Reference numeral 500 denotes an RG control menu selection section (icon) showing a range grill (RG) control menu. The range grill (RG) control menu has a total of 10 items such as "warm", "manual range" and "thaw meat".

In FIG. 152(B), 497A is an induction heating source selection section (icon) for selecting the left heating section 17HL. 497B is a selection section (icon) for the right heating section 17HR.

497C is a selection section (icon) for selecting the microwave induction heating source 189.
When the screen change mark (icon) 503 in FIG. 152(B) is touched, the display screen 480 in FIG. 152(B) changes to that in FIG. 153(B).

Next, we will explain Figures 153 (A) and (B).
Figures 153(A) and (B) show the state in which all (10) of the Range Grill (RG) control menus are displayed. Figure 153(A) shows five control menus 500, and Figure 153(B) shows the remaining five control menus 500.

The large arrows shown in Figures 153 (A) and (B) respectively indicate the rear and front when the display screen 480 is held horizontally. The display screen 480 can be operated without any problems whether it is held horizontally, vertically, or at an angle.

Next, we will explain Figures 154 (A) and (B).
FIG. 154(A) shows the state in which the "warm" control menu 500 has been selected from the range grill (RG) control menu in the state shown in FIG. 152(A).
When the fingertip touches the RG control menu selection section (icon) 500, the selection section 500 detects the touch and changes the display color, for example, the characters are inverted to white. When the input confirmation key display section (icon) 496 is touched in the state of Fig. 154(A), the display screen changes to 480 in Fig. 154(B).

Figure 154(B) is the default screen of the Range Grill (RG) control menu.
Reference numeral 504 denotes a name display section (icon) of the RG control menu.
The display form and design of the control menu in Fig. 154(B) are similar to those shown in Fig. 49 etc. of embodiment 1. Such a display is possible because of the presence of cooking appliance database 468 and remote operation information generating unit 470 (see Fig. 150).

In FIG. 154(B), 505 is the temperature display section (icon) of the RG control menu. In the example of FIG. 154(B), the default value is 80°C, but the next selectable options are 75°C and 85°C, so these are also displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 154(B), the name display section (icon) 504 of the RG control menu displays the next display candidates, "Oven" and "Parboil leafy vegetables," adjacent to it in slightly smaller size.

154(B), if the user wishes to change the microwave temperature setting to 75° C., he or she need only place fingertip FG on the portion displaying 75° C. This will be explained in the next FIG.
Similarly, when changing the control menu's "warm" to "oven" or "pre-boil leafy vegetables," the user simply touches the candidate switching marks (icons) 519, 520 near "oven" or "pre-boil leafy vegetables."

In FIG. 154(B), 506 is a reference image display section. The reference image may be something other than a photograph, and may be an illustration showing an image of the "warm" option in the control menu.

Next, we will explain Figures 155 (A) and (B).
When the orientation of the portable information terminal device 418 is changed to the vertical direction, the display screen 480 changes to a portrait orientation as shown in Figures 155(A) and 155(B). The display screen 480 may be set to be fixed in a portrait orientation as shown in Figures 155(A) and 155(B).

Switching between FIG. 155(A) and FIG. 155(B) can be achieved simply by touching the screen switching mark (icon) 503.
Next, Fig. 156 (A) and (B) will be described. When the fingertip touches the control menu selection section 500 of "Warm" shown in Fig. 155 (A) to select the control menu 500, the display color changes and, for example, the characters are inverted to white, as shown in Fig. 156 (A).
When the input confirmation key display section (icon) 496 is touched in the state shown in FIG. 156(A), the display screen changes to a display screen 480 shown in FIG. 156(B).

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 156(B), if you want to change the (upper heating limit) temperature setting of the "warm" range (microwave heating) to 75°C, you can simply place your fingertip FG on the 75°C display area (temperature display area 505 of the RG control menu). Then, the display screen 480 will change to the state shown in FIG. 157(A).

In FIG. 156(B), 507A is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. 156(B), the user is advised to select a set temperature.

Next, we will explain Figure 157 (A).
As shown in Fig. 157(A), the set temperature is displayed as having been changed to 75°C. Note that, since this is still a stage before the control conditions have been finalized, the other set temperature of "85°C" remains displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 157(A), the remote control signal transmission key display section (icon) 521 is displayed for the first time.
In FIG. 157(A), when the transmission key display section 521 is selected, the setting information displayed in FIG. 157(A) is transmitted all at once to the cooking appliance 1 as remote control information.

The state in Figure 157 (B) is the stage where all conditions for executing "Warm" in the RG control menu have been selected, so the heating temperature condition of "75°C" displayed on the temperature display unit 505 is sent to the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 157(A), 507B is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. 157(A), it is shown that the input operation is completed by pressing the transmission key display section 521.

At the stage in Fig. 157(B) where the remote control signal has ended, the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed for the first time. Pressing this stops the heating operation at the stage in Fig. 157(B). Once this stop key display section 522 is pressed, the system returns to the first stage, and all remote control conditions must be re-entered.

The portable information terminal 418 is provided with a stop key display section (icon) 522 that can instantly send a command to stop heating, and has the function of ensuring the safety of the cooking appliance 1.

Next, we will explain Figure 158 (A).
Fig. 158(A) shows a screen displayed when the linked cooking selection section 499 shown in Fig. 152(A) is touched. The display screen 480 in Fig. 158(A) may be displayed by touching the central operation section selection section 491M in Fig. 151(A). However, when the central operation section selection section 491M is touched, the selection screen is also used for the range grill cooking mode (combined cooking mode KM2), so there are a few more touch operations required to select the linked cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 158(A) shows an example in which "fried chicken" is selected as one of the cooking menus in the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
When the user wishes to cook "fried chicken" and touches the linked cooking menu display section (selection section) 500C, the display color changes, for example, to white characters, as shown in FIG. 158 (A).

When the input confirmation key display section (icon) 496 is touched in the state shown in FIG. 158(A), the display screen changes to a display screen (not shown) for cooking "fried chicken". Display screen 480 in FIG. 159(A) is a display screen showing the first stage of cooking process for "fried chicken".

Note that Figure 158(A) only shows the collaborative cooking menu and omits the subsequent illustration of selecting the heating unit and control conditions, but if you select (touch) the collaborative cooking menu selection section (icon) 500C on the display screen 480 of Figure 158(A), you will proceed to the display screen 480 for setting the selected cooking menu (e.g., "fried chicken").

The display screen 480 for setting "fried chicken" displays icons (334L, 334R) for selecting the left and right heating sections 17HL, 17HR, as shown in Figures 81 and 82 of the first embodiment, and also displays the transmission key display section (icon) 521.

Figure 159 (B) shows an example of a notification corresponding to "Reference Information 1" FA1 notified by the cooking appliance 1 during cooking step 1 when cooking "fried chicken" using the cooking menu in the collaborative cooking mode.

In this embodiment 7, the "first reference information" FA1 notified by the cooking appliance 1 notifies two things: opening the door of the heating chamber 113, and then removing the heated food from the heating chamber 113, as shown in FIG. 158(B).

The display screen 480 of the portable information terminal 418 also displays, as contents corresponding to the above-mentioned reference information FA1, a preparatory work reference image 509 indicating opening the door and a preparatory work reference image 510 indicating removing the food to be cooked together with the tray, as shown in FIG. 158 (B).
Reference numeral 511 denotes attention-calling information, and 512 denotes auxiliary information that explains the user's operation.

Next, we will explain Figure 159 (A).
Display screen 480 in FIG. 159(A) displays the first cooking step of "fried chicken."
Reference numeral 513 denotes a process information display section. In Fig. 159(A), this indicates that microwave heating is still continuing. Reference numeral 514 denotes a display section for the next cooking process information. In the example shown in this figure, it indicates that induction heating will be performed next in the right heating section 17HR.

515 is a display section for the recommended menu. This display section 515 may include a recommended cooking menu (another dish) searched for from inventory information previously obtained from the refrigerator 401. In the example of FIG. 159(A), it is suggested that there is a recommended menu for another dish that can be cooked in the heating chamber 113 currently being used for "fried chicken" after that heating chamber is no longer in use.

At the stage shown in FIG. 159(A), the recommended menu is not automatically displayed in detail. If the user touches the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523, which is displayed for the first time at this stage, the details are displayed as shown in FIG. 159(B).

The selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 521 as shown in FIG. 159(B) is not displayed on the integrated display section 30 of the cooking appliance 1. After a certain period of time, the screen in FIG. 159(A) automatically returns to the screen in FIG. 158(A).

Even at the stage shown in FIG. 159(B) after the remote control signal has been sent, the stop key display section (icon) 522 is displayed to stop the heating operation by remote control.

In Fig. 159 (B), 487 is a display section for the name of the coordinated cooking menu, and in this case, the name of the food to be cooked, "fried chicken", is displayed. 516 is a display section for the recommended menu. The specific contents of the recommended menu are displayed in the display section for the recommended menu 515. It is recommended that the food be defrosted and heated before cooking.

In FIG. 159(B), 517 is auxiliary information for the recommended menu, indicating that cooking can be done using the "warm" control menu that utilizes microwave heating.
Reference numeral 518 denotes a cooking reference image for the recommended menu. This may be an illustration (conceptual image) instead of a photograph.
At this stage in FIG. 159(B), the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is also displayed.

Next, we will explain Figure 160(A).
Display screen 480 in FIG. 160(A) shows the state in which cooking process 1 of “fried chicken” has ended and transition period TR has begun.
Reference numeral 513 denotes a process information display section. In Fig. 160(A), this indicates that microwave heating has ended. Reference numeral 514 denotes a display section for the next cooking process information. In the example shown in this figure, it indicates that induction heating will be performed next in the right heating section 17HR.

515 is a display section for the recommended menu. If there is a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched for from the inventory information previously obtained from the refrigerator 401, this display section 515 shows that there is a recommended cooking menu, as shown in FIG. 160 (A).

When the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 displayed on the display screen 480 in FIG. 160(A) is touched, details of possible cooking menu items that can be performed in parallel with cooking process 2 in the heating chamber 113 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 160(B).

The selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. 160(A) may also be displayed on the integrated display section 30 of the cooking device 1. However, if the display screen of the integrated display section 30 is not a touch-type input type, it is necessary to display that an appropriate input key should be pressed.

When the input confirmation key display section (icon) 496 in FIG. 160 (B) is pressed, information on a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) that uses the heating chamber 113 is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1. In other words, the user who is cooking in front of the cooking appliance 1 is informed of his or her intention to "agree with the recommended menu."

When information on a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) is sent to the cooking appliance 1, the owner of the mobile information terminal device 418 may not be in the kitchen KT and may receive the notification of the recommended cooking menu (another cooking). In other words, it is conceivable that at that moment another user may be in front of the cooking appliance 1. In any case, the user can know that cooking can be performed simultaneously in parallel by effectively using the heating chamber 113.

In the above explanation, the signal from the portable information terminal device 418 reaches the cooking appliance 1 via the wide area communication network 416, but since the cooking appliance 1 has an NFC input/output unit 472 for short-range wireless communication, the signal may be input by directly approaching or contacting the NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the cooking appliance 1 side.

Summary of embodiment 7.
As is clear from the above description, in this seventh embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
a heating chamber 113 whose opening is freely opened and closed by a door 114;
A microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
An induction heating source 9 for heating an object placed on a top plate 15;
A notification unit AN30 that notifies information about a cooking process;
an input operation unit 40 that enables touch input and voice input;
A wireless communication unit 49 that wirelessly transmits cooking control information to the outside and receives information from the outside;
An integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189, one or both of the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source are driven in an integrated manner,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source or the oven heating source, and a cooking process 2 using the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device automatically performs the cooking process 1, and after the first cooking process is completed, starts the cooking process 2 in response to a start command from a user, and automatically performs the second cooking process.
The integrated control device MC, in the middle of the cooking process 1,
(1) Reference information FA1 regarding the cooking process 1;
(2) The notification unit is configured to automatically notify, during the cooking process 1 stage or transition period TR, of reference information FA1 regarding another cooking process that can be performed simultaneously with cooking process 2 using the heating chamber 113 occupied by cooking process 1.

Therefore, in this seventh embodiment, it is expected that user convenience will be further improved compared to the first embodiment.

In addition, the user can input commands by voice instead of manually, and it is also possible to start and stop the heating operation, which is expected to further improve user convenience compared to embodiment 1.

In addition, the voice input mode is restricted by the human detection sensor JC when a person is near the cooking appliance 1, improving safety.

In addition, in the cooking appliance 1, the remote control signal from the external mobile information terminal device 418 is enabled only when the input operation to start cooking has begun after the main power is turned on and the input has not yet been completed (see FIG. 148, step SW5).

Therefore, there is no risk of an external remote control signal interrupting the user while he or she is making an input on the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1, causing the input up to that point to go to waste. In addition, there is no risk of confusion for the user who is actually cooking in front of the cooking device 1.

Also, on the display screen 480 of the mobile information terminal 418, as shown in FIG. 158(B), a preparatory work reference image 509 indicating that the door 114 should be opened and a preparatory work reference image 510 indicating that the food to be cooked should be removed together with the tray are displayed as contents corresponding to the above-mentioned reference information FA1.

Therefore, even if there is no user or resident carrying a mobile information terminal device 418 near the cooking appliance 1, the user can obtain useful information for using the cooking appliance 1 effectively in a timely manner. In other words, the user can prepare in advance the tasks required when the current cooking process is completed, or reaffirm the procedure for moving to the next cooking process, thereby further improving user convenience.

In the seventh embodiment, the portable information terminal 418 has a function of transmitting a “remote control signal” to the cooking appliance 1 .
Correspondingly, the cooking appliance 1 has a function of receiving the "remote control signal."

When the wireless communication unit 49 of the heating cooker 1 receives a remote control signal (external input) from the outside, it determines whether or not certain "permission conditions" are met, and only if it is determined that the permission conditions are met, does it proceed to a step of the coordinated cooking mode in accordance with the remote control signal (external input).
Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations in advance where the cooking is interrupted due to insufficient power during the cooking process of coordinated cooking or where the cooking fails due to insufficient heat (heating) due to the permission conditions not being met.

Furthermore, whether or not to start the heating operation even when a remote control signal is received is ultimately left to the judgment and input of the user facing the cooking appliance 1, so there is no risk of heating being started inadvertently (unconditionally) against the will of the user or resident due to an incorrect remote control signal from outside.

It is difficult to imagine a situation in which a user holding the portable information terminal device 418 would transmit remote operation information from a remote location far away from the cooking appliance 1, but it is possible that a user may operate the portable information terminal device 418 placed on a dining table or the like in the same kitchen KT.

Incidentally, as explained in the seventh embodiment, the display screen (display design) of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode or linked cooking mode of the cooking appliance 1 and the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal device 418 have many similarities in terms of displaying the cooking menu and displaying and changing default values of the control conditions. Therefore, when the user works while checking the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal device 418, there is no significant sense of incongruity, and the burden of remote operation input on the user is also small.

In particular, as shown in Figure 156 (B) and Figures 157 (A) (B), at the stage where the cooking menu and control conditions (temperature, heat, etc.) are determined on the display screen 480 of the mobile information terminal device 418, the display design corresponds to the display screen of the second specific screen 30SC of the integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1.

The display screen 480 of the portable information terminal device 418 and the display screens of the second specific screen 30SC and the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1 have corresponding (similar) designs at the stage of important input items.
Even for a user who is accustomed to using the input operation unit 40 of the cooking appliance 1, there is little discomfort in operating the portable information terminal device 418, and there is no concern that the operability of the user will be impaired. In other words, a user who is accustomed to operating the portable information terminal device 418 will not experience any impairment in operability when using the input operation unit 40 of the actual cooking appliance 1.

In the seventh embodiment, the portable information terminal device 418 has a function of manually inputting a "remote control signal" for the cooking appliance 1 into the portable information terminal device 418 and transmitting the input result, but it is also possible to obtain recipe information held in the external server 417 and use it as a remote control signal.

As shown in FIG. 46 in the first embodiment, the standby display screen 2A at the time of startup displays two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) that guides the user to a dedicated recipe site (one of the external servers).
By reading this two-dimensional information with a portable information terminal 418, it is possible to connect to the recipe site, so that various cooking recipes (cooking procedure instructions, data, etc.) can be viewed and the data can be easily downloaded.

Therefore, by step SW5 in FIG. 148, recipe data is acquired by the portable information terminal device 418, and the control data contained in the data, such as heat (heating intensity) and heating time, is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1. In this case, the recipe data is in a format that allows the contents to be analyzed by steps SW10 and SW11 in FIG. 148.

(Modification of the Seventh Embodiment)
Fig. 161 shows a modification of the seventh embodiment, and shows an operation management system for a cooking appliance 1 and a home electric appliance 400. Fig. 162 is an explanatory diagram 1 of a display operation in a portable information terminal device 418 in Fig. 161. Fig. 163 is an explanatory diagram 2 of a display operation in a portable information terminal device 418 in Fig. 161.

The external server 417 is a collection of multiple servers that perform different information processing. The external servers 417 may be operated by the same or different administrators. For example, one external server may provide useful information to the alarm device 441 or the temperature monitoring device 440.

In this modified example, the cooking appliance 1 can directly communicate wirelessly with the portable information terminal 418. Also, the cooking appliance 1 and the portable information terminal 418 are designed to automatically connect when they are within communication range with each other, which is a major difference from the seventh embodiment.

In FIG. 161, the communication method between the portable information terminal device 418 and the cooking device 1 is Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards, and the communication method between the portable information terminal device 418 and the router 530 is a wireless LAN such as WiFi (registered trademark).

First, the portable information terminal device 418 performs mutual authentication with the cooking appliance 1. The cooking appliance 1 has a function setting input key 43KP, which is operated at the first startup to display the mutual authentication setting screen from the function setting menu and perform mutual authentication.

In addition, application software for the cooking appliance 1 is pre-stored in the cooking appliance database 468 or memory unit 467 of the portable information terminal device 418.

When the cooking appliance 1 is started, the portable information terminal device 418 transmits a signal for automatic connection, and mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking appliance 1 and the portable information terminal device 418.

Like the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) described in the first embodiment, a connection command means (not shown) for commanding wireless communication at any timing may be provided and operated when the cooking appliance 1 is started. For example, the connection command means (not shown) may be operated at the stage of steps SW2 to SW4 shown in FIG. 148.

When the connection between the cooking appliance 1 and the portable information terminal device 418 is established in this manner, the cooking appliance 1 and the portable information terminal device 418 continue to be able to directly communicate wirelessly with each other. If the portable information terminal device 418 moves and becomes distant from the cooking appliance 1, communication may become temporarily impossible, but if the portable information terminal device 418 returns to a communication range (distance), the connection will automatically be restored.

In addition, when a connection is established between the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal device 418, if the heating cooker 1 starts cooking process 1 or the preheating process and the mutual wireless communication state between the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal device 418 is interrupted for a certain period of time or longer, an alarm is issued on both the heating cooker 1 side and the portable information terminal device 418 side.
After this warning, the cooking device 1 is automatically held in a state in which the heating power value at that time is lowered by one or two steps.
To release this hold state, a specific input key on the input operation unit 40 of the cooking appliance 1 may be touched (the input key 47 described in FIG. 19 may be touched). This allows the integrated control device MC of the cooking appliance 1 to confirm the presence of the user.

In addition, this cooking device 1 does not automatically cut off the connection established with the portable information terminal device 418 even if the user stops the heating operation during the preheating process, cooking process 1, or cooking process 2.

In addition, even during the transition period TR, the cooking appliance 1 does not automatically disconnect the connection established with the portable information terminal device 418.

When the cooking appliance 1 turns off the main power switch 97, the connection established with the portable information terminal 418 is automatically cut off. If the cooking appliance 1 is subsequently turned on by closing the main power switch 97 again, and the cooking appliance 1 is started, if it is desired to reconnect with the portable information terminal 418, it is necessary to carry out the prescribed operation again. For example, as described above, the input key 47 may be pressed during standby (before the heating start operation begins).

According to this modified example, the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 is transmitted to the portable information terminal device 418 at any time (in real time), so even if the user temporarily leaves the cooking appliance 1 and moves around the kitchen KT or temporarily moves to another living space, as long as the user has the portable information terminal device 418 with them, they can know the latest cooking status.

If the portable information terminal 418 is provided with a function that can transmit the minimum remote control signals necessary to ensure safety, such as commands to stop heating or reduce the heat, it will be possible for the user to stop the operation of the cooking device 1 or reduce the heat to the minimum without going through the external wide area communication network (Internet) 416, even if the user is in a remote location.

It is assumed that the wide area communication network 416 may experience temporary communication failures for some reason. In contrast, in this modified example, the wide area communication network 416 is not interposed between the cooking appliance 1 and the portable information terminal device 418, so reliable information exchange can be expected.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 152(A), which is an improvement of the collaborative cooking menu display screen 480 described in Fig. 158(A).
For example, when the user touches the collaborative cooking menu display section (selection section) 500C to select "fried chicken", the display color changes as shown in FIG. 162(A), and the text is inverted to white, for example.

Display screen 480 in Fig. 162(A) displays a key display section (icon) 524 for a search request to obtain inventory information for refrigerator 401. When key display section 524 is touched, the display screen transitions to the display screen in Fig. 152(B).

In the display screen 480 of FIG. 162(B), the display unit 525 simply displays whether there are any ingredients for the cooking menu that can be eaten together with the "fried chicken." 526 is a key display unit (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 of FIG. 162(A).

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 163(A), which is an improvement of the RG control menu display screen 480 described in Fig. 156(A).
For example, when the RG control menu selection section (icon) 500 for selecting "warm" is touched, the display color changes, for example, to white characters, as shown in FIG. 163(A).

Display screen 480 in FIG. 163(A) displays a key display section (icon) 527 for the search request. When this key display section 527 is touched, the display screen transitions to that in FIG. 163(B).

In the next display screen 480 in FIG. 163(B), the display unit 528 simply displays whether there are ingredients for the cooking menu that are suitable for "warming." 529 is a key display unit (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 in FIG. 163(A).

Note that the purpose of use of ingredient information in the coordinated cooking mode, which obtains inventory information to make effective use of the heating chamber 113 after its use (occupation) in cooking process 1 has finished, is different from that of ingredient information when the RG control menu is selected as shown in FIG. 163. When searching when the RG control menu is selected, the condition "Are there ingredients for a cooking menu to be eaten with the hamburger steak?", which was one of the search conditions during coordinated cooking, is not necessary, so more ingredient information is extracted from the search results.

Therefore, it is possible to set conditions in advance for ingredients that can be effectively thawed using the RG control menu's features, such as microwave heating and the radiant heat of the oven heating source 188 at the same time (compared to microwave heating alone), and for ingredients that can be thawed quickly and deliciously, and to check the inventory of the refrigerator 401 under those conditions.

As shown in FIG. 161, the power control unit (HEMS) 448, the temperature monitoring device 440, and the alarm device 441 are connected to the router 530 via a wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) as described above.

The refrigerator 401 and the portable information terminal 418 may be modified to communicate with each other, as with the cooking appliance 1. In this way, the portable information terminal 418 can obtain inventory information directly from the refrigerator 401, and extract and provide cooking menus that are useful to the cooking appliance 1. Even in this case, the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 may be transmitted to the external server 417, and the external server 417 may analyze the inventory information using its specialized information processing capabilities. The portable information terminal 418 may then obtain information on cooking menus that are useful to the cooking appliance 1 from the external server 417, and provide the information to the cooking appliance 1.

In this modified example, if a user holding the portable information terminal device 418 is far away from the cooking appliance 1, they will be unable to communicate with the cooking appliance 1. If they wish to exchange information with the cooking appliance 1 from a remote location, they will connect to an access point of the wide area communication network 416.

Embodiment 8.
Fig. 164 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the cooking device disclosed in the eighth embodiment, and shows the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking steps, etc., in chronological order from the selection to the transition of the cooperative cooking mode. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configuration of the first embodiment described in Figs. 1 to 115 are given the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 of this embodiment 8 has a function of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4. This coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 is characterized in that the preheating process is performed in the heating chamber 113, cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, and cooking process 2 is performed in the left heating section 17HL.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, and 43MS is pressed to select one of the cooking menus in the linked cooking mode KM3, the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 can be selected.

From the moment input key 43MC is pressed, the oven heating source 189 of the heating chamber 113 starts heating at a specified power, and the ambient temperature of the heating chamber 113 is raised. Note that it takes several minutes or more to raise the temperature to the desired preheat temperature (at this stage, the heating and cooking period P2 begins).

On the other hand, from the time the input key 43MS is pressed, the left heating unit 17HL, which is determined by the control program (for the linked preheating cooking mode KM4) to be used in cooking step 2, is occupied, and the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are disabled. In FIG. 164, the input keys are shown in a dashed frame to indicate this disabling.

The ambient temperature of the heating chamber 113 is detected by the temperature sensor TS10 and the infrared temperature sensor 160. When the integrated control device MC determines that the temperature has reached a predetermined preheating completion temperature, the user is notified (by the voice synthesizer 95) that preheating in the heating chamber 113 has been completed.

At this stage, the user opens the door 114 and places the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 .
When the door 114 is opened, the command to "start cooking" by the input key 43MS is cancelled. Therefore, after the door 114 is closed, the input key 43MS is pressed again (at this stage, cooking period P3 starts. In other words, cooking step 1 starts in the heating chamber 113).

In the cooking step 1, microwave irradiation may be performed by a microwave heating source 189, or cooking step 1 may be completed using only an oven heating source 188.
In addition, when it is necessary to raise the temperature inside and outside of the food to be cooked in as short a time as possible, it is also beneficial to use microwave heating and heating by radiant heat from the oven heating source 189 in combination.

The cooking step 1 may be performed by the user setting the heating and cooking time, as in timer cooking, or a default value (time) may be determined in advance depending on the cooking menu. Furthermore, the user may terminate the process at any time.

The example in Figure 164 shows a case where the user terminates the process at any time. Pressing input key 43MT immediately terminates cooking process 1. From this point on, the heating pause period P4 (transition period TR) begins.

On the other hand, when the heating pause period P4 begins, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are restored (the input signal from the left operation unit 40L is treated as a valid signal in the integrated control device MC).

Therefore, even if the heating pause period P4 has begun, pressing input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L will select the left heating unit 17HL, and operating input keys 43L1, 44L, etc. will allow cooking in single cooking mode KM1 (using induction heating source 9) to begin in the left heating unit 17HL.

During the heating pause period P4, as shown in FIG. 164, the input function of the input key 43MC for selecting the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is disabled.

Meanwhile, during the heating pause period P4, the input functions of all input keys, such as the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the single cooking mode KM1, and the input key 43M2 for selecting the control conditions, are enabled so that cooking other than the coordinated cooking mode KM3 can be started anew (each input key is indicated by a solid line frame). Also, the input function of the input key 43MT is kept enabled in consideration of the possibility of canceling the coordinated pre-heat cooking mode KM4 at this stage.

FIG. 164 shows an example in which no cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 after cooking step 1.
On the other hand, during heating pause period P4 (transition period TR), the user moves the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 to above the left heating section 17HL.

During the heating pause period P4 (transition period TR), when the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, etc. are operated, induction heating in the left heating unit 17HL is started and the cooking process 2 is started.
Then, when the input key 43L1 is pressed again, cooking process 2 ends immediately, and at this point the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) is released.

It is also possible to control the linked cooking mode KM3 so that it is not automatically cancelled when cooking step 2 is completed. If the start switch (input key 43L1) of the left operation unit 17HL is pressed within a certain period of time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after completing cooking step 2, a message is displayed indicating that the mode will be treated as part of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4, and the process may wait for additional input from the user (operation input for setting heat and time, such as input keys 43L2 and 43L3).

In this way, after completing cooking step 2, the user can check the doneness of the food on the left heating section 17HL, and if it is not heated enough, immediately touch the input key to add additional heating. This method also improves usability for the user.

In FIG. 164, the input function of the input keys (43L1, etc.) of the left operation unit 40L is disabled from the time the input key 43MS is pressed in order to occupy the left heating unit 17HL, which is determined by the control program (of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4) to be used in cooking step 2. However, this disabling may be delayed until just before the start of the heating cooking period P3 or the heating pause period P4. This is because, depending on the target preheating temperature, the time of the preheating step P2 may be long, and it is anticipated that there may be cases in which it would be inconvenient if the left operation unit 17HL could not be used during that period.

The cooking device 1 according to the eighth embodiment is
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key (start unit) 43MS for switching to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and an end input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is started by the start input key (start section) 43MS.
The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is terminated by the termination input key (termination section) 43MT.

As a result, the start and end of the heating operation for cooking process 2 can be performed centrally at the central operation unit 40M, so the user can start and end cooking process 2 by operating the central operation unit 40M. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the eighth embodiment has
The second heating means HM2 has a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188),
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a composite cooking mode KM2 that drives the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means HM2 in combination,
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key 43MS for switching to the operation of the composite cooking mode KM2 and an end input key 43MT for canceling the operation of the composite cooking mode,
The heating operation of the composite cooking mode KM2 is started by the start input key (start section) 43MS.
The heating operation of the composite cooking mode KM2 is terminated by the termination input key (termination section) 43MT.
The start input key (start portion) 43MS and the end input key (end portion) 43MT are used in common to instruct the start and end of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode.

That is, in the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, if the end input key (cancel unit) 43MT is operated once, the cooking step 2 is ended, and if it is pressed twice, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 is cancelled.

Therefore, the heating operation in the composite cooking mode KM2 can be started and ended centrally at the central operation unit 40M.
Furthermore, depending on the number of times the end input key (end section) 43MT is operated, the cooking process 2 can be ended or the operation of the combined cooking mode KM2 can be cancelled.
This makes it possible to provide a cooking device with good operability by utilizing one input key (end portion) 43MT.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the eighth embodiment has
The central operation unit 40M has an input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
When the end input key (end section) 43MT is operated in the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, the display content of the integrated display section 30 is automatically changed from the first specific screen 30SP to a standby initial screen (see FIG. 52).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 having the above structure.

As a result, when heating in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is canceled on the central operation unit 40M, the initial standby screen is automatically displayed, preventing the user from misunderstanding or operating incorrectly and providing a cooking device with good operability.

Summary of embodiment 8.
As is clear from the above description, in this eighth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the tenth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N on a top plate 15;
A second heating means (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked contained inside the heating chamber 113;
An information providing means AN (including an integrated display unit 30, a voice synthesizer 95, etc.) for providing information on cooking;
An integrated control device MC for controlling a heating operation;
An input means (input operation unit) 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated preheating cooking mode KM4 having a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2, a cooking step 1 of heating the food to be cooked using the second heating means HM2 after the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of further heating the food to be cooked in the cooking step 1 by heating the food to be cooked N using the first heating means HM1 after the cooking step 1.
The cooking device 1 is characterized by the above.

This configuration allows the coordinated cooking mode to be performed using two or more locations, and the preheating process can also be performed using the heating chamber 113. This provides a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in this eighth embodiment, the cooking device 1 as follows has been disclosed.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 inside the main body, the front opening of which is closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating objects placed above heating portions arranged at least at two positions on the left and right of the top plate 15;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber;
A notification unit AN that notifies information about a cooking process;
A control unit MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit;
An input operation unit 40 for inputting a command signal to the control unit MC,
The input operation unit includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means,
The control unit MC has a function of executing a coordinated cooking mode KM3 (coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4) that coordinates the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a program for sequentially executing a first cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means HM1,
The control unit MC is
(1) When a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected on the central operation unit 40M, the operation pattern of the cooperative cooking mode is switched to;
(2) The heating operation of the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started and ended in response to a command from the central operation unit 40M.
(3) During the period from the start to the end of the cooking process 1, a part or all of the input functions of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R of the first heating means HM1 are disabled,
(4) When the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R is restored, and the start and end of the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is performed according to a command from the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R.
The present invention discloses a combined heating and cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the cooperative cooking mode to be carried out using two or more locations, and also allows the preheating step to be carried out using the heating chamber 113 .
In addition, input functions are appropriately restricted to eliminate unnecessary input functions, thereby preventing user operation errors.
This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, as is clear from the above explanation, in this embodiment 8, the same effects as in embodiment 1 can be expected for the same configuration as in embodiment 1.

Other embodiments.
In embodiment 1, for the induction heating source 9 that is used first in the (first) coordinated control mode (see Figure 55), the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR are prohibited or restricted from operating in any mode other than the coordinated control mode by the input operation unit 40, but further induction heating units may also be included as targets.

Furthermore, in the second coordinated control mode (see FIG. 55), the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, are driven simultaneously to start the cooking process, so in this case, it is possible to prohibit or restrict the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, from operating in a cooking mode other than the coordinated cooking mode KM3. In both the first coordinated cooking mode and the second coordinated cooking mode, a wide range of cooking can be performed using multiple heating means in the coordinated cooking mode by prioritizing the securing of the heat source required for the cooking process.

In the description of embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC is configured to display, as a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode KM2 or the collaborative cooking mode KM3, a first display screen 30SP dedicated to the collaborative cooking mode KM3, or a second display screen 30SC dedicated to the composite cooking mode KM2, on the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, etc.
Instead of switching the entire screen in this manner, the basic configurations of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC may be unified and a design may be used that clearly distinguishes between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3.

For example, the first display screen 30SP may clearly indicate in text that it is displaying the coordinated cooking mode KM3, while the second display screen 30SC may clearly indicate in text that it is displaying the composite cooking mode KM2. This makes it even easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Furthermore, a light-emitting display unit such as the light-emitting display unit 27L described in embodiment 1 may be provided on each of the display units for the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, so that when either one is emitting light, it is possible to know that the cooking mode that is emitting light is being used.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, if the integrated control device MC performs a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, a configuration may be provided in which such a cooking mode display unit (light-emitting unit) is provided.

The collaborative cooking mode is not limited to being composed of two cooking steps, cooking step 1 and cooking step 2.
For example, cooking process 1 is performed using the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, cooking process 2 is performed using the microwave heating source 189, and the food to be cooked is finally returned to the top plate 15, and cooking process 3 is provided for the purpose of compensating for insufficient heating, making adjustments, adding seasonings or other cooking liquids, etc.

In one example, the final cooking process is carried out on the right heating section 17HR while being visually checked directly. In other words, the food that is almost finished in cooking step 2 is moved onto the right heating section 17HR and heated weakly for a long period of time to increase the degree of maturity of the meat, vegetables, and other ingredients, as well as the broth.

In the above explanation, the collaborative cooking mode automatically determines the heating sources to be used and their order when one cooking menu item (e.g., hamburger steak) is specified, but this can be changed to give priority to the user's wishes.

For example, the cooperative cooking modes "Cooked item X" and "Cooked item Y" are used relatively frequently by users, and cooking step 1 for both of these modes is performed using the right heating unit 17HR, so it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking using the right heating unit 17HR.

If the user subsequently selects "food Z," one of the collaborative cooking modes, and the left heating unit 17HL is selected, it is expected that the user will be confused as to how to operate it since they are not accustomed to using it.

Therefore, if the integrated control device MC determines that either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is acceptable, when the integrated cooking mode is first selected, the first specific screen 30SP may preferentially display the right heating unit 17HR, which the user is accustomed to using. In other words, for example, when selecting a heating unit, the "right heating unit" may always be displayed, and the user may then input to specify the left heating unit 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot properly heat the food due to constraints such as the heat value for cooking the food or the induction heating current control pattern, the cooking can be performed only with the heating unit specified (default setting) in the operation program on the integrated control device MC, preventing misuse or misunderstanding by the user. For example, if a heating unit with a relatively weak heat such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, when the user selects it, the cooking device 1 can notify the user and guide them to correct the situation (move the heated food, such as a pan, to another heating unit).

In the first embodiment, there were two paths: an internal path that passed through the inside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and an external path that passed through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. However, these paths may be interchanged and modified as follows.
(1) Internal path: A path that cools the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air drawn in by the third cooling fan 128 from the second air intake 152F, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and leads to the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: A path that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 using outside air drawn in by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air intake 152B, guides the cooling air to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally reaches the exhaust duct 102.

Generally, the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is structured such that multiple heat dissipation plates (heat dissipation fins) are stacked together and cooling air passes through the narrow spaces between the heat dissipation plates to exchange heat (dissipate heat), resulting in a large pressure loss of the cooling air, or in other words, a large airflow resistance.
Therefore, the cooling air that passes through heat dissipation section 122H of magnetron 122 is exhausted without entering heating chamber 113 (the length of the air path is also shortened), thereby improving the balance between the internal and external paths. This is effective when third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. In other words, as explained in the first embodiment, this is a promising idea for realizing low procurement costs during manufacturing by aligning third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129 with exactly the same structure, shape, and rated specifications.

In addition, after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 may be eliminated, and the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 may be discharged directly to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 via the duct 307, simplifying the cooling air path inside the lower unit 200. By reducing the air path resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has the advantage of being more cost-effective.

In the case of a user who does not require both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in the first to eighth embodiments, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are sold separately and installed separately on the kitchen furniture 2. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, convenience at the time of sale can be maintained by setting a separate packaging form for the set sale of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and a separate packaging form for the sale of only the upper unit 100.

As shown in the first to eighth embodiments, the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 to be configured as separate housings. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured as a single housing (main body case HC) from the beginning.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are formed from thin metal plates. However, either the upper case 16 or the lower case 101, or both, may be formed from a plastic material. For example, they may be formed from a thermoplastic plastic material. Examples of materials include PET, PA, PP, or ABS. "PET" stands for polyethylene terephthalate. "PA" stands for polyamide, and "PP" stands for polypropylene. The materials can be determined taking into consideration the heat resistance temperature and durability as a structure. Also, only a portion of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be formed from plastic, with the remaining portions formed from metal plates.

The induction heating circuit may use various drive methods, such as a half-bridge circuit or a full-bridge circuit, depending on the shape and number of IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, a full-bridge circuit is proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 617h23.

In addition, the IH coil is not limited to a doughnut-shaped configuration, and may be an induction heating unit that includes a circular main heating coil and flat first and second sub-heating coils that are arranged close to both sides of the main heating coil and have a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil, as shown in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5538546.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when starting induction heating, the induction heating operation starts under default conditions (heating power value or heating power level) without the need to set the heating power, and then the user decides the desired heating power. However, other methods are also possible.
For example, an operating method may be adopted in which, after turning on the main power, the desired induction heating source and the heat value (watts) or heat level (one of a range of heat levels such as "high" to "low") are always determined, and then a start command is issued using a specified input key, etc., and such a method does not affect the effects and essential effects of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, there are two lower air passages during microwave heating: an air passage (internal path) for the cooling air that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and an air passage (external path) for the cooling air that cools the inverter circuit board 121. These two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then discharged to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 via a common exhaust port 20.

However, it is not necessary to route the exhaust air through one (common) exhaust duct, nor is it necessary to collect the exhaust air at one exhaust port 20. For example, a second exhaust port separate from the exhaust port 20 may be provided at a different position (directly below the exhaust cover 19), and the cooling air from either the internal or external route may be exhausted from the second exhaust port. In particular, in the embodiment in which the rear of the upper unit 100 is divided into front and rear by the partition plate 52 (embodiment 1), it is preferable to have the exhaust port face the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52.

In the first embodiment, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is located on the input operation unit 40 (including the operation key 98) exposed on the top surface of the main body case HC, and is operated from above the main body case HC. Note that the operation key 98 is sometimes called an operation button, but it is basically the same structure.

However, the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to such a form of the input operation unit 40. For example, the input operation unit 40 does not need to be constantly exposed when viewed from above the main body case HC, and may be stored inside the main body case HC when not in use. Known storage forms include a type that moves horizontally like a drawer and a type that rotates around a single fulcrum.

The method of storing by rotating is called the operating part of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-28569, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-3845, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 3-2h26. The main power switch 97 may also be a seesaw-type switch, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-3845.

Even though the input operation unit 40 is stored by rotating in this manner, it can be operated from above (the direction of) the main body case HC during use. In other words, the user can turn on the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 while standing near the front of the cooking appliance 1, so there is no problem in realizing the cooking appliance 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the user is not forced into an awkward posture, and operability is good.
The input operation unit 40 that rotates and is stored in this manner may be provided, for example, on the right-side front cover 112 described in the first embodiment.

For example, JP 2017-172941 A proposes a cooking device that has a heating section (such as a gas burner) exposed on the top plate and a heating section in the heating chamber (grill compartment), and employs a kangaroo pocket mechanism for the operation section, which rotates and stores the operation section.

In the first to eighth embodiments, a magnetron is used as the microwave generating source 122, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a cooking device using a semiconductor oscillator is proposed in JP-A-2019-509587 and JP-A-51-9562.

In JP2019-509587A, the microwave generator includes a small signal generator (one or more) configured to generate a high frequency signal at a first power level, and a solid-state high frequency signal amplifier (solid-state amplifier, one or more) that amplifies the high frequency signal from the small signal generator. The solid-state amplifier amplifies a first high frequency signal having a first low power level to a second high frequency signal having a second high power level, and supplies the second high frequency signal to a heating chamber containing an object to be cooked (food).
When realizing the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generating source configured with such a semiconductor element may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that the operation of the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128, 129 is performed independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100. In other words, when the induction heating source 9 is used, it has been explained that the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128, 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated, but this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128, 129 are not operated at the same time.

For example, as explained in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup before selecting the heat source to be used (see step ST2 in FIG. 38), all cooling fans may be test-run for a short period of time, and the integrated control device MC may check whether abnormal currents, voltages, etc. are occurring in the circuit. In this case, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 may be started all at once for a certain short period of time, or they may be started one by one for a short period of time. Doing so does not in any way impair the essential effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, the user needs to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 68, step STR5). That is, first, the user selects either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL by using the input key 43M2.
However, in the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, such a heating unit selection step is not necessarily required.

For example, Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852 state:
The heating device includes a plurality of heating coils regularly arranged adjacent to each other below a top plate on which an object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the heating coils, a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether an object to be heated is placed directly above the heating coils, an input operation unit provided on an upper surface of the main body, and a control device,
The control device displays a number of icons corresponding to the objects to be heated in a display area of the display screen based on a result of the object to be heated placement determination unit determining that the object to be heated is placed on the heating coil,
The control device discloses an induction heating cooker that operates to input heating and cooking conditions for a first heated object by detecting that a user has touched a first icon corresponding to the first heated object.

In addition, Japanese Patent No. 5202064 states:
The heating device comprises a top plate on which an object to be heated, such as a pan, is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils distributed under the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, a band-shaped operation and display means continuously arranged in a predetermined area near the top plate, and a control means,
An induction heating cooker is disclosed in which the control means identifies the occupied area on the top plate of the heated object based on the output of the sensor, further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the identified occupied area and its surrounding area to identify the area of the heated object, estimates the center position and size of the identified occupied area, and displays the operation means in a specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result, enabling the operation means and making it accessible by external operation.

In other words, rather than cooking by placing a heated object such as a pot in a specific position on the top plate, a technology has been proposed that allows the heated object to be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate, with the control device detecting the position of the heated part and allowing cooking to begin.

The above-mentioned technology can also be applied to the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure. In other words, it is no longer necessary to display the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L, which indicates that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side, on the first specific screen 30SP as described in the first embodiment.

In addition, there is no longer any need to first select either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL using the input key 43M2, further improving usability.

In addition, in the cooking appliances 1 of the first to sixth embodiments, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4, etc., in order to provide multiple functions. Therefore, there is a concern that a user who is not accustomed to the operation may not be able to easily perform a desired operation.
Therefore, for users who do not want to use all the functions from the beginning, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the input keys themselves is turned off and the input functions of the input keys are disabled when a specific switch is operated, thereby creating a visual effect of reducing the number of input operation units 40. Note that a cooking device that limits the functions that can be used according to such user wishes has already been proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771.

It is also possible to set either the linked cooking mode or the combined cooking mode so that it cannot be used by user operation. In that case, the setting may be made using the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment, or an input key or push button switch or the like may be provided that allows the user to limit and expand functions simply by touching it.

Of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being performed automatically can also be performed manually. Also, all or part of the processes described as being performed manually can be performed automatically using a known method.

In the first to eighth embodiments, there are two induction heating sections 17H, a left heating section 17HL and a right heating section 17HR, and the inverter circuits 81L, 81R are arranged corresponding to each of the two heating sections, but this may be changed to the following form.
(1) When a large object to be heated is placed over two adjacent heating sections, the induction coils of the two adjacent heating sections are driven in a coordinated manner (see Japanese Patent No. 5,188,215 for a typical example).

(2) A system that includes four induction coils of approximately the same shape and size, wound in the same direction, and arranged in close proximity to each other on approximately the same plane below the top plate 15, and two inverter circuits that supply power to the four induction coils, in which the four induction coils are divided into two coil groups, and power is supplied to each of the two induction coil groups from the two inverter circuits (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5299590 as a representative example).

(3) A system having a circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged under the top plate 15 and (multiple) auxiliary IH coils arranged to surround the circular IH coil, a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil, and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coils (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5257542 as a representative example).

(4) A heating device comprising: a main IH coil for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate; a sub-IH coil group consisting of a plurality of sub-IH coils each installed adjacent to the outside of the main IH coil; a main inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the main IH coil; a sub-inverter circuit group for independently supplying high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils in the sub-IH coil group; a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether the same object to be heated is placed on at least one of the main IH coil and the plurality of sub-IH coils; and a current control circuit for controlling the output of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group, wherein the sub-IH coil is A plurality of sub-IH coils are provided around the main IH coil with a predetermined insulating space between them, and the outer diameter shape of the sub-IH coil is such that the side edge adjacent to the outer periphery of the main IH coil is curved along the outer periphery of the main IH coil, and the current control circuit controls the output of the main inverter circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuits to a predetermined distribution so that the heating power value set by the user is achieved, and then when the number of sub-IH coils performing the cooperative heating operation increases or decreases, or is switched to another sub-IH coil, the output distribution before the change is maintained (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5642168 as a representative example).

The circuits, parts, and components of the devices shown in the figures are conceptual and functional, and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown. Furthermore, the integrated control device MC, microwave heating control device 130, heating chamber control device 159, display drive circuit 63, and control device 105 described in particular in Figures 30 and 123 allow the functions of these devices and circuits to be distributed and integrated, and the specific form is not limited to that shown, and all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating conditions, etc.

The functions of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 are realized by processing circuits. The processing circuits that realize the functions may be dedicated hardware or may be processors that execute programs stored in memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device MM, which is memory. The processor realizes each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90. The memory device MM is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM, etc.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs of the memory device MM and memory device 90R shown in FIG. 30 may not be stored in the cooking appliance 1 but in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooking appliance 1 obtains the necessary data and program information by accessing the external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operating programs of the integrated control device MC, microwave heating control unit 130, heating chamber control unit 159, and display unit drive circuit 63 described in particular in FIG. 30 may be updated to appropriately improved versions at the request of the user or the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. In this case, for example, a correction program may be obtained via the wireless communication unit 49.

One of the heating parts 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9 (first heating means HM1) for cooking on the top plate 15 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, a gas flow valve is configured to be controlled by the control unit.
Also, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, or the oven heating source 188 may be replaced with a gas-fired burner.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R have all been described as "contact input" operation units in which the user touches input keys to give input commands, but a non-contact method in which input is performed by detecting the movement of the user's fingers or hands in a non-contact manner may also be used. Furthermore, the input method may be changed to a voice input method in which the user's voice is recognized and input (see embodiment 6). In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and voice receiving unit for receiving the user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal corresponds to the input operation unit.

In the first to third and fifth to seventh embodiments, the input operation unit 40 was used as the means for selecting the various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP and the third specific screen 30ST, but the means may be provided within the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 30L and 30R, which are display means.

For example, the aforementioned Patent Publication No. 5833699, which proposes a technique for composite cooking, proposes a technique in which a composite cooking display screen is displayed, the names of the composite cooking menus are displayed on the display screen, and the user selects a menu by touching the menu selection section directly with their finger.

Therefore, the menu of dishes possible in the composite cooking or collaborative cooking mode, the names of the foods to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. may be displayed on the first specific screen 30SC or the second specific screen 30SP, and the user may directly touch the display portion (also called the "icon" portion) with their finger to select the menu of the collaborative cooking mode, etc.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives command signals transmitted from outside the cooking appliance 1, and the cooking appliance 1 transmits each operation signal and command signal L1 to L10 to the outside, but it may also transmit information indicating the progress of cooking step 1, cooking step 2, such as the start and end of cooking step 2. The user can know this progress information on the portable terminal device 418, etc., improving convenience.

In addition, in the first embodiment, command signals, operation signals, etc. are sent and received between the home gateway 411 inside the house HA by the wireless communication unit 49, but power line carrier technology (also called "PLC technology") may also be used.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the home gateway 411 having a function of receiving search result data of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is used as the information management device, but the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 may each be connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 and connected to an external server 417 via the Internet 416. In that case, the external server 417 may store and hold the inventory information of the refrigerator 401.

Furthermore, the external server 417 stores recipe information for various cooking methods that can be used with the cooking appliance 1. The system may then be configured to search for recipe information in response to a request from the cooking appliance 1 or the information and communication terminal device 418, and provide the extracted recipe information to the cooking appliance 1 or the information and communication terminal device 418.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The cooking device disclosed herein can be widely used not only in the kitchens of ordinary homes, but also in kitchens in public facilities, stores, etc.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Cooking appliance 2 Kitchen furniture 2A Installation opening 2B Front opening 2G Step 2P Upper surface of rim 2S Right side 3 Surface material 4 Surface material 5 Surface material 6 Surface material 7 Frame line 8 Wall 9 Induction heating source 10 Main body of upper unit 11 Partition member (partition wall)
12 Partition plate 13 Partition plate 14 Partition wall 15 Top plate 16 Upper case (upper housing)
16A Flange 16B Rear vertical wall 16BL Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX Horizontal bent portion 16F Front vertical wall 16L Side vertical wall 16R Side vertical wall 16S Bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C Coil base (coil support frame)
17CH Arm 17CL Coil wire 17H Induction heating section 17HL Left heating section (second heating section)
17HM Center heating section 17HR Right heating section (first heating section)
17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 Opening 19 Exhaust cover 20 Exhaust port 21 Decorative frame 22 Reinforcement plate 23 Right-side input control device 24 Left-side input control device 25 Decorative frame 26 Cushioning material 27 Light-emitting display section 27L Light-emitting display section 27M Light-emitting display section 27R Light-emitting display section 27L1 to 27L4 Individual light-emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 Individual light-emitting sections 27R1 to 27R5 Individual light-emitting sections 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display section (central display section)
30A Display text 30AD Additional screen 30B Display text 30C Two-dimensional information 30D Display screen 30E Caution display 30F Explanation text 30G Caution text 30H Recommendation text 30J Specific text 30K Heating source display section 30L First area 30M Second area 30MY Microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Heating time information for grill cooking 30P Guidance information 30P1 Guidance information 30Q Text information (additional information)
30R Third area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Information indicating output level 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display section 31L Left side display section 31LW Display window 31R Right side display section 31RW Display window 32 Central operation board 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 Rectifier circuit 36 Power supply circuit B
37L Drive circuit 37R Drive circuit 38 Exhaust window 39A Signal line 39B Signal line 40 Input operation unit 40L Left operation unit (second individual operation unit)
40M Central operation unit 40VR Audio signal receiving unit 40VS Audio signal analyzing unit 40R Right operation unit (first individual operation unit)
41 Operation board 41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input key 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key (guide key)
43KP Input key 43L1-43L4 Input key 43M1-43R3 Input key 43MC Input key 43MS Input key 43MT Input key 43R1-43R4 Input key 43MX Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 Holder 51 Screw 52 Partition plate 52A Exhaust window 52B Exhaust window 53L Exhaust port plate 53R Exhaust port plate 54 Filter circuit board 55 Power supply circuit board 56 Choke coil 57 Transformer 58 Capacitor 59 Diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 First cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A Air outlet 60C Fan case 60F Rotor 60FL Cooling air 60H Intake port 60M Motor 60P Drive circuit 60T Rotor shaft 61 Second cooling fan 61A Air outlet 61C Fan case 61F Rotor 61M Motor 61P Drive circuit 62 Cooling fan drive circuit 63 Display drive circuit 63CS Display command unit (for second specific screen)
63SP Display command unit (for 1st specific screen)
63ST Display command unit (for 3rd specific screen)
64 Vent hole 64S Auxiliary vent hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Antimagnetic ring 67L Heat power display section 67H Keep warm display section 67R Heat power display section 68 Heat source display section 68L Display section 68M Display section 68R Display section 69 High temperature warning section 70 Cover 70A Front cutout section 70B Hanging wall 70E Extension section 71 Support plate 72 Power control section (demand control section)
73 Signal transmission section 74 Drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 Resonant capacitor 76m Resonant capacitor 77a Input current detection section 77am Input current detection section 77b Output current detection section 77bm Output current detection section 78a Diode bridge 78am Diode bridge 78b Reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing capacitor 78cm Smoothing capacitor 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBT
79bm IGBT
79c Diode 79cm Diode 79d Diode 79dm Diode 80 Inverter circuit board 80F First inverter circuit board 80M Second inverter circuit board 81 Inverter circuit 81L Inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M Inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R Inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 Heat sink 82B Heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 Heat sink (rear first heat sink)
82B2 Heat sink (rear second heat sink)
82F Heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 Heat sink (front first heat sink)
82F2 Heat sink (front second heat sink)
82FN Heat dissipation fin 82M Heat sink 82MF Heat dissipation fin 82MF1 Heat dissipation fin 82MF2 Heat dissipation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensor 85 Electrical component 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Ventilation hole 87B Drainage hole 88 Inner case 88A Ventilation hole 88B Hole 89 Insertion hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Storage device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power supply conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit 94L Induction heating circuit 94R Induction heating circuit 95 Voice synthesis device 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Operation button or operation key of main power switch 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 Upper unit 101 Lower case (lower housing)
101A Flange 101B Rear wall (rear vertical wall)
101C Inclined portion 101F Front plate 101H Body portion 101U Bottom plate 101L Side vertical wall 101R Side vertical wall 101T Front horizontal wall 102 Exhaust duct 102A Internal passage 102B Internal passage 102E End portion 104 Cavity 105 Control device 106 Power cord 106A Plug 108A Connection port (connection terminal)
108B Connection port (connection terminal)
109A Output terminal section 109B Output terminal section 109C Output terminal section 110 Main body 111 Inclined section 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Rear wall (rear wall surface)
113T: recess 114: door 115: handle 117: through hole (guide hole)
118 Connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A Electric wire 119B Electric wire 120 Microwave heating device 120P Power supply circuit section 121 Inverter circuit board 121A Inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 Magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillator 122H Heat Dissipation Section 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna Case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna Drive Motor 126A Rotating Shaft 127 Power Supply Circuit Board 128 Third Cooling Fan (Lower Cooling Fan) (Cooling Fan A)
129 Fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 Microwave heating control unit 131 Door open/close detection mechanism 132A Latch switch 132B Door switch 133 Monitor switch 134 Pin 135 Pin 136A Interlocking rod 136B Interlocking rod 137 Support plate 138A Communication port 138B Communication port 139 Closure detection unit 140 Oven heating device 141 Space (ceiling space)
142 Space (side space)
145 Tray 150 Case A
151 Case B
152B Air intake (second air intake)
152F Intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A Lid 154B Body 158 Non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit)
159 Heating chamber control unit 160 Temperature sensor 161 Detection window 162 Cooking dish 163 Heater 163A Upper heater 163B Lower heater 164 Vent (first air intake)
165 Recess (intake duct)
166L Left side partition plate 166R Right side partition plate 167 Upper heat shield plate 168 Lower heat shield plate 169 Upper case 170 Lower case 171 Partition plate 172 Passage 173 Communication port 174 Communication port 176 Hinge 178A Relay 178B Relay 180 Power supply port 181 Cover 182 Relay 184 Sealing material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 Microwave heating source 190 Frame 191 Cover 192 Inner frame 192W Viewport (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Air direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Inlet 226 Leg 264 Ventilation hole 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right gap (third gap)
301L Left gap (third gap)
302 Front gap (third gap)
303 gap 304 support metal fitting 304V vertical portion 304H horizontal portion (flange portion)
305 Vent hole 306 Communication window 307 Exhaust duct 308 Vertical portion 309 Communication window 310 Spacer (cushion material)
311 Lower gap (third gap)
320 Exhaust port 326 Cushioning material 330 Identification information 331 Additional information 332 Cooking process information (display section of cooking process)
333 Time-saving information 334 Refrigerator display 335D Symbol 335U Symbol 337 Display guide 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual ingredient information 340 Function setting title display section 341 Explanation display 342L Linked cooking mode selection section 342M Combined (RG) cooking mode selection section 342R Previous cooking selection section 360 Icon 361 Menu display section 362 Linked cooking mode display information 373 Signal line 400 Home appliance 401 Refrigerator 402 Television receiver 403 Air conditioner 404 Air purifier 405 Ventilator 406 Electric rice cooker (electric rice cooker)
408 Microwave oven 409 Lighting equipment 410 Kitchen 411 Home gateway 412 Main body case 413 Environment detection unit 413A Sensor unit 413H Human detection unit 414 Power meter 415 Power line (main line)
416 Wide area communication circuit network 417 External server 418 Information and communication terminal device 419 Wireless router 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Intake port 426 Electric fan 429 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 Intake port 433 Air outlet 434 Odor sensor 435 Communication unit 436 Vertical wall surface 440 Temperature monitoring device 441 Temperature detection unit 442 Communication unit 443 Temperature determination circuit 444 Light receiving unit 445 Alarm device 446 Communication unit (transmitter/receiver)
447 Central control unit 448 Power amount control unit 449 Input unit 450 Storage device 451 Schedule management unit 452 Human detection sensor 453 Environmental sensor 460 Transmitter and receiver 461 Communication control unit 462 Central processing unit (CPU)
463 ROM and RAM
464 Speaker 465 Operation unit 466 Display unit 467 Storage unit 468 Cooking device database (storage unit)
469 Posture detection unit 470 Remote operation information generation unit 471 Display operation unit 472 NFC input/output unit 473 Remote operation data 475 Voice input unit 480 Display screen 481 Display menu display unit 482 Left heating unit menu selection display unit 483 Heating source selection display unit 484 Range grill control menu selection display unit 485 Collaborative cooking menu display unit 486 Preparation information display unit 487 Collaborative cooking menu name display unit 488 Left heating unit control menu display unit (icon)
489 Left heating section control menu display section (icon)
490 Warning information display section 491M Central operation section selection section (icon)
491L Left operation section selection section (icon)
491R Right operation section selection section (icon)
492 Advice display selection section (icon)
493 Left heating section control menu display section (icon)
494 Range grill control menu display (icon)
495 Menu screen display section (icon)
496 Input confirmation key display section (icon)
497 Induction Heating Source Selection Section (icon)
498 Range grill heat source selection section (icon)
499 Collaborative cooking selection section (icon)
500 RG control menu selection section (icon)
500C Collaborative cooking menu selection section (icon)
501 Screen switching mark (icon)
502 Screen switching mark (icon)
503 Screen switching mark (icon)
504 RG control menu name display section (icon)
505 RG control menu temperature display (icon)
506 Reference image display section 507A to 507C Auxiliary information display section 509 Preparation work reference image 510 Preparation work reference image 511 Caution information 512 Auxiliary information 513 Process information display section 514 Next process information display section 515 Recommended menu display section 516 Recommended menu display section 517 Auxiliary information for recommended menu 518 Cooking reference image for recommended menu 519 Candidate switching mark (icon)
520 Candidate switching mark (icon)
521 Send key display section (icon)
522 Stop key display section (icon)
523 Detail display indicator (icon)
524 Key display section (icon)
525 Display section 526 Key display section (icon)
527 Key display section 528 Display section 529 Key display section (icon)
530 Router 550 Function setting section 551 Function setting data storage section AH Upper air passage AL Exposed range of top plate AN Notification section BL Straight line (reference line)
BH Depth dimension BT1 Dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Maximum dimension of upper case in front-to-back direction D6 Maximum width dimension in front-to-back direction D7 Distance between opposing sides DP1 Depth (dimension)
EM Abnormality detection unit F1 First air duct F2 Second air duct FA1 to FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI Inlet FL1 Air outlet line FL2 Air outlet line FO Outlet GD1 Step GP1 Gap GP2 Gap (first gap)
GP5L gap GP5R gap GP6 gap GP7 gap GP8 gap GP9 gap GP10 gap GP11 gap GP12 gap (second gap)
GP13 Distance between the top plate and the cover GP14 Gap with the first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Gap GP18 Gap HC Main body case H1 Maximum height dimension H2 Height dimension H3 Height dimension H4 Height dimension H5 Height dimension H6 Height dimension H7 Height dimension H8 Height dimension HA House HB Reference bottom surface HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 Input information IP3 Selection value signal IP4 Selection value signal IP5 Image signal JC Human detection sensor LA Protrusion dimension LD1 Distance LD2 Distance LF Exhaust port dimension MC Integrated control device MM Memory device MM1 to MM3 Memory section MNP Search section N Heated object QC Seismic sensor RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling air RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air duct W1 Width dimension of installation port W2 Maximum width dimension of installation space W3 Maximum width dimension of cooking appliance W4 Maximum dimension in left-right direction W5 Maximum width dimension in left-right direction of upper case W6 Length of inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum left-right (width) dimension inside the upper case W9: Distance between opposing hanging walls 70B (dimension of space in the front-rear direction)
W10 Distance W11 Diameter W12 Distance W13 Distance W14 Installation interval WB Depth dimension WH Inside width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB Intersection XF Intersection XG Intersection.

Claims (13)

A heating chamber;
A display means;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
A second heating means for heating the food in the heating chamber;
An input means;
a control unit that receives a command from the input unit and controls the first heating unit and the second heating unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone, and an integrated cooking mode in which a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means are combined,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a first cooperative cooking mode in which cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means, and a second cooperative cooking mode in which cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means,
When a main power source is turned on, the control unit automatically displays an initial standby screen on the display means, and during a period in which the initial standby screen is displayed,
(1) when a first command is received from the input means, identification information of at least one food item that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display means;
(2) when a second command is received from the input means, information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode is displayed on the display means ;
The control unit automatically selects either the first collaborative cooking mode or the second collaborative cooking mode based on the identification information.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. When the control unit receives the first command, the control unit displays a specific screen different from the standby initial screen on the display unit.
2. The cooking device according to claim 1 . When the control unit receives the second command, the control unit displays a specific screen different from the standby initial screen on the display unit.
2. The cooking device according to claim 1 . On the specific screen, information on applicable control conditions is displayed for each of the identification information.
3. The cooking device according to claim 2 . On the specific screen, information on applicable control conditions is displayed for each of the control patterns.
4. The cooking device according to claim 3. The second heating means has a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber, and an oven heating source that increases the temperature of the internal space of the heating chamber.
2. The cooking device according to claim 1 . The control unit further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the microwave heating source and the oven heating source are driven simultaneously or with a time lag.
7. The cooking device according to claim 6. A heating chamber;
A display means;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate outside the heating chamber;
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber;
An input operation unit for receiving commands;
a control unit that controls the first heating means and the second heating means based on a command signal from the input operation unit,
The control unit is
a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone;
a combined cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are used in combination;
When the main power source is turned on, a standby initial screen is automatically displayed on the display means, and during the period when the standby initial screen is displayed,
(1) when a first command is received from the input operation unit, identification information of at least one food item that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display means;
(2) when a second command is received from the input operation unit, information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode is displayed on the display means;
The control unit is
The cooking apparatus executes an operation step A of determining whether or not cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is permitted for a specific food item selected by the input operation unit, an operation step B of issuing a first specific notification including information about the food item to be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode if cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is permitted , and an operation step C of transitioning to the coordinated cooking mode if a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit after the first specific notification,
In the operation step A, the conditions for permitting cooking in the coordinated cooking mode include a permission condition 1 in which a peak cut value of power of the heating cooker is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and a permission condition 2 in which the first heating means and the second heating means are in a predetermined operating state,
The control unit permits cooking in the combined cooking mode when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. A heating chamber;
A display means;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated outside the heating chamber;
A second heating means for heating the food in the heating chamber;
an input means for giving commands to the first heating means and the second heating means;
a control unit that receives a command from the input unit and controls the first heating unit and the second heating unit;
The control unit has a function of executing a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone, and an integrated cooking mode in which a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means are combined,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a first cooperative cooking mode in which cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means, and a second cooperative cooking mode in which cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means,
When a main power source is turned on, the control unit automatically displays an initial standby screen common to the first heating means and the second heating means on the display unit, and during a period in which the initial standby screen is displayed,
(1) upon receiving a first command specifying the cooperative cooking mode, switching from the standby initial screen to a first specific screen and displaying a cooking menu that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) when receiving a second command specifying a control pattern for the first heating means, a specific screen different from the standby initial screen is displayed on the display means to display a control menu for the single cooking mode;
The control unit automatically selects either the first cooperative cooking mode or the second cooperative cooking mode based on identification information of an object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. When the control unit receives the second command during the period when the standby initial screen is displayed, the control unit displays, on the first specified screen, identification information for identifying the food to be cooked and guidance information serving as a reference for the user's operation in correspondence with each other.
The cooking device according to claim 9 . When the control unit receives a selection signal for the single cooking mode during a period in which the standby initial screen is displayed, the control unit causes the display unit to display information specifying at least one of the control patterns and information on control conditions applicable to the specified control pattern in association with each other.
The cooking device according to claim 9 . A heating chamber;
A display means;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate outside the heating chamber;
A second heating means for heating the food in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit that gives commands to the first heating means and the second heating means;
a control unit that receives a command from the input operation unit and controls the first heating means and the second heating means,
The control unit has a function of executing a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated alone, and an integrated cooking mode in which a cooking process using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means are combined,
The control unit is
When a main power source is turned on, a standby initial screen common to the first heating means and the second heating means is automatically displayed on the display means, and during a period in which this standby initial screen is displayed,
(1) upon receiving a first command specifying the cooperative cooking mode, switching from the standby initial screen to a first specific screen and displaying a cooking menu that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) when receiving a second command specifying a control pattern for the first heating means, a specific screen different from the standby initial screen is displayed on the display means to display a control menu for the single cooking mode;
The control unit is
The cooking apparatus executes an operation step A of determining whether or not cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is permitted for a specific food item selected by the input operation unit, an operation step B of issuing a first specific notification including information about the food item to be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode if cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is permitted , and an operation step C of transitioning to the coordinated cooking mode if a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit after the first specific notification,
In the operation step A, the conditions for permitting cooking in the coordinated cooking mode include a permission condition 1 in which a peak cut value of power of the heating cooker is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and a permission condition 2 in which the first heating means and the second heating means are in a predetermined operating state,
The control unit permits cooking in the combined cooking mode when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The first specific notification is to display the first specific screen on which the identification information of the food to be cooked and information on at least the cooking process to be started first among the cooking process by the first heating means and the cooking process by the second heating means are displayed together.
The cooking device according to claim 12 .

Images